Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 404

MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS

e-STUDIO3511/4511

File No. SHE03000200 R03042133500-TTEC VerB_2003-08

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION AND SERVICE FOR e-STUDIO3511/4511


The installation and service should be done by a qualified service technician. 1. Transportation/Installation When transporting/installing the equipment, employ four persons and be sure to use the positions as indicated below. The equipment is quite heavy and weighs approximately 112kg (246 lb), therefore pay full attention when handling it.

Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 115V or 120V/20A (220V, 230V, 240V/10A) for its power source. The equipment must be grounded for safety. Never ground it to a gas pipe or a water pipe. Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and direct sunlight. Also provide proper ventilation as the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone. To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 80 cm (32) on the left, 80 cm (32) on the right and 10 cm (4) in the rear. The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible. 2. Service of Machines Basically, be sure to turn the main switch off and unplug the power cord during service. Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, the fuser unit, the damp heater and their periphery. Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, transfer belt, 2nd transfer roller, developer, IH control circuit, high-voltage transformer, exposure lamp control inverter, inverter for the LCD backlight and power supply unit. Especially, the board of these components should not be touched since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the power is turned OFF. Be sure not to touch rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts, pulleys, fan, etc. Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges underneath. When servicing the machines with the main switch turned on, be sure not to touch live sections and rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposure to laser radiation. Use suitable measuring instruments and tools. Avoid exposure to laser radiation during servicing. - Avoid direct exposure to the beam. - Do not insert tools, parts, etc. that are reflective into the path of the laser beam. - Remove all watches, rings, bracelets, etc. that are reflective. Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug once a year or more. A fire may occur when dust lies on this area.

manuals4you.com

3.

Main Service Parts for Safety The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, etc. are particularly important for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly. If these parts are shorted circuit and/or made their functions out, they may burn down, for instance, and may result in fatal accidents. Do not allow a short circuit to occur. Do not use the parts not recommended by Toshiba TEC Corporation.

4.

Cautionary Labels During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and the cautionary labels such as Unplug the power cord during service, Hot area, Laser warning label etc. to see if there is any dirt on their surface and whether they are properly stuck to the equipment.

5.

Disposition of Consumable Parts, Packing Materials, Used batteries and RAM-ICs Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, consumable parts, packing materials, used batteries and RAM-ICs including litium batteries, it is recommended to follow the relevant local regulations or rules.

6.

When parts are disassembled, reassembly is basically the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to reassemble small parts such as screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers in the wrong places.

7. 8.

Basically, the machine should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled. Precautions Against Static Electricity The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband, because the ICs on it may become damaged due to static electricity. Caution: Before using the wristband, pull out the power cord plug of the equipment and make sure that there are no uninsulated charged objects in the vicinity.

Caution :

Dispose of used batteries and RAM-ICs including lithium batteries according to this manual.

Attention :

Se dbarrasser de batteries et RAM-ICs uss y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.

Vorsicht :

Entsorgung des gebrauchten Batterien und RAM-ICs (inklusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem Handbuch.

CONTENTS
1. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES .......................................... 1-1
1.1 Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Accessories ........................................................................................................................ 1-5 1.3 Options ............................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.4 Supplies ............................................................................................................................. 1-6 1.5 System List ........................................................................................................................ 1-7

2. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ........................................................ 2-1


2.1 Error Code List ................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.1 Jam ......................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.2 Service call.............................................................................................................. 2-6 2.2 Self-diagnosis Modes ....................................................................................................... 2-12 2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03) ................................................................................... 2-14 2.2.2 Output check (test mode 03) ................................................................................. 2-19 2.2.3 Test print mode (test mode 04) ............................................................................. 2-23 2.2.4 Adjustment mode (05) ........................................................................................... 2-24 2.2.5 Setting mode (08) ................................................................................................. 2-65 2.2.6 Pixel counter ....................................................................................................... 2-132

3. ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................................. 3-1


3.1 Adjustment Order (Image Related Adjustment) ................................................................. 3-1 3.2 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor ................................................................................ 3-2 3.3 Performing Image Quality Control ...................................................................................... 3-5 3.4 Image Dimensional Adjustment ......................................................................................... 3-6 3.4.1 General description ................................................................................................. 3-6 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller ................................................................ 3-8 3.4.3 Printer related adjustment ....................................................................................... 3-9 3.4.4 Scanner related adjustment .................................................................................. 3-13 3.5 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function) ................................................................. 3-20 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment .............................................................................. 3-20 3.5.2 Density adjustment ............................................................................................... 3-21 3.5.3 Color balance adjustment ..................................................................................... 3-22 3.5.4 Gamma balance adjustment ................................................................................. 3-23 3.5.5 Offsetting adjustment for background processing ................................................. 3-24 3.5.6 Judgment threshold for ACS ................................................................................. 3-25 3.5.7 Sharpness adjustment .......................................................................................... 3-25 3.5.8 Setting range correction ........................................................................................ 3-26 3.5.9 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) .................................. 3-27 3.5.10 Adjustment of blurred/thin spotted text .................................................................. 3-27 3.5.11 Adaptation to highlighter ....................................................................................... 3-28 3.5.12 Beam level conversion setting .............................................................................. 3-28 3.5.13 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type ................................................ 3-28
August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
i e-STUDIO3511/4511 CONTENTS

manuals4you.com

3.6 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Functions) ................................................................ 3-29 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment .............................................................................. 3-29 3.6.2 Gamma balance adjustment ................................................................................. 3-30 3.6.3 Color balance adjustment ..................................................................................... 3-31 3.6.4 Adjustment of binary image shaving level ............................................................. 3-32 3.6.5 Upper limit value at toner saving mode ................................................................. 3-32 3.7 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function) ............................................................... 3-33 3.7.1 Gamma balance adjustment ................................................................................. 3-33 3.7.2 Density adjustment (Black mode) ......................................................................... 3-34 3.7.3 Background adjustment (Gray scale mode) .......................................................... 3-35 3.7.4 Background adjustment (Color mode) .................................................................. 3-35 3.7.5 Judgment threshold for ACS ................................................................................. 3-36 3.7.6 Sharpness adjustment .......................................................................................... 3-36 3.7.7 Setting range correction ........................................................................................ 3-37 3.7.8 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) .................................. 3-37 3.7.9 Fine adjustment of black density ........................................................................... 3-38 3.7.10 RGB conversion method selection ........................................................................ 3-38 3.8 High-Voltage Transformer Setting .................................................................................... 3-39 3.8.1 General description ............................................................................................... 3-39 3.8.2 Setting at the replacement of high-voltage transformer ........................................ 3-39 3.9 Adjustment of the Scanner Section .................................................................................. 3-40 3.9.1 Carriages .............................................................................................................. 3-40 3.9.2 Lens unit ............................................................................................................... 3-44 3.10 Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System ........................................................................ 3-46 3.10.1 Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding ............................................. 3-46 3.11 Adjustment of the Developer Unit .................................................................................... 3-47 3.11.1 Doctor-to-sleeve gap (black developer unit) ......................................................... 3-47 3.11.2 Doctor-to-sleeve gap (color developer unit) .......................................................... 3-48 3.12 Adjustment of the Transfer Section .................................................................................. 3-50 3.12.1 Adjusting the 2nd transfer roller contact position .................................................. 3-50 3.13 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3015) ................................................................................ 3-52 3.14 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1022) .............................................................................. 3-53 3.14.1 Adjusting the jogging plate width .......................................................................... 3-53 3.14.2 Adjusting the angle of the jogging plate ................................................................ 3-55 3.14.3 Adjusting the overlap of the sensor flag ................................................................ 3-56 3.14.4 Adjusting the tension of the stack processing motor belt ...................................... 3-57 3.14.5 Releasing the stack tray guide lever fixing plate ................................................... 3-59 3.14.6 Adjustment of the upper tray angle ....................................................................... 3-60 3.14.7 DIP switch functions .............................................................................................. 3-62 3.15 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1023/24) ......................................................................... 3-64 3.16 Key Copy Counter (MU-8, MU-10) ................................................................................... 3-65

e-STUDIO3511/4511 CONTENTS

ii

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) ............................................................................ 4-1


4.1 PM Support Mode .............................................................................................................. 4-1 4.1.1 General description ................................................................................................. 4-1 4.1.2 Operational flow and operational screen ................................................................ 4-1 4.1.3 Work flow of parts replacement .............................................................................. 4-6 4.2 General Descriptions for PM Procedure ............................................................................ 4-7 4.3 Operational Items in Overhauling ....................................................................................... 4-7 4.4 Preventive Maintenance Checklist ..................................................................................... 4-7 4.5 PM KIT ............................................................................................................................. 4-19 4.6 Jig List .............................................................................................................................. 4-20 4.7 Grease List ....................................................................................................................... 4-20 4.8 Precautions for Storing and Handling Supplies ................................................................ 4-21 4.8.1 Precautions for storing TOSHIBA supplies ........................................................... 4-21 4.8.2 Checking and cleaning of photoconductive drum ................................................. 4-22 4.8.3 Checking and cleaning of drum cleaning blade and transfer belt cleaning blade . 4-23 4.8.4 Handling of drum cleaning brush and transfer roller cleaning brush ..................... 4-23 4.8.5 Handling of transfer belt ........................................................................................ 4-23 4.8.6 Checking and cleaning of fuser belt and pressure roller ....................................... 4-23 4.8.7 Checking and replacing the oil roller and cleaning roller ...................................... 4-24

5. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................................. 5-1


5.1 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code ............................................................... 5-1 5.1.1 Paper transport jam (paper exit section) ................................................................. 5-1 5.1.2 Paper misfeeding .................................................................................................... 5-2 5.1.3 Paper transport jam (paper pickup and transport section) ...................................... 5-7 5.1.4 Other paper jam .................................................................................................... 5-15 5.1.5 Cover open jam ..................................................................................................... 5-17 5.1.6 RADF jam ............................................................................................................. 5-21 5.1.7 Finisher jam .......................................................................................................... 5-26 5.1.8 Drive system related service call .......................................................................... 5-39 5.1.9 Paper feeding system related service call ............................................................ 5-41 5.1.10 Scanning system related service call .................................................................... 5-45 5.1.11 Fuser unit related service call ............................................................................... 5-46 5.1.13 RADF related service call ..................................................................................... 5-51 5.1.14 Circuit related service call ..................................................................................... 5-52 5.1.15 Laser optical unit related service call .................................................................... 5-54 5.1.16 Finisher related service call .................................................................................. 5-55 5.1.17 Image control related service call ......................................................................... 5-69 5.1.18 Copy process related service call ......................................................................... 5-73 5.1.19 Toner density control related service call .............................................................. 5-77 5.1.20 Other service call .................................................................................................. 5-81 5.2 Troubleshooting of Image ................................................................................................ 5-82

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

iii

e-STUDIO3511/4511 CONTENTS

manuals4you.com

6. FIRMWARE UPDATING ................................................................................................ 6-1


6.1 Firmware Updating with Download Jig ............................................................................... 6-2 6.1.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48MB) ............................................................................. 6-4 6.1.2 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16MB) ........................................................................... 6-10 6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) .............................. 6-19 6.1.4 K-PWA-DLM-320 .................................................................................................. 6-20 6.2 Firmware Updating with FSMS (Field Service Manager) ................................................. 6-34

7. POWER SUPPLY UNIT ................................................................................................. 7-1


7.1 Output Channel .................................................................................................................. 7-1 7.2 Fuse ................................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.3 Configuration of Power Supply Unit ................................................................................... 7-4

8. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ............................................................. 8-1

e-STUDIO3511/4511 CONTENTS

iv

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

1. ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

3. PRECAUTIONS FOR STORING & HANDLING SUPPLIES

4. TROUBLESHOOTING

5. UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

6. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

manuals4you.com

1. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1.1 Specifications
Values in [ ] are for e-STUDIO4511 in case that the specification is different between e-STUDIO3511 and e-STUDIO4511. Copy process Type Original table Accepted originals Indirect electrophotographic process (dry) Desktop type (Console type: when paper feed pedestal (PFP) or large capacity feeder (LCF) is installed.) Fixed type (the left rear corner used as guide to place originals) Sheet, book and 3-dimentional object For single-sided originals 50-127 g/m2 (13-34 lb.) For double-sided originals 50-105 g/m2 (13-28 lb.) None of the carbon, bonded nor stapled sheet original is acceptable when using the reversing automatic document feeder (option). Maximum size: A3/LD Copy speed (Copies/min.) e-STUDIO3511
Paper supply Paper size A4, LT, B5 A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, LT-R, ST-R B4, LG A3, LD

Drawer 35 (11) 28 ( 5 ) 24 ( 5 ) 21 ( 5 )

Bypass feed (Size specified) 35 (11) 28 ( 5 ) 24 ( 5 ) 21 ( 5 ) Bypass feed (Size specified) 45 (11) 32 ( 5 ) 26 ( 5 ) 22 ( 5 )

PFP 35 (11) 28 ( 5 ) 24 ( 5 ) 21 ( 5 )

LCF 35 (11)

e-STUDIO4511
Paper supply Paper size A4, LT, B5 A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, LT-R, ST-R B4, LG A3, LD

Drawer 45 (11) 32 ( 5 ) 26 ( 5 ) 22 ( 5 )

PFP 45 (11) 32 ( 5 ) 26 ( 5 ) 22 ( 5 )

LCF 45 (11)

* * *

means Not acceptable. The copy speed in the above table are available when originals are manually placed for single side, multiple copying. When the automatic document feeder is used, the copy speed of 35[45] sheets per minute is only available under the following conditions: Original/Mode: Number of sheets: Paper feeding: Single-sided original/A4/LT size. APS/automatic density are not selected. 35[45] or more at the black mode and 11 or more at the color mode. LCF

Reproduction ratio: 100%

The values in ( ) are available when printed at color mode.


1-1 e-STUDIO3511/4511 SPECIFICATIONS

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

* System copy speed


Copy mode e-STUDIO3511 Single-sided originals Single-sided copies Single-sided originals Double-sided copies Double-sided originals Double-sided copies Double-sided originals Single-sided copies 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets TBD TBD TBD TBD Min. e-STUDIO4511

TBD

TBD

TBD

TBD

* The values in ( ) are the speeds at color mode. * The system copy speed, including scanning time, is available when 10 sheets of A4-sized original are set on RADF and one of the copy modes in the left table is selected. * Upper drawer is selected and copying is at the non-sort mode. Copy paper
Drawer Size ADU PFP LCF A4, LT Bypass copy A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R (Non-standard or userspecified sizes can be set.) 64 to 209 g/m2,17 to 110 lb. (Continuous feeding) 64~209 g/m2, 17 to 110 lb. (Single paper feeding) Tracing paper, labels, OHP film (thickness: 80m or thicker) Remarks

A3 to A5-R LD to ST-R 64 to 105 g/m2 17 to 28 lb.

Weight

Special paper

These special papers recommended by Toshiba Tec

First copy time ................... Approx. 8sec. or less (black), approx. 18sec. or less (color) (A4/LT, upper drawer, 100%, original placed manually) Warming-up time ............... Approx. 40 seconds (Stand-alone, temperature: 20C) Multiple copying ................ Up to 999 copies; Key in set numbers Reproduction ratio ............. Actual ratio: Zooming: Resolution/Gradation ........ Read: ........ Write: 1000.5% 25 - 400% in increments of 1% (25 - 200% when using RADF) 600 dpi Equivalent to 2400 dpi x 600 dpi (black copy) Equivalent to 600 dpi x 600 dpi (color copy) Eliminated portion ............. Leading/trailing edges : 3.02.0 mm, Side edges: 2.02.0 mm (black copy) : 5.02.0 mm, : 2.02.0 mm (color copy) : 5.02.0 mm, : 5.02.0 mm (black/color print)
e-STUDIO3511/4511 SPECIFICATIONS 1-2 August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Paper feeding .................... Drawers in the equipment 2 drawers (stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 550 sheets; 64-80 g/m2 (17-22 lb.)) PFP Option (1 or 2 drawers: stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 550 sheets; 64-80 g/m2 (17-22 lb.)) LCF Option (stack height 137.5 mm x 2, equivalent to 2500 sheets; 64-80 g/m2 (17-22 lb.)) Bypass feed Stack height 11 mm, equivalent to 100 sheets; 64-80 g/m2 (17-22 lb.) Capacity of originals in the reversing automatic document feeder (Option) ................. A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R: 100 sheets/80 g/m2 (Stack height 16mm or less) Automatic duplexing unit ... Stackless/switchback type Toner supply ...................... Automatic toner density detection/supply Toner cartridge replacing method Density control .................. Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable in 11 steps Weight ............................... Approx. 112 kg (246.9 lb.) Power requirements .......... AC 115V/15A, AC 220 240V/10A Power consumption .......... 1.5 kW or less (115V series, 200V series) * The electric power is supplied to the reversing automatic document feeder, finisher, PFP and LCF through the copier. Total counter ..................... Electronical counter

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

1-3

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SPECIFICATIONS

manuals4you.com

Dimensions of the equipment .......... See the figure below (W660 x D718 x H739 mm) * When the tilt angle of the control panel is 45 degrees.

718

45

739

66

Fig. 1-101

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SPECIFICATIONS

1-4

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

1.2 Accessories
Unpacking/setup instruction Operators manual Operator's manual pocket Power cable Warranty sheet Setup report Customer satisfaction card PM sticker Drum (installed inside of the copier) Drum cover Developer material (installed inside of the copier) Toner cartridge * Machine version NAD: North America MJD: Europe AUD: Australia ASD: Asia TWD: Taiwan SAD: Saudi Arabia 1 set 4 pcs. (except for MJD) 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. (for NAD) 1 set (for NAD and MJD) 1 pc. (for MJD) 1 pc. (for MJD) 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. each for Y, M, C and K 1 pc. (for TWD, SAD, ASD, AUD)

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

1-5

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SPECIFICATIONS

manuals4you.com

1.3 Options
Platen cover Reversing automatic document feeder (RADF) Drawer module Paper feed pedestal (PFP) Large capacity feeder (LCF) Finisher (Hanging type) Finisher (Console type) Hole punch unit Staple cartridge KA-3511PC MR-3015 MY-1021 KD-1011 KD-1012 A4/LT MJ-1022 MJ-1023, MJ-1024 (with saddle stitcher) MJ-6004 N/E/F/S STAPLE-1600 (for hanging type) STAPLE-2000 (for console type) STAPLE-600 (for saddle stitcher) Bridge unit Key copy counter, key copy counter socket Work table Damp heater kit FAX board FAX board 2nd line Expansion memory Wireless LAN adapter PCI slot Scrambler board KN-3511 MU-8, MU-10 KK-3511 MF-3511 GD-1150 GD-1160 GC-1180 GN-1010 GO-1030 GP-1030

1.4 Supplies
Drum Toner bag Toner cartridge (K) Toner cartridge (Y) Toner cartridge (M) Toner cartridge (C) Marked * : E, D, C and T PS-OD3511 PS-TB3511 PS-ZT3511 *K PS-ZT3511 *Y PS-ZT3511 *M PS-ZT3511 *C

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SPECIFICATIONS

1-6

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Finisher (Hanging type) MJ-1022 Platen cover KA-3511PC Reversing automatic document feeder (RADF) MR-3015

1.5 System List


Work table KK-3511

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Staple cartridge STAPLE-1600

Staple cartridge STAPLE-2000 Bridge unit KN-3511 FAX board GD-1150 FAX board 2nd line GD-1160 Expansion memory GC-1180 Wireless LAN adapter GN-1010 PCI slot GO-1030 Scrambler board GP-1030

Key copy counter socket MU-10

Finisher (Console type) MJ-1023 Hole punch unit MJ-6004

Key copy counter MU-8

Fig. 1-501

1-7

manuals4you.com
Drawer module MY-1021

Damp heater MF-3511

Finisher (Console full feature type) MJ-1024

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SPECIFICATIONS

Staple cartridge STAPLE-600

Paper feed pedestal (PFP) KD-1011

Large capacity feeder (LCF) KD-1012

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SPECIFICATIONS

1-8

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE


2.1 Error Code List
One of the following error codes is displayed instead of the set number while pressing the [CLEAR] key and the digital key [8] simultaneously when the CLEAR PAPER or CALL SERVICE symbol is blinking. 2.1.1 Jam
Error code E010 E020 Classification Paper discharging jam Contents Jam not reaching the exit sensor : The paper which has passed through the fuser unit does not reach the exit sensor. Stop jam at the exit sensor: The trailing edge of the paper does not pass the exit sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. E030 E090 E110 Paper misfeeding Other paper jam Power-ON jam: The paper is remaining on the paper transport path when power is turned ON. HDD abnormality causes jam: Image data to be printed cannot be prepared. ADU misfeeding (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper which has passed through ADU does not reach the registration sensor during duplex printing. Bypass misfeeding (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper fed from the bypass tray does not reach the regist ration sensor. E130 Upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the upper drawer does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor. Lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the lower drawer does not reach the lower drawer feed sensor. E150 PFP upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the PFP upper drawer does not reach the PFP upper drawer feed sensor. PFP lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the PFP lower drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the PFP lower drawer does not reach the PFP lower drawer feed sensor. E190 E200 Paper transport jam LCF misfeeding (Paper not reaching the LCF feed sensor): The paper fed from the LCF does not reach the LCF feed sensor. Upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the regist ration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor. Lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the lower drawer feed sensor. Ch. 5.1.2 Ch. 5.1.3 Ch. 5.1.2 Ch. 5.1.2 Ch. 5.1.4 Ch. 5.1.4 Ch. 5.1.2 Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.1 Ch. 5.1.1

E120

Ch. 5.1.2

E140

Ch. 5.1.2

E160

Ch. 5.1.2

E210

Ch. 5.1.3

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2-1

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Error code E220

Classification Paper transport jam

Contents Lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the regist ration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor. PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the regist ration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor. PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the lower drawer feed

Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.3

E300

Ch. 5.1.3

E310

Ch. 5.1.3

E320

sensor. PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has passed the PFP upper drawer

Ch. 5.1.3

E330

feed sensor. PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the regist ration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor.

Ch. 5.1.3

E340

PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the PFP lower drawer feed sensor.

Ch. 5.1.3

E350

PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor. PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the PFP upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the PFP lower

Ch. 5.1.3

E360

Ch. 5.1.3

E3C0

drawer feed sensor. LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor.

Ch. 5.1.3

E3D0

LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the lower drawer feed sensor. LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has passed the LCF feed sensor.

Ch. 5.1.3

E3E0

Ch. 5.1.3

E400 E410 E420 E430 E440

Cover open jam

Jam access cover open jam: The jam access cover has opened during printing. Front cover open jam: The front cover has opened during printing. PFP side cover open jam: The PFP side cover has opened during printing. ADU open jam: The ADU has opened during printing. Side cover open jam: The side cover has opened during printing.

Ch. 5.1.5 Ch. 5.1.5 Ch. 5.1.5 Ch. 5.1.5 Ch. 5.1.5

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2-2

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Error code E450 E480 E510 E520

Classification Cover open jam

Contents LCF side cover open jam: The LCF side cover has openend during printing. Relay unit open jam: The relay unit has openend during printing.

Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.5 Ch. 5.1.5 Ch. 5.1.3 Ch. 5.1.3

Paper transport jam (ADU section)

Stop jam in the ADU: The paper does not reach the ADU exit sensor after it has passed the ADU entrance sensor. Jam not reaching the ADU entrance sensor: The paper does not reach the ADU entrance sensor after it is switchbacked in

E550 E711

Other paper jam RADF jam

the exit section. Paper remaining jam on the transport path: The paper is remaining on the transport path when CRUN is OFF. Jam not reaching the original length sensor: The original fed from the original feeding tray does not reach the original length sensor.

Ch. 5.1.4 Ch. 5.1.6

E712 E713

Jam not reaching the registration sensor: The original fed from the original feeding tray does not reach the registration sensor. Stop jam at the original length sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the original length sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Feed signal reception jam: The feed signal is received even no original exists on the original feeding tray. Jam not reaching the read sensor: The original does not reach the read sensor after it has passed the registration sensor (when scanning obverse side) or the reversal sensor (when scanning reverse side).

Ch. 5.1.6 Ch. 5.1.6

E714 E721

Ch. 5.1.6 Ch. 5.1.6

E722

Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during scanning): The original which passed the read sensor does not reach the exit sensor when it is transported from the scanning section to exit section. Jam not reaching the reversal sensor (during scanning): The original which passed the read sensor does not reach the reversal sensor when it is transported from the scanning section

Ch. 5.1.6

E723

Ch. 5.1.6

E724

to reverse section. Stop jam at the registration sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the registration sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor.

Ch. 5.1.6

E725

Stop jam at the read sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the read sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Transport/exit signal reception jam: Stop jam at the exit sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the exit sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Stop jam at the reversal sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the reversal sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor.

Ch. 5.1.6

E726 E731

Ch. 5.1.6 Ch. 5.1.6

E741

Ch. 5.1.6

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2-3

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Error code E742

Classification RADF jam

Contents Jam not reaching the reversal sensor (during reverse feeding): The leading edge of the original does not reach the reversal sensor when original is fed from the reverse section.

Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.6

E743

Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during reverse feeding): The original does not reach the exit sensor after it has passed the reversal sensor when the original is dicharged from the reverse section.

Ch. 5.1.6

E860 E870 E910

Jam access cover open: The jam access cover has opened during RADF operation. Finisher jam (Bridge unit) RADF open jam: RADF has opened during RADF operation. Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 1: The paper does not reach the bridge unit transport sensor 1 after it has passed the exit sensor.

Ch. 5.1.6 Ch. 5.1.6 Ch. 5.1.7 (1)

E920

Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 1: The trailing edge Ch. 5.1.7 (1) of the paper does not pass the bridge unit transport sensor 1 after its leading edge has reached the sensor. Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 2: The trailing edge of the paper does not reach the bridge unit transport sensor 2 after its leading edge has reached the bridge unit transport Ch. 5.1.7 (1)

E930

E940

sensor 1. Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 2: The trailing edge Ch. 5.1.7 (1) of the paper does not reach the bridge unit transport sensor 2 after its leading edge has reached the bridge unit transport

E9F0 EA10 EA20

Finisher jam (Punch unit) Finisher jam (Finisher section)

sensor 2. Punching jam: Punching is not performed properly. [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] Paper transport delay jam: The paper which has passed the bridge unit does not reach the inlet sensor. [MJ-1022/23/24] Paper transport stop jam: (1) The paper does not pass through the inlet sensor [MJ-1022/ 1023/1024]. (2) The paper has passed through the inlet sensor but does not reach or pass the feed path sensor or processing tray sensor.

Ch. 5.1.7 (4) Ch. 5.1.7 (2) Ch. 5.1.7 (2)

manuals4you.com

EA30

Power-ON jam: (1) Paper exists at the inlet sensor when power is turned ON. [MJ-1022/1023/1024] (2) Paper exists at the feed path sensor or processing tray

Ch. 5.1.7 (2)

EA40

sensor when power is turned ON. [MJ-1023/1024] Door open jam: (1) The finisher has been released from the copier during printing. [MJ-1022] (2) The upper/front cover of the finisher section or the upper/ front door of the puncher section has opened during

Ch. 5.1.7 (2)

EA50

printing. [MJ-1023/1024] Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly. [MJ-1022/1023/1024]

Ch. 5.1.7 (2)

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2-4

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Error code EA60 EA70 EA80 EA90 EAA0

Classification Finisher jam (Finisher section)

Troubleshooting Early arrival jam: The inlet sensor detects the paper earlier than Ch. 5.1.7 (2) Contents a specified timing. [MJ-1022/1023/1024] Stack delivery jam: It cannot deliver the stack of paper on the intermediary process tray to the stack tray. [MJ-1022] Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly. [MJ-1024] Door open jam: The saddle stitcher door, the outlet cover or the inlet cover has opened during printing [MJ-1024]. Power-ON jam: Paper exists at No.1 paper sensor, No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor, vertical path paper sensor or delivery sensor when power is turned ON. [MJ-1024] Transport stop jam: The paper which passed through the inlet sensor does not reach or pass No.1 paper sensor, No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor or delivery sensor. [MJ-1024] Ch. 5.1.7 (2) Ch. 5.1.7 (2) Ch. 5.1.7 (3) Ch. 5.1.7 (3)

Finisher jam (Saddle stitcher section)

EAB0

Ch. 5.1.7 (3)

EAC0 EAD0 EAE0 EAF0 EB30 EB50 EB60 Finisher jam Finisher jam (Finisher section) Finisher jam Paper transport jam

Transport delay jam: The paper which has reached the inlet sensor does not pass through the inlet sensor. [MJ-1024] Print end command time-out jam: Receiving time time-out jam:

Ch. 5.1.7 (3) Ch. 5.1.7 (5) Ch. 5.1.7 (5)

Stack return jam: It cannot load the paper which passed through Ch. 5.1.7 (2) the delivery roller on the intermediary process tray. [MJ-1022] Ready time time-out jam: Ch. 5.1.7 (5) Paper remaining on the paper transport path: It cannot detect the Ch. 5.1.3 trailing edge of the paper when it passes the registration sensor. Paper remaining on the paper transport path: It cannot detect the trailing edge of the paper when it passes the registration sensor. Ch. 5.1.3

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2-5

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

2.1.2 Service call


Error code C010 C020 C030 C040 Paper feeding system related service call C130 Classification Drive system related service call Contents Main motor abnormality: The main motor is not rotating normally. Developer motor abnormality: The developer motor is not rotating normally. Transport motor abnormality: The transport motor is not rotating normally. PFP motor abnormality: The PFP motor is not rotating normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the PFP) Upper drawer tray abnormality: The upper drawer tray motor is not rotating or the upper drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the upper drawer) C140 Lower drawer tray abnormality: The lower drawer tray motor is not rotating or the lower drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the lower drawer) C150 PFP upper drawer tray abnormality: The PFP upper drawer tray motor is not rotating or the PFP upper drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the PFP upper drawer) C160 PFP lower drawer tray abnormality: The PFP lower drawer tray motor is not rotating or the PFP lower drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the PFP lower drawer) C180 LCF tray motor abnormality: The LCF tray motor is not rotating or the LCF tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the LCF) LCF end fence motor abnormality: The LCF end fence motor is not rotating or the LCF end fence is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the LCF) C1B0 LCF transport motor abnormality: The LCF transport motor is not rotating normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any Scanning system related service call C270 drawer except the LCF) Peak detection error: Lighting of the exposure lamp (white reference) is not detected when power is turned ON. Carriage home position sensor not going OFF within a specified time: The carriage does not shift from its home position in a specified time. C280 Carriage home position sensor not going ON within a specified time: The carriage does not reach to its home position in a Copy process related service call specified time. Main charger wire cleaner abnormality: Wire cleaner motor is not rotating or wire cleaner is not moving normally. Ch. 5.1.10 Ch. 5.1.9 Ch. 5.1.9 Ch. 5.1.9 Ch. 5.1.9 Ch. 5.1.9 Ch. 5.1.9 Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.8 Ch. 5.1.8 Ch. 5.1.8 Ch. 5.1.9

C1A0

Ch. 5.1.9

C260

Ch. 5.1.10 Ch. 5.1.10

C360

Ch. 5.1.16

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2-6

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Error code C410

Classification Fuser unit related service call

Contents Thermistor or heater abnormality at power-ON: Abnormality of service call the thermistor is detected when power is turned ON or the temperature of the fuser roller does not rise in a specified time after power is turned ON. Thermistor abnormality after abnormality judgment: Abnormality of the thermistor is detected after a specified time has passed from power-ON (including ready time or energy saving mode).

Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.11

C430

Ch. 5.1.11

C440

Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment: The temperature of the fuser roller has exceeded the range of control (in this case, the main switch goes OFF automatically) or does not even reach the range.

Ch. 5.1.11

C450 C470

Thermistor abnormality during printing: Abnormality of the thermistor is detected during printing. IH initialization or IH power voltage abnormality: The AC input is not applied to the IH control circuit normally, or the input voltage is too high/low. Overheating of IGBT: The temperature of the IGBT rises abnormally. IH control circuit or IH coil abnormality: Abnormality is detected Optional communication related service call RADF related service call in IH control circuit or IH coil is broken/shorted. RADF I/F error: Communication error has occurred between the RADF and the scanner. Communication error between Main CPU and IPC board Communication error between IPC board and finisher EEPROM initialization error: EEPROM is not initialized normally when performing the code 05-356. Fan motor abnormality: The fan motor is not rotating normally. Read sensor adjustment error: The read sensor cannot be adjusted normally when performing the code 05-356. Original length sensor adjustment error: The original length sensor cannot be adjusted normally when performing the code Circuit related service call Process related service call 05-356. Main CPU abnormality LGC board abnormality DRV board abnormality High-voltage transformer abnormality: Leakage of the main charger is detected.

Ch. 5.1.11 Ch. 5.1.11

C480 C490 C550 C570 C580 C730 C810 C820 C830

Ch. 5.1.11 Ch. 5.1.11 Ch. 5.1.12 Ch. 5.1.12 Ch. 5.1.12 Ch. 5.1.13 Ch. 5.1.13 Ch. 5.1.13 Ch. 5.1.13

C940 C950 C960 C970 CA10 CA20 CB20 CB30

Ch.5.1.14 Ch. 5.1.14 Ch. 5.1.14 Ch. 5.1.18 Ch. 5.1.15 Ch. 5.1.15 Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16

Laser optical unit Polygonal motor abnormality: The polygonal motor is not related service call rotating normally. H-Sync detection error: H-Sync detection PC board cannot detect laser beams. Finisher related service call Delivery motor abnormality: Delivery motor or delivery roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1022] Tray 1/Tray 2 shift motor abnormality: Tray 1/Tray 2 shift motor is not rotating or delivery tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024]

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2-7

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Error code CB40

Classification Finisher related service call

Contents Rear aligning plate motor abnormality: Rear aligning plate motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024] Staple motor abnormality: Staple motor is not rotating or stapler is not moving normally. [MJ-1022/1023/1024] Stapler shift motor abnormality: Stapler shift motor is not rotating or staple unit is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024] Backup RAM data abnormality: (1) Abnormality of checksum value on finisher controller board is detected when the power is turned on. [MJ-1023/1024] (2) Abnormality of checksum value on punch driver board is detected when the power is turned on. [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)]

Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.16

CB50 CB60 CB80

Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16

CB90

Saddle stitcher paper pushing plate motor abnormality: Paper pushing plate motor is not rotating or paper pushing plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Saddle stitcher stitch motor (rear) abnormality: Stitch motor (rear) is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Saddle stitcher stitch motor (front) abnormality: Stitch motor (front) is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Alignment motor abnormality: Alignment motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Guide motor abnormality: Guide motor is not rotating or guide is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Paper folding motor abnormality: Paper folding motor or paper folding roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1024] Paper positioning plate motor abnormality: Paper positioning plate motor is not rotating or paper positioning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1024]

Ch. 5.1.16

CBA0 CBB0 CBC0 CBD0 CBE0 CBF0

Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16

CC00

Saddle stitcher sensor connector abnormality: Connector of guide home position sensor, paper pushing plate home position sensor or paper pushing plate top position sensor is disconnected. [MJ-1024]

Ch. 5.1.16

CC10

Saddle stitcher micro switch abnormality: With all cover closed, inlet door switch, delivery door switch or front cover switch is open. [MJ-1024] Communication error between finisher and saddle stitcher: Communication error between finisher controller board and saddle stitcher controller board [MJ-1023/1024]

Ch. 5.1.16

CC20

Ch. 5.1.16

CC30

Stack processing motor abnormality: The stack processing motor is not rotating or the stack delivery belt is not moving normally. [MJ-1022] Swing motor abnormality: Swing motor is not rotating or swing unit is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024] Horizontal registration motor abnormality: Horizontal registration motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)]

Ch. 5.1.16

CC40 CC50

Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2-8

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Error code CC60

Classification Finisher related service call

Contents Punch motor abnormality: Punch motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] Front alignment motor abnormality: Front alignment motor is not rotating or front aligning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1022] Front aligning plate motor abnormality: Front aligning plate motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not moving normally.

Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.16

CC80

Ch. 5.1.16

CC90

[MJ-1023/1024] Upper stack tray lift motor abnormality: The upper stack tray lift motor is not rotating or the upper stack tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1022]

Ch. 5.1.16

CCA0

Lower stack tray lift motor abnormality: The lower stack tray lift motor is not rotating or the lower stack tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1022] Rear jogging motor abnormality: The rear jogging motor is not rotating or the rear jogging plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1022] Stack ejection motor abnormality: Stack ejection motor or stack ejection roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1023/1024] Paper trailing edge assist motor abnormality: Paper trailing edge assist motor is not rotating or paper trailing edge assist is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024]

Ch. 5.1.16

CCB0 CCD0 CCE0

Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16

CCF0 CE00

Gear changing motor abnormality: Gear changing motor is not rotating normally. [MJ-1023/1024] Communication error between finisher and punch unit: Communication error between finisher controller board and punch Image control driver board [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] Image quality sensor abnormality (OFF level): The output value

Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16

CE10

Ch. 5.1.17

related service call of this sensor is out of a specified range when sensor light source is OFF. CE20 Image quality sensor abnormality (no pattern level): The output value of this sensor is out of a specified range when the image quality control test pattern is not formed. Image quality control test pattern abnormality: The test pattern is not formed normally. Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality: The output value of this sensor is out of a specified range. Drum thermistor abnormality: The output value of the drum Copy process thermistor is out of a specified range. Revolver home position detection abnormality: It cannot detect Ch. 5.1.17

CE40 CE50 CE90 CEA0 CEB0

Ch. 5.1.17 Ch. 5.1.17 Ch. 5.1.17 Ch. 5.1.18 Ch. 5.1.18

related service call that the revolver is at its home position. Black developer unit lifting movement abnormality: The black developer unit does not move up or down normally (lifting cam does not operate normally).

CEC0 CEE0

2nd transfer roller position detection abnormality: The 2nd transfer roller does not contact/release normally. Transfer belt marker detection abnormality (normal operation): The home position of the transfer belt cannot be detected.

Ch. 5.1.18 Ch. 5.1.18

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2-9

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Error code CEE1 CEF0 CF20 CF30

Classification Copy process related service call

Contents Transfer belt marker detection abnormality (when decelerating): Reference position of the transfer belt cannot be detected. Revolver motor abnormality: Revolver motor is not rotating or revolver is not moving normally. Toner density detection voltage abnormality: The output value of the color auto-toner sensor in printing is out of a specified range. Reference plate detection voltage abnormality: The output value of the color auto-toner sensor against the reference plate is out of a specified range at the light amount correction during

Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.18 Ch. 5.1.18 Ch. 5.1.19 Ch. 5.1.19

Toner density control related service call

CF40

an auto-toner adjustment or when a print job has finished. Light amount correction voltage abnormality: The light amount correction is not finished normally during an auto-toner adjustment or when a print job has finished, or the output value of the sensor is out of a specified range when the light amount correction has finished.

Ch. 5.1.19

CF50

Color auto-toner sensor abnormality: The connection of the color auto-toner sensor cannot be detected at the initialization, or the output value of color auto-toner sensor when the revolver starts rotating for initialization is out of a specified range.

Ch. 5.1.19

F070 F100 F101 F102 F103 F104 F105 F110

Communication elated service call Other service call

Communication error between system CPU and main CPU HDD format error: HDD cannot be initialized normally. HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be detected. HDD start error: HDD cannot become Ready state. HDD transfer time-out: Reading/writing cannot be performed in the specified time. HDD data error: Abnormality is detected in the data of HDD.

Ch. 5.1.12 Ch. 5.1.20 Ch. 5.1.20 Ch. 5.1.20 Ch. 5.1.20 Ch. 5.1.20 Ch. 5.1.20 Ch. 5.1.20

Communication related service call

HDD other error Communication error between system CPU and scanner CPU

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 10

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

<<Error history>> In the setting mode (08-253), the latest twenty groups of error data will be displayed. Display example EA10 03 07 26 17 57 32 064 064 23621000000 Error code YY MM DD HH MM SS MMM NNN ABCDEFHIJLO 4 digits 12 digits (Year is indicated 3 digits 3 digits 11 digits with its last two digits.)
A Paper source 0: Not selected 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: Upper drawer 4: Lower drawer 5: PFP upper drawer 6: PFP lower drawer Paper size code 0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7: A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5 A: FOLIO/COMP B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13"LG H: A6-R I: Post card J: 8.5SQ K: A3-wide L: 305457 mm M: 8K-R N: 16K-R O: 16K Z: Not selected Sort mode/staple mode 0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple 8: Double staple 9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch ADF mode 0: Unused 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED APS/AMS mode 0: Not selected 1: APS

2: AMS

G H

Duplex mode 0: Not selected 1: Book 2: Double-sided/Single-sided 8: Single-sided/Duplex copying Unused Image shift 0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 4: Right Editing 0: Unused

4: Double-sided/Duplex copying

1: Masking

2: Trimming

3: Mirror image

4: Unused/Positive

Edge erase/Dual-page 0: Unused 1: Edge erase

2: Dual-page

3: Edge erase & Dual-page

K L

Unused Function 0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission 3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing 4: Unused 5: Printing/List print 6: Scan/E-mail transmission MMM Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal) (Mx256)+(Mx16)+M NNN Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal) (Nx256)+(Nx16)+N Color mode 0: Auto color 1: Full color 2: Black 3: Unused 4: Twin color 5: Image smoothing 6: U-FINE Full color 7: Multivalued black 2 - 11
e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

2.2 Self-diagnosis Modes


Mode Control panel check mode Test mode Test print mode Adjustment mode Setting mode List print mode PM support mode Firmware update mode For start [0]+[1]+ [POWER] [0]+[3]+ [POWER] [0]+[4]+ [POWER] [0]+[5]+ [POWER] [0]+[8]+ [POWER] [9]+[START]+ [POWER] [6]+[START]+ [POWER] [8]+[9]+ [POWER] Contents All LEDs on the control panel are lit, and all the LCD pixels blink. Checks the status of input/output signals. Outputs the test patterns. Adjusts various items. Sets various items. Prints out the data lists of the codes 05 and 08, PM support mode and pixel counter. Performs auto-toner adjustment and clears each counter. Performs updating of the system firmware. For exit [STOP] or [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON 100% C A4 TEST MODE 100% P A4 TEST PRINT 100% A A4 TEST MODE 100% D TEST MODE 100% UA A4 LIST PRINT 100% K TEST MODE Display

Note: To enter the desired mode, turn ON the power while two digital keys designated to each mode (e.g. [0] and [5]) are pressed simultaneously. <Operation procedure> Control panel check mode (01):
[0][1] [POWER] (LED/LCD lit) [START] [START] (Button check) [STOP] or [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit) [STOP] (Exit)

Notes: 1. A mode can be canceled only by pressing the [STOP] button during the button check and by the [STOP] button or [POWER] OFF/ON during the LED and LCD are lit. 2. Button Check Buttons with LED (Press to turn OFF the LED.) Buttons without LED (Press to display the message on the control panel.) Button on touch panel (Press to display the screen on the control panel at powerON.)

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 12

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Test mode (03): Refer to 2.2.1. Input check (test mode 03) and 2.2.2. Output check (test mode 03). Test print mode (04): Refer to 2.2.3. Test print mode (04). Adjustment mode (05): Refer to 2.2.4. Adjustment mode (05). Setting mode (08): Refer to 2.2.5. Setting mode (08). List print mode (9S):
[9] [START] [POWER] (Code) [START] 101: Adjustment mode (05) 102: Setting mode (08) (Code) 103: PM support mode 104: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference) 105: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference) 106: Error history [Digital keys] Input a start code [START] [Digital keys] Input an end code [START] List starts to be printed [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

PM support mode (6S):


[6][START] [POWER] (Code) 1:Auto-toner adjustment 2:PM management screen [START] (Operation started) [POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)

Firmware update mode (89): Refer to 6. FIRMWARE UPDATING.


[POWER] ON Normal *1 [STOP] Warming up Control panel check mode [0][1] [0][3] [0][4] Test print mode [0][5] Adjustment mode [0][8] Setting mode [9][START] List print mode [6][START] PM support mode [3][9]

Test mode

Firmware update mode

Ready

[POWER] OFF *2 To user

State transition diagram of self-diagnosis modes *1 *2 In the Control panel check mode, copying is disabled. Enter the ready state by pressing the [STOP] button to start copying. Turn OFF the power after using the self-diagnosis mode, and leave the copier to the user.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 13

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03) The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, [COPY] button and the digital keys in the test mode (03). <Operation procedure>
[0][3] [POWER] [START] [FAX] or [COPY] [Digital keys] [CLEAR] (LCD ON) [POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)

Note: Initialization is performed before the copier enters the test mode.

[Example of display during input check]

Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are listed in the following pages.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 14

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

[FAX] button: OFF/[COPY] button: OFF ( [FAX] LED: OFF/[COPY] LED: OFF)
Digital Button key A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H Bypass unit connection ADU connection LCF connection PFP upper drawer detection switch PFP upper drawer paper stock sensor PFP upper drawer feed sensor PFP connection PFP side cover open/close switch PFP upper drawer empty sensor PFP upper drawer tray-up sensor LCF tray bottom sensor LCF standby side paper misload detection sensor Paper stock sensor at LCF feed side PFP lower drawer detection switch PFP lower drawer paper stock sensor PFP lower drawer feed sensor PFP motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode (03)) PFP lower drawer empty sensor PFP lower drawer tray-up sensor LCF end fence home position sensor LCF end fence stop position sensor Empty sensor at LCF standby side LCF side cover open/close switch LCF motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode (03)) LCF tray-up sensor LCF feed sensor Empty sensor at LCF feed side Lower drawer detection switch Upper drawer detection switch Lower drawer paper stock sensorPaper almost empty Upper drawer paper stock sensorPaper almost empty Lower drawer empty sensor Upper drawer empty sensor Lower drawer tray-up sensor Upper drawer tray-up sensor 2 - 15 Not connected Items to check Condition with highlighted button Not connected Not connected

[1]

Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Paper present Not connected Cover opened No paper Tray at upper limit position Tray at bottom position Properly loaded

[2]

[3]

Paper present Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Paper present Abnormal rotation No paper Tray at upper limit position Fence home position Fence stop position No paper Cover closed Motor stopped Tray at upper limit position No paper No paper Drawer not installed Drawer not installed

[4]

[5]

[6]

No paper No paper Tray at upper limit position Tray at upper limit position

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Digital Button key A B C D [7] E F G H A B C D [8] E F G H A B C D [9] E F G H A B C D [0] E F G H

Items to check Side cover open/close switch Front cover switch Exit sensor Paper present Bypass feed paper width sensor 3 Bypass feed paper width sensor 2 Bypass feed paper width sensor 1 Bypass feed paper width sensor 0 Bypass sensor ADU open/close sensor ADU exit sensor ADU entrance sensor Key copy counter connection

Condition with highlighted button

Cover opened Cover opened

Refer to table 1 Refer to table 1 Refer to table 1 Refer to table 1 No paper ADU opened Paper present Paper present

Not connected

Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper width sensor and paper size (width).
Bypass paper-width sensor 3 0 1 1 1 0 1 2 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 Paper-width size A3/LD A4-R/LT-R A5-R/ST-R Card size B4-R/LG B5-R

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 16

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

[FAX] button: ON/[COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: ON/[COPY] LED: OFF)
Digital Button key A B C D [1] E F G H A B C D [2] E F G H A B C D [3] E F G H A B C D [4] E F G H A B C D [5] E F G H Items to check 2nd transfer roller contact detection Black developer unit contact detection Black developer unit position detection Main motor synchronized signal detection Developer motor synchronized signal detection Transport motor synchronized signal detection Polygonal motor synchronized signal detection 24V Power supply IPC board connection Color toner cartridge installation detection sensor Revolver home position sensor Toner bag full detection sensor Black auto-toner sensor connection Lower drawer feed sensor Upper drawer feed sensor Bridge unit connection Color auto-toner sensor connection (Reserved) RADF connection (Reserved) Platen sensor (Reserved) Carriage home position sensor Condition with highlighted button Release Release operation Release position Stopped or abnormal status Stopped or abnormal status Stopped or abnormal status Stopped or abnormal status Power OFF Not connected Installed normally Home position

Toner bag full Not connected

No paper Paper present

Not connected Not connected

RADF connected Platen cover opened Home position

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 17

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Digital Button key A B C D [6] E F G H A B C D [7] E F G H A B C D [8] E F G H A B C D [9] E F G H A B C D [0] E F G H

Items to check (Reserved) APS sensor (APS-5) (Reserved) APS sensor (APS-4) (Reserved) APS sensor (APS-3) (Reserved) APS sensor (APS-2) (Reserved) APS sensor (APS-1) (Reserved) RADF tray sensor (Reserved) RADF empty sensor (Reserved) RADF jam access cover open/close switch (Reserved) RADF open/close sensor (Reserved) RADF exit sensor (Reserved) RADF reversal sensor (Reserved) RADF read sensor (Reserved) RADF registration sensor (Reserved) RADF original length sensor (Reserved) RADF original width sensor 1 (Reserved) RADF original width sensor 2 (Reserved) RADF original width sensor 3 Black toner cartridge detection switch Bypass feed sensor Registration sensor Transfer belt home position sensor Bridge unit transport sensor 2 Bridge unit transport cover open/close sensor Bridge unit transport sensor 1 Bridge unit paper full detection sensor Main charger wire cleaner home position sensor Main charger wire cleaner returning sensor

Condition with highlighted button

No original No original No original No original No original Original present Original present Cover opened RADF opened Original present Original present Original present Original present

Original present Original present Original present Original present Cartridge not installed

No paper Paper present

Home position Paper present Cover opened Paper present Paper not full Home position Returning position

[FAX] button: OFF/[COPY] button: ON ([FAX] LED: OFF/[COPY] LED: ON)


Digital Items to check key [1] Temperature sensor [2] Humidity sensor [3] Drum thermistor Message on the touch panel Displays the temperature inside the equipment. (Unit: C) Displays the humidity inside the equipment. (Unit: %RH) Displays the temperature near the drum surface. (Unit: C)

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 18

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2.2.2 Output check (test mode 03) Status of the output signals can be checked by entering the following codes in the test mode 03.

<Operation procedure> Procedure 1


[0][3] [POWER] (Code) [START]

Operation ON

) ( )
Stop code

[START]

Operation OFF

[POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)

Procedure 2

[0][3] [POWER]

(Code)

[START]

Operation One direction

[CLEAR]

Test mode standby

[POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)

Procedure 3

[0][3] [POWER]

(Code)

[START]

Operation ON

[START]

Operation OFF

[CLEAR]

Test mode standby

[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

Procedure 5
[0][3] [POWER] (Code) [START] [POWER]OFF

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 19

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Code 101 102 103 108 109 110 112 115 116 118 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 218 225 226 228 232 235 241 242 243 248 249 252 261

Function

Code

Function

Procedure 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2

Main motor ON (Operational without black 151 Code No.101 function OFF developer unit) Toner motor K (normal rotation) ON 152 Code No.102 function OFF Polygonal motor (600dpi) ON 153 Code No.103 function OFF Registration clutch ON 158 Code No.108 function OFF PFP motor ON 159 Code No.109 function OFF ADU motor ON 160 Code No.110 function OFF Developer motor ON (Operational with black 162 Code No.112 function OFF developer unit) Drum cleaning brush motor ON 165 Code No.115 function OFF Transfer belt cleaner auger motor ON 166 Code No.116 function OFF Laser ON 168 Code No.118 function OFF Exit motor (normal rotation) ON 170 Code No.120 function OFF Exit motor (reversal rotation) ON 171 Code No.121 function OFF LCF motor ON 172 Code No.122 function OFF Transport motor ON 173 Code No.123 function OFF Toner motor K (reversal rotation) ON 174 Code No.124 function OFF Color auto-toner sensor shutter ON (open) 175 Code No.125 function OFF Color auto-toner sensor LED ON 176 Code No.126 function OFF Upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF Lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF Transport clutch ON/OFF Bypass feed clutch ON/OFF Paper pushing clutch ON/OFF LCF pickup solenoid ON/OFF LCF end fence reciprocating movement LCF end fence motor ON/OFF LCF feed clutch ON/OFF LCF transport clutch ON/OFF (Reserved) RADF feed motor (normal rotation) ON/OFF (Reserved) RADF feed motor (reversal rotation) ON/OFF (Reserved) RADF read motor (normal rotation) ON/OFF (Reserved) RADF read motor (reversal rotation) ON/OFF (Reserved) RADF reversal motor (normal rotation) ON/OFF (Reserved) RADF reversal motor (reversal rotation) ON/OFF Key copy counter count up PFP transport clutch ON/OFF PFP upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF PFP lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF Bridge unit gate solenoid ON/OFF Discharge lamp ON/OFF IH board cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF Upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) Lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) Developer bias (Black) [ +DC] ON/OFF Developer bias (Black) [ -DC] ON/OFF Main charger (Black and color) ON/OFF Scan motor ON (Automatically stops at limit position, speed can be changed by using ZOOM key)

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 20

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Code 264 265 266 267 268 271 278 280 294 295 297 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 424 425 426 427 428 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457

Function Scanner cooling fan 1 ON/OFF Scanner cooling fan 2 ON/OFF Scanner cooling fan 3 ON/OFF Scanner exposure lamp ON/OFF Laser unit cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF LCF tray-up motor UP/DOWN PFP upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) PFP lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) RADF reverse solenoid ON/OFF Power OFF mode (for 200V series) RADF fan motor ON/OFF Power supply cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF Power supply cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF Toner scattering prevention fan (low speed) ON/OFF Toner scattering prevention fan (high speed) ON/OFF Paper cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF Paper cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF IH board cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF Ozone exhaust fan (low speed) ON/OFF Ozone exhaust fan (high speed) ON/OFF Developer bias (Black) [AC] ON/OFF Developer bias (Color) [+DC] ON/OFF Developer bias (Color) [-DC1] ON/OFF Developer bias (Color) [AC] ON/OFF 1st transfer roller bias [+] ON/OFF 1st transfer roller bias [-] ON/OFF 2nd transfer roller bias [+] ON/OFF 2nd transfer roller bias [-] ON/OFF Drum cleaning blade bias ON/OFF Image quality sensor cleaning solenoid ON/OFF Color developer unit drive clutch ON/OFF Black developer unit drive clutch ON/OFF Black developer unit contact clutch ON/OFF 2nd transfer roller drive clutch ON/OFF 2nd transfer roller contact clutch ON/OFF 2nd transfer roller cleaner contact clutch ON/OFF Transfer belt cleaner contact clutch ON/OFF Coating roller contact solenoid ON/OFF Intermediary roller drive clutch (for transport drive) ON/OFF Intermediary roller drive clutch (for process speed drive) ON/OFF Color auto-toner sensor Color developer toner supply clutch ON/OFF Revolver motor ON/OFF (printing operation) Revolver motor operation (at standby position) Revolver motor operation (at toner cartridge Y access position) Revolver motor operation (at toner cartridge M access position) Revolver motor operation (at toner cartridge C access position) Revolver motor operation (at developer unit Y access position) Revolver motor operation (at developer unit M access position) Revolver motor operation (at developer unit C access position) 2 - 21

Procedure 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

Code 458 459 460 461

Function Revolver motor operation (at home position) Revolver motor operation (at developing position) Black developer unit lifting movement ON/OFF (continuous lifting movement) Main charger wire cleaning movement (one reciprocating movement)

Procedure 2 2 3 2

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 22

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2.2.3 Test print mode (test mode 04) The embedded test pattern can be printed out by entering the following codes in the test print mode (04).

<Operation procedure>
Operation Continuous Test Print

[0][4] [POWER]

(Code)

[START]

[CLEAR]

[POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)

Notes: 1. When an error occurs, it is indicated on the panel, but the recovery operation is not performed. Turn OFF the power and then back ON to clear the error. 2. During test printing, the [CLEAR] button is disabled when Wait adding toner is displayed.
Code 101 102 142 204 219 220 230 231 234 270 Types of test pattern Pattern for making the gamma correction table Pattern for making the gamma correction table Grid pattern Grid pattern 6% test pattern 8% test pattern Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps Halftone Image quality control test pattern For checking the image quality control 2 pixels standard, Width: 10 mm 3 pixels standard, Width: 10 mm Binary dither Pattern width: 2 dots, Pitch: 10 mm Pattern width: 1 dot, Pitch: 10 mm Remarks Binary error diffusion

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 23

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

2.2.4 Adjustment mode (05)


Items in the adjustment mode list in the following pages can be corrected or changed in this adjustment mode (05). Turn ON the power with pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously in order to enter this mode. Procedure 1
[0][5] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code) [Digital key] *[RESET] (Enter a value) [ENTER] ([FAX] [START]) or (Test copy) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM) [CLEAR] (Corrects value)
*Press [RESET] to enter "-".

[START] [CANCEL]

[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

Procedure 2

[0][5] [POWER]

(Code)

[START]

Value displayed

[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (value unchangable)

([FAX] [START]) (Test copy)

[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

Procedure 3
[0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [UP] or [DOWN] (Enter a value) [ENTER] ([FAX] [START]) or (Test copy) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

[START] [CANCEL]

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

Procedure 4
[CANCEL] [START]
[0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (Sub code) [START] [Digital key] *[RESET] (Enter a value) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

Stores value in RAM

[START] (Test copy)

[FAX]

[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value) *Press [RESET] to enter "-".

Procedure 5
[CANCEL]or[CLEAR] [0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [UP] [ENTER] or or [DOWN] [INTERRUPT] (Enter a value) Stores value in RAM

Automatic adjustment

[START] (Test copy)

[FAX]

[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 24

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Procedure 6
[0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) Automatic ( adjustment )

[START]

([FAX] [START]) (Test copy)

[POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)

*[CANCEL]or[CLEAR] *When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, error message is displayed.

Procedure 7
[CANCEL]

[0][5] [POWER]

[Digital key] (Code)

[START]

Automatic ( adjustment )

[ENTER] Stores value in RAM

*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]

[START] (Test copy)

[FAX]

[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

*When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, error message is displayed.

Procedure 10
[0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [Digital key] (Sub code)
Value ( displayed )

[START]

[START]

[START]

[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

[SET]or[INTERRUPT] (Value unchangable)

Procedure 14
[0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [UP]or[DOWN] (Enter a value) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]

[START]

[Digital key] (Sub code)

[START]

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

Stores value in RAM [CANCEL] (Corrects value)

[START] (Test copy)

[FAX]

[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

Note: The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal state. Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjustment mode. In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the copier for approx. 3 minutes after it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 25

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 200 201 202 203 204 206 210 Default ProceClassifiFunc- <Acceptable RAM Items Contents cation tion dure value> Devel- Automatic All ALL 5 M The value starts changing approx. 3 <0-255> opment adjustment of the (Y,M,C,K) minutes after this adjustment started. ALL M The value is automatically set during 5 Y auto-toner sensor <0-255> this adjustment (approx. 2 minutes). M ALL M 5 <0-255> (As the value increases, the sensor C ALL M output increases correspondingly.) 5 <0-255> Chapter 3.2) ( K ALL M 5 <0-255> YMC ALL M 5 <0-255> Transfer 1st transfer roller bias output ALL M When the value decreases, the 1st 3 225 adjustment transfer roller bias output increases. <0-225> (When not transferred) Y Transfer 1st transfer roller ALL 133 M When the value decreases, the 1st 14 (color) <0-225> transfer roller bias output increases. bias output M M 14 ALL 133 adjustment (color) <0-225> (Image quality C M 14 ALL 133 control test (color) <0-225> pattern) K M 14 ALL 137 (color) <0-225> Normal Transfer 1st transfer roller M When the value decreases, the 1st 3 ALL 145 paper bias output transfer roller bias output increases. (black) <0-225> adjustment Thick ALL 145 M 3 paper 1 (black) <0-225> Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL ALL (color) 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> M 3

211-0 211-1 211-2 211-3 212

214

215

216

217

218-0 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias outputbias 218-1 out-put adjustment (Normal 218-2 paper) 218-3

Y M C K

M M M M

When the value decreases, the 1st transfer roller bias output increases.

14 14 14 14

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 26

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 220-0 220-1 220-2 220-3 221-0 221-1 221-2 221-3 222-0 222-1 222-2 222-3 223-0 223-1 223-2 223-3 224 Transfer Transfer 1st transfer roller bias output adjustment (OHP film) Transfer Transfer 1st transfer roller bias output adjustment (Thick paper 3) Transfer Transfer 1st transfer roller bias output adjustment (Thick paper 2) ClassifiItems cation Transfer 1st transfer roller bias output adjustment (Thick paper 1) Default Func- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion value> ALL 145 M When the value decreases, the 1st (color) <0-225> transfer roller bias output increases. M ALL 145 (color) <0-225> M ALL 145 (color) <0-225> M ALL 145 (color) <0-225> M When the value decreases, the 1st ALL 145 (color) <0-225> transfer roller bias output increases. M ALL 145 (color) <0-225> M ALL 145 (color) <0-225> M ALL 145 (color) <0-225> M When the value decreases, the 1st ALL 145 (color) <0-225> transfer roller bias output increases. M ALL 145 (color) <0-225> M ALL 145 (color) <0-225> M ALL 145 (color) <0-225> M When the value decreases, the 1st ALL 145 (color) <0-225> transfer roller bias output increases. M ALL 145 (color) <0-225> M ALL 145 (color) <0-225> M ALL 145 (color) <0-225> M When the value decreases, the 2nd ALL 137 transfer roller bias output increases. <0-158> ALL 196 M <159-255> 169 M <159-255> When the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases. When the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases.
Procedure

Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K

14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 3

225

226

Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output adjustment (When cleaning the roller [+] ) Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output adjustment (When cleaning the roller [-] ) Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output adjustment (Paper interval/When not transferred)

ALL

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 27

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 227-0 227-1 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (color) 140 <0-158> 140 <0-158> 134 <0-158> 134 <0-158> 140 <0-158> 140 <0-158> 134 <0-158> 134 <0-158> 125 <0-158> 122 <0-158> 110 <0-158> 107 <0-158> 93 <0-158> 87 <0-158> 5 <0-10> M M Contents When the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases.
Procedure

227-2 227-3

229-0 229-1

229-2 229-3

230-0 230-1 231-0 231-1 232-0 232-1 233

Single side Reverse side at duplexing Single side Reverse side at duplexing Transfer 2nd transfer roller Single side bias output adjustment (Thick Reverse side at paper 1) duplexing Single side Reverse side at duplexing Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output (Thick paper 2)

Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output adjustment (Normal paper)

14 14

M M

14 14

M M

When the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases.

14 14

M M

14 14

M M M M M M M

When the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases.

14 14

Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output (Thick paper 3)

When the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases.

14 14

Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output (OHP film)

When the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases.

14 14

Transfer 1st transfer roller bias offsetting

234-0 234-1

Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (Normal paper)

234-2 234-3

Single side Reverse side at duplexing Single side Reverse side at duplexing

ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (color)

5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10>

M M

M M

Sets the offset amount of 1st transfer roller bias. 0: -500V 1: -400V 2: -300V 3: -200V 4: -100V 5: 0V 6: +100V 7: +200V 8: +300V 9: +400V 10: +500V Sets the offset amount of 2nd transfer roller bias. 0: -500V 1: -400V 2: -300V 3: -200V 4: -100V 5: 0V 6: +100V 7: +200V 8: +300V 9: +400V 10: +500V

4 4

4 4

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 28

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 236-0 236-1 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL (black) 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 77 <0-255> 77 <0-255> 77 <0-255> 100 <0-255> 5 <0-10> M M Contents Sets the offset amount of 2nd transfer roller bias. 0: -500V 1: -400V 2: -300V 3: -200V 4: -100V 5: 0V 6: +100V 7: +200V 8: +300V 9: +400V 10: +500V
Procedure

Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (Thick paper 1)

236-2 236-3

237-0 237-1 238-0 238-1 239-0 239-1 241 242 243 244 245

Single side Reverse side at duplexing Single side Reverse side at duplexing Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (Thick paper 2) Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (Thick paper 3) Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (OHP film) Main Main charger grid charger bias adjustment Y M C K Transfer 1st transfer roller bias offsetting

4 4

M M

4 4

M M M M M M M M M M M Sets the offsetting amount of 1st transfer roller bias. 0: -500 V 1: -400 V 2: -300 V 3: -200 V 4: -100 V 5: 0 V 6: +100 V 7: +200 V 8: +300 V 9: +400 V 10: +500 V Transformer output setting of the 1st transfer roller bias. When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the values listed in attached data sheet are entered. (Unit: V) Transformer output setting of the 2nd transfer roller bias (plus output). When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the values listed in attached data sheet are entered. (Unit: V) As the value increases,the transformer output increases. The adjustment value becomes effective only when the setting mode (08-400, 401,409) is 0 (invalid).

4 4 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 1

250

Transfer 1st transfer roller bias output voltage

+Low

ALL

251

+High

ALL

2000 <18004400> 200 <0-500>

252

Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output voltage

+Low

ALL

253

+High

ALL

4800 M <43205280> M 516 <416-616>

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 29

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 254 Classification Items -Low Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL -110 <-9999-0> -2000 <-9999-0> 133 <0-225> 133 <0-225> 133 <0-225> 137 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> M Contents Transformer output setting of the 2nd transfer roller bias (minus output). When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the values listed in attached data sheet are entered. (Unit: V) Displays the value of 1st transfer roller bias when the actual printing is operated.
Procedure

Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output voltage

255

-High

ALL

262-0 262-1 262-2 262-3 263 265 266 267 268 269-0 269-1 269-2 269-3 271-0 271-1 271-2 271-3 272-0 272-1 272-2 272-3

Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual value display (Image quality control test pattern)

Y M C K

Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual value display

Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual value display (Normal paper)

Normal paper Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film Y M C K

Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual value display (Thick paper 1)

Y M C K

Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual value display (Thick paper 2)

Y M C K

ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color)

M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M

10 10 10 10

Displays the value of 1st transfer roller bias when the actual printing is operated.

2 2 2 2 2

Displays the value of 1st transfer roller bias when the actual printing is operated.

10 10 10 10

Displays the value of 1st transfer roller bias when the actual printing is operated.

10 10 10 10

Displays the value of 1st transfer roller bias when the actual printing is operated.

10 10 10 10

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 30

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 273-0 273-1 273-2 273-3 274-0 274-1 274-2 274-3 275 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias actual value (When cleaning the roller) Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias actual value display (Normal paper) Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual value display (OHP film) Classification Items Y M C K Y M C K (+) Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 137 <0-255> 196 <0-255> 140 <0-158> 140 <0-158> 134 <0-158> 134 <0-158> 140 <0-158> 140 <0-158> 134 <0-158> 134 <0-158> 125 <0-158> 122 <0-158> 110 <0-158> 107 <0-158> M M M M M M M M M Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when the actual printing is operated. Displays the value of 1st transfer roller bias when the actual printing is operated. Contents Displays the value of 1st transfer roller bias when the actual printing is operated.
Procedure

Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual value display (Thick paper 3)

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 2

276 277-0 277-1

(-)

ALL ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color)

M M M Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when the actual printing is operated.

2 10 10

277-2 277-3

279-0 279-1

279-2 279-3

290-0 290-1 291-0 291-1

Single side Reverse side at duplexing Single side Reverse side at duplexing Transfer 2nd transfer roller Single bias actual value side Reverse display (Thick side at paper 1) duplexing Single side Reverse side at duplexing Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (Thick paper 2) Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (Thick paper 3)

M M

10 10

M M

Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when the actual printing is operated.

10 10

M M

10 10

M M M M

Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when the actual printing is operated. Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when the actual printing is operated.

10 10 10 10

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 31

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 292-0 292-1 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL (black) ALL (black) 93 <0-158> 87 <0-158> 90 <0-100> 90 <0-100> 80 <0-100> 70 <0-100> 70 <0-100> 142 <0-255> 142 <0-255> M M M M M M M M M Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when the actual printing is operated. (The value adjusted in 05-293 is displayed.) Contents Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when the actual printing is operated. Corrects the 2nd transfer roller bias output of leading/trailing edge of paper (05-227, 229, 230, 231 and 232). Correcting factor: %
Procedure

Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (OHP film) Normal paper Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film

10 10 14 14 14 14 14 10 10

293-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias correction of 293-1 leading/trailing edge of paper 293-2 293-3 293-4 294-0 Transfer Actual value display of 2nd 294-1 transfer roller bias of leading/trailing edge of paper (Normal paper) 294-2 294-3

296-0 Transfer 296-1

296-2 296-3

297-0 Transfer 297-1 298-0 Transfer 298-1 299-0 Transfer 299-1

Single side Reverse side at duplex printing Single side Reverse side at duplex printing Actual value Single side display of 2nd transfer roller bias Reverse of leading/trailing side at duplex edge of paper printing (Thick paper 1) Single side Reverse side at duplex printing Actual value display of 2nd transfer roller bias of leading/trailing edge of paper (Thick paper 2) Actual value display of 2nd transfer roller bias of leading/trailing edge of paper (Thick paper 3) Actual value display of 2nd transfer roller bias of leading/trailing edge of paper (OHP film)

ALL (color) ALL (color)

137 <0-255> 137 <0-255>

M M

10 10

ALL (black) ALL (black)

137 <0-255> 137 <0-255>

M M

10 10

ALL (color) ALL (color)

134 <0-255> 134 <0-255>

M M

10 10

ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color)

133 <0-255> 131 <0-255> 127 <0-255> 121 <0-255> 129 <0-255> 126 <0-255>

M M M M M M

10 10 10 10 10 10

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 32

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 305 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL Contents
Procedure

306

308 330-0 330-1 330-2 330-3 331-0 331-1 331-2 331-3 332-0 332-1 332-2 332-3 333-0 333-1 333-2 333-3 334 335

Scanner Image location adjustment of secondary-scanning direction (scanner section) Scanner Image location adjustment of secondary-scanning direction (scanner section) Scanner Distortion mode Image Image quality control closed-loop control contrast voltage correction/ Mode 2 maximum number of time corrected Image Image quality control closed-loop control laser power correction/ Mode 2 maximum number of time corrected Image Image quality control closed-loop control contrast voltage correction/ Mode 1 maximum number of time corrected Image Image quality control closed-loop control laser power correction/ Mode 1 maximum number of time corrected Image control Image control Image control Image control Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K

128 SYS When the value increases by 1, the <92-164> image shifts by approx. 0.137mm toward the trailing edge of the paper. 128 SYS When the value increases by 1, the <0-255> image shifts by approx. 0.0423mm toward the front side of the paper. 3 <0-255> 3 <0-255> 3 <0-255> 3 <0-255> 2 <0-255> 2 <0-255> 2 <0-255> 2 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 300 <270-330> 1200 <10801320> 100 <85-115> 900 <810-990> M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M Transformer output calibration of the main charger grid bias. When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the values listed in attached data sheet are entered. (Unit: V) Transformer output calibration of the color developer bias. When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the values listed in attached data sheet are entered. (Unit: V) Sets the maximum correction number of time of the laser power in the closed-loop control mode 1. Sets the maximum correction number of time of the contrast voltage in the closed-loop control mode 1. Sets the maximum correction number of time of the laser power in the closed-loop control mode 2. Moves carriages to the adjusting position. ( Chapter 3. 4. 4.) Sets the maximum correction number of time of the contrast voltage in the closed-loop control mode 2.

ALL

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 1

Main charger grid calibration voltage 1 (low) Main charger grid calibration voltage 1 (high) Color developer bias DC (-) calibration voltage 1 (low) Color developer bias DC (-) calibration voltage 2 (high)

338 339

ALL ALL

M M

1 1

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 33

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 340 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL Contents
Procedure

Scanner Reproduction ratio adjustment of secondary-scanning direction (scanner section)

354

RADF

Adjustment of RADF paper alignment

355

356

RADF

357

RADF

for singlesided original for double sided original Automatic adjustment of RADF sensor and EEPROM initialization Fine adjustment of RADF transport speed

ALL

ALL

SYS When the value increases by 1, the 128 <0-255> reproduction ratio in the secondaryscanning direction (vertical to paper feeding direction) increases by approx. 0.223%. 10 SYS When the value increases by 1, the <0-20> aligning amount increases by approx. 0.5mm. 10 SYS <0-20> SYS Performs the adjustment and initialization when the RADF board or RADF sensor is replaced. SYS When the value increases by 1, the reproduction ratio of the secondary scanning direction on original (fed from the RADF) increases by approx. 0.1%. SYS When the value increases by 1, the image of original fed from the RADF shifts toward the rear side of paper by approx. 0.0423mm. SYS When the value increases by 1, the carriage position shifts by approx. 0.1 SYS mm toward the exit side when using the RADF. SYS When the value increases by 1, the copied image of original fed from the RADF shifts toward the trailing edge SYS of paper by approx. 0.1mm.

ALL

ALL

50 <0-100>

358

RADF

RADF sideways deviation adjustment

ALL

128 <0-256>

359 360 365

366

372

Scanner Carriage position adjustment ALL 128 during scanning from RADF (black) <0-255> ALL 128 (color) <0-255> for single- ALL RADF RADF leading 50 sided edge position 1 <0-100> original adjustment 50 for double ALL <0-100> sided original Image Black developer bias DC ALL 100 control (-) calibration voltage 1 (low) <85-115> Image Black developer bias DC control (-) calibration voltage 2 (high) Image Image quality Y control open-loop control/ M contrast voltage initial value C display K ALL

1 1 1

373

900 M <810-990> 320 <0-999> 330 <0-999> 340 <0-999> 375 <0-999> M M M M

Transformer output calibration of the black developer bias. When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the values listed in attached data sheet are entered. (Unit: V) Displays the contrast voltage initial value set by the open-loop control. (Unit: V)

380-0 380-1 380-2 380-3

ALL ALL ALL ALL

10 10 10 10

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 34

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 381-0 381-1 381-2 381-3 382-0 382-1 382-2 382-3 383-0 383-1 383-2 383-3 384-0 384-1 384-2 384-3 385-0 385-1 385-2 385-3 386-0 386-1 386-2 386-3 Image Developer bias control DC (-) actual value display Image Main charger grid control bias actual value display Image Laser power control actual value display Image Laser power control actual value display Image Image quality control open-loop control/ laser power initial value display Classification Items Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL 320 <0-999> 330 <0-999> 340 <0-999> 375 <0-999> 408 <0-999> 408 <0-999> 408 <0-999> 408 <0-999> 92 <0-255> 92 <0-255> 92 <0-255> 92 <0-255> 408 <0-999> 408 <0-999> 408 <0-999> 408 <0-999> 78 <0-255> 84 <0-255> 87 <0-255> 94 <0-255> 135 <0-255> 137 <0-255> 139 <0-255> 146 <0-255> M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M Displays the developer bias at the actual print. (bit value) Displays the main charger grid bias at the actual print. (bit value) Displays the laser power at the actual print. (Unit: W) Displays the laser power at the actual print. (bit value) Displays the laser power initial value set by the open-loop control. (Unit: W) Contents Displays the contrast voltage at the actual print. (Unit: V)
Procedure

Image Contrast voltage control actual value display

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 35

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 388 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL 0 <0-1023> M Contents Displays the output value of image quality sensor when the sensor light source is OFF. Displays the output value of image quality sensor (when there is no test pattern) on the transfer belt. Displays the output value of image quality sensor when a high-density test pattern is written.
Procedure

Image Output value control display of image quality sensor

389

390-0

390-1

390-2

390-3

391-0

391-1

391-2

391-3

392

When the light source is OFF Transfer belt surface Highdensity pattern Y Highdensity pattern M Highdensity pattern C Highdensity pattern K Lowdensity pattern Y Lowdensity pattern M Lowdensity pattern C Lowdensity pattern K Image Light amount adjustment control result of image quality sensor

ALL

0 <0-1023> 0 <0-1023> 0 <0-1023> 0 <0-1023> 0 <0-1023> 0 <0-1023> 0 <0-1023> 0 <0-1023> 0 <0-1023> 0 <0-255>

ALL

10

ALL

10

ALL

10

ALL

10

ALL

Displays the output value of image quality sensor when a low-density test pattern is written.

10

ALL

10

ALL

10

ALL

10

ALL

393

394

395

396 401 405

Image Relative humidity display control during latest closed-loop control Image Enforced performing of control image quality open-loop control Image Enforced performing of control image quality closed-loop control (color) Image Image quality control control initialization Laser Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed (reproduction ratio adjustment)

ALL

0 <0-100> -

ALL

The LED light amount adjustment value of this sensor is the reference value to set the reflected light from the belt surface. Displays the relative humidity at the latest performing of the closed-loop control. Performs the image quality open-loop control. Performs the image quality closedloop control. Performs the image quality control, initialize each control value. When the value increases by 1, the reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction increases by approx. 0.07%. (approx. 0.5mm/5 step)

ALL

ALL PRT PPC

128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>

M M M

6 1 1

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 36

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 410 411 421 422 Drive Classification Laser Items Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position side by approx. 0.0423mm. Adjustment of secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio (fine adjustment of main motor speed) Fine adjustment of exit motor speed Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> PPC PRT PPC /PRT FAX 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 107 <0-255> 121 <0-255> 138 <0-255> 139 <0-255> 0 <0-255> 0 <0-255> M M M M Contents When the value increases by 1, the writing start position shifts to the front side by approx. 0.0423mm. When the value increases by 1, the reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction decreases by approx. x.xx%. When the value increases by 1, the rotation becomes faster by approx. x.xx%. When the value increases by 1, the reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction decreases by approx. x.xx%. When the value increases by 1, the blank area becomes wider by approx. 0.0423mm.
Procedure

424 425 426 427

Drive

PPC /PRT FAX PPC /PRT FAX

M M M M

Drive

Adjustment of secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio (fine adjustment of transport motor speed) Top margin adjustment (blank area at the leading edge of the paper) Left margin adjustment (blank area at the left of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Right margin adjustment (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Bottom margin adjustment (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper) Top margin adjustment (blank area at the leading edge of the paper) Left margin adjustment (blank area at the left of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Right margin adjustment (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Bottom margin adjustment (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper)

1 1

430

Image

PPC

431

Image

PPC

432

Image

PPC

0 <0-255>

433

Image

PPC

0 <0-255> 24 <0-255> 0 <0-255>

435

Image

PRT

436

Image

PRT

437

Image

PRT

0 <0-255>

438

Image

PRT

0 <0-255>

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 37

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 440 441 442 443 444 445 448-0 448-1 448-2 449-0 449-1 449-2 450-0 450-1 450-2 452-0 452-1 452-2 455-0 455-1 455-2 457 Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Classification Laser Items Secondary scanning laser writing start position Upper drawer Lower drawer Bypass feeding LCF PFP Duplex feeding Paper aligning Long size amount adjustMiddle ment at the size registration Short section (PFP upper drawer) size Paper aligning Long size amount adjustMiddle ment at the size registration Short section (PFP lower drawer) size Paper aligning Long size amount adjustMiddle ment at the size registration Short section (Upper drawer) size Paper aligning Long size amount adjustMiddle ment at the size registration Short section (Lower drawer) size Paper aligning Long size amount adjustMiddle ment at the size registration Short section (Duplex feeding) size Paper aligning amount adjustment at the registration section (LCF) Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL 20 <0-40> 40 <0-80> 20 <0-40> 20 <0-40> 20 <0-40> 20 <0-40> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 18 <0-63> 18 <0-63> 18 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 33 <0-63> 33 <0-63> 33 <0-63> 15 <0-63> M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M When the value increases by 1, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8mm. <Paper length> Long size: 330mm or longer Middle size: 220mm to 329mm Short size: 219mm or shorter Contents When the value increases by 1, the image shifts toward the leading edge of the paper by approx. 0.4mm.
Procedure

1 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 38

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 458-0 Classification Items Long size Middle size Short size Long size Middle size Short size Long size Middle size Short size Long size Middle size Short size Post card Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (Bypass feeding/OHP film) Long size Middle size Short size Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 17 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 17 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 16 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> M Contents When the value increases by 1, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8mm. <Paper length> Long size: 330mm or longer Middle size: 220mm to 329mm Short size: 219mm or shorter
Procedure

458-1

458-2

Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (Bypass feeding/Normal paper)

ALL

ALL

460-0

460-1

460-2

Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (Bypass feeding/Thick paper 1)

ALL

ALL

ALL

461-0

461-1

461-2

Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (Bypass feeding/Thick paper 2) Short

ALL

ALL

ALL

462-0

462-1

462-2

Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (Bypass feeding/Thick paper 3) Short

ALL

ALL

ALL

462-3

ALL

463-0 463-1 463-2

ALL ALL ALL

M M M

4 4 4

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 39

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 466-0 466-1 466-2 466-3 466-4 466-5 466-6 466-7 467 Classification Items Normal paper Post card Thin paper Envelope Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film Paper Adjustment of paper pushing feeding amount/Duplex feeding (short size) Finisher Fine adjustment A4-R of binding position /LT-R B4 /folding position A3/LD Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (Upper drawer) Thick paper 1 Long size Thick paper 1 Middle size Thick paper 1 Short size Thick paper 1 Long size Thick paper 1 Middle size Thick paper 1 Short size Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 0 <-14-14> 0 <-14-14> 0 <-14-14> 18 <0-63> 18 <0-63> M M M M M M M M M Contents
Procedure

Paper Adjustment of feeding paper pushing amount Post /Bypass feeding Thin

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1

468-0 468-1 468-2 469-0

ALL ALL ALL ALL

M M M M

When the value increases by 1, the binding/folding position shifts toward the right page by 0.25mm.

4 4 4

469-1

ALL

When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8mm. <Paper length> Long size: 330mm or longer Middle size: 220mm to 329mm Short size: 219mm or shorter

469-2

ALL

18 <0-63> 15 <0-63>

470-0

470-1

Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (Lower drawer)

ALL

ALL

15 <0-63>

470-2

ALL

15 <0-63>

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 40

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 471-0 Classification Items Thick paper 1 Long size Thick paper 1 Middle size Thick paper 1 Short size Thick paper 1 Long size Thick paper 1 Middle size Thick paper 1 Short size Thick paper 1 Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL 15 <0-63> M Contents When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8mm. <Paper length> Long size: 330mm or longer Middle size: 220mm to 329mm Short size: 219mm or shorter
Procedure

471-1

Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (PFP upper drawer)

ALL

15 <0-63>

471-2

ALL

15 <0-63>

472-0

472-1

Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (PFP lower drawer)

ALL

15 <0-63>

ALL

15 <0-63>

472-2

ALL

15 <0-63>

473-0

474-0

474-1

Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (LCF) Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (ADU)

ALL

15 <0-63>

474-2

Thick paper 1 Long size Thick paper 1 Middle size Thick paper 1 Short size

ALL

33 <0-63>

ALL

33 <0-63>

ALL

33 <0-63>

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 41

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 475-0 ClassifiItems cation Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (Bypass feeding) Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> ALL 28 4 M When the value increases by "1", the <0-63> aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8mm. <Paper length> ALL 28 M Long size: 330mm or longer 4 <0-63> Middle size: 220mm to 329mm Short size: 219mm or shorter ALL 28 <0-63> M 4

475-1

475-2

475-3

475-4

475-5

475-6

475-7

475-8

475-9 480 481

manuals4you.com

482 483 484

Thick paper 2 Long size Thick paper 2 Middle size Thick paper 2 Short size Thick paper 3 Long size Thick paper 3 Middle size Thick paper 3 Short size OHP film Long size OHP film Middle size OHP film Short size Post card Revolver Revolver home position adjustment Revolver Revolver standby position adjustment Revolver Revolver developY ment position M adjustment C

ALL

28 <0-63>

ALL

28 <0-63>

ALL

28 <0-63>

ALL

28 <0-63> 28 <0-63> 28 <0-63> 28 <0-63> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>

ALL

ALL

ALL ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color)

M M M M M M

4 1 1 1 1 1

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 42

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (05)


ClassifiItems cation 485-0 Revolver Revolver driving current 485-1 (120 revolving) Code 485-2 485-3 485-4 486-0 Revolver Revolver driving current 486-1 (65 revolving) 486-2 486-3 486-4 487-0 Revolver Revolver driving current 487-1 (55 revolving) 487-2 487-3 487-4 488-0 Revolver Revolver driving current (Low 488-1 speed revolving) 488-2 488-3 488-4 489-0 Revolver Revolver driving current (Holding) 489-1 494 Laser Secondary scanning data laser writing start position Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> 2 M ALL At prehold (color) <0-7> M At accelALL 2 eration (color) <0-7> M At same ALL 2 speed (color) <0-7> M At decelALL 2 eration (color) <0-7> M At postALL 2 hold (color) <0-7> M At preALL 2 hold (color) <0-7> M At accelALL 2 eration (color) <0-7> M At same ALL 2 speed (color) <0-7> M At decelALL 2 eration (color) <0-7> M At postALL 2 hold (color) <0-7> M At preALL 2 hold (color) <0-7> M At accelALL 2 eration (color) <0-7> M At same ALL 2 speed (color) <0-7> M At decelALL 2 eration (color) <0-7> M At postALL 2 hold (color) <0-7> M At preALL 2 hold (color) <0-7> M At accelALL 2 eration (color) <0-7> M At same ALL 2 speed (color) <0-7> M At decelALL 2 eration (color) <0-7> M At postALL 2 hold (color) <0-7> M At ready ALL 6 (color) <0-7> At Print M ALL 6 (color) <0-7> When M ALL 128 decelerat<0-255> ing to 1/2 When ALL 128 M decelerat<0-255> ing to 1/3 When ALL 128 M decelerat<0-255> ing to 1/4 Contents
Procedure

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1

495

496

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 43

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 497-0 497-1 497-2 ClassifiItems cation Laser Adjustment of Upper drawer sideways drawer Lower deviation drawer PFP upper drawer PFP lower drawer LCF Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> ALL 4 128 M When the value increases by 1, the <0-255> image shifts toward the front side by ALL M 0.0423mm. 4 128 <0-255> ALL M 4 128 <0-255> ALL 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 148 <0-255> 148 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 40 <0-255> 16 <0-255> 40 <0-255> M 4

497-3

497-4 497-5 498-0 498-1

ALL

M M M M When the value increases by 1, the image shifts toward the front side by 0.0423mm.

4 4 4 4

Laser

501 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 512 514 515 532 533 534

Image

Image

Image

Image

Image

Bypass ALL feeding Adjustment of ALL Long size duplex feeding sideways devia- Short size ALL (A4/LT or tion smaller) Density adjustment Photo PPC (black) Fine adjustment Text PPC of manual /Photo (black) density Text PPC /Center value (black) Density adjustment Text PPC (black) Fine adjustment of /Photo PPC manual density Photo (black) /Light step value Text PPC (black) Density adjustment Text PPC (black) Fine adjustment of /Photo PPC manual density Photo (black) /Dark step value Text PPC (black) Density adjustment Photo PPC (black) Fine adjustment of PPC automatic density Text /Photo (black) Text PPC (black) Range correction Text PPC (black) Background peak /Photo Photo PPC adjustment (black) Text PPC (black)

SYS When the value increases, the image of the center step density becomes SYS darker. SYS SYS When the value increases, the image of the light steps becomes lighter. SYS SYS SYS When the value increases, the image of the dark steps becomes darker. SYS SYS SYS When the value increases, the image becomes darker. SYS SYS SYS When the value increases, the background becomes more brightSYS ened. SYS

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 44

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 570 ClassifiItems cation Image Range correction Text on original /Photo manually set on the original glass Photo Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> PPC 1 22 SYS Sets whether the value of the (black) <11-14, background peak and text peak are fixed or not. Ones place is an 21-24, adjustment for automatic density 31-34, 41-44> and tens place is for manual PPC SYS density. Once they are fixed, the 1 12 (black) <11-14, range correction is performed with 21-24, standard values. The values of the 31-34, background peak and text peak affect 41-44> the reproduction of the background PPC SYS density and text density respectively. 1 22 (black) <11-14, Background peak Text peak 21-24, 1: fixed fixed 31-34, 2: varied fixed 41-44> 3: fixed varied 4: varied varied PPC - Adjusts the gradation reproduction 7 (black) automatically. 128 SYS When the value increases, the 4 PPC (black) <0-255> density in the target area becomes SYS higher. 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> Note: SYS L : Low density area 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> M : Medium density area SYS H : High density area 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> SYS When the value increases, the 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> density in the target area becomes SYS higher. 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> L : Low density area SYS M : Medium density area 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> H : High density area SYS 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255>

571

572

Text

580 590-0 590-1 590-2 591-0 591-1 591-2 592-0 592-1 592-2 596-0 596-1 596-2 597-0 597-1 597-2

Image Image

Automatic gamma adjustment L Adjustment of gamma balance M (Text/Photo) H

Image

Adjustment of gamma balance (Text)

L M H

Image

Adjustment of gamma balance (Photo)

L M H

Image

Adjustment of gamma balance (PS/Photo)

L M H

Image

Adjustment of gamma balance (PS/Text)

L M H

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 45

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 598-0 598-1 598-2 599-0 599-1 599-2 604 605 606 Image Image ClassifiItems cation Image Adjustment of gamma balance (PCL/Photo) Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> L PRT 4 128 SYS When the value increases, the (black) <0-255> density in the target area becomes M SYS higher. 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> L : Low density area H SYS M : Medium density area 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> H : High density area Adjustment of L SYS 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> gamma balance M SYS 4 PRT 128 (PCL/Text) (black) <0-255> H SYS 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> Sharpness Text SYS When the value increases, the image 1 PPC 0 /Photo (black) <0-31> adjustment becomes sharper. When the value deSYS creases, the image becomes softer. 1 Text PPC 0 (black) <0-31> The smaller the value is, the less the Photo SYS moire becomes. 1 PPC 0 (black) <0-31> * The default value 0 is equivalent to 16 (center value). Adjustment of Text PPC 30 SYS Adjustment of the blurred/thin 1 blurred/thin /Photo (black) <0-255> spotted text spotted text With increasing the value, the thin spotted text is suppressed, and with decreasing it, the blurred text is suppressed. Binary image PS PRT 5 SYS When the value decreases, the width 1 (black) <0-9> shaving/shaving of text becomes wider. PCL SYS 1 PRT 5 level (black) <0-9> Maximum output value when PRT SYS 1 255 applying Half Duty (black) <0-255> PS SYS When the value decreases, the 1 Upper limit in PRT 176 (black) <0-255> printing density becomes lighter. toner saving PCL SYS 1 PRT 176 mode (black) <0-255> Setting beam level converM Beam level is set for 4 divided smooth4 PPC 0 (black) <0-255> sion ing. When the value decreases, the M beam diameter becomes smaller to 4 PPC 63 (black) <0-255> reproduce the smaller dots. M 4 PPC 127 (black) <0-255> M 4 PPC 191 (black) <0-255> M 4 PPC 255 (black) <0-255> M 4 PPC 0 (black) <0-255> M 4 PPC 0 (black) <0-255> M 4 PPC 0 (black) <0-255>

648

Image

654 655 663 664 665

Image

Paper feeding Image

667-0 Paper feeding 667-1 667-2 667-3 667-4 667-5 667-6 667-7

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 46

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 693 ClassifiItems cation Image Range correction Text on original set on /Photo the RADF Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> PPC 22 SYS Sets whether the value of the back1 (black) <11-14, ground peak and text peak are fixed or 21-24 not. Ones place is an adjustment for 31-34 automatic density and tens place is 41-44> for manual density. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed PPC 12 SYS with standard values. 1 (black) <11-14, The values of the background peak 21-24, and text peak affect the reproduction 31-34, of the background density and text 41-44> density respectively. PPC (black) 22 SYS Background peak Text peak <11-14, 1: fixed fixed 21-24, 2: varied fixed 31-34 3: fixed varied 41-44> 4: varied varied SYS When the value increases, the image 125 <0-255> of center value density becomes darker. 20 SYS When the value increases, the image <0-255> of light side becomes lighter. 20 SYS When the value increases, the image <0-255> of dark side becomes darker. 128 SYS When the value increases, the image <0-255> of the center step density becomes darker. 128 SYS <0-255> 20 SYS When the value increases, the image <0-255> of the light steps becomes lighter. 20 SYS <0-255> 20 SYS When the value increases, the image <0-255> of the dark steps becomes darker. 20 SYS <0-255> 128 SYS When the value increases, the image <0-255> becomes darker. SYS 128 <0-255>

694

Photo

695

Text

700

Image

701

Adjustment of binarized threshold (Text)

Center value Light step value Dark step value Photo

FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black)

702

710

Image

714

Density adjustment manual density fine adjustment/Center Text /Photo value Density adjustment manual density fine adjustment/Light step value Density adjustment manual density fine adjustment/Dark step value Density adjustment automatic density fine adjustment Photo

715

Image

719

Text /Photo Photo

720

Image

724

Text /Photo Photo Text /Photo

725 729

Image

1 1

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 47

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 825 ClassifiItems cation Image Range correction Text on original /Photo manually set on the original glass Text Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> SCN 12 SYS Sets whether the value of the 1 (black) <11-14, background peak and text peak are 21-24, fixed or not. Ones place is an 31-34, adjustment for automatic density 41-44> and tens place is for manual SCN SYS density. Once they are fixed, the 1 12 (black) <11-14, range correction is performed with 21-24, standard values. The values of the 31-34, background peak and text peak 41-44> affect the reproduction of the SCN SYS background density and text density 1 12 (black) <11-14, respectively. 21-24, Background peak Text peak 31-34, 1: fixed fixed 41-44> 2: varied fixed SCN SYS 3: 1 12 fixed varied (black) <11-14, 4: varied varied 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> SCN SYS Sets whether the value of the 1 12 (black) <11-14, background peak and text peak are fixed or not. Ones place is an 21-24, adjustment for automatic density 31-34, 41-44> and tens place is for manual SCN SYS density. Once they are fixed, the 1 12 (black) <11-14, range correction is performed with 21-24, standard values. 31-34, The values of the background peak 41-44> and text peak affect the reproduction SCN SYS of the background density and text 1 12 (black) <11-14, density respectively. 21-24, Background peak Text peak 31-34, 1: fixed fixed 41-44> 2: varied fixed SCN SYS 3: 1 12 fixed varied (black) <11-14, 4: varied varied 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> SCN SYS When the value increases, the 1 48 (black) <0-255> background becomes more brightSYS ened. 1 SCN 64 (black) <0-255> SYS 1 SCN 32 (black) <0-255> SYS 1 SCN 32 (black) <0-255>

826

827

Photo

828

Gray scale

830

Image

Range correction Text on original set on /Photo the RADF

831

Text

832

Photo

833

Gray scale

835 836 837 838

Image

Range correction Text Background peak /Photo Text adjustment Photo Gray scale

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 48

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 840 841 842 843 845 846 847 848 850 851 852 853 855 856 857 858 860 861 862 Image Density adjustment automatic density fine adjustment Image Density adjustment manual density fine adjustment/Dark step value Image Density adjustment manual density fine adjustment/Light step value Image ClassifiItems cation Image Sharpness Text /Photo adjustment Text Photo Gray scale Text /Photo Text Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> SCN 0 SYS When the value increases, the image 1 (black) <0-31> becomes sharper. When the value SYS decreases, the image becomes 1 SCN 0 (black) <0-31> softer. SYS The smaller the value is, the less the 1 SCN 0 (black) <0-31> moire becomes. SYS * The default value 0 is equivalent to 1 SCN 0 (black) <0-31> 16 (center value). SYS When the value increases, the image 1 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> becomes darker. SYS 1 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 1 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 1 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> SYS When the value increases, the image 1 SCN 20 (black) <0-255> of the light steps becomes lighter. SYS 1 SCN 20 (black) <0-255> SYS 1 SCN 20 (black) <0-255> SYS 1 SCN 35 (black) <0-255> SYS When the value increases, the image 1 SCN 20 (black) <0-255> of the dark steps becomes darker. SYS 1 SCN 20 (black) <0-255> SYS 1 SCN 20 (black) <0-255> SYS 1 SCN 20 (black) <0-255> SYS When the value increases, the image 1 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> becomes darker. SYS 1 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 1 SCN 128 (black) <0-255>

Density adjustment manual density fine adjustment/Center Photo value

Gray scale Text /Photo Text Photo Gray scale Text /Photo Text Photo Gray scale Text /Photo Text Photo

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 49

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 880-0 880-1 880-2 881-0 881-1 881-2 882-0 882-1 882-2 883-0 883-1 883-2 884 ClassifiItems cation Image Adjustment of gamma balance (Text/Photo) Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> 128 L SCN SYS When the value increases, the density 4 (black) <0-255> in the target area becomes higher. M SYS L : Low density area 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> M : Medium density area H SYS H : High density area 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> Image Adjustment of L SYS 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> gamma balance M SYS 4 SCN 128 (Text) (black) <0-255> H SYS 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> Image Adjustment of L SYS 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> gamma balance M SYS 4 SCN 128 (Photo) (black) <0-255> H SYS 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> Image Adjustment of L SYS 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> gamma balance M SYS 4 SCN 128 (Grayscale) (black) <0-255> H SYS 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> Image Reproduction ratio fine SYS When the value increases by 1, the 1 SCN 128 adjustment of prinary reproduction ratio of primary scanning (black) <0-255> scanning direction direction increases by approx. 0.1%. Mainte- Equipment number (serial ALL SYS When this adjustment is performed 1 nance number) display with this code, the setting code (08995) is also performed automatically. (10 digits) Image Automatic PS PRT SYS Adjusts the gradation reproduction 7 /600x600dpi (color) gamma for each color, Y, M, C and K. SYS 7 PS PRT adjustment /1200x600dpi (color) SYS 7 PCL PRT /600x600dpi (color) SYS 7 PCL PRT /1200x600dpi (color)

976

1000 1001 1002 1003

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 50

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (05)


ClassifiItems cation 1010-0 Image Color balance adjustment for Y 1010-1 (PS/600x600dpi/ Photo) 1010-2 Code 1011-0 1011-1 1011-2 1012-0 1012-1 1012-2 1013-0 1013-1 1013-2 1014-0 1014-1 1014-2 1015-0 1015-1 1015-2 1016-0 1016-1 1016-2 1017-0 1017-1 1017-2 Image Color balance adjustment for K (PS/600x600dpi/ Text) Image Color balance adjustment for C (PS/600x600dpi/ Text) Image Color balance adjustment for M (PS/600x600dpi/ Text) Image Color balance adjustment for Y (PS/600x600dpi/ Text) Image Color balance adjustment for K (PS/600x600dpi/ Photo) Image Color balance adjustment for C (PS/600x600dpi/ Photo) Image Color balance adjustment for M (PS/600x600dpi/ Photo) Default Func- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion value> SYS The target color, mode and density PRT 128 (color) <0-255> area become darker as the value SYS increases. PRT 128 (color) <0-255> Note: SYS L : Low density area PRT 128 (color) <0-255> M : Medium density area SYS H : High density area PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS The target color, mode and density PRT 128 (color) <0-255> area become darker as the value SYS increases. PRT 128 (color) <0-255> Note: SYS L : Low density area PRT 128 (color) <0-255> M : Medium density area SYS H : High density area PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255>
Procedure

L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 51

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (05)


ClassifiItems cation 1018-0 Image Color balance adjustment for Y 1018-1 (PS/1200x600dpi/ Photo) 1018-2 Code 1019-0 1019-1 1019-2 1020-0 1020-1 1020-2 1021-0 1021-1 1021-2 1022-0 1022-1 1022-2 1023-0 1023-1 1023-2 1024-0 1024-1 1024-2 1025-0 1025-1 1025-2 Image Color balance adjustment for K (PS/1200x600dpi/ Text) Image Color balance adjustment for C (PS/1200x600dpi/ Text) Image Color balance adjustment for M (PS/1200x600dpi/ Text) Image Color balance adjustment for Y (PS/1200x600dpi/ Text) Image Color balance adjustment for K (PS/1200x600dpi/ Photo) Image Color balance adjustment for C (PS/1200x600dpi/ Photo) Image Color balance adjustment for M (PS/1200x600dpi/ Photo) Default Func- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion value> PRT 128 SYS The target color, mode and density (color) <0-255> area become darker as the value SYS increases. PRT 128 (color) <0-255> Note: SYS L : Low density area PRT 128 (color) <0-255> M : Medium density area SYS H : High density area PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS The target color, mode and density PRT 128 (color) <0-255> area become darker as the value SYS increases. PRT 128 (color) <0-255> Note: SYS L : Low density area PRT 128 (color) <0-255> M : Medium density area SYS H : High density area PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255>
Procedure

L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 52

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (05)


ClassifiItems cation 1026-0 Image Color balance adjustment for Y 1026-1 (PCL/600x600dpi/ Photo) 1026-2 Code 1027-0 1027-1 1027-2 1028-0 1028-1 1028-2 1029-0 1029-1 1029-2 1030-0 1030-1 1030-2 1031-0 1031-1 1031-2 1032-0 1032-1 1032-2 1033-0 1033-1 1033-2 Image Color balance adjustment for K (PCL/600x600dpi/ Text) Image Color balance adjustment for C (PCL/600x600dpi/ Text) Image Color balance adjustment for M (PCL/600x600dpi/ Text) Image Color balance adjustment for Y (PCL/600x600dpi/ Text) Image Color balance adjustment for K (PCL/600x600dpi/ Photo) Image Color balance adjustment for C (PCL/600x600dpi/ Photo) Image Color balance adjustment for M (PCL/600x600dpi/ Photo) Default Func- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion value> SYS The target color, mode and density PRT 128 (color) <0-255> area become darker as the value SYS increases. PRT 128 (color) <0-255> Note: SYS L : Low density area PRT 128 (color) <0-255> M : Medium density area SYS H : High density area PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS The target color, mode and density PRT 128 (color) <0-255> area become darker as the value SYS increases. PRT 128 (color) <0-255> Note: SYS L : Low density area PRT 128 (color) <0-255> M : Medium density area SYS H : High density area PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255>
Procedure

L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 53

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (05)


ClassifiItems cation 1034-0 Image Color balance adjustment for Y 1034-1 (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/ 1034-2 Photo) Code 1035-0 1035-1 1035-2 1036-0 1036-1 1036-2 1037-0 1037-1 1037-2 1038-0 1038-1 1038-2 1039-0 1039-1 1039-2 1040-0 1040-1 1040-2 1041-0 1041-1 1041-2 Image Color balance adjustment for K (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/Text) Image Color balance adjustment for C (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/Text) Image Color balance adjustment for M (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/Text) Image Image Image Image Color balance adjustment for M (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/ Photo) Color balance adjustment for C (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/ Photo) Color balance adjustment for K (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/ Photo) Color balance adjustment for Y (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/Text) Default Func- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion value> PRT 128 SYS The target color, mode and density (color) <0-255> area become darker as the value SYS increases. PRT 128 (color) <0-255> Note: SYS L : Low density area PRT 128 (color) <0-255> M : Medium density area SYS H : High density area PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS The target color, mode and density PRT 128 (color) <0-255> area become darker as the value SYS increases. PRT 128 (color) <0-255> Note: SYS L : Low density area PRT 128 (color) <0-255> M : Medium density area SYS H : High density area PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255>
Procedure

L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 54

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (05)


ClassifiItems cation 1046-0 Image Adjustment of PS maximum toner 1046-1 PCL amount (Normal paper) 1047-0 Image Adjustment of PS maximum toner 1047-1 PCL amount (Thick paper 1) 1048-0 Image Adjustment of PS maximum toner 1048-1 PCL amount (Thick paper 2) 1049-0 Image Adjustment of PS maximum toner 1049-1 PCL amount (Thick paper 3) 1050-0 Image Adjustment of PS maximum toner 1050-1 PCL amount (OHP film) 1055 Image Upper limit PS/ 600x600dpi in toner 1056 saving mode PS/ 1200x600dpi 1057 PCL/ 600x600dpi 1058 PCL/ 1200x600dpi 1060 Image Reproduction ratio fine adjustment of primaryscanning direction 1065 Image Judgment threshold for ACS Code Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> 255 4 PRT SYS When the value decreases, the (color) <0-255> image becomes lighter. SYS Note: 4 PRT 255 (color) <0-255> When the value increases, the image SYS offsetting may occur. 4 PRT 255 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 255 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 255 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 255 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 255 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 255 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 185 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 185 (color) <0-255> SYS When the value decreases, the 1 PRT 176 (color) <0-255> printing density becomes lighter. SYS 1 PRT 176 (color) <0-255> SYS 1 PRT 176 (color) <0-255> SYS 1 PRT 176 (color) <0-255> SYS When the value increases by 1, the 1 SCN 128 reproduction ratio of primary scanning (color) <0-255> direction decreases by approx. x.xx%. SCN 70 SYS When the value increases, originals 1 (color) <0-255> tend to be judged as monochrome, and when the value decreases, they tend to be judged as color in autocolor mode. SCN 70 SYS 1 (color) <0-255> SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) 0 <0-50> 0 <0-50> 0 <0-50> 0 <0-4> 0 <0-4> 0 <0-4> SYS Adjusts the level of background. When the value increases, the background SYS becomes more brightened. SYS SYS Adjusts the black density of the scanned image. When the value SYS increases, the black density becomes darker. SYS 1 1 1 1 1 1

1066

Image

Judgment threshold for ACS on original set on the RADF Fine adjustment of background Text Printed image Photo

1070 1071 1072 1075 1076 1077

Image

Image

Fine adjustment of black density

Text Printed image Photo

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 55

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (05)


Code ClassifiItems cation Image RGB conversion Text method selection Printed image Photo Image Sharpness adjustment Text Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> SCN 0 SYS Sets the color space format of the 1 (color) <0-3> output image. SYS 0: sRGB 1: AppleRGB 1 SCN 0 (color) <0-3> 2: ROMMRGB 3: AdobeRGB SYS 1 SCN 0 (color) <0-3> SYS When the value increases, the image 1 SCN 0 becomes sharper. When the value (color) <0-31> decreases, the image becomes SCN 0 SYS softer. 1 (color) <0-31> The smaller the value is, the less the moire becomes. SCN 0 SYS * The default value 0 is equivalent to 1 (color) <0-31> 16 (center value). PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PR (color) PPC (color) PR (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> SYS When the value increases, the image becomes darker. SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS When the value increases, the image of the dark steps becomes darker. SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS When the value increases, the image of the light steps becomes lighter. SYS SYS SYS SYS

1080 1081 1082 1086

1087

Printed image Photo

1088

1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574

Image

Density adjustment manual density fine adjustment/Center value

Text /Photo Text Printed image Photo Map

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Image

Density adjustment manual density fine adjustment/Dark step value

Text /Photo Text Printed image Photo Map

Image

Density adjustment manual density fine adjustment/Light step value

Text /Photo Text Printed image Photo Map

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 56

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1642 1643 1675 1676 Image Image Image Image Adjustment of maximum toner amount ClassifiItems cation Image Density adjustText ment automatic /Photo Text density fine adjustment Printed image Photo Map Normal paper Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> 128 SYS When the value increases, the image 1 PPC (color) <0-255> becomes darker. SYS 1 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 1 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 1 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 1 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS When the value decreases, the 1 PPC 255 (color) <0-255> image becomes lighter. SYS Note: 1 PPC 255 (color) <0-255> When the value increases, image SYS offsetting may occur. 1 PPC 237 (color) <0-255> SYS 1 PPC 237 (color) <0-255> SYS 1 PPC 230 (color) <0-255> SYS Adjusts the gradation reproduction 7 PPC (color) for each color; Y, M, C and K. SYS 7 PPC (color) 70 SYS When the value increases, originals 1 PPC (color) <0-255> tend to be judged as monochrome, SYS and when the value decreases, they 1 PPC 70 (color) <0-255> tend to be judged as color in autocolor mode. PPC 128 SYS When the value increases, the 1 (color) <0-255> background becomes darker. SYS 1 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 1 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 1 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 1 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS When the value increases, the text 1 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> becomes darker. SYS 1 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 1 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 1 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 1 PPC 128 (color) <0-255>

Automatic gamma Color/ Black adjustment Color Judgment threshold for ACS Judgment threshold for ACS on original set on the RADF Automatic offsetting adjustment for background processing (background density) Text /Photo Text Printed image Photo Map

1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697

Image

Image

Automatic offsetting adjustment for background processing (text density)

Text /Photo Text Printed image Photo Map

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 57

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1769 1770 1771 1772 1779-0 1779-1 1779-2 1780-0 1780-1 1780-2 Image Color balance adjustment for Y (Text) Image Color balance adjustment for Y (Text/Photo) Image Setting for highlighter Image Sharpness adjustment Image Manual offsetting adjustment for background processing (text density) ClassifiItems cation Image Manual offsetting adjustment for background processing (background density) Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> PPC 128 SYS When the value increases, the 1 (color) <0-255> background becomes darker. SYS 1 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 1 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 1 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 1 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS When the value increases, the text 1 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> becomes darker. SYS 1 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 1 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 1 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 1 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS When the value increases, the image 1 PPC 0 (color) <0-31> becomes sharper. When the value deSYS creases, the image becomes softer. 1 PPC 0 (color) <0-31> The smaller the value is, the less the SYS moire becomes. 1 PPC 0 (color) <0-31> SYS *The default value 0 is equivalent to 1 PPC 0 (color) <0-31> 16 (center value). SYS 1 PPC 0 (color) <0-31> SYS Sets the reproduction mode for 1 PPC 0 (color) <0-2> highlighter for four types of one touch SYS adjustment. 1 PPC 0 (color) <0-2> 0: Default SYS 1: Highlighter 1 1 PPC 0 (color) <0-2> 2: Highlighter 2 SYS 1 PPC 0 (color) <0-2> SYS The target color, mode and density 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> area become darker as the value SYS increases. 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> Note: SYS L : Low density area 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M : Medium density area SYS H : High density area 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255>

Text /Photo Text Printed image Photo Map Text /Photo Text Printed image Photo Map Text /Photo Text Printed image Photo Map Vivid Clear Warm Cold L M H L M H

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 58

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (05)


ClassifiItems cation 1781-0 Image Color balance adjustment for Y 1781-1 (Text/Photo) Code 1781-2 1782-0 1782-1 1782-2 1783-0 1783-1 1783-2 1784-0 1784-1 1784-2 1785-0 1785-1 1785-2 1786-0 1786-1 1786-2 1787-0 1787-1 1787-2 1788-0 1788-1 1788-2 Image Color balance adjustment for M (Map) Image Color balance adjustment for M (Photo) Image Color balance adjustment for M (Printed image) Image Color balance adjustment for M (Text) Image Color balance adjustment for M (Text/Photo) Image Color balance adjustment for Y (Map) Image Color balance adjustment for Y (Photo) Default Func- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion value> PPC 128 SYS The target color, mode and density (color) <0-255> area become darker as the value SYS increases. PPC 128 (color) <0-255> Note: SYS L : Low density area PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M : Medium density area SYS H : High density area PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS The target color, mode and density PPC 128 (color) <0-255> area become darker as the value SYS increases. PPC 128 (color) <0-255> Note: SYS L : Low density area PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M : Medium density area SYS H : High density area PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255>
Procedure

L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 59

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (05)


ClassifiItems cation 1789-0 Image Color balance adjustment for C 1789-1 (Text/Photo) Code 1789-2 1790-0 1790-1 1790-2 1791-0 1791-1 1791-2 1792-0 1792-1 1792-2 1793-0 1793-1 1793-2 1794-0 1794-1 1794-2 1795-0 1795-1 1795-2 1796-0 1796-1 1796-2 Image Color balance adjustment for K (Printed image) Image Color balance adjustment for K (Text) Image Color balance adjustment for K (Text/Photo) Image Color balance adjustment for C (Map) Image Color balance adjustment for C (Photo) Image Color balance adjustment for C (Printed image) Image Color balance adjustment for C (Text) Default Func- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion value> PPC 128 SYS The target color, mode and density (color) <0-255> area become darker as the value SYS value increases. PPC 128 (color) <0-255> Note: SYS L : Low density area PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M : Medium density area SYS H : High density area PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS The target color, mode and density PPC 128 (color) <0-255> area become darker as the value SYS increases. PPC 128 (color) <0-255> Note: SYS L : Low density area PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M : Medium density area SYS H : High density area PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255>
Procedure

L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 60

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (05)


ClassifiItems cation 1797-0 Image Color balance adjustment 1797-1 for K (Photo) Code 1797-2 1798-0 Image 1798-1 1798-2 1800-0 Image control 1800-1 1800-2 1800-3 1801-0 Image control 1801-1 1801-2 1801-3 1802-0 Image control 1802-1 1802-2 1802-3 1803-0 Image control 1803-1 1803-2 1803-3 1804-0 Image control 1804-1 1804-2 1804-3 Background voltage actual value display Lower limit value of laser power Upper limit value of laser power Lower limit value of contrast voltage Upper limit value of contrast voltage Color balance adjustment for K (Map) Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> PPC 128 SYS The target color, mode and density 4 (color) <0-255> area become darker as the value SYS increases. 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> Note: SYS L : Low density area 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M : Medium density area SYS H : High density area 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M Sets the upper limit value of the 4 ALL 450 <0-999> contrast voltage at the image quality ALL M control. (Unit: V) 4 450 <0-999> ALL M 4 450 <0-999> ALL M 4 450 <0-999> ALL M Sets the lower limit value of the 4 120 <0-999> contrast voltage at the image quality ALL M control. (Unit: V) 4 120 <0-999> ALL M 4 120 <0-999> ALL M 4 120 <0-999> ALL M Sets the upper limit value of the laser 4 800 <0-999> power at the image quality control. ALL M (Unit: W) 4 800 <0-999> ALL M 4 800 <0-999> ALL M 4 800 <0-999> ALL M Sets the lower limit value of the laser 4 350 <0-999> power at the image quality control. ALL M (Unit: W) 4 350 <0-999> ALL M 4 350 <0-999> ALL M 4 350 <0-999> ALL M Displays the background voltage at 10 125 <0-999> the actual print. (Unit: V) ALL M 10 125 <0-999> ALL M 10 125 <0-999> ALL M 10 125 <0-999>

L M H L M H Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 61

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (05)


ClassifiItems cation 1805-0 Image Drum initial control voltage character1805-1 istic/slope factor display 1805-2 Code 1805-3 1806-0 Image control 1806-1 1806-2 1806-3 1807-0 Image control 1807-1 1807-2 1807-3 1808-0 Image control 1808-1 1808-2 1808-3 1809-0 Image control 1809-1 1809-2 1809-3 1810-0 Image control 1810-1 1810-2 1810-3 Drum residual voltage characteristic/offset factor display (main charger grid high voltage area) Drum residual voltage characteristic/slope factor display (main charger grid high voltage area) Drum residual voltage characteristic/offset factor display (main charger grid low voltage area) Drum residual voltage characteristic/slope factor display (main charger grid low voltage area) Drum initial voltage characteristic/offset factor display Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL 975 M <0-999> ALL M 975 <0-999> ALL M 975 <0-999> ALL M 981 <0-999> ALL M 50 <-999-999> ALL M 50 <-999-999> ALL M 50 <-999-999> ALL M 50 <-999-999> ALL M 50 <0-999> ALL M 50 <0-999> ALL M 50 <0-999> ALL M 50 <0-999> ALL M 50 <-999-999> ALL M 50 <-999-999> ALL M 50 <-999-999> ALL M 50 <-999-999> ALL M 50 <0-999> ALL M 50 <0-999> ALL M 50 <0-999> ALL M 50 <0-999> ALL M 50 <-999-999> ALL M 50 <-999-999> ALL M 50 <-999-999> ALL M 50 <-999-999> Contents Displays the slope factor of the approximate expression of the drum initial voltage to the main charger grid voltage at the open-loop control.
Procedure

Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K

10 10 10 10

Displays the offset factor of the approximate expression of the drum initial voltage to the main charger grid voltage at the open-loop control.

10 10 10 10

Displays the slope factor of the approximate expression of the drum residual voltage to the main charger grid voltage at the open-loop control.

10 10 10 10

Displays the offset factor of the approximate expression of the drum residual voltage to the main charger grid voltage at the open-loop control.

10 10 10 10

Displays the slope factor of the approximate expression of the drum residual voltage to the main charger grid voltage at the open-loop control.

10 10 10 10

Displays the offset factor of the approximate expression of the drum residual voltage to the main charger grid voltage at the open-loop control.

10 10 10 10

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 62

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (05)


ClassifiItems cation 1811-0 Image Contrast voltage/ control upper limit actual 1811-1 value display Code 1811-2 1811-3 1812-0 Image control 1812-1 1812-2 1812-3 1813-0 Image control 1813-1 1813-2 1813-3 1814-0 Image control 1814-1 1814-2 1814-3 1815-0 Image control 1815-1 1815-2 1815-3 1816-0 Image control 1816-1 1816-2 1816-3 Laser power correction/number of time display Contrast voltage/ correction number of time display Background voltage/lower limit actual value display Display of background voltage/upper limit actual value Contrast voltage/ lower limit actual value display Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> M Displays the upper limit value of the ALL 450 10 <0-999> contrast voltage at the actual print. ALL M (Unit: V) 10 450 <0-999> ALL M 10 450 <0-999> ALL M 10 600 <0-999> ALL M Displays the lower limit value of the 10 120 <0-999> contrast voltage at the actual print. ALL M (Unit: V) 10 120 <0-999> ALL M 10 120 <0-999> ALL M 10 120 <0-999> ALL M Displays the upper limit value of the 10 170 <0-999> background voltage at the actual ALL M print. (Unit: V) 10 170 <0-999> ALL M 10 170 <0-999> ALL M 10 170 <0-999> ALL M Displays the lower limit value of the 10 80 <0-999> background voltage at the actual ALL M print. (Unit: V) 10 80 <0-999> ALL M 10 80 <0-999> ALL M 10 80 <0-999> ALL M Displays the actual number of time of 10 0 <0-255> the contrast voltage correction at the ALL M closed-loop control. 10 0 <0-255> ALL M 10 0 <0-255> ALL M 10 0 <0-255> ALL M Displays the actual number of time of 10 0 <0-255> the laser power correction at the ALL M closed-loop control. 10 0 <0-255> ALL M 10 0 <0-255> ALL M 10 0 <0-255>

Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 63

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (05)


Code 1817 ClassifiItems cation Laser power actual value Image control display Image control Image control Image control Laser power correcting factor Laser power actual value display Laser power correcting factor Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> 2 PPC 92 M Displays the laser power value when the printing is actually performed. (black) <0-255> (Bit value) PPC 100 M 1 (black) <100-255> M Displays the laser power value when 2 PRT 92 the printing is actually performed. (black) <0-255> (Bit value) PRT 100 M 1 (black) <100-255>

1819 1820

1821

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE LIST

2 - 64

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2.2.5 Setting mode (08)


The items in the setting code list can be set or changed in this setting mode (08).

Procedure 1
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] *[RESET] Sets or changes value [ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM) *Press [RESET] to enter "-".

(
Procedure 2
[0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

[START]

(
Procedure 3
[0][8] [POWER]

[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] Adjustment value cannot be changed

[POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)

[Digital key] (Code)

[START]

[ENTER] or (Automatic setting) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)

[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]

Procedure 4
[CANCEL] [START] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (Sub-code) [START] [Digital key] * [RESET] Sets or changes value [CLEAR] (Corrects value) [POWER] [ENTER] [FAX] or OFF/ON [INTERRUPT] [START] (Exit) (Stores value (Test copy) in RAM)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value) * Press [RESET] to enter "-".

Procedure 5
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [ENTER] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON or *[HELP] (Exit) [INTERRUPT] Sets or (Stores value in RAM) changes value [CLEAR] (Corrects value) *Press [HELP] to enter - .

(
August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 65

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Procedure 7
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [Digital key] (Setting) [ENTER] or (HDD formatting) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)

[START]

[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

Procedure 9
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Select icon] [ENTER] [POWER]OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

Procedure 10
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (1st setting) [START] [Digital key] (2nd setting) [ENTER] [POWER] or OFF/ON [INTERRUPT] (Exit) (Stores value in RAM) [CLEAR] (Corrects value)

[CLEAR] (Corrects value)

Procedure 11 and 12
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START]

[Digital key] or [POWER] OFF/ON [ENTER] [Select keyboard] *2(Stores value in RAM) (Exit) on the LCD *1 [PAUSE] [CLEAR] Sets or changes value (Corrects value)

*1. Press [PAUSE] to enter "-", when entering telephone number. *2. The data are stored in SYS-RAM in procedure 11 and stored in NIC-RAM in procedure 12.

Procedure 14
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (Sub-code) [START] [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] Adjustment value cannot be changed [CLEAR] (Corrects value) e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES 2 - 66 August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 200 ClassifiItems cation General Date and time setting Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> - Year/month/date/day/hour/minute/ 5 ALL <13 digits> second Example: 03 07 0 13 13 27 48 Day - 0 is for Sunday. Proceeds Monday through Saturday from 1 to 6. Destination selection ALL EUR: 0 M 0: EUR 1: UC 1 UC: 1 2: JPN 3: Other JPN: 2 <0-3> Counter installed externally ALL M 0: No external counter 1 0 1: Coin controller <0-3> 2: Copy key card 3: Key copy counter Line adjustment mode ALL 0 M 0: For factory shipment 1: For line 1 <0-1> *Field: 0 must be selected Auto-clear timer setting ALL SYS Timer to return the copier to the 1 3 <0-10> default settings when the [START] key is not pressed after the function and the mode are set 0: Not cleared 1 to 10: Set number X 15 sec. Auto power save mode timer ALL 11 SYS Timer to automatically switch to the 1 setting <0, 6-15> energy saving mode when the copier has not been used 0: Invalid 6: 3min. 7: 4min. 8: 5min. 9: 7min. 10: 10min. 11: 15min. 12: 20min. 13: 30min. 14: 45min. 15: 60min. Auto shut off mode timer ALL 9 SYS Timer to automatically turn OFF the 1 setting <0-20> power when the copier has not been used 0: 3min. 1: 5min. 2: 10min. 3: 15min. 4: 20min. 5: 25min. 6: 30min. 7: 40min. 8: 50min. 9: 60min. 10: 70min. 11: 80min. 12: 90min. 13: 100min. 14: 110min. 15: 120min. 16: 150min. 17: 180min. 18: 210min. 19: 240min. 20: Not used Highlighting display on LCD ALL 0 SYS 0: Black letter on white background 1 <0-1> 1: White letter on black background Default filing format when EALL SYS 0:TIFF (Multi) 1 0 1:PDF mailing (common in all color (color) <0-1> modes) ALL 130 SYS 1 Tab paper printing/Tab <100-200> extension setting (Bypass feeding) ALL 130 SYS 1 Tab paper printing/Tab shift setting (Bypass feeding) <0-300> ALL SYS 0: TIFF (Multi) 1: PDF 2: JPG 1 Default filing format when 1 (color) 3:TIFF (Single) storing files (at color/ACS <0-3> modes)

201

General

202

User interface

203 204

General User interface

205

User interface

206

User interface

207 209

User interface User interface Paper feeding Paper feeding User interface

216

217 218

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 67

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 219 220 Classification User interface User interface Items Default filing format when storing files (at black mode) Language displayed at power-ON Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> ALL 0 1: PDF 2: JPG 1 SYS 0: TIFF (Multi) (black) <0-3> 3:TIFF (Single) 1 ALL JPN: 5 SYS 0: Language 1 1: Language 2 OTHER: 0 2: Language 3 3: Language 4 <0-6> 4: Language 5 5: Language 6 6: Language 7 ALL 0 SYS 0: Language 1 1 1: Language 2 <0-4> 2: Language 3 3: Language 4 4: Language 5 ALL 0 M 0: Output pages 1: Driving counts 1 <0-1> ALL 9 UNDEF SYS Press the icon on the LCD to select the size. ALL EUR:A4 M Press the icon on the LCD to select 9 UC:LT the size. JPN:A4 ALL 9 EUR:A3 M Press the icon on the LCD to select the size. UC:LD JPN:A3 ALL EUR: A4-R M Press the icon on the LCD to select 9 the size. UC: LT-R JPN: A4-R ALL 9 EUR:A4 M PPress the icon on the LCD to select the size. UC:LG JPN:B4 ALL 10 420/297 M <182-432/ 140-297> ALL 10 297/210 M <182-432/ 140-297> ALL 10 210/148 M <182-432/ 140-297> ALL 10 364/257 M <182-432/ 140-297> ALL 10 257/182 M <182-432/ 140-297> ALL 10 279/216 M <182-432/ 140-297> ALL 10 432/279 M <182-432/ 140-297> ALL 10 356/216 M <182-432/ 140-297> ALL 10 216/140 M <182-432/ 140-297>

221

User Language selection in UI interface data at Web power ON Maintenance Paper feeding Paper feeding Switching of output pages/ driving counts at PM Paper size for bypass feed Paper size for upper drawer

223 224 225

226

Paper Paper size for lower drawer feeding Paper Paper size for PFP upper feeding drawer Paper Paper size for PFP lower feeding drawer Paper Paper size (A3) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (A4-R) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (A5-R) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (B4-R) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (B5-R) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (LT-R) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (LD) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (LG) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (ST-R) feeding feeding/widthwise direction

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 68

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 238 ClassifiItems cation Paper Paper size (COMPUTER) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (FOLIO) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (13LG) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (8.5X8.5) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (Non-standard) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Memory 1 feeding Paper size (bypass feeding/ non-standard type) feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (8K) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (16K-R) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (A3-wide) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Memory 2 feeding Paper size (bypass feeding/ non-standard type) feeding/widthwise direction Paper Memory 3 feeding Paper size (bypass feeding/ non-standard type) feeding/widthwise direction Paper Memory 4 feeding Paper size (bypass feeding/ non-standard type) feeding/widthwise direction Mainte- Service call telephone nance number Mainte- Setting value of PM counter nance Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL 356/257 M <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 330/210 <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 330/216 <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 216/216 <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 432/279 <148-432/ 105-297> ALL 148/100 SYS <148-432/ 100-297> ALL 390/270 M <182-432/ 140-297> M 270/195 <182-432/ 140-297> M 457/305 <182-457/ 140-305> 148/100 SYS <148-432/ 100-297> 148/100 SYS <148-432/ 100-297> 148/100 SYS <148-432/ 100-297> 0 SYS A telephone number can be entered <14 up to 14 digits. Use the [Pause] digits> button to enter a hyphen(-). M Driving counts of the drum Refer to contents <Default> <8 digits> e-STUDIO 3511 UC, EUR: 120000 JPN: 0 e-STUDIO 4511 UC, EUR: 150000 JPN: 0 Contents
Procedure

10

239

10

240

10

241

10

242

10

243

10

244

10

245

ALL

10

246

ALL

10

247

ALL

10

248

ALL

10

249

ALL

10

250

ALL

11

251

ALL

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 69

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 252 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL 0 <8 digits> 1 <0-1> M Contents Driving counts of the drum (Registration sensor ON) is counted.
Procedure

253 254

Mainte- Current value of PM time nance counter Display/0 clearing Mainte- Error history display nance Paper LT A4/LD A3 feeding

ALL PRT

SYS Displaying of the latest 20 errors data

2 1

255

Paper PFP/LCF installation feeding

ALL

256

Paper Paper size setting /LCF feeding Counter Counter copy Mainte- FSMS acceptance nance Network Storage period at testing for free and private Network Web data retention period Network Web Box data retention period Network TWAIN data retention period Network Administrator's password (Maximum 6 digits) Network File retention period Network Maximum data capacity at E-mailing Network Maximum data capacity at Internet FAX Full guarantee of the documents in BOX when the HDD is full

ALL

257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267

ALL ALL PRT ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

268 269

ACS threshold (Step value) Search method in address book

ALL ALL

SYS Exits the LT size paper forcibly when A4 print is performed from the client computer in the network print function though only LT paper exists. Similarly, exits the A4/LD/A3 size paper forcibly when LT/A3/LD print is performed from the client computer in the network print function though only A4/LD/A3 paper exists. 0: Valid 1: Invalid 0 M 0: Automatic <0-4> 1: PFP single-drawer type installed 2: PFP dual-drawer type installed 3: LCF installed 4: Not installed EUR:A4 M Press the icon on the LCD to select UC:LT the size. JPN:A4 - 1: Electrical counter -> Backup counter <1-2> 2: Backup counter -> Electrical counter SYS 0: Prohibited 1: Accepted (only serial) 1 <0-2> 2: Accepted (serial + USB) SYS 0: No limits 1 to 30: 1 to 30 days 14 <0-30> SYS Unit: Minute 10 <3 digits> SYS Unit: Minute 10 <3 digits> SYS Unit: Minute 10 <3 digits> 123456 SYS Able to enter within 6 digits (Figures <6 digits> only) SYS 0: No limits 30 <0-999> 1 to 999: 1 to 999 days SYS 2 to 30 M bytes 30 <2-30> SYS 2 to 30 M bytes 30 <2-30> SYS 0: Not fully guaranteed (The docu0 ments may be erased by CutDoc/ <0-1> SaveDo) 1: Fully guaranteed (Copies of the documents are retained at any time) 3 SYS <1-5> SYS 0: AND 1: OR 0 <0-1>

1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1

1 1

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 70

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 270 Classification Items Storage setting of user box (Set when creating user box) Warning display of the HDD capacity to be filled Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL Contents
Procedure

0 SYS 0: Not erase <0-999> 1 to 999: 1 to 999 days 90 SYS Sets the percentage of the HDD <0-100> capacity filled which warning is displayed 0 to 100: 0 to 100 % 3 SYS Sets the days left the notification of <0-99> E-mail saving time limit appears 0 to 99: 0 to 99 days 0 SYS Only the default value set on <0-6> template is defined. 0: No partitioning 1: 64 2: 128 3: 256 4: 512 5: 1024 6: 2048 0 SYS Only the default value set on <0-4> template is defined. 0: No partitioning 1: 256 2: 512 3: 1024 4: 2048 0 SYS 0: MH 1: MR 2: MMR <0-3> 3: JBIG SYS 0: Automatic 1: -5 0 2: -4 <0-11> 3: -3 4: -2 5: -1 6: 0 7: +1 8: +2 9: +3 10: +4 11: +5 3 SYS 1: -2 2: -1 3: 0 <1-5> 4: +1 5: +2 SYS 0: B/W 0 1: Grayscale2: Scale <0-4> 3: Full color 4: Auto Color SYS 0: 100 dpi 1: 150 dpi 2: 200 dpi 2 <0-3> 3: 300dpi SYS 0: 100 dpi 1: 150 dpi 2: 200 dpi 2 <0-4> 3: 300dpi 4: 400 dpi SYS 0: 150 dpi 1: 200 dpi 2: 300 dpi 1 <0-4> 3: 400dpi 4: 600 dpi SYS 0: Text 0 1: Text/Photo 2: Photo <0-2> SYS 0: Text 1: Text/Photo 2: Photo 0 <0-2> SYS 0: Single 1: Book 2: Tablet 0 <0-2> SYS 0: 0 degree 1: 90 degrees 0 <0-3> 2: 180 degrees 3: 270 degrees SYS 0: Automatic 1: A3 0 2: A4 <0-19> 3: LD 4: LT 5: A4-R 6: A5-R 7: LT-R 8: LG 9: B4 10: B5 11: ST-R 12: COMP 13: B5-R 14: FOLIO 15: 13"LG 16: 8.5"x 8.5" 18: A6-R 19: Size mixed 0 SYS 0: OFF 1: ON <0-1>

271

ALL

272

Notification setting of E-mail saving time limit Network Default size setting of partitioned data to be transmitted

ALL

273

ALL

274

Network Default size setting of partitioned data Page by Page Default setting of encode method Default setting of scanning density (B/W)

ALL

275 276

ALL ALL

1 1

277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286

Default setting of background adjustment (Color) Default setting of color mode Default setting of resolution (Color) Default setting of resolution (Gray) Default setting of resolution (B/W) Default setting of original mode (Color) Default setting of original mode (B/W) Default setting of scanning mode Default setting of rotation angle of original Default setting of original paper size

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL SCN ALL ALL

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

287

ON/OFF setting of Notification

ALL

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 71

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 288 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL 12 <1-24> 3 <1-5> 1 <0-1> EUR: 6 UC: 2 JPN: 6 <0 -13> 0 <0-4> 0 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 0 <0-2> 1200 <50012800> 1000 <44-9999> 1200 <40099975> 0 <0-79> 0 <0-2> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> SYS Unit: Hour Contents
Procedure

289 290 291

Searching interval of erasing files exceeding saving time limit Default setting of background (Gray) Network Raw printing job (Duplex) Network Raw printing job (Paper size)

ALL PRT PRT

SYS 1: -2 2: -1 3: 0 5: +2 SYS 0: Valid 1: Invalid

4: +1

1 1 1

292

Network Raw printing job (Paper type) Network Raw printing job (Paper direction) Network Raw printing job (Staple) Network Raw printing job (Exit bin) Network Raw printing job (Number of form lines) Network Raw printing job (PCL font pitch) Network Raw printing job (PCL font size)

PRT

293 294 295 296

PRT PRT PRT PRT

SYS 0: LD 1: LG 2: LT 3: COMP 4: ST 5: A3 6: A4 7: A5 8: A6 9: B4 10: B5 11: FOLIO 12: 13 "LG 13: 8.5" x 8.5" SYS 0: Normal paper 1: Thick paper 1 2: Thick paper 2 3: Thick paper 3 4: OHP film SYS 0: Portrait 1: Landscape SYS 0: Valid 1: Invalid SYS 0: Inner receiving tray 1: 1 bin 2: 2 bin SYS 500 to 12800 (Number of form lines) SYS 44 to 9999 (PCL font pitch) SYS 400 to 99975 (PCL font size)

1 1 1 1

297 298

PRT PRT

1 1

Network Raw printing job (PCL font number) 300 User Maximum number of interface printouts (MAX9) 301-0 Counter Number of output A3 pages at full color 301-1 Counter mode in copier A4 function 301-2 Counter A5 301-3 301-4 301-5 301-6 301-7 301-8 301-9 Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT

299

PRT ALL PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color)

SYS SYS 0: 999 1: 99 2: 9

1 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

SYS Counts the output pages at the full color mode in the copier function for SYS each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 72

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (08)


Code Classification Items ST Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> EUR: 2 UC: 0 JPN: 0 <0, 2> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> Contents
Procedure

301-10 Counter Number of output pages at full color 301-11 Counter mode in copier function 301-12 Counter 301-13 Counter 301-14 Counter 301-15 Counter 301-16 Counter 302 User interface

PPC (color) COMP PPC (color) 13"LG PPC (color) 8.5"x8.5" PPC (color) 16K PPC (color) 8K PPC (color) Others PPC (color) Original counter display ALL

SYS Counts the output pages at the full color mode in the copier function for SYS each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS Sets whether the original counter is displayed or not. 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed SYS Counts the output pages at the full color mode in the printer function for SYS each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1

303-0 303-1 303-2 303-3 303-4 303-5 303-6 303-7 303-8 303-9

Counter Number of output pages at full color Counter mode in printer function Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter

303-10 Counter 303-11 Counter 303-12 Counter 303-13 Counter 303-14 Counter 303-15 Counter 303-16 Counter

PRT (color) A4 PRT (color) A5 PRT (color) A6 PRT (color) B4 PRT (color) B5 PRT (color) FOLIO PRT (color) LD PRT (color) LG PRT (color) LT PRT (color) ST PRT (color) COMP PRT (color) 13"LG PRT (color) 8.5"x8.5" PRT (color) 16K PRT (color) 8K PRT (color) Others PRT (color)

A3

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 73

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 304-0 304-1 304-2 304-3 304-4 304-5 304-6 304-7 304-8 304-9 Classification Items Function A3 PPC (color) A4 PPC (color) A5 PPC (color) A6 PPC (color) B4 PPC (color) B5 PPC (color) FOLIO PPC (color) LD PPC (color) LG PPC (color) LT PPC (color) ST PPC (color) COMP PPC (color) 13"LG PPC (color) 8.5"x8.5" PPC (color) 16K PPC (color) 8K PPC (color) Others PPC (color) A3 PPC (black) A4 PPC (black) A5 PPC (black) A6 PPC (black) B4 PPC (black) B5 PPC (black) FOLIO PPC (black) LD PPC (black) LG PPC (black) Default
<Acceptable value>

RAM

Contents

Procedure

Counter Number of output pages at twin Counter color mode in copier function Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter

304-10 Counter 304-11 Counter 304-12 Counter 304-13 Counter 304-14 Counter 304-15 Counter 304-16 Counter 305-0 305-1 305-2 305-3 305-4 305-5 305-6 305-7 305-8 Counter Number of output pages at black Counter mode in copier function Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter

0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>

SYS Counts the output pages at the twin color mode in the copier function for SYS each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS Counts the output pages at the black mode in the copier function for each SYS paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized SYS paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 74

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 305-9 Classification Counter Function Number of output LT PPC (black) pages at black ST PPC mode in copier (black) function COMP PPC (black) 13"LG PPC (black) 8.5"x8.5" PPC (black) 16K PPC (black) 8K PPC (black) Others PPC (black) Number of output A3 PRT (black) pages at black A4 PRT mode in printer (black) function A5 PRT (black) A6 PRT (black) B4 PRT (black) B5 PRT (black) FOLIO PRT (black) LD PRT (black) LG PRT (black) LT PRT (black) ST PRT (black) COMP PRT (black) 13"LG PRT (black) 8.5"x8.5" PRT (black) 16K PRT (black) 8K PRT (black) Others PRT (black) Items Default
<Acceptable value>

RAM

Contents

Procedure

305-10 Counter 305-11 Counter 305-12 Counter 305-13 Counter 305-14 Counter 305-15 Counter 305-16 Counter 306-0 306-1 306-2 306-3 306-4 306-5 306-6 306-7 306-8 306-9 Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter

306-10 Counter 306-11 Counter 306-12 Counter 306-13 Counter 306-14 Counter 306-15 Counter 306-16 Counter

0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>

SYS Counts the output pages at the black mode in the copier function for each SYS paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized SYS paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS Counts the output pages at the black mode in the printer function for each SYS paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized SYS paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 75

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 307-0 307-1 307-2 307-3 307-4 307-5 307-6 307-7 307-8 307-9 Classification Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Function Number of output PRT A3 (black) pages at list print A4 PRT mode (black) A5 PRT (black) A6 PRT (black) B4 PRT (black) B5 PRT (black) FOLIO PRT (black) LD PRT (black) LG PRT (black) LT PRT (black) ST PRT (black) COMP PRT (black) 13"LG PRT (black) 8.5"x8.5" PRT (black) 16K PRT (black) 8K PRT (black) Others PRT (black) Number of output A3 FAX pages in FAX A4 function FAX Items A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX Default
<Acceptable value>

RAM

Contents

Procedure

307-10 Counter 307-11 Counter 307-12 Counter 307-13 Counter 307-14 Counter 307-15 Counter 307-16 Counter 308-0 308-1 308-2 308-3 308-4 308-5 308-6 308-7 308-8 Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter

0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>

SYS Counts the output pages at the list print mode for each paper size SYS according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) SYS and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS Counts the output pages in the FAX function for each paper size accordSYS ing to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the SYS definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 76

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 308-9 Classification Counter Default Func- <Acceptable tion value> 0 Number of output LT FAX <8 digits> pages in FAX ST 0 function FAX <8 digits> COMP 0 FAX <8 digits> 13"LG 0 FAX <8 digits> 8.5"x8.5" FAX 0 <8 digits> 16K 0 FAX <8 digits> 8K 0 FAX <8 digits> Others 0 ALL <8 digits> Number of A3 SCN 0 (color) <8 digits> scanning pages at A4 SCN 0 full color mode in (color) <8 digits> copier function A5 SCN 0 (color) <8 digits> A6 SCN 0 (color) <8 digits> B4 SCN 0 (color) <8 digits> B5 SCN 0 (color) <8 digits> FOLIO SCN 0 (color) <8 digits> LD SCN 0 (color) <8 digits> LG SCN 0 (color) <8 digits> LT SCN 0 (color) <8 digits> ST SCN 0 (color) <8 digits> COMP SCN 0 (color) <8 digits> 13"LG SCN 0 (color) <8 digits> 8.5"x8.5" SCN 0 (color) <8 digits> 16K SCN 0 (color) <8 digits> 8K SCN 0 (color) <8 digits> Others SCN 0 (color) <8 digits> Items RAM Contents
Procedure

308-10 Counter 308-11 Counter 308-12 Counter 308-13 Counter 308-14 Counter 308-15 Counter 308-16 Counter 309-0 309-1 309-2 309-3 309-4 309-5 309-6 309-7 309-8 309-9 Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter

SYS Counts the output pages in the FAX function for each paper size accordSYS ing to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the SYS definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS Counts the scanning pages at the full color mode in the copier function for SYS each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

309-10 Counter 309-11 Counter 309-12 Counter 309-13 Counter 309-14 Counter 309-15 Counter 309-16 Counter

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 77

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 310-0 310-1 310-2 310-3 310-4 310-5 310-6 310-7 310-8 310-9 Classification Items A3 Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> Contents
Procedure

Counter Number of scanning pages at Counter full color mode in network scanning Counter function Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter

310-10 Counter 310-11 Counter 310-12 Counter 310-13 Counter 310-14 Counter 310-15 Counter 310-16 Counter 311-0 311-1 311-2 311-3 311-4 311-5 311-6 311-7 311-8 Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter

SCN (color) A4 SCN (color) A5 SCN (color) A6 SCN (color) B4 SCN (color) B5 SCN (color) FOLIO SCN (color) LD SCN (color) LG SCN (color) LT SCN (color) ST SCN (color) COMP SCN (color) 13"LG SCN (color) 8.5"x8.5" SCN (color) 16K SCN (color) 8K SCN (color) Others SCN (color) Number of A3 SCN (color) scanning pages at A4 SCN twin color mode in (color) copier function A5 SCN (color) A6 SCN (color) B4 SCN (color) B5 SCN (color) FOLIO SCN (color) LD SCN (color) LG SCN (color)

SYS Counts the scanning pages at the full color mode in the network scanning SYS function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting SYS of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS Counts the scanning pages at the twin color mode in the copier function SYS for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 78

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 311-9 Classification Items LT Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> Contents
Procedure

Counter Number of scanning pages at 311-10 Counter twin color mode in copier function 311-11 Counter 311-12 Counter 311-13 Counter 311-14 Counter 311-15 Counter 311-16 Counter 312-0 312-1 312-2 312-3 312-4 312-5 312-6 312-7 312-8 312-9 Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter

312-10 Counter 312-11 Counter 312-12 Counter 312-13 Counter 312-14 Counter 312-15 Counter 312-16 Counter

SCN (color) SCN ST (color) SCN COMP (color) SCN 13"LG (color) 8.5"x8.5" SCN (color) SCN 16K (color) SCN 8K (color) SCN Others (color) Number of SCN A3 (black) scanning pages at SCN black mode in A4 (black) copier function SCN A5 (black) SCN A6 (black) SCN B4 (black) SCN B5 (black) SCN FOLIO (black) SCN LD (black) SCN LG (black) SCN LT (black) SCN ST (black) SCN COMP (black) SCN 13"LG (black) 8.5"x8.5" SCN (black) SCN 16K (black) SCN 8K (black) SCN Others (black)

SYS Counts the scanning pages at the twin color mode in the copier function SYS for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS Counts the scanning pages at the black mode in the copier function for SYS each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 79

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 313-0 313-1 313-2 313-3 313-4 313-5 313-6 313-7 313-8 313-9 Classification Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Function SCN Number of A3 (black) scanning pages in SCN network scanning A4 (black) function SCN A5 (black) SCN A6 (black) SCN B4 (black) SCN B5 (black) SCN FOLIO (black) SCN LD (black) SCN LG (black) SCN LT (black) SCN ST (black) SCN COMP (black) SCN 13"LG (black) 8.5"x8.5" SCN (black) SCN 16K (black) SCN 8K (black) SCN Others (black) Number of SCN A3 (black) scanning pages in SCN FAX function A4 (black) SCN A5 (black) SCN A6 (black) SCN B4 (black) SCN B5 (black) SCN FOLIO (black) SCN LD (black) SCN LG (black) Items Default
<Acceptable value>

RAM

Contents

Procedure

313-10 Counter 313-11 Counter 313-12 Counter 313-13 Counter 313-14 Counter 313-15 Counter 313-16 Counter 314-0 314-1 314-2 314-3 314-4 314-5 314-6 314-7 314-8 Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter

0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>

SYS Counts the scanning pages in the network scanning function for each SYS paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized SYS paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS Counts the scanning pages in the FAX function for each paper size SYS according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) SYS and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 80

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 314-9 Classification Counter Function Number of SCN LT scanning pages in (black) FAX function SCN ST (black) SCN COMP (black) SCN 13"LG (black) 8.5"x8.5" SCN (black) SCN 16K (black) SCN 8K (black) SCN Others (black) Number of A3 FAX transmitted pages in FAX function A4 FAX Items A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13"LG 8.5"x8.5" 16K 8K Others FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX Default
<Acceptable value>

RAM

Contents

Procedure

314-10 Counter 314-11 Counter 314-12 Counter 314-13 Counter 314-14 Counter 314-15 Counter 314-16 Counter 315-0 315-1 315-2 315-3 315-4 315-5 315-6 315-7 315-8 315-9 Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter

315-10 Counter 315-11 Counter 315-12 Counter 315-13 Counter 315-14 Counter 315-15 Counter 315-16 Counter

0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>

SYS Counts the scanning pages in the FAX function for each paper size SYS according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) SYS and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS Counts the transmitted pages in the FAX function for each paper size SYS according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) SYS and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 81

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 316-0 316-1 316-2 316-3 316-4 316-5 316-6 316-7 316-8 316-9 Classification Items A3 Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> FAX Contents
Procedure

Counter Number of received pages in Counter FAX function Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter

316-10 Counter 316-11 Counter 316-12 Counter 316-13 Counter 316-14 Counter 316-15 Counter 316-16 Counter 317-0 Counter

317-1 Counter

0 <8 digits> 0 A4 FAX <8 digits> 0 A5 FAX <8 digits> 0 A6 FAX <8 digits> 0 B4 FAX <8 digits> 0 B5 FAX <8 digits> 0 FOLIO FAX <8 digits> 0 LD FAX <8 digits> 0 LG FAX <8 digits> 0 LT FAX <8 digits> 0 ST FAX <8 digits> 0 COMP FAX <8 digits> 0 13"LG FAX <8 digits> 0 8.5"x8.5" FAX <8 digits> 0 16K FAX <8 digits> 0 8K FAX <8 digits> 0 Others FAX <8 digits> Display of number Large PPC 0 of output pages at (color) <8 digits> full color mode in copier function Small PPC 0 (color) <8 digits>

SYS Counts the received pages in the FAX function for each paper size SYS according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) SYS and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 14

317-2 Counter

Total

SYS Displays the number of output pages at the full color mode in the copier function. Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at SYS 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper PPC 0 SYS Total: Total number output pages of (color) <8 digits> all paper sizes.

14

14

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 82

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (08)


Code Classification Items Large Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> Contents
Procedure

318-0 Counter Display of number of output pages at full color mode in printer function 318-1 Counter

Small

319-0 Counter Display of number of output pages at twin color mode in copier function 319-1 Counter

Large

Small

319-2 Counter

Total

PPC 0 SYS Displays the number of output pages (color) <8 digits> at the twin color mode in the copier function. Large: Number of output pages of PPC 0 large-sized paper defined at SYS (color) <8 digits> 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper PPC 0 SYS Total: Total number output pages of (color) <8 digits> all paper sizes.

14

14

14

320-0 Counter Display of number of output pages at black copy mode in copier function 320-1 Counter

Large

Small

320-2 Counter

Total

PPC 0 SYS Displays the number of output pages (black) <8 digits> at the black mode in the copier function. Large: Number of output pages of PPC 0 large-sized paper defined at SYS (black) <8 digits> 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper PPC 0 SYS Total: Total number output pages of (black) <8 digits> all paper sizes.

14

14

14

321-0 Counter Display of number of output pages at black copy mode in printer function 321-1 Counter

Large

Small

321-2 Counter

Total

PRT 0 SYS Displays the number of output pages (black) <8 digits> at the black mode in the printer function. Large: Number of output pages of PRT 0 large-sized paper defined at SYS (black) <8 digits> 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper PRT 0 SYS Total: Total number output pages of (black) <8 digits> all paper sizes.

14

14

14

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 83

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

manuals4you.com

318-2 Counter

Total

PRT 0 SYS Displays the number of output pages (color) <8 digits> at the full color mode in the printer function. Large: Number of output pages of PRT 0 large-sized paper defined at SYS (color) <8 digits> 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper PRT 0 SYS Total: Total number output pages of (color) <8 digits> all paper sizes.

14

14

14

Adjustment mode (08)


ClassifiItems cation 322-0 Counter Display of number of output pages at list print mode Code 322-1 Counter Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> PRT 0 14 SYS Displays the number of output pages (black) <8 digits> at the list print mode in the printer function. Large: Number of output pages of PRT 0 14 large-sized paper defined at SYS (black) <8 digits> 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper PRT 0 14 SYS Total: Total number output pages of (black) <8 digits> all paper sizes.

Large

Small

322-2 Counter

Total

323-0 Counter Display of number of output pages in FAX function 323-1 Counter

Large

Small

323-2 Counter

Total

FAX 0 SYS Displays the number of output pages (black) <8 digits> in the FAX function. Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at FAX 0 08-353 SYS (black) <8 digits> Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of FAX 0 all paper sizes. SYS (black) <8 digits>

14

14

14

324-0 Counter Display of number of scanning pages at full color mode in copier function 324-1 Counter

Large

Small

324-2 Counter

Total

SCN 0 SYS Displays the number of scanning (color) <8 digits> pages at the full color mode in the copier function. Large: Number of output pages of SCN 0 large-sized paper defined at SYS (color) <8 digits> 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper SCN 0 SYS Total: Total number output pages of (color) <8 digits> all paper sizes.

14

14

14

325-0 Counter Display of number of scanning pages at full color mode in network 325-1 Counter scanning function

Large

Small

325-2 Counter

Total

SCN 0 SYS Displays the number of scanning (color) <8 digits> pages at the full color mode in the network scanning function. Large: Number of output pages of SCN 0 large-sized paper defined at SYS (color) <8 digits> 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper SCN 0 SYS Total: Total number output pages of (color) <8 digits> all paper sizes.

14

14

14

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 84

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (08)


ClassifiItems cation 326-0 Counter Display of number of scanning pages at twin color mode in copier function 326-1 Counter Code Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> SCN 0 14 SYS Displays the number of scanning (color) <8 digits> pages at the twin color mode in the copier function. Large: Number of output pages of SCN 0 14 large-sized paper defined at SYS (color) <8 digits> 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper SCN 0 14 SYS Total: Total number output pages of (color) <8 digits> all paper sizes.

Large

Small

326-2 Counter

Total

327-0 Counter Display of number of scanning pages at black mode in copier function 327-1 Counter

Large

Small

327-2 Counter

Total

SCN 0 SYS Displays the number of scanning (black) <8 digits> pages at the black mode in the copier function. Large: Number of output pages of SCN 0 large-sized paper defined at SYS (black) <8 digits> 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper SCN 0 SYS Total: Total number output pages of (black) <8 digits> all paper sizes.

14

14

14

328-0 Counter Display of number of scanning pages in FAX function 328-1 Counter

Large

Small

328-2 Counter

Total

SCN 0 SYS Displays the number of scanning (black) <8 digits> pages in the FAX function. Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at SCN 0 08-353 SYS (black) <8 digits> Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of SCN 0 all paper sizes. SYS (black) <8 digits>

14

14

14

329-0 Counter Display of number of scanning pages in network scanning function 329-1 Counter

Large

Small

329-2 Counter

Total

SCN 0 SYS Displays the number of scanning (black) <8 digits> pages in the network scanning function. Large: Number of output pages of SCN 0 large-sized paper defined at SYS (black) <8 digits> 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper SCN 0 SYS Total: Total number output pages of (black) <8 digits> all paper sizes.

14

14

14

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 85

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (08)


ClassifiItems cation 330-0 Counter Display of number of transmitted pages in FAX function 330-1 Counter Code Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> 0 FAX 14 SYS Displays the number of transmitted pages in the FAX function. (black) <8 digits> Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at FAX 0 14 08-353 SYS (black) <8 digits> Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of FAX 0 14 all paper sizes. SYS (black) <8 digits>

Large

Small

330-2 Counter

Total

331

User Screen priority selection interface

332-0 Counter Display of number of received pages in FAX function 332-1 Counter

Large

Small

332-2 Counter

Total

SYS Sets the screen to be displayed after the auto-clear time has passed or it has recovered from the energy saving mode or sleep mode. 0: Copier 1: Fax 2: Scan 3: Box FAX 0 SYS Displays the number of received (black) <8 digits> pages in the FAX function. Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at FAX 0 08-353 SYS (black) <8 digits> Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of FAX 0 all paper sizes. SYS (black) <8 digits>

ALL

0 <0-3>

14

14

14

333-0 333-1 333-2 334-0 334-1 334-2 335-0 335-1 335-2 346 347

Counter Display of total number of output Counter pages at full color mode Counter Counter Display of total number of pages Counter at twin color mode Counter Counter Display of total number of pages Counter at black mode Counter

Large Small Total Large Small Total Large Small Total

Counter Count setting of large-sized paper (PM) Counter Definition setting of largesized paper (PM)

ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL ALL

0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1>

SYS Displays the total number of pages at full color mode in the copier/printer/ SYS scanning functions. SYS SYS Displays the total number of pages at twin color mode in the copier/ SYS scanning functions. SYS M M M M M 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 0: A3/LD 1: A3/LD/B4/LG/FOLIO/COMP Displays the total number of pages at list print mode and black mode in the copier/printer/scanning/FAX functions.

14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 1 1

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 86

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 348 349 352 ClassifiItems cation Counter Count setting of thick paper Counter Count setting of OHP film Counter Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter) Counter Definition setting of largesized paper (Fee charging system counter) Counter Counter for upper drawer feeding Counter Counter for lower drawer feeding Counter Counter for bypass feeding Counter Counter for LCF feeding Counter Counter for PFP upper drawer feeding Counter Counter for PFP lower drawer feeding Counter Counter for ADU Counter Counter for RADF Mainte- Setting value of PM time nance counter display/0 clearing Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> 1 M 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 1 ALL <0-1> ALL M 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 1 1 <0-1> ALL M 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 1 JPN: 0 2: Counted as 1 (Mechanical counter OTHER: 1 <0-2> is double counter) ALL M 0: A3/LD 1 0 <0-1> 1: A3/LD/B4/LG/FOLIO/COMP ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL 0 M Counts the number of sheets fed <8 digits> from upper drawer M Counts the number of sheets fed 0 <8 digits> from lower drawer M Counts the number of sheets fed 0 <8 digits> from bypass feed M Counts the number of sheets fed 0 <8 digits> from LCF M Counts the number of sheets fed 0 <8 digits> from PFP upper drawer M Counts the number of sheets fed 0 <8 digits> from PFP lower drawer M Counts the number of output pages 0 <8 digits> of duplex printing. SYS Counts the number of fed paper from 0 <8 digits> the RADF M Counts the drum driving time (drum Refer to contents motor ON). <8 digits> <Default> e-STUDIO3511 JPN: 0 UC, EUR: 200,000 e-STUDIO4511 JPN: 0 UC, EUR: 160,000 0 M <8 digits> SYS 0 <8 digits> SYS 0 <8 digits> SYS 0 <8 digits> SYS 0 <8 digits> M 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> M 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1

353

356 357 358 359 360 370 372 374 375

376 390 391 392 393 398

399

Mainte- Current value of PM time nance counter Counter Number of errors in HDD (Copying) Counter Number of errors in HDD (FAX) Counter Number of errors in HDD (Network scanning) Counter Number of errors in HDD (Printer) Image Number of ON/OFF of process- polygonal motor ing Image Accumulated time of process- polygonal motor at normal ing rotation

ALL PPC FAX SCN PRT ALL

1 2 2 2 2 2

ALL

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 87

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 400 ClassifiItems cation Fuser Fuser unit error status counter Default Func- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion value> ALL 0 M 0: No error 1: C410 (Once) <0-18> 2: C410 (consecutively occurred) 3: C460 4: C430 5: C440 6: C450 7: C440 8: C450 9: C440 10: C470 11: C470 12: C480 13: C490 14: C470 15: C480 16: C490 17: C470 18: C480 Fuser roller temperature at a ALL 0 M 0: OFF 1: 40C 2: 45C low-power mode (Center <0-16> 3: 50C 4: 55C 5: 60C thermistor) 6: 65C 7: 70C 8: 75C 9: 80C 10: 85C 11: 90C 12: 95C 13: 100C 14: 105C 15: 110C 16:115C Fuser roller temperature ALL 12 M 0: 120C 1: 125C 2: 130C during printing (Center (black) <0-16> 3: 135C 4: 140C 5: 145C thermistor/Normal paper) 6: 150C 7: 155C 8: 160C ALL 12 M 9: 165C 10: 170C 11: 175C (color) <0-16> 12: 180C 13: 185C 14: 190C 15: 195C 16: 200C Fuser roller temperature on ALL 12 M 0: 120C 1: 125C 2: 130C standby <0-16> 3: 135C 4: 140C 5: 145C (Center thermistor) 6: 150C 7: 155C 8: 160C 9: 165C 10: 170C 11: 175C 12: 180C 13: 185C 14: 190C 15: 195C 16: 200C Fuser roller temperature ALL 12 M 0: 120C 1: 125C 2: 130C during printing (black) <0-16> 3: 135C 4: 140C 5: 145C (Center thermistor/Thick 6: 150C 7: 155C 8: 160C ALL 12 M 9: 165C 10: 170C 11: 175C paper 1) (color) <0-16> 12: 180C 13: 185C 14: 190C 15: 195C 16: 200C Fuser unit transport decelALL 0, 3 M 0: 1/1 1: 1/2 2: 1/3 eration <0-3> 3: 1/4 (OHP film) ALL 0, 1 M 0: 1/1 1: 1/2 2: 1/3 Fuser unit transport decel<0-3> 3: 1/4 eration (Thick paper 1) ALL 0, 2 M 0: 1/1 1: 1/2 2: 1/3 Fuser unit transport decel<0-3> 3: 1/4 eration (Thick paper 2) ALL 12 M 0: 120C 1: 125C 2: 130C Fuser roller temperature (black) <0-16> 3: 135C 4: 140C 5: 145C during printing 6: 150C 7: 155C 8: 160C (Center thermistor /Thick ALL 10 M 9: 165C 10: 170C 11: 175C paper 2) (color) <0-16> 12: 180C 13: 185C 14: 190C 15: 195C 16: 200C
Procedure

409

Fuser

410-0

Fuser

410-1

411

Fuser

413-0

Fuser

413-1

430

Fuser

431

Fuser

432

Fuser

437-0

Fuser

437-1

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 88

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 438-0 Classification Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> ALL 12 2: 130C Fuser Fuser roller temperature M 0: 120C 1: 125C 4 during printing (black) <0-16> 3: 135C 4: 140C 5: 145C (Center thermistor/OHP film) 6: 150C 7: 155C 8: 160C ALL 10 M 9: 165C 10: 170C 11: 175C 4 (color) <0-16> 12: 180C 13: 185C 14: 190C 15: 195C 16: 200C Fuser Pre-running time for first ALL 14 M 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 1 2: 2 sec. printing <0-16> 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. (Thick paper 2) 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 10 sec. 10: 12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14: 20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec. Fuser Pre-running time for first ALL 12 M 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 1 2: 2 sec. printing <0-16> 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. (Normal paper) 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 10 sec. 10: 12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14: 20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec. Fuser Pre-running time for first ALL 9 M 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 1 2: 2 sec. printing <0-16> 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. (Thick paper 1) 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 10 sec. 10: 12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14: 20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec. RADF Setting for switchback ALL 0 M Sets whether or not detecting the 1 operation to copy mixed<0-1> original length by transporting without sized original on RADF scanning in reverse when finding A4R/FOLIO paper. 0: Invalid- Judges as A4-R without transporting in reverse with no scanning. 1: Valide- Judges whether it is A4-R or FOLIO size by transporting in reverse with no scanning. * The original is transported in reverse with no scanning when detecting LT-LG size-paper in LT, regardless of this setting. Paper Feeding retry Normal ALL 5 M Sets the number of times of the 4 paper <0-5> feeding counter setting feeding retry from the upper drawer. M 4 5 value (upper Others ALL drawer) <0-5> Paper Feeding retry M Sets the number of times of the 4 Normal 5 ALL paper <0-5> feeding counter setting feeding retry from the lower drawer. M 4 5 value (lower Others ALL drawer) <0-5> Paper Feeding retry M Sets the number of times of the 4 Normal 5 ALL paper <0-5> feeding counter setting feeding retry from the PFP upper M drawer. 4 5 value (PFP upper Others ALL drawer) <0-5> Items

438-1

439

440

441

462

463-0 463-1 464-0 464-1 465-0 465-1

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 89

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 466-0 466-1 467-0 467-1 468-0 468-1 469 470 ClassifiItems cation Paper Feeding retry feeding counter setting value (PFP lower drawer) Paper Feeding retry feeding counter setting value (bypass feed) Paper Feeding retry feeding counter setting value (LCF) Separation Paper feeding Default Func- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion value> 5 M Sets the number of times of the ALL <0-5> feeding retry from the PFP lower M drawer. 5 ALL <0-5> 5 ALL M Sets the number of times of the <0-5> feeding retry from the bypass tray. 5 ALL M <0-5> 5 ALL M Sets the number of times of the <0-5> feeding retry from the LCF. 5 ALL M <0-5> 1: Low speed 0 ALL M 0: High speed <0-1> ALL M 457/305 <148-457/ 105-305> ALL M 148/100 <148-432/ 100-297> ALL M 0: 2 times 1: 12 times 0 <0-1> ALL 0 <0-1> 0: Waiting time for polygonal motor rotation overshooting 0.6 sec. 1: Waiting time for polygonal motor rotation overshooting 2.2 sec. M 0: A4/LT 1: LCF 2: Upper drawer 3: Lower drawer 4: PFP upper drawer 5: PFP lower drawer SYS Sets whether or not changing the drawer automatically to the other drawer with the paper of the same size when paper in the selected drawer has run out. 0: OFF 1: ON (Changes to the drawer with the same paper direction and size: ex. A4 to A4) 2: ON (Changes to the drawer with the same paper size. Paper with the different direction is acceptable as long as the size is the same: ex., A4 to A4-R, LT-R to LT. 1 is applied when the staple/holepunch is specified.) M 0: ON 1: OFF M
Procedure

Normal paper Others Normal paper Others Normal paper Others

4 4 4 4 4 4 1 10

Speed switching for subseparation fan Paper size (305x457 mm) feeding/widthwise direction

471

Paper Paper size (Post card) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Laser Frequency judgment of Separation polygonal motor (at a regular speed) Judging method of polygonal motor at acceleration/ deceleration

10

478

479

Laser

480

Paper Paper source priority feeding selection

ALL

0 <0-5>

481

Paper Automatic change of paper feeding source

ALL

1 <0-2>

482

Paper Feeding retry feeding

ALL

0 <0-1>

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 90

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 483 ClassifiItems cation Laser Pre-running rotation of polygonal motor Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> ALL 0 SYS 0: Valid (when using RADF and 1 <0-2> manually-set original) 1: Invalid 2: Valid (when using RADF only) ALL 0 SYS 0: Valid 1: Invalid 1 <0-1> ALL SYS 0: Rotating 1: Stopped 1 0 <0-1> ALL SYS 0: 15sec. 1: 30sec. 2: 45sec. 1 0 <0-2> ALL M 0: 38090.55rpm 1: 35000rpm 1 5 2: 30000rpm 3: 25000rpm <0-5> 4: 20000rpm 5: 10000rpm ALL 0 M 0: Stopped 1 1: 10000rpm <0-1> PPC SYS Sets the image reproduction method 1 0 (black) at photo mode. <0-1> 0: Error diffusion 1: Dither PPC 0 SYS 0: Automatic 1 (black) <0-1> 1: Manual (Center) M 0: Invalid 1 ALL 1 <0-1> 1: Valid ALL M 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 1 16 2: 2 sec. <0-16> 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 10 sec. 10: 12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14: 20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec. 1 ALL M Sets whether or not correcting the 1 <0-1> 1st transfer roller bias depending on the environment. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 ALL M Sets whether or not correcting the 1st 1 <0-1> transfer roller bias depending on the transfer belt life. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 ALL M Sets whether or not correcting the 1 <0-1> 1st transfer roller bias depending on the 1st transfer roller life. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 ALL M Sets whether or not correcting the 1 <0-1> 2nd transfer roller bias depending on the environment. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 ALL M Sets whether or not correcting the 1 <0-1> 2nd transfer roller bias depending on the transfer belt life. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 ALL M Sets whether or not correcting the 1 <0-1> 2nd transfer roller bias depending on the 2nd transfer roller life. 0: Invalid 1: Valid

484 485 486 489

Laser Laser Laser Laser

Polygonal motor stop at the auto-clear mode Polygonal motor rotation stopping status Polygonal motor stopping period Polygonal motor rotation number on standby Polygonal motor rotation in the energy saving mode Error diffusion and dither setting at a photo mode Density mode priority Main charger wire autocleaning setting Pre-running time for first printing (OHP film/black)

490 502

Laser Image

503 511 526

User interface Main charger Fuser

541

Image Environment correction control control of 1st transfer roller bias Image Transfer belt life correction control of 1st transfer roller bias

542

543

Image 1st transfer roller life control correction of 1st transfer roller bias Image Environment correction control control of 2nd transfer roller bias Image Transfer belt life correction control of 2nd transfer roller bias

544

545

546

Image 2nd transfer roller life control correction of 2nd transfer roller bias

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 91

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 547 548 ClassifiItems cation Transfer Setting of 2nd transfer bias paper type correction control Transfer Setting of 2nd transfer bias table (for each destination/ paper type) Image Image quality control/opencontrol loop control 1 Image Original mode priority Default Func- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion value> 0 ALL M 0: Invalid <0-1> 1: Valid 2 ALL M 0: TEG <0-2> 1: HM 2: P50S ALL 1 <0-1> 0 <0-3> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> Sets whether or not performing the open-loop control 1. 0: Invalid 1: Valid SYS 0: Text/Photo 1: Photo 2: Text 3: GRAY SCALE M Sets whether or not performing the open-loop control 2. 0: Invalid 1: Valid M Sets whether or not correcting the drum voltage depending on the drum life in open-loop control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid M Sets whether or not correcting the drum voltage depending on the drum surface temperature in open-loop control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid M Sets whether or not deciding the initial value of contrast voltage in open-loop control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid M Sets whether or not correcting the laser power depending on the drum life when the laser power initial value is set in open-loop control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid M Sets whether or not correcting the contrast voltage in closed-loop control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid M Sets whether or not correcting the laser power in closed-loop control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid M Sets whether or not switching the correction amount once at contrast voltage correction depending on the environment. 0: Invalid 1: Valid M Sets whether performing closed-loop control automatically at power-ON when the fuser roller temperature becomes below the specified level. 0: Invalid 1: Valid (at mode 1) 2: Valid (at mode 2) M 0: Invalid 1: Valid M
Procedure

1 1

549

550 551

Image Image quality control/opencontrol loop control 2 Image Drum life correction control control

PPC (black) ALL

1 1

552

ALL

553

Image Drum temperature correction control control

ALL

1 <0-1>

554

Image Image quality open-loop control control/Contrast voltage initial value Image Drum life correction of laser control power initial value

ALL

1 <0-1>

555

ALL

1 <0-1>

556

Image Image quality closed-loop control control/Contrast voltage

ALL

1 <0-1>

557

Image Image quality closed-loop control control/Laser power Image Contrast voltage/Correction control gain environment setting

ALL

1 <0-1> 1 <0-1>

558

ALL

559

Image Image quality closed-loop control control automatic start-up/At power-ON

ALL (color)

1 <0-2>

560

Image

Mode switching for image smoothing (Text/Photo)

PPC (black)

1 <0-1>

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 92

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 561 ClassifiItems cation Image Mode switching for image smoothing (Photo) Image Mode switching for image smoothing (Text) Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> PPC 0 M 0: Invalid (black) <0-1> PPC (black) ALL (color) 1 <0-1> 1 <0-2> M 0: Invalid Contents 1: Valid
Procedure

562

1: Valid

565

Image Image quality closed-loop control control automatic start-up/ Relative humidity variation

566

Image Image quality closed-loop control control automatic start-up/ Period of time unattended

ALL (color)

1 <0-2>

567

Image Image quality closed-loop control control automatic start-up/ Accumulated print volume

ALL (color)

2 <0-2>

568

Image Image quality closed-loop control control automatic start-up/ When recovered from Toner empty Image Image quality closed-loop control control automatic start-up/ Temperature setting of fuser roller at power-ON

ALL (color)

2 <0-2>

569

ALL (color)

6 <0-20>

570

Image Image quality closed-loop control control automatic start-up/ Relative humidity difference setting

ALL (color)

4 <0-6>

571

Image Image quality closed-loop control control automatic start-up/ Setting of period of time unattended

ALL (color)

4 <0-24>

Sets whether or not performing closed-loop control automatically when the relative humidity becomes below the specified level from the previous control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid (at mode 1) 2: Valid (at mode 2) Sets whether or not performing closed-loop control automatically when the equipment has not been used for a specified period of time. 0: Invalid 1: Valid (at mode 1) 2: Valid (at mode 2) Sets whether or not performing closed-loop control automatically when the specified number of sheets has been printed out from the previous control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid (at mode 1) 2: Valid (at mode 2) Sets whether or not performing closed-loop control automatically when recovered from Toner empty. 0: Invalid 1: Valid (at mode 1) 2: Valid (at mode 2) Sets the fuser roller temperature to perform closed-loop control when 1 or 2 (valid) is set in 08-559. 0: 20C 1: 25C 2: 30C 3: 35C 4: 40C 5: 45C 6: 50C 7: 55C 8: 60C 9: 65C 10: 70C 11: 75C 12: 80C 13: 85C 14: 90C 15: 95C 16: 100C 17: 105C 18: 110C 19: 115C 20: 120C Sets the relative humidity difference to perform the closed-loop control when 1 or 2 (valid) is set in 08565. 0: 0% 1: 5% 2: 10% 3: 15% 4: 20% 5: 25% 6: 30% Sets the period of time unattended to perform closed-loop control when 1 or 2 (valid) is set in 08-566. Setting value x 1 (hour)

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 93

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 572 ClassifiItems cation Image Image quality closed-loop control control automatic start-up/ Setting of accumulated print volume Image control Image control Image control Image control User interface User interface User interface Image Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> ALL 10 M Sets the number of accumulated 1 (color) <0-30> print volume to perform closed-loop control when 1 or 2 (valid) is set in 08-567. Setting value x 100 (pages) Abnormality detection count ALL 0 M Counts the abnormality detection of 1 (Y) <0-16> image quality control. Accumulating Display/0 clearing total of [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40] ALL 0 M Counts the abnormality detection of 1 Abnormality detection count <0-16> (M) image quality control. Accumulating Display/0 clearing total of [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40] ALL 0 M Counts the abnormality detection of 1 Abnormality detection count <0-16> (C) image quality control. Accumulating Display/0 clearing total of [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40] ALL 0 M Counts the abnormality detection of 1 Abnormality detection count <0-16> (K) image quality control. Accumulating Display/0 clearing total of [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40] PPC 0 SYS 0: Text/Photo 1 Original mode priority 1: Text (color) <0-4> 2: Printed image 3: Photo 4: Map Density mode priority PPC 1 SYS 0: Automatic 1 (color) <0-1> 1: Manual (Center) Color mode priority SYS 0: Auto color 1: Black 1 PPC 1 (color) <0-2> 2: Full color Scanning operation switchSYS 0: Color/black (Automatic gamma 1 PPC 0 ing for calibration by user (Color) <0-1> adjustment (05-1642) is performed.) 1: Color (Automatic gamma adjustment (05-1643) is performed.) Gamma correction table all PRT SYS Clearing of the HDD area 3 clearing (color) EUR:0 SYS 0: OFF 1: ON 1 Screen setting for automatic ALL UC:1 energy saver/automatic JPN:1 power OFF <0-1> Setting for automatic ALL SYS 0: Invalid 1 0 duplexing mode 1: Single-sided to duplex copying <0-3> 2: Two-sided to duplex copying 3: User selection APS priority selection ALL 0 SYS 0: APS 1: AMS 2: None 1 <0-2> Centering printing of primary/ ALL SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 0 secondary scanning at AMS <0-1> PPC SYS 0: Continuous feeding 1 RADF mode priority 0 (by pressing the [START] key) <0-1> 1: Single feeding (by setting original on the tray)

573

574

575

576

585

587 588 595

597 602

Image User interface

603

User interface

604 605 607

User interface User interface User interface

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 94

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 609-0 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> 88 ALL SYS <0-255> ALL 108 SYS <0-255> 148 SYS <0-255> 178 SYS <0-255> 208 SYS <0-255> 1 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> EUR: FOLIO UC:COMP JPN:A5-R 6 <1-50> SYS 0: OFF (Not slow down) 1: ON to slow down SYS 0: Left page to right page 1: Right page to left page SYS 0: Not summer time 1: Summer time SYS Press the icon on the LCD to select the size. Contents
Procedure

609-1

609-2

609-3

609-4

610 611 612 613

Threshold of ACS "1" for ACS setting (08-268) setting "2" for ACS setting "3" for ACS setting "4" for ACS setting "5" for ACS setting User Key touch sound of control interface panel User Book type original priority interface General Summer time mode User Paper size selection for interface [OTHER] button

ALL

ALL

ALL

ALL PPC ALL PPC

1 1 1 9

614 615

Network Local I/F time-out period Mainte- Size information of main nance memory and page memory Counter Setting of twin color mode count in copier function as black mode User Print setting without departinterface ment code User Original size priority interface Paper Time lag before auto-start of feeding bypass feeding

ALL ALL

SYS SYS Confirms if the main memory and page memory are correctly recognized. SYS Counts the twin color copy as the black copy. 0: OFF 1: ON SYS 0: Printed 1: Not printed SYS 0: Same size originals 1: Mixed size originals SYS Sets the time taken to add paper feeding when paper in the bypass tray has run out during the bypass feed copying. 0: Paper is not drawn in unless the [START] button is pressed. 1-10: Setting value X 0.5sec. SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid SYS 0: Invalid SYS 0: Invalid SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1: Valid 1: Valid

1 2

616

PPC (color) ALL PPC ALL

0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 4 <0-10>

617 618 619

1 1 1

620 621 622 623

User interface User interface User interface User interface

Department management setting (Copier) Department management setting (FAX) Department management setting (Printer) Department management setting (Network scanner)

ALL ALL ALL ALL

1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1>

1 1 1 1

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 95

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 624 625 Classification User interface User interface Laser Items Department management setting (List print) Blank copying prevention mode during RADF jamming Outer guide elimination when paper size is not selected for a bypass feed printing Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> ALL 1 SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 <0-1> PPC SYS 0: OFF 1 0 1: ON (Start printing when the <0-1> scanning of each page is finished) PPC 1 SYS When a size is not selected for a 1 <0-1> bypass feed printing, 0: OFF (Outer guide not eliminated image printed in the largest size) 1: ON (Image printed with a standard width detected by the bypass guide) ALL 0 SYS 0: Not rotating 1 1: Rotating <0-1> PPC SYS 0: Automatic 1: Portrait 1 0 <0-2> 2: Landscape ALL SYS 0: Invalid 1 0 1: Valid <0-1> PPC SYS Sets the disclosing level of automatic 1 1 calibration. <0-2> 0: Service technician 1: Administrator 2: User ALL 0 SYS 0: Normal 1 <0-1> 1: Inner receiving tray PPC SYS 0: ON 1: OFF 1 0 <0-1> ALL EUR: 24 SYS 0: +12.0h 1: +11.5h 2: +11.0h UC: 40 3: +10.5h 4: +10.0h 5: 9.5h JPN: 6 6: +9.0h 7: +8.5h 8: +8.0h <0-47> 9: +7.5h 10: +7.0h 11: +6.5h 12: +6.0h 13: +5.5h 14: +5.0h 15: +4.5h 16: +4.0h 17: +3.5h 18: +3.0h 19: +2.5h 20: +2.0h 21: +1.5h 22: +1.0h 23: +0.5h 24: 0.0h 25:-0.5h 26: -1.0h 27: -1.5h 28: -2.0h 29: -2.5h 30: -3.0h 31: -3.5h 32: -4.0h 33: -4.5h 34: -5.0h 35: -5.5h 36: -6.0h 37: -6.5h 38: -7.0h 39: -7.5h 40: -8.0h 41: -8.5h 42: -9.0h 43: -9.5h 44: -10.0h 45: -10.5h 46: -11.0h 47: -11.5h EUR:1 SYS 0: YYYY.MM.DD. 1: DD.MM.YYYY UC:2 2: MM.DD.YYYY JPN:0 <0-2> SYS 0: Invalid 1: STAPLE 2 2:SORT 3: GROUP <0-4> 4: ALTERNATION 1

626

627 628 629 632

User interface User interface User interface User interface

Rotation printing at the nonsorting Direction priority of original image Department management printing counter Automatic calibration disclosure level

634 636

User interface User interface

638

Inner receiving tray priority at non-sort mode Width setting for image shift copying (linkage of front side and back side) General Time differences

640

User Date display format interface

PPCN

641

User Automatic sorting mode interface priority setting (RADF)

PPC

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 96

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 642 ClassifiItems cation User Sorter mode priority setting interface User Color 1 at twin color interface selection (Select what color black in original is copied) User Color 2 at twin color interface selection (Select what color black in original is copied) User Correction of reproduction interface ratio in editing copy Default Func- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion value> PPC 0 SYS 0: NON-SORT 1: STAPLE <0-4> 2: SORT 3: GROUP 4: ALTERNATION ALL 0 SYS 0: K 1: Y 2: M 3: C (color) <0-6> 4: R 5: G 6: B ALL (color) PPC 4 <0-6> 10 <0-10> SYS 0: K 4: R 1: Y 5: G 2: M 6: B 3: C
Procedure

643

644

645

646

User Image position in editing interface Rotation of paper direction for BOX printing User Returning finisher tray when interface printing is finished

PPC

0 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 0 <0-1>

647 648

ALL ALL

649 650 651

User interface User interface User interface

Magazine sort setting 2 in 1/4 in 1 page allocating order setting Printing format setting for date, time and page number

PPC PPC PPC

0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 2 <0-3>

SYS Sets the reproduction ratio for the X in 1 printing (including magazine sort) to the Reproduction ratio x Correction ratio. 0: 90% 1: 91% 2: 92% 3: 93% 4: 94% 5: 95% 6: 96% 7: 97% 8: 98% 9: 99% 10: 100% SYS Sets the page pasted position for X in 1 to the upper left corner/center. 0: Cornering 1: Centering SYS 0: Rotation OFF 1: Rotation ON SYS Sets whether or not returning the finisher tray to the 1-bin when printing is finished. 0: Not returned 1: Returned SYS 0: Left page to right page 1: Right page to left page SYS 0: Horizontal 1: Vertical SYS Hyphen Dropout
(with page number)(with date, time and page number)

1 1

1 1 1

652 653 657 658

User interface User interface User interface User interface

Cascade operation setting Cascade operation setting Direction priority for date and time stamp printing Auto-start setting for bypass feed printing

PPC PPC PPC PPC

0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>

0: OFF OFF 1: ON OFF 2: OFF ON 3: ON ON Note: Hyphen printing format ON: -1- OFF: 1 SYS 0: OFF 1: ON SYS 0: OFF 1: ON SYS 0: Short edge 1: Long edge SYS Sets whether or not feeding a paper automatically into the copier when it is placed on the bypass tray. 0: OFF (Press the [START] button to start feeding.) 1: ON (Automatical feeding)

1 1 1 1

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 97

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 659 ClassifiItems cation User Auto-start setting for bypass interface feed printing Default Func- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion value> SYS Sets whether or not feeding a paper PPC 1 <0-1> automatically into the copier when it is placed on the bypass tray. 0: OFF (Press the [START] button to start feeding.) 1: ON (Automatical feeding) ALL 0 SYS 0: Invalid <0-1> 1: Valid ALL SYS 0: Invalid 0 <0-1> 1: Valid ALL M/ Initializes all the adjustment modes SYS and the setting modes. ALL SYS Initializes system NVRAM area. ALL 0 <0-1> SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid SYS Initializing of the department management information * Enter the code with the digital keys and press the [INITIALIZE] button to perform the initialization. If the area storing the department management information is destroyed for some reason, Enter Department Code is displayed on the control panel even if the department management function is not set on. In this case, initialize the area with this code. This area is normally initialized at the factory. SYS 0: OFF (Not slow down) 1: ON to slow down SYS SYS
Procedure

660 661 665 669 671 672

Network Auto-forwarding setting of received FAX Network Auto-forwarding setting of received E-mail General M/SYS all clearing General System all clearing User Size indicator interface General Initialization of department management information

1 1 3 3 1 3

675-0 675-1 675-2

PPC low speed mode

675-3

675-4 676

Upper drawer Lower drawer PFP upper drawer PFP lower drawer LCF

PPC PPC PPC

0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>

4 4 4

PPC

SYS

PPC ALL

SYS SYS 0: OFF 1: ON

4 1

Bypass feed "SLOW" icon display

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 98

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 677-0 677-1 677-2 677-3 677-4 684 685 686 689 690 691 692 693 694 696 697 698 699 701 Classification Items PRT low speed mode Normal paper Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film Default Func- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion value> PRT 0 SYS 0: OFF (Not slow down) <0-1> 1: ON to slow down PRT SYS 0 <0-1> PRT SYS 0 <0-1> PRT SYS 0 <0-1> PRT SYS 0 <0-1> ALL SYS ALL ALL FAX ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL FAX 0 <0-1> <2> <0-2> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> SYS SYS SYS 0: Not subjected for APS judgment 1: Subjected for APS judgment SYS 2: Normal formatting SYS 0: Not formatted 1: Not used 2: Normal format SYS SYS SYS 0: Not installed 1: Installed 0: 128 bit 1: 64 bit
Procedure

4 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 1 5 2 1 3 3 2 1 3 3 1

General Rebuilding all data bases General Rebuilding all data bases related to address book General Rebuilding all data bases related to log FAX Adaptation of paper source priority selection General HDD formatting General HDD type display Mainte- Performing panel calibration nance General Initialization of NIC information General Performing HDD testing Scrambler board Scrambler board Scrambler board General FAX Installation of scrambler board (Option) Setting key code length for scrambler board Entering the key code for scrambler board Erasing all data in HDD Destination setting for facsimile

702

Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance function

ALL

EUR: 5 SYS 0: Japan 1: Asia UC: 4 2: Australia 3: Hong Kong JPN: 0 4: U.S.A. 5: Germany Other: 1 6: U.K. 7: Italy <0-25> 8: Belgium 9: Netherlands 10: Finland 11: Spain 12: Austria 13: Switzerland 14: Sweden 15: Denmark 16: Norway 17: Portugal 18: France 19: Greece 20: Poland 21: Hungary 22: Czech 23: Turkey 24: South Africa 25: Taiwan 2 SYS 0: Valid (Remote-controlled server) <0-2> 1: Valid (L2) 2: Invalid

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 99

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 703 ClassifiItems cation Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance HTTP server URL setting (Maximum 256 Bytes) Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance HTTP server Port number setting Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance HTTP initially-registered server URL setting (Maximum 256 Bytes) Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance HTTP initially-registered server Port number setting Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance lengthened polling interval Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance periodical polling timing (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute) Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance polling interval at emergency Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance response waiting time (Timeout) Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance initial registration Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance tentative password (Maximum 10 letters) Mainte- Status of remote-controlled nance service initial registration (Display only) Mainte- Service center call function nance Mainte- Service center call nance E-mail address setting (Maximum 192 letters) Mainte- Service center call nance HTTP server URL setting (Maximum 256 letters) Mainte- Service center call nance HTTP server port number setting Mainte- HTTP proxy setting nance Mainte- HTTP proxy IP address nance setting (xxx xxx xxx xxx) Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL SYS Contents
Procedure

11

704

ALL

0 SYS <0-9999> SYS

707

ALL

11

708

ALL

0 SYS <0-9999>

711 715

ALL ALL

2 <0-2> -

SYS 0: Valid (Once a month) 1: Valid (Once a week) 2: Invalid SYS

1 1

716 717

ALL ALL

0 <0-1> 3 <1-30> 0 <0-1> -

SYS 0: Invalid SYS Unit: Minute

1: Valid

1 1

718 719

ALL ALL

SYS 0: OFF 1: Start SYS

1 11

720

ALL

0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> -

SYS 0: Not registered 1: Registered SYS 0: OFF 1: By HTTP SYS

721 722

ALL ALL

1 11

723

ALL

SYS

11

724

ALL

0 SYS <0-9999> 1 <0-1> SYS 0: Valid 1: Invalid SYS

726 727

ALL ALL

1 11

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 100

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 728 729 730 Classification Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> 0 SYS ALL <0-9999> ALL SYS ALL SYS Contents
Procedure

731 732

HTTP proxy port number setting HTTP proxy ID setting (Maximum 30 letters) HTTP proxy password setting (Maximum 30 letters) Mainte- HTTP proxy panel display nance Mainte- Automatic ordering function nance of supplies

1 11 11

ALL ALL

1 <0-1> 3 <0-3>

SYS 0: Valid 1: Invalid SYS 0: Ordered by FAX 1: Ordered by E-mail 2: Ordered by HTTP 3: OFF SYS Enter hyphen with the [Pause] button

1 1

733

734

735

736

738

739

740

741

742

Mainte- Automatic ordering function nance of supplies FAX number (Maximum 16 digits) Mainte- Automatic ordering function nance of supplies E-mail address (Maximum 192 letters) Mainte- Automatic ordering function nance of supplies HTTP server URL setting (Maximum 256 letters) Mainte- Automatic ordering function nance of supplies HTTP server port number setting Mainte- Automatic ordering function nance of supplies User's name (Maximum 50 letters) Mainte- Automatic ordering function nance of supplies User's telephone number (Maximum 32 letters) Mainte- Automatic ordering function nance of supplies User's E-mail address (Maximum 192 letters) Mainte- Automatic ordering function nance of supplies User's address (Maximum 100 letters) Mainte- Automatic ordering function nance of supplies Service number (Maximum 5 digits)

ALL

11

ALL

SYS List: 256 digits

11

ALL

SYS

11

ALL

0 SYS <0-9999>

ALL

SYS

11

ALL

SYS Enter hyphen with the [Pause] button

11

ALL

SYS List: 256 digits

11

ALL

SYS

11

ALL

0 SYS <5 digits>

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 101

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 743 Default ProceClassifiFunc- <Acceptable RAM Items Contents cation tion dure value> Mainte- Automatic ordering function SYS 11 ALL nance of supplies Service technician's name (Maximum 50 letters) Mainte- Automatic ordering function ALL SYS Enter hyphen with the [Pause] button 11 nance of supplies Service technician's telephone number (Maximum 32 digits) Mainte- Automatic ordering function ALL SYS List: 256 digits 11 nance of supplies Service technician's E-mail address (Maximum 192 letters) Mainte- Automatic ordering function ALL SYS 11 nance of supplies Supplier's name (Maximum 50 letters) Mainte- Automatic ordering function ALL SYS 11 nance of supplies Supplier's address (Maximum 100 letters) Mainte- Automatic ordering function ALL SYS 11 nance of supplies Notes (Maximum 200 letters) Mainte- Information about supplies ALL SYS 11 nance Part number of toner cartridge C (Maximum 20 digits) Mainte- Information about supplies ALL 1 SYS 1 nance Order quantity of toner <1-99> cartridge C Mainte- Information about supplies ALL 1 SYS 1 nance Stock quantity of toner <1-99> cartridge C Mainte- Information about supplies ALL SYS 11 nance Part number of toner cartridge M (Maximum 20 digits) Mainte- Information about supplies ALL 1 SYS 1 nance Order quantity of toner <1-99> cartridge M Mainte- Information about supplies ALL 1 SYS 1 nance Stock quantity of toner <1-99> cartridge M Mainte- Information about supplies ALL SYS 11 nance Part number of toner cartridge Y (Maximum 20 digits) Mainte- Information about supplies ALL 1 SYS 1 nance Order quantity of toner <1-99> cartridge Y

744

745

746

747

748

749

750

751

752

753

754

755

756

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 102

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 757 ClassifiItems cation Mainte- Information about supplies nance Stock quantity of toner cartridge Y Mainte- Information about supplies nance Part number of toner cartridge K (Maximum 20 digits) Mainte- Information about supplies nance Order quantity of toner cartridge K Mainte- Information about supplies nance Stock quantity of toner cartridge K Mainte- Information about supplies nance Part number of toner bag (Maximum 20 digits) Mainte- Information about supplies nance Order quantity of toner bag Mainte- Information about supplies nance Stock quantity of toner bag Mainte- Automatic ordering supplies nance Result table printout Mainte- Automatic ordering supplies nance Display Mainte- Reset of service NVRAM nance Area reset of UTY service NVRAM Mainte- Notification setting nance Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> 1 SYS ALL <1-99> ALL SYS Contents
Procedure

758

11

759

ALL

1 <1-99> 1 <1-99> -

SYS

760

ALL

SYS

761

ALL

SYS

11

762 763 764 765

ALL ALL ALL ALL

1 <1-99> 1 <1-99> 1 <0-2> 2 <0-2> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>

SYS SYS SYS 0: OFF 1: Always 2: ON Error SYS 0: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX) 1: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX/HTTP) 2: Invalid SYS 0: Default 1: Reset

1 1 1 1

766

ALL

767

ALL

768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776

Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance

Destination E-mail address (Maximum 192 letters) Total counter information transmission setting Total counter transmission interval setting (1 to 31 days) PM counter notification setting Dealer's name (Maximum 100 letters) Login name (Maximum 20 letters) Setting of notification display Sending or not sending error history of copier Setting total counter transmission interval (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute)

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

0 <0-1> 1 <1-31> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> -

SYS Enables to set up to 3 E-mail addresses to be sent. (08-768, 777, 778) 0: Invalid 1: Valid SYS SYS 0: Invalid SYS SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1: Valid

11 1 1 1 11 11 1 1 1

SYS Needed at initial registration SYS Needed at initial registration SYS 0: Invalid SYS 0: Invalid SYS 1: Valid 1: Valid

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 103

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 777 778 779 780 Classification Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Items Destination E-mail address 2 (Maximum 192 letters) Destination E-mail address 3 (Maximum 192 letters) Notification format selection Remote-controlled service polling day selection Day-1 Remote-controlled service polling day selection Day-2 Remote-controlled service polling day selection Day-3 Remote-controlled service polling day selection Day-4 Remote-controlled service polling day selection Sunday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Monday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Tuesday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Wednesday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Thursday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Friday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Saturday Information of supplies setting of toner cartridge C Information of supplies setting of toner cartridge M Information of supplies setting of toner cartridge Y Information of supplies setting of toner cartridge K Information of supplies setting of toner bag Remote-controlled service lengthened interval polling (End of month) Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL SYS ALL ALL ALL 0 <0-1> 0 <0-31> 0 <0-31> 0 <0-31> 0 <0-31> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> SYS SYS 0: Text 1: Text + XML data SYS 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month SYS 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month SYS 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month SYS 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid Contents
Procedure

11 11 1 1

781

ALL

782

ALL

783

ALL

784

ALL

785

ALL

SYS 0: Invalid

1: Valid

786

ALL

SYS 0: Invalid

1: Valid

787

ALL

SYS 0: Invalid

1: Valid

788

ALL

SYS 0: Invalid

1: Valid

789

ALL

SYS 0: Invalid

1: Valid

790

ALL

SYS 0: Invalid

1: Valid

791 792 793 794 795 796

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

SYS 0: Invalid SYS 0: Invalid SYS 0: Invalid SYS 0: Invalid SYS 0: Invalid SYS 0: Invalid

1: Valid 1: Valid 1: Valid 1: Valid 1: Valid 1: Valid

1 1 1 1 1 1

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 104

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (08)


Classification Mainte797 nance 810 Image control 823-0 Development 823-1 Code 823-2 Items Firmware download Transfer bias correction table setting Color auto-toner Y sensor/light amount correction M voltage abnormal detection C Y M C Y M C Y M C Upper limit Lower limit Upper limit Lower limit Upper limit Lower limit Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL 0 SYS <0-1> ALL M 1 <1-3> ALL M 0 (color) <0-1> M ALL 0 (color) <0-1> M ALL 0 (color) <0-1> M ALL 0 (color) <0-1> M ALL 0 (color) <0-1> M ALL 0 (color) <0-1> ALL 0 M (color) <0-1> ALL 0 M (color) <0-1> ALL 0 M (color) <0-1> ALL 0 M (color) <0-1> ALL 0 M (color) <0-1> ALL 0 M (color) <0-1> ALL 20 M (color) <0-1023> ALL 0 M (color) <0-1023> ALL 205 M (color) <0-255> ALL (color) 40 <0-255> M Contents 0: Accepted 1: Prohibited
Procedure

1 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

1 : TYPE1 2 : TYPE2 3 : TYPE3 Displays 1 when the abnormal output voltage is detected for the color auto-toner sensor light amount correction. ([CF40] error) 0: Normal 1: Abnormality detected Displays 1 when the abnormal toner density detection voltage is detected. ([CF20] error) 0: Normal 1: Abnormality detected Becomes 1 when detecting the toner empty. 0: Normal 1: Empty detected

824-0 Develop- Color auto-toner ment sensor/toner density detection 824-1 voltage abnormal detection 824-2 858-0 Develop- Toner empty ment detection 858-1 858-2 859-0 Develop- Color toner forced ment supply level display 859-1 859-2 860-0 Develop- Color auto-toner ment sensor/proper range setting of 860-1 OFF level voltage 861-0 Develop- Color auto-toner ment sensor/proper range setting of standard light 861-1 amount voltage 862-0 Develop- Color auto-toner ment sensor/proper range setting of reference plate 862-1 output

Becomes 1 when the toner density decreases and it is judged forced toner supply is needed. 0: Normal level 1: Forced supply level Sets the range for judging whether the sensor output value when the sensor light source is OFF is correct or not. Sets the range for judging whether the adjustment result of sensor light amount is correct or not.

4 4 4 4 4 4

ALL 820 (color) <0-1023> ALL 205 (color) <0-1023> ALL 400 (color) <0-1023> ALL 155 (color) <0-1023> ALL (color) <0-1023>

Sets the range for judging whether the sensor output value for the reference plate is correct or not.

Upper 863-0 Develop- Color auto-toner limit ment sensor/proper Lower range setting of 863-1 developer output limit 864 Develop- Color auto-toner sensor/ ment sensor OFF output value display at power ON

M M M

Sets the range for judging whether the sensor output value for the sleeve is correct or not. Displays the sensor output value when the sensor light source is OFF at power ON.

4 4 2

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 105

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 865 ClassifiItems cation Devel- Color auto-toner sensor/ opment reference plate output value display at power ON Devel- Color auto-toner Upper opment sensor/abnormal limit detection potential Lower difference setting limit of reference plate output Devel- Color auto-toner control opment environment and life light amount correction setting Devel- Color auto-toner adjustment opment finishing range setting Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> 2 ALL M Displays the sensor output value with (color) <0-1023> the standard light amount for the reference plate at power ON. ALL 820 M Sets the range for judging whether 4 (color) <0-1023> the difference between the sensor output when the sensor light source ALL 205 M is OFF and the sensor output for the 4 (color) <0-1023> reference plate is correct or not. ALL (color) 0 <0-1> M Sets whether the sensor light amount is corrected or not depending on the environment and life. 0: Correction 1: No correction Sets the difference from the target value for judging whether the color auto-toner adjustment finishes correctly or not. Sets the difference from the target value for judging whether the light amount correction finishes correctly or not. Sets the number of times of continuous error detection before the light amount correction abnormality is displayed. Displays the number of times of the reference plate detection error for the environment and life light amount correction. Displays the number of times of the light amount control voltage adjustment error for the environment and life light amount correction. 1

866-0

866-1

867

868

ALL (color)

4 <0-255>

869

870

871

872

873-0 873-1 873-2 874

Devel- Color auto-toner control opment environment and life light amount correction/correction finishing range setting Devel- Color auto-toner sensor/ opment setting of number of times of error detection at light amount correction Devel- Color auto-toner control opment environment and life light amount correction/display of number of times of reference plate detection error Devel- Color auto-toner control opment environment and life light amount correction/display of number of times of light amount control voltage adjutsment error Devel- Color auto-toner Y opment control/developer initial output M setting C Devel- Color developer life correcopment tion

ALL (color)

5 <0-255>

ALL (color)

3 <0-255>

ALL (color)

0 <0-255>

ALL (color)

0 <0-255>

ALL 256 (color) <0-1023> ALL 256 (color) <0-1023> ALL 256 (color) <0-1023> ALL 0 (color) <0-1>

M M M M

Sets the initial developer output target value.

4 4 4

Sets whether the toner density detection voltage correction is performed or not depending on the developer life in the color auto-toner control. 0: Corrected 1: Not corrected

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 106

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (08)


ClassifiItems cation 875-0 Develop- Color developer ment life correction value (segment 0) 875-1 Code 875-2 876-0 Develop- Color developer ment life correction value (segment 1) 876-1 876-2 877-0 Develop- Color developer ment life correction value (segment 2) 877-1 877-2 878-0 Develop- Color developer ment life correction value (segment 3) 878-1 878-2 879-0 Develop- Color developer ment life correction value (segment 4) 879-1 879-2 880-0 Develop- Color developer ment life correction value (segment 5) 880-1 880-2 881-0 Develop- Color developer ment life correction value (segment 6) 881-1 881-2 900 903 905 907 908 Version System firmware ROM version Version Printer ROM version Version Scanner ROM version Version RADF ROM version Version Finisher ROM version Function ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL Default
<Acceptable value>

RAM M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M -

Contents Sets the correction amount of the toner density detection voltage depending on the developer life. In this code, the life count within 0-2000 is set as the correction amount. Sets the correction amount of the toner density detection voltage depending on the developer life. In this code, the life count within 20015000 is set as the correction amount. Sets the correction amount of the toner density detection voltage depending on the developer life. In this code, the life count within 500110000 is set as the correction amount. Sets the correction amount of the toner density detection voltage depending on the developer life. In this code, the life count within 1000120000 is set as the correction amount. Sets the correction amount of the toner density detection voltage depending on the developer life. In this code, the life count within 2000130000 is set as the correction amount. Sets the correction amount of the toner density detection voltage depending on the developer life. In this code, the life count within 3000137500 is set as the correction amount. Sets the correction amount of the toner density detection voltage depending on the developer life. In this code, the life count 37501 or more is set as the correction amount. JPN: T350SJXXX UC, EUR, Others: T350SUXXX 350M-XXX 350S-XXX DF-XXX SDL-XXX FIN-XXX

Procedure

Y M C Y M C Y M C Y M C Y M C Y M C Y M C

0 <-512-511> 0 <-512-511> 0 <-512-511> -4 <-512-511> -2 <-512-511> -2 <-512-511> -8 <-512-511> -4 <-512-511> -4 <-512-511> -12 <-512-511> -6 <-512-511> -6 <-512-511> -16 <-512-511> -8 <-512-511> -8 <-512-511> -20 <-512-511> -10 <-512-511> -10 <-512-511> -24 <-512-511> -12 <-512-511> -12 <-512-511> -

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 107

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 915 916 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 995 ClassifiItems cation Version Fax board ROM version Version NIC board ROM version Version FROM basic section software version Version FROM internal program Version UI data fixed section version Version UI data common section version Version Version of UI data language 1 in HDD Version Version of UI data language 2 in HDD Version Version of UI data language 3 in HDD Version Version of UI data language 4 in HDD Version Version of UI data language 5 in HDD Version Version of UI data language 6 in HDD Version Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power-ON Version Version of UI data language 7 in HDD Mainte- Copier number (serial nance number) display Mainte- FSMS total counter nance Network Reset of NIC board Network Selection of NIC board status information Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> FAX - F562-XXX ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL X.XXX VX.X/X.X VXXX.XXX VXXX.XXX VXXX.XXX VXXX.XXX VXXX.XXX VXXX.XXX VXXX.XXX VXXX.XXX VXXX.XXX VXXX.XXX VXXX.XXX Contents
Procedure

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 11

999 1001 1002

ALL ALL ALL

1003 1004

Network Speed setting of Ethernet Network NIC Web password (Maximum 32 letters) Not scannable Network Availability of IP Network Method of IP addressing Network Domain name (Maximum 96 letters)

ALL ALL

0 SYS This code can be also keyed in from <10 digits> the adjustment mode (05-976). 10 digits 0 SYS Refers to values of total counter <8 digits> NIC 1: Cold 2: Warm 3: No reset 3 <1-3> NIC 1: Not printed out when the copier is 1 restarted <1-2> 2: Printed out when the copier is restarted 3 NIC 1: 10 MBPS 2: 100 MBPS <1-3> 3: Automatic NIC Writing only -

1 12 12

12 12

1005 1006 1007

ALL ALL ALL

1 <1-2> 2 <1-2> -

NIC 1: Available

2: Not available

12 12 12

NIC 1: Unchanging 2: Automatic addressing (DHCP) NIC

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 108

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 1008 Classification Network IP address Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL 000/000/ 000/000 <000-255/ 000-255/ 000-255/ 000-255> 000/000/ 000/000 <000-255/ 000-255/ 000-255/ 000-255> 000/000/ 000/000 <000-255/ 000-255/ 000-255/ 000-255> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-5> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> NIC Contents
Procedure

12

1009

Network Subnet mask

ALL

NIC

12

1010

Network Gateway

ALL

NIC

12

1011 1012

Network Availability of IPX Network Network frame type

ALL ALL

NIC 1: Available NIC 1: Automatic 3: Ethernet II 5: ieee802.2 NIC 1: Available NIC 1: Available

2: Not available 2: ieee802.3 4: ieee802.3 SNAP 2: Not available 2: Not available

12 12

1013 1014 1015

Network Availability of NCP Burst Network Availability of Apple Talk Network Zone setting of Apple Talk (Maximum 32 letters) is displayed as a default value Network Availability of LDAP Network Availability of DNS Network IP address to DNS server (Primary)

ALL ALL ALL

12 12 12

NIC : Wildcard character

1016 1017 1018

ALL ALL ALL

1019

Network IP address to DNS server (Secondary)

ALL

1020

Network DDNS Desired level

ALL

1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 000/000/ 000/000 <000-255/ 000-255/ 000-255/ 000-255> 000/000/ 000/000 <000-255/ 000-255/ 000-255/ 000-255> 1 <1-5> 1 <1-2>

NIC 1: Available NIC 1: Available NIC

2: Not available 2: Not available

12 12 12

NIC

12

1021

Network Availability of SLP

ALL

NIC 1: Invalid 2: Via DHCP 3: Insecure DDNS 4: Secure DDNS 5: Multi-secure DDNS NIC 1: Available 2: Not available

12

12

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 109

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 1023 1024 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL ALL NIC NIC Contents
Procedure

1025

1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035

Network NetBios name (Maximum 16 letters) Network Name of WINS server or IP address (Primary/Maximum 128 letters) Network Name of WINS server or IP address(Secondary / Maximum 128 letters) Network Availability of Bindery Network Availability of NDS Network Directory service context (Maximum 127 letters) Network Directory service tree (Maximum 47 letters) Network Availability of HTTP server Network Port number to NIC HTTP server Network Port number to system HTTP server Network Availability of NIC HTTP client Network TCP port number to Controller HTTP client Network IP address to HTTP server (Primary)

12 12

ALL

NIC

12

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 80 <1-65535> 8080 <1-65535> 1 <1-2> 80 <1-65535> 000/000/ 000/000 <000-255/ 000-255/ 000-255/ 000-255> 1 <1-2> -

NIC 1: Available NIC 1: Available NIC NIC NIC 1: Available NIC SYS UTY 1: Available NIC SYS NIC

2: Not available 2: Not available

12 12 12 12

2: Not available

12 12 1

2: Not available

12 1 12

1037 1038

Network Availability of SMTP client Network FQDN or IP address to SMTP server (Maximum 128 Bytes) Network TCP port number of SMTP client Network Availability of SMTP server Network TCP port number of SMTP server Network E-mail box name to SMTP server (Maximum 192 letters) Network Availability of Offramp Network Offramp security Network Printing at Offramp

ALL ALL

NIC 1: Available NIC

2: Not available

12 12

1039 1040 1041 1042

ALL ALL ALL ALL

25 <1-65535> 1 <1-2> 25 <1-65535> -

NIC SYS 1: Available SYS SYS 2: Not available

12 12 12 12

1043 1044 1045

ALL ALL ALL

2 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2>

SYS 1: Available SYS 1: Available SYS 1: Available

2: Not available 2: Not available 2: Not available

12 12 12

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 110

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 1046 1047 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL ALL 1 <1-2> NIC 1: Available NIC Contents 2: Not available
Procedure

Network Availability of POP3 clients Network FQDN or IP address to POP3 server (Maximum 128 Bytes) Network Types of POP3 server Network Login name to POP3 server (Maximum 32 letters) Network Login password to POP3 (Maximum 32 letters) Network E-mail reception interval (Unit: Minute) Network TCP port number of POP3 client Network Availability of FTP client Network FQDN or IP address to FTP server (Maximum 128 letters) Network TCP port number of FTP client Network Data port number of FTP client Network Login name to FTP server (Maximum 31 letters) Network Login password to FTP server (Maximum 31 letters) Network Availability of FTP server Network TCP port number of FTP server Network Login name to FTP client (Maximum 31 letters) Network Login password to FTP client (Maximum 31 letters) Network MIB function Network Setting of read Community (Maximum 31 letters) Network Setting of read/Write Community (Maximum 31 letters) Network Authentication TRAP function Network ALERTS TRAP function

12 12

1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

1 <1-3> 5 <0-4096> 110 <1-65535> 1 <1-2> -

NIC 1: Automatic 3: apop NIC NIC NIC NIC NIC 1: Available NIC

2: pop3

12 12 12 12 12

2: Not available

12 12

1055 1056 1057 1058

ALL ALL ALL ALL

21 SYS <1-65535> SYS 0 <0-65535> SYS SYS

12 12 11 11

1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1065 1066

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

1 NIC 1: Available <1-2> SYS 21 <1-65535> SYS 1 <1-2> public private SYS NIC 1: Valid 2: Invalid NIC NIC

2: Not available

12 12 11 11 12 12 12

1067 1068

ALL ALL

1 <1-2> 1 <1-2>

NIC 1: Valid 2: Invalid NIC 1: Valid 2: Invalid

12 12

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 111

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 1069 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL 000/000/ NIC 000/000 <000-255/ 000-255/ 000-255/ 000-255> NIC public Contents
Procedure

Network TRAP destination IP address

12

1070

1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093

Network Community setting of TRAP (via IP) (Maximum 31 letters) Network Availability of Raw/TCP Network TCP port number of Raw Network Availability of LPD client Network TCP port number of LPD Network LPD queue name (Maximum 31 letters) Network Availability of IPP Network Availability of IPP port number 80 Network TCP port number of IPP Network IPP printer name (Maximum 127 letters) Network IPP printer location (Maximum 127 letters) Network IPP printer information (Maximum 127 letters) Network IPP printer information (more) (Maximum 127 letters) Network Installer of IPP printer driver (Maximum 127 letters) Network IPP printer Make and Model (Maximum 127 letters) Network IPP printer information (more) MFGR (Maximum 127 letters) Network IPP message from operator (Maximum 127 letters) Network Availability of FTP print Network Printer user name of FTP (Maximum 31 letters) Network Printer user password of FTP (Maximum 31 letters) Network TCP port number to FTP print server Network Login name to Novell print server (Maximum 47 letters)

ALL

12

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

1 <1-2> 9100 <1-65535> 1 <1-2> 515 <1-65535> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 631 <1-65535> 1 <1-2> print -

NIC 1: Valid 2: Invalid NIC NIC 1: Valid 2: Invalid NIC NIC NIC 1: Valid 2: Invalid NIC 1: Valid 2: Invalid NIC NIC NIC NIC NIC NIC NIC NIC NIC NIC 1: Available NIC NIC 2: Not available

12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

21 NIC <1-65535> NIC -

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 112

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 1094 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL NIC Contents
Procedure

1095 1096 1370

Network Login password to Novell print server (Maximum 31 letters) Network Name of Search Root server (Maximum 31 letters) Network Scan rate setting of print queue Image Image quality control time process- accumulating counter ing Image Heater and energizing time process- accumulating counter ing Display/0 clearing

12

ALL ALL ALL

NIC

12 12 1

1372

ALL

1378

Image Fuser roller ready process- temperature time ing accumulating counter

ALL

1380

Image Fuser roller printing process- temperature time ing accumulating counter

ALL

1382

Image Fuser roller energy saving process- temperature time ing accumulating counter Display/0 clearing

ALL

1385

Image Number of output pages process- (Thick paper 1) ing

ALL

1386

Image Number of output pages process- (Thick paper 2) ing

ALL

1387

Image Number of output pages process- (Thick paper 3) ing

ALL

5 NIC Unit: Second <0-255> M Counts driving count of the drum 0 (image quality control time). <8 digits> Counts up when drum motor and image quality control are ON. 0 M Counts up the heater control time <8 digits> accumulated (when power of the copier is ON) but does not count at energy saving mode. When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. 0 M Counts up the heater control time <8 digits> accumulated (on standby). When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. 0 M Counts up the heater control time <8 digits> accumulated (during printing). When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. 0 M Counts up the heater control time <8 digits> accumulated (at energy saving mode). When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. 0 M Counts up when the registration <8 digits> sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. 0 M Counts up when the registration <8 digits> sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. 0 M Counts up when the registration <8 digits> sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 113

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Adjustment mode (08)


Code 1388 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL 0 <8 digits> M Contents Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Does not count up when cleaning is invalid. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the upper drawer. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the lower drawer. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the PFP upper drawer. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the PFP lower drawer. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the bypass tray. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the LCF. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the upper drawer. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the lower drawer. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the PFP upper drawer. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the PFP lower drawer. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the bypass tray. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the LCF.
Procedure

Image Number of output pages process- (OHP film) ing

1389 1390 1391 1392

Main charger Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding

Main charger wire cleaning counter display/0 clearing Feeding retry counter (upper drawer) Feeding retry counter (lower drawer) Feeding retry counter (PFP upper drawer)

ALL ALL ALL ALL

0 <5 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>

M M M M

1 1 1 1

1393

Paper Feeding retry counter (PFP feeding lower drawer) Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Feeding retry counter (bypass feed) Feeding retry counter (LCF) Feeding retry counter setting value (upper drawer) Feeding retry counter setting value (lower drawer) Feeding retry counter setting value (PFP upper drawer)

ALL

1394 1395 1396 1397 1398

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

M M M M M

1 1 1 1 1

1399

Paper Feeding retry counter setting feeding value (PFP lower drawer) Paper feeding Paper feeding Feeding retry counter setting value (bypass feed) Feeding retry counter setting value (LCF)

ALL

1400 1401

ALL ALL

M M

1 1

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 114

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

<<Pixel counter related code>> (

Chapter 2.2.6)

Note: In the pixel counter function, the twin color copy mode is regarded as the full color mode.
Setting mode (08)
Code 1500 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL EUR: 0 UC: 1 JPN: 1 Contents
Procedure

Pixel Standard paper size setting counter Pixel Pixel counter all clearing counter Pixel Service technician reference counter counter clearing Pixel Toner cartridge reference counter counter clearing Pixel Pixel counter display setting counter Pixel Displayed reference setting counter

1501 1502

ALL ALL

1503

ALL

1504

ALL

0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>

1505

ALL

1509

Pixel Pixel counter clear flag/ counter Service technician reference Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Service technician reference cleared date Toner cartridge reference cleared date (Y) Toner cartridge reference cleared date (M) Toner cartridge reference cleared date (C) Toner cartridge reference cleared date (K) Toner cartridge reference count started date (Y) Toner cartridge reference count started date (M) Toner cartridge reference count started date (C) Toner cartridge reference count started date (K) Number of output pages/full color (Service technician reference)

ALL

0 <0-1> -

SYS Selects the standard paper size to convert it into the pixel count (%). 0: A4 1: LT SYS Clears all information related to the pixel counter. SYS Clears all information related to the service technician reference pixel counter. SYS Clears all information related to the toner cartridge reference pixel counter. SYS Selects whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen. 0: Displayed 1: Not displayed SYS Selects the reference when displaying the pixel counter on the LCD screen. 0: Service technician reference 1: Toner cartridge reference SYS Becomes 1 when 08-1502 is performed.

3 3

1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1547

ALL ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL PPC (color)

SYS Displays the date on which 08-1502 was performed. SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the copy function, full color mode and service technician reference. [Unit. page]

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 115

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Setting mode (08)


Code 1548 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> Contents
Procedure

Pixel Number of output pages/ counter black (Service technician reference)

1549

Pixel Number of output pages/full counter color (Service technician reference)

1550

Pixel Number of output pages/ counter black (Service technician reference)

1551

Pixel Number of output pages/ counter black (Service technician reference)

1552

Pixel Number of output pages/full counter color (K) (Toner cartridge reference)

1553

Pixel Number of output pages/ counter black (Toner cartridge reference)

1554

Pixel Number of output pages/full counter color (K) (Toner cartridge reference)

1555

Pixel Number of output pages/ counter black (Toner cartridge reference)

1556

Pixel Number of output pages/ counter black (Toner cartridge reference)

1557

Pixel Number of output pages/full counter color (Y) (Toner cartridge reference)

PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages (black) converted to the standard paper size in the copy function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit. page] PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages (color) converted to the standard paper size in the printer function, full color mode and service technician reference. [Unit. page] PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages (black) converted to the standard paper size in the printer function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit. page] FAX <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages (black) converted to the standard paper size in the FAX function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit. page] PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages (color) converted to the standard paper size in the copy function, full color mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages (black) converted to the standard paper size in the copy function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages (color) converted to the standard paper size in the printer function, full color mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages (black) converted to the standard paper size in the printer function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] FAX <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages (black) converted to the standard paper size in the FAX function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages (color) converted to the standard paper size in the copy function, full color mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page]

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 116

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Setting mode (08)


Code 1558 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> Contents
Procedure

Pixel Number of output pages/full counter color (Y) (Toner cartridge reference)

1559

Pixel Number of output pages/full counter color (M) (Toner cartridge reference)

1560

Pixel Number of output pages/full counter color (M) (Toner cartridge reference)

1561

Pixel Number of output pages/full counter color (C) (Toner cartridge reference)

1562

Pixel Number of output pages/full counter color (C) (Toner cartridge reference)

1563 1564 1565 1566 1577

Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter

Toner cartridge Y replacement counter Toner cartridge M replacement counter Toner cartridge C replacement counter Toner cartridge K replacement counter Average pixel count/full color (Y+M+C+K) (Service technician reference)

1578

Pixel Average pixel count/full color counter (Y) (Service technician reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full color counter (M) (Service technician reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full color counter (C) (Service technician reference)

1579

1580

PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages (color) converted to the standard paper size in the printer function, full color mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages (color) converted to the standard paper size in the copy function, full color mode, toner M and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages (color) converted to the standard paper size in the printer function, full color mode, toner M and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages (color) converted to the standard paper size in the copy function, full color mode, toner C and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages (color) converted to the standard paper size in the printer function, full color mode, toner C and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] ALL <3 digits> SYS Counts the number of time of the (color) toner cartridge Y replacement. ALL <3 digits> SYS Counts the number of time of the (color) toner cartridge M replacement. ALL <3 digits> SYS Counts the number of time of the (color) toner cartridge C replacement. ALL <3 digits> SYS Counts the number of time of the toner cartridge K replacement. PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, all toner and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, toner Y and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, toner M and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, toner C and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%]

2 2 2 2 2

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 117

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Setting mode (08)


Code 1581 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> Contents
Procedure

1582

1583

1584

1585

1586

1587

1588

1589

1590

1591

1592

1593

Pixel Average pixel count/full color PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (K) (Service technician (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, reference) toner K and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (Y+M+C+K) (Service (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, technician reference) all toner and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (Y) (Service technician (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, reference) toner Y and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (M) (Service technician (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, reference) toner M and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (C) (Service technician (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, reference) toner C and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (K) (Service technician (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, reference) toner K and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PPC+ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (Y+M+C+K) (Service PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color technician reference) (color) mode, all toner and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PPC+ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (Y) (Service technician PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color reference) (color) mode, toner Y and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PPC+ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (M) (Service technician PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color reference) (color) mode, toner M and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PPC+ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (C) (Service technician PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color reference) (color) mode, toner C and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PPC+ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (K) (Service technician PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color reference) (color) mode, toner K and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/black PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (Service technician refer(black) <0-10000> the copy function, black mode and ence) service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/black PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (Service technician refer(black) <0-10000> the printer function, black mode and ence) service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%]

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 118

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Setting mode (08)


Code 1594 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> Contents
Procedure

Pixel Average pixel count/black counter (Service technician reference) Pixel Average pixel count/black counter (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (Y+M+C+K) (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (Y) (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (M) (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (C) (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (K) (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (Y+M+C+K) (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (Y) (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (M) (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (C) (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (K) (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/black counter (Service technician reference)

1595

1596

1597

1598

1599

1600

1601

1602

1603

1604

1605

1606

FAX 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (black) <0-10000> the FAX function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC+ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in PRT+ <0-10000> the copy/printer/FAX function, black FAX mode and service technician (black) reference. [Unit: 0.01%] 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the PPC (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, all toner and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner Y and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner M and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner C and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner K and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, all toner and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner Y and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner M and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner C and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner K and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (black) <0-10000> copy function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%]

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 119

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Setting mode (08)


Code 1607 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> Contents
Procedure

Pixel Latest pixel count/black counter (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/black counter (Service technician reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (Y) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (M) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (C) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (K) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/black counter (Toner cartridge reference)

1608

1609

1610

1611

1612

1613

1614

Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color+black (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (Y) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (M) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (C) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (K) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/black counter (Toner cartridge reference)

1615

1616

1617

1618

1619

PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (black) <0-10000> printer function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] FAX 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (black) <0-10000> FAX function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, toner M and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, toner C and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (black) <0-10000> the copy function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color/black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, toner M and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, toner C and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (black) <0-10000> the printer function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%]

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 120

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Setting mode (08)


Code 1620 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> Contents
Procedure

Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color+black (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (Y) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (M) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (C) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (K)+black (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/black counter (Toner cartridge reference)

1621

1622

1623

1624

1625

1626

Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (Y) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (M) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (C) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (K) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (Y) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (M) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (C) (Toner cartridge reference)

1627

1628

1629

1630

1631

1632

PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color/black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC+ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color (color) mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC+ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color (color) mode, toner M and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC+ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color (color) mode, toner C and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC+ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in PRT+ <0-10000> the copy/printer/FAX function, black FAX mode and toner cartridge reference. (color) [Unit: 0.01%] 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in FAX (black) <0-10000> the FAX function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner M and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner C and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner M and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner C and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%]

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 121

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Setting mode (08)


Code 1633 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> Contents
Procedure

Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (K) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/black counter (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/black counter (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/black counter (Toner cartridge reference)

1634

1639

1640

Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (Y) 1641-1 1641-0 1641-2 1641-3 1641-4 1641-5 1641-6 1641-7 1641-8 1641-9

0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1-100%

PRT SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the 0 (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] FAX 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (black) <0-10000> FAX function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (black) <0-10000> copy function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (black) <0-10000> printer function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into (color) 10 ranges. The number of output PPC <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In (color) this code, the distributions in the PPC <8 digits> SYS copy function, full color mode and (color) toner Y are displayed. [Unit: page] PPC <8 digits> SYS (color) PPC <8 digits> SYS (color) PPC <8 digits> SYS (color) PPC <8 digits> SYS (color) PPC <8 digits> SYS (color) PPC <8 digits> SYS (color) PPC <8 digits> SYS (color)

14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 122

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Setting mode (08)


Code 1642-0 Classification Items 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1-100% 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1-100% Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) Contents
Procedure

Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (M) 1642-1 1642-2 1642-3 1642-4 1642-5 1642-6 1642-7 1642-8 1642-9 Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (C) 1643-1 1643-0 1643-2 1643-3 1643-4 1643-5 1643-6 1643-7 1643-8 1643-9

<8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS copy function, full color mode and toner M are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS copy function, full color mode and toner C are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS

14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 123

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Setting mode (08)


Code 1644-0 Classification Items 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1-100% 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1-100% Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) Contents
Procedure

Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (K) 1644-1 1644-2 1644-3 1644-4 1644-5 1644-6 1644-7 1644-8 1644-9 Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (Y) 1645-1 1645-0 1645-2 1645-3 1645-4 1645-5 1645-6 1645-7 1645-8 1645-9

<8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS copy function, full color mode and toner K are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS printer function, full color mode and toner Y are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS

14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14

manuals4you.com

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 124

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Setting mode (08)


Code 1646-0 Classification Items 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1-100% 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1-100% Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) Contents
Procedure

Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (M) 1646-1 1646-2 1646-3 1646-4 1646-5 1646-6 1646-7 1646-8 1646-9 Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (C) 1647-1 1647-0 1647-2 1647-3 1647-4 1647-5 1647-6 1647-7 1647-8 1647-9

<8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS printer function, full color mode and toner M are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS printer function, full color mode and toner C are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS

14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 125

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Setting mode (08)


Code 1648-0 1648-1 1648-2 1648-3 1648-4 1648-5 1648-6 1648-7 1648-8 1648-9 1649-0 1649-1 1649-2 1649-3 1649-4 1649-5 1649-6 1649-7 1649-8 1649-9 Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/black Classification Items 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1-100% 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1-100% Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) Contents
Procedure

Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (K)

<8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS printer function, full color mode and toner K are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS copy function and black mode are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS

14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 126

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Setting mode (08)


Code 1650-0 1650-1 1650-2 1650-3 1650-4 1650-5 1650-6 1650-7 1650-8 1650-9 1651-0 1651-1 1651-2 1651-3 1651-4 1651-5 1651-6 1651-7 1651-8 1651-9 Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/black Classification Items 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1-100% 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1-100% Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) Contents
Procedure

Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/black

<8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS printer function and black mode are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the FAX <8 digits> SYS function and black mode are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS

14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 127

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

<<PM support mode related code>> The management items at PM support mode can also be operated at setting mode (08). The following items are displayed or set by using sub-codes at PM management setting in the table below. <Sub-codes> 0: Present number of output pages 1: Recommended number of output pages for replacement 2: Number of output pages at the last replacement 3: Present driving counts 4: Recommended driving counts to be replaced 5: Driving counts at the last replacement 6: Present output pages for control 7: Present driving counts for control 8: Number of times replaced Notes: Sub-code 3 is equivalent to sub-code 7. When the value of sub-code 3 is changed, the value of sub-code 7 is also updated and vice versa. When "0" is set at one of sub-codes 0, 3, 6 and 7, the rest of them are automatically updated to "0".

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 128

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Items Photoconductive drum

PM management Date of previous setting replacement


<Procedure 4> *Indicated in 8 digits <Procedure 2>

Remarks 1150-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1150-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving counts of the drum. 1150-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing). 1152-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1152-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving counts of the developer unit Y. 1152-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing) and performing of Y-ATC is detected. 1154-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1154-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving counts of the developer unit M. 1154-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing) and performing of M-ATC is detected. 1156-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1156-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving counts of the developer unit C. 1156-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing) and performing of C-ATC is detected. 1158-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1158-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving counts of the drum. 1158-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing). 1166-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1166-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving counts of the drum. 1166-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing). 1174-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1174-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving counts of the drum. 1174-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing). 1182-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1182-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving counts of the drum. 1182-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing). 1190-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1190-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving counts of the drum. 1190-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing).

1150

1151

Photoconductive drum (Yellow)

1152

1153

Photoconductive drum (Magenta)

1154

1155

Photoconductive drum (Cyan)

1156

1157

Drum cleaning blade

1158

1159

Drum cleaner brush

1166

1167

Main charger grid

1174

1175

Main charger wire

1182

1183

Main charger wire cleaning pad

1190

1191

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 129

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Items Ozone filter

PM management Date of previous setting replacement


<Procedure 4> *Indicated in 8 digits <Procedure 2>

Remarks 1198-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1198-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving counts of the drum. 1198-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing). 1200-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1200-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving counts of the developer unit K. 1200-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing) and performing of K-ATC is detected. 1202-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1202-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving counts of the developer unit Y 1202-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing) and performing of Y-ATC is detected. 1204-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1204-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving counts of the developer unit M. 1204-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing) and performing of M-ATC is detected. 1206-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1206-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving counts of the developer unit C. 1206-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing) and performing of C-ATC is detected. 1214-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1214-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving counts of the drum. 1214-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing). 1228-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1228-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving counts of the drum. 1228-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing). 1230-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1230-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving counts of the drum. 1230-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing). 1232-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1232-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving counts of the drum. 1232-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing).

1198

1199

Developer material K

1200

1201

Developer material Y

1202

1203

Developer material M

1204

1205

Developer material C

1206

1207

1st transfer roller

1214

1215

Transfer belt

1228

1229

Transfer belt driving roller cleaning brush

1230

1231

Transfer belt cleaning blade

1232

1233

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 130

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Items 2nd transfer roller

PM management Date of previous setting replacement


<Procedure 4> *Indicated in 8 digits <Procedure 2>

Remarks 1240-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1240-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the time when the 2nd transfer roller drive clutch is ON. 1240-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing). 1244-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1244-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the time when the 2nd transfer roller drive clutch is ON. 1244-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing). 1250-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1250-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving time of feeding. 1250-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing). 1258-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1258-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving time of feeding. 1258-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing). 1260-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1260-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving time of feeding. 1260-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing). 1270-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1270-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving time of feeding. 1270-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing). 1272-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1272-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving time of feeding. 1272-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. "0" clearing). 1276-0, 1, 2 and 6 count up when the registration sensor is ON. 1276-3, 4, 5 and 7 count the driving time of feeding. 1276-8 counts up when entering the values 0 to 7 (incl. 0 clearing). Counts the driving time of pickup roller (RADF). 1282-3, 5 and 7 are not counted. Counts the driving time of feed roller (RADF). 1284-3, 5 and 7 are not counted. Counts the driving time of separation roller (RADF). 1286-3, 5 and 7 are not counted. Counts the driving time of pickup roller (upper drawer). 1290-3, 5 and 7 are not counted.

1240

1241

2nd transfer roller cleaning brush

1244

1245

Pressure roller

1250

1251

Oil roller

1258

1259

Cleaning roller

1260

1261

Pressure roller separation finger

1270

1271

Fuser belt

1272

1273

Fuser belt guide

1276

1277

Pickup roller (RADF) Feed roller (RADF) Separation roller (RADF) Pickup roller (Upper drawer)

1282 1284 1286 1290

1283 1285 1287 1291

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 131

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

manuals4you.com

Items Pickup roller (Lower drawer) Pickup roller (LCF) Feed roller (Upper drawer) Feed roller (Lower drawer) Feed roller (LCF) Separation roller (Upper drawer) Separation roller (Lower drawer) Separation roller (LCF) Separation roller (PFP upper drawer) Separation roller (PFP lower drawer) Separation roller (Bypass unit) Feed roller (PFP upper drawer) Feed roller (PFP lower drawer) Feed roller (Bypass unit) Pickup roller (PFP upper drawer) Pickup roller (PFP lower drawer) Pickup roller (Bypass unit)

PM management Date of previous setting replacement


<Procedure 4> *Indicated in 8 digits <Procedure 2>

Remarks Counts the driving time of pickup roller (lower drawer). 1292-3, 5 and 7 are not counted. Counts the driving time of pickup roller (LCF). 1294-3, 5 and 7 are not counted. Counts the driving time of feed roller (upper drawer). 1298-3, 5 and 7 are not counted. Counts the driving time of feed roller (lower drawer). 1300-3, 5 and 7 are not counted. Counts the driving time of feed roller (LCF). 1302-3, 5 and 7 are not counted. Counts the driving time of separation roller (upper drawer). 1306-3, 5 and 7 are not counted. Counts the driving time of separation roller (lower drawer). 1308-3, 5 and 7 are not counted. Counts the driving time of separation roller (LCF). 1310-3, 5 and 7 are not counted. Counts the driving time of separation roller (PFP upper drawer). 1312-3, 5 and 7 are not counted. Counts the driving time of separation roller (PFP lower drawer). 1314-3, 5 and 7 are not counted. Counts the driving time of separation roller (bypass unit). 1316-3, 5 and 7 are not counted. Counts the driving time of feed roller (PFP upper drawer). 1320-3, 5 and 7 are not counted. Counts the driving time of feed roller (PFP lower drawer). 1322-3, 5 and 7 are not counted. Counts the driving time of feed roller (bypass unit). 1324-3, 5 and 7 are not counted. Counts the driving time of pickup roller (PFP upper drawer). 1328-3, 5 and 7 are not counted. Counts the driving time of pickup roller (PFP lower drawer). 1330-3, 5 and 7 are not counted. Counts the driving time of pickup roller (bypass unit). 1332-3, 5 and 7 are not counted.

1292 1294 1298 1300 1302 1306 1308 1310 1312

1293 1295 1299 1301 1303 1307 1309 1311 1313

1314

1315

1316 1320 1322 1324 1328

1317 1321 1323 1325 1329

1330

1331

1332

1333

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 132

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2.2.6 Pixel counter (1) Outline Pixel counter is a function that counts the number of dots emitted by the laser and converts it into the print ratio (%) per standard size. This Print ratio (%) per standard size calls Pixel count. This function enables you to know how each user uses the equipment and to grasp the tendency of toner consumption (number of output pages per cartridge). (2) Factors affecting toner consumption Standard toner consumption (standard number of output pages per cartridge) shows the average number of output pages under the condition that the data of print ratio 6% is printed on the standard paper size (A4/LT) at a normal temperature and humidity. However, users do not always print under the above condition. As for the type of original, copy/print mode and environment, each user has different tendency, and as a result, the toner consumption becomes different depending on the user. The major factors affecting toner consumption are as follows: (a) Original/Data coverage (b) Original/Data density (c) Original/Print mode (d) Density setting Also there are other factors in addition to the above, such as environment, individual difference of equipment, difference in lot quality of materials, toner density and drum surface potential.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 132

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

The general relations between the above 4 factors and toner consumption in copy function are as follows:

Toner consumption (mg)

Original coverage

Toner consumption (mg)

Original density

Toner consumption (mg)

TEXT /PHOTO

TEXT

PHOTO

PRINTED IMAGE

Toner consumption (mg)


MAP

Original mode

Manual Manual Automatic Manual Manual Manual density density density density density density -5 -1 Center +1 +5

Density setting

Fig. 2-203 Factors affecting toner consumption and the tendency

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 133

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

(3) Details of pixel counter (a) Toner cartridge reference and service technician reference The pixel counter function in this equipment has 2 references, toner cartridge reference and service technician reference. Toner cartridge reference This is a system that integrates data between installing a new toner cartridge (when toner empty is cleared) and subsequently detecting the toner empty. When it is detected, each counter of the toner empty reference is automatically cleared. However, clearing by manual is performed with the setting mode (08-1503). Service technician reference This is a system that integrates data between clearing the counter of the service technician reference by service technician and subsequently clearing the same counter. Clearing the counter of the service technician reference is performed in the setting mode (081502). (b) Print count (number of output pages) The number of output pages shown at the pixel counter is counted after converting all paper sizes to the standard size (A4/LT). Printing on other than the standard size is converted by paper area ratio. The standard size is set in the setting mode (08-1500). The examples of conversion are as follows: Ex.) 1. 1 is added to the print count when printing on A4/LT size. 2. 2 is added to the print count when printing on A3/LD size. (area ratio to A4/LT: 200%) 3. 1.49 is added to the print count when printing on B4 size. (area ratio to A4: 149%) 4. 1.27 is added to the print count when printing on LG size. (area ratio to LT: 127%)

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 134

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(c) Pixel count (%) Pixel count (%) shows the ratio of laser emitting pixels to all pixels on standard paper. The examples of pixel count are as follows: Note: In the following examples, solid copy is considered to be 100%. But since the image has 4 margins, it never becomes 100% actually. Ex.) 1. Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.) Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 5 2. Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.) Pixel count: 0%, Print count: 5 3. Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.) Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.) Pixel count: 50%, Print count: 4 4. Printing 3 pages on A4/LT size with 6% of laser emission Printing 1 page on A4/LT size with 2% of laser emission Pixel count: 5%, Print count: 4 5. Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.) Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 4 6. Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with 6% of laser emission Pixel count: 6%, Print count: 4 (d) Average pixel count (%) and latest pixel count (%) There are 2 types of the value calculated as the pixel count, average pixel count (%) and latest pixel count (%). 1. Average pixel count (%) The average value of all pixel count data after each reference data is cleared is calculated and displayed. 2. Latest pixel count (%) The value is displayed for printing just before the pixel counter is confirmed.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 135

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

(e) Type of calculated data Since this is multifunctional and color equipment, the data of pixel count is calculated for each function and color. The following list is the information that can be confirmed by LCD screen. But actually, more information can be confirmed by the setting mode (08). See after-mentioned (5)-(c) for details. : With data : Without data
Toner cartridge reference Yellow Magenta Cyan Copy function Printer function FAX function Total
Table 2-201 Type of calculated data

Service technician reference Full color/Twin color Black Black

Black

Total

Yellow Magenta Cyan

(f) Setting related with the pixel counter function (f-1) Standard paper size setting The standard paper size (A4 or LT) to convert it into the pixel count is selected (08-1500). (f-2) Pixel counter display setting Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (08-1504). (f-3) Display reference setting The reference when displaying the pixel counter on the LCD screen (toner cartridge reference or service technician reference) is selected (08-1505). (f-4) Pixel counter clearing There are 3 types for the pixel count clear as follows: 08-1501: All information related to the pixel count is cleared. 08-1502: All information related to the service technician reference pixel count is cleared. 08-1503: All information related to the toner cartridge reference pixel count is cleared.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 136

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(4) Relation between pixel count and toner consumption The users printing out the image with large coverage or high density may cause the large value of pixel count. And the setting that toner consumption becomes high in the original mode or density setting may cause it as well. In this case, the replacement cycle of toner cartridge is faster than the standard number of output pages. Therefore, this trend needs to be grasped for the service. The relation between pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge is as follows:

Standard number of output pages (K) Number of output pages per cartridge (Page) Y

Y/2

Standard number of output pages (Y, M, C)

X/2 Y/10 X/10 6% 12% 60% Pixel count (%)


Fig. 2-204 Pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 137

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

(5) Pixel counter confirmation (a) Display on LCD screen Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed) in the setting mode (08-1504), and whether or not to display it at the service technician reference or toner cartridge reference is selected (0: Service technician reference, 1: Toner cartridge reference) in the setting mode (08-1505). The following screen is displayed when the buttons, [USER FUNCTIONS], [COUNTER] and [PIXEL COUNTER] are pressed in this order after Displayed is selected with the code above and the power is, as usual, turned ON. (The displayed buttons are depending on the setting of 08-1505.)

Table 2-205 Reference selection screen

When selecting and pressing the button in the above screen, each pixel counter screen is displayed. [TONER CARTRIDGE] button: Information screen of toner cartridge reference is displayed. [SERVICE (COLOR)] button: Information screen of service technician reference (full color) is displayed. [SERVICE (BLACK)] button: Information screen of service technician reference (black) is displayed.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 138

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

The following screen is displayed when pressing the [TONER CARTRIDGE] button.

Table 2-206 Information screen of toner cartridge reference

The following screen is displayed when pressing the [SERVICE (COLOR)] button.

Table 2-207 Information screen of service technician reference (full color)

The following screen is displayed when pressing the [SERVICE (BLACK)] button.

Table 2-208 Information screen of service technician reference (black)

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 139

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

(b) Data list printing The data for pixel counter can be printed in the list print mode (9S). 9S-104: The data of the toner cartridge reference is printed. 9S-105: The data of service technician reference is printed.

TBD

Table 2-209 Data list of toner cartridge reference

TBD

Table 2-210 Data list of service technician reference

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 140

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(c) Display in the setting mode (08) Information of pixel count can be also checked in the setting mode (08). For details, see 2.2.5 Setting mode (08). (c-1) Print count, pixel count
Full color/Twin color Yellow Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Average pixel count (%) 1557 1609 1626 1558 1615 1630 1621 Magenta 1559 1610 1627 1560 1616 1631 1622 Cyan 1561 1611 1628 1562 1617 1632 1623 Black 1552 1612 1629 1554 1618 1633 Black 1553 1613 1639 1555 1619 1640 1556 1625 1634 Black (at color) + Black 1614 1620 1624

Copy function

Printer function

FAX function

Total

Table 2-202 Pixel count code table (toner cartridge reference)

Total Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Average pixel count (%) 1547 1577 1596 1549 1582 1601 1587

Full color/Twin color Yellow Magenta Cyan 1578 1597 1583 1602 1588 1579 1598 1584 1603 1598 1580 1599 1585 1604 1590

Black 1581 1600 1586 1605 1591

Black 1548 1592 1606 1550 1593 1607 1551 1594 1608 1595

Copy function

Printer function

FAX function

Total

Table 2-203 Pixel count code table (service technician reference)

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2 - 141

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

(c-2) Pixel count distribution


Full color/Twin color Magenta Cyan 1642 1646 1643 1647 Black 1649 1650 1651

Yellow Copy function Printer function FAX function Pixel count distribution (page) Pixel count distribution (page) Pixel count distribution (page) 1641 1645 -

Black 1644 1648 -

Note: By entering the sub code at the above code, the pixel count distribution can be displayed dividing into 10 ranges. The sub codes are as follows. 0: 0 - 5% 5: 25.1 - 30% 1: 5.1 - 10% 6: 30.1 - 40% 2: 10.1 - 15% 7: 40.1 - 60% 3: 15.1 - 20% 8: 60.1- 80% 4: 20.1 - 25% 9: 80.1 - 100%

Table 2-204 Pixel count code table

(c-3) Other information Toner cartridge replacement counter The toner cartridge replacement count is displayed. 08-1563: Toner cartridge Y 08-1565: Toner cartridge C 08-1564: Toner cartridge M 08-1566: Toner cartridge K

Toner cartridge reference count started date The toner cartridge reference count started date is displayed. 08-1515: Toner cartridge Y 08-1517: Toner cartridge C 05-1516: Toner cartridge M 05-1518: Toner cartridge K

Service technician reference cleared date The service technician reference cleared date (08-1510) is displayed. The date (08-1502 was performed) is stored. Toner cartridge reference cleared date The toner cartridge reference cleared date is displayed. The date (08-1503 was performed) is stored. 08-1511: Toner cartridge Y 08-1513: Toner cartridge C 05-1512: Toner cartridge M 05-1514: Toner cartridge K

e-STUDIO3511/4511 SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

2 - 142

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

3. ADJUSTMENT
3.1 Adjustment Order (Image Related Adjustment)
This chapter mainly explains the procedures for image related adjustment. When replacing components which have other specified instructions for adjustment, those specified instructions are to be obeyed in priority. In the following diagram, the solid lines with arrow lead to essential adjustments, while the dotted lines lead to adjustments to be performed if necessary.
Parts to be replaced Drum Main charger wire Main charger grid Code in mode 05 200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 206 Code in mode 05 396

Developer material

Transfer belt 1st transfer roller 2nd transfer roller

Item to be adjusted 3.2 Adjustment of the auto-toner sensor Item to be adjusted 3.3 Adjustment of image quality control / Automatic initialization of image quality control

3.4 Image dimensional adjustment Order Items 1 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller Code in mode 05 448, 449, 450, 452, 455, 457, 458, 459, 460, 461, 462, 463 401 411 426 440 - 445 498 405 306 340 305 430 432 433

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

3.4.3 Printer related adjustment 3.4.4 Scanner related adjustment

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h)

Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction Primary-scanning data laser writing start position Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction Secondary scanning data laser writing start position Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing Image distortion Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction Image location of primary scanning direction Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction Image location of secondary scanning direction Top margin Right margin Bottom margin Code in mode 05 1642, 1643 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003 Adjust the image quality if necessary. ( Chapter 3.5, 3.6, 3.7)

Item to be adjusted 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (PPC) 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (PRT)

END August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 3-1 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3.2 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor


When the developer material is replaced, adjust the auto-toner sensor in the following procedure. Note: Make sure the cleaning blade is pressed to contact with the drum before adjusting auto-toner. (1) Install the cleaner and developer unit.

Note: Do not install the toner cartridge. (2) While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. The following message will be displayed. [0] [5] [POWER] 100% TEST MODE A A3

(3)

Key in a code and press the [START] button. Code 200: All developer materials 201: Developer material Y 202: Developer material M 203: Developer material C 204: Developer material K 206: Developer material Y, M, C 100% (Code) [START] TEST MODE 200 A3

(4)

Adjustment for K (Magnetometric sensor control) The following message will be displayed approx. 2 minutes later. (B) (C) (A) K: zzzV (B): Current sensor voltages (V) (C): No display (A): Target values (V) for adjustment reference voltages Note: The current sensor voltages (V) shown in (B) automatically changes, gradually approaching the target values for adjustment reference voltages shown in (A). K: xxxV

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3-2

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

In 30 to 60 seconds, the current sensor voltages (V) in (B) are converged. Then the sensor output control values (bit values) corresponding to the initial developer material is displayed in (C). (B) (C) (A) K: xxxV K: yyyV K: zzzV (B): Current sensor voltages (V) (C): Sensor output control values (bit values) (A): Target values (V) for adjustment reference voltages Note: Be careful that the values in (A), (B) and (C) vary with humidity. In case of single-color adjustment, press the [ENTER] button to store the adjustment results in memory when the control values are displayed. In case of multiple-color adjustment, it is automatically proceeded to the adjustment of next color. (5) Adjustments for Y, M and C (light sensor control) In 15 to 45 seconds, the following message will be displayed (The time varies with the number of colors to be adjusted). (B) (C) (A) Y: (B): Current sensor voltages (V) (C): No display (A): Target values (V) for adjustment reference voltages Note: The current sensor voltages (V) shown in (B) automatically changes, gradually approaching the target values for adjustment reference voltages shown in (A). After approx. 5 seconds have passed, the current sensor voltages (V) in (B) are converged. Then the sensor output control values (bit values) corresponding to the initial developer material is displayed in (C). (B) (C) (A) Y: xxxV Y: yyyV Y: zzzV (B): Current sensor voltages (V) (C): Sensor output control values (bit values) (A): Target values (V) for adjustment reference voltages Y:

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3-3

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

In case of single-color adjustment, press the [ENTER] button to store the adjustment results in memory when the control values are displayed. In case of multiple-color adjustment, it is automatically proceeded to the adjustment of next color. When the adjustments of all colors have finished and [ENTER] is lit, press [ENTER] button to store the adjustment results in memory. (6) Standard of adjustment value range (A): Adjustment reference voltages (V)
Humidity(%) 29.9 or below 30.0 - 44.9 45.0 - 59.9 60.0 - 74.9 75.0 or above K 2.47 2.49 2.50 2.69 2.86 Y 1.25 M 1.25 C 1.25

Note: Since the adjustments for Y, M and C are controlled by the light sensor, the humidity correction is not performed. (B): Current sensor voltages (V)
Humidity(%) 29.9 or below 30.0 - 44.9 45.0 - 59.9 60.0 - 74.9 75.0 or above K 2.37~2.57 2.39~2.59 2.40~2.60 2.59~2.79 2.76~2.96 Y 1.15~1.35 M 1.15~1.35 C 1.15~1.35

Note: Since the adjustments for Y, M and C are controlled by the light sensor, the humidity correction is not performed. (7) (8) Turn OFF the power supply. Install the toner cartridges.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3-4

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

3.3 Performing Image Quality Control


(1) When unpacking Prior to image dimensional adjustment, perform the Automatic initialization of image quality control (05-396) procedure. When any of the following parts is replaced, be sure to perform the Automatic initialization of image quality control (05-396) procedure. Photoconductive drum Image quality sensor Developer material Transfer belt Laser optical unit 1st transfer roller

(2)

Note: When performing "Automatic gamma adjustment" in addition, Automatic initialization of image quality control (05-396) should be done first. (3) When performing "Automatic gamma adjustment" in cases no parts written above are replaced, do the Forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (05-395) procedure before "Automatic gamma adjustment".

Code 395

Item to be adjusted Forced performing of image quality closed-loop control

Contents <Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. Adjustment mode (2) Enter [395] with digital keys and press the [START] button. (3) "WAIT" is displayed. (4) When the adjustment finishes normally, the equipment returns to the initial state of adjustment mode. If an error has occurred, take appropriate action by referring to 5. TROUBLESHOOTING.

396

Automatic initialization of image quality control

<Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. Adjustment mode (2) Enter [396] with digital keys and press the [START] button. (3) "WAIT" is displayed. (4) When the adjustment finishes normally, the equipment will return to initial state of the adjustment mode. If an error has occurred, take appropriate action by referring to 5. TROUBLESHOOTING.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3-5

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3.4 Image Dimensional Adjustment


3.4.1 General description There are several adjustment items in the image dimensional adjustment, as listed below. Prior to this image dimensional adjustment, perform the "Automatic initialization of image quality control (05-396)". When adjusting these items, the following adjustment order should strictly be observed.
Item to be adjusted 1 Paper alignment at the registration roller Code in mode 05 448, 449, 450, 452, 455, 457, 458, 459, 460, 461, 462, 463 (a) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction
2 Printer related adjustment

401 411 426 440 - 445 498 405 306 340 305 430 432 433

(Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed) (b) Primary scanning data laser writing start position (c) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of transport motor rotation speed) (d) Secondary scanning data laser writing start position (e) Primary-scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing (a) Image distortion (b) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (c) Image location of primary scanning direction (d) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (e) Image location of secondary scanning direction (f) Image trailing edge margin (g) Right margin (h) Bottom margin

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 Scanner related adjustment

3-6

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[Procedure to key in adjustment values] In accordance with the procedure described below, make adjustment of each adjustment item so that the measured values obtained from test copies satisfy the specification. By pressing the [FAX] button, immediately after starting the adjustment mode (05), single-sided test copying can be performed (normal copy mode).
Varies with the code XXX keyed in.

<Operation keys>

<Display> 100%

A3

0 1

TEST MODE

POWER Digital keys : Enter codes. 100% START TEST MODE Digital keys : Enter adjustment values. ( CLEAR Use to make corrections) ENTER
or

Code No.

XXX
ZZZ

A3
Adjustment value newly entered (If no entering, YYY is displayed.)

YYY

Current adjustment value 100% TEST MODE

Value ZZZ is stored replacing values YYY.

A3

INTERRUPT FAX Test copy START If the test copy does not satisfy the specified values, return to step 1 and repeat the adjustment procedure. Power OFF/ON : Exit the adjustment mode. 100% Wait Warming Up

A3

100% COPYING

A3

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3-7

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

manuals4you.com

3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller <Operation procedure> (Use codes 439 to 452 and 492 in adjustment mode (05).)
PFP upper drawer PFP lower drawer Upper drawer Lower drawer 450 (*1) 452 (*1) 448 (*1) LCF 457 449 (*1) Duplexing 455 (*1) Bypass feed Normal paper 458 (*1)

Bypass feed Thin paper 459 (*2)

Bypass feed Thick paper 1 460 (*2)

Bypass feed Thick paper 2 461 (*2)

Bypass feed Thick paper 3 462 (*2)

Bypass feed OHP 463 (*2)

Sub-code (*1) 0: Long size, 1: Middle size, 2: Short size (*2) 0: Long size, 1: Middle size, 2: Short size, 3: Post card (1) [0][5] [Power] (Code) [START]

[SET] or [INTERRUPT] stores in memory

T.B.D.
(Sub-code) [START]
[Drawer selection]
Transfer void

(Not necessary for LCF)

( Current value) displayed


[FAX] (Text print)

( Enter new) value


[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)

(2)

Check if any transfer void is occurring. If there is a transfer problem, try the values in descending order as 31 30 29 until the transfer void disappears. At the same time, confirm if any paper jam occurs. Also, when the aligning amount has been increased, this may increase the scraping noise caused by the paper and the mylar sheet as it is transported by the registration roller. If this scraping noise is annoying, try to decrease the value. Perform the same procedure for all paper source.

m50m

mm 100

(3)

Note: When paper thinner than specified is used, paper jams may occur frequently at the registration section. In this case, it is advisable to change (or reduce) the aligning amount. However, if the aligning amount is reduced too much, this may cause the shift of leading edge position. So, when adjusting the aligning amount, try to choose the appropriate amount while confirming the leading edge position is not shifted. * As a tentative countermeasure, the service life of the feed roller can be extended by increasing the aligning amount.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3-8

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

3.4.3 Printer related adjustment (a) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed (Printer)) 1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode) 2. Press [1] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower drawer.) 3. Measure the distance A from the 1st line to the 21st line of the grid pattern. 4. Check if the distance A is within 200 0.5 mm. 5. If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance A again. <Procedure> (Adjustment mode) (Key in code [401]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) "100% A" is displayed. [Press [1] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) ** The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance A becomes (approx. 0.5 mm/5 steps). (b) Primary scanning data laser writing start position (Printer) 1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode) 2. Press [1] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower drawer.) 3. Measure the distance B from the front edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern. 4. Check if the distance B is within 52 0.5 mm. 5. If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance B again. <Procedure> (Adjustment mode) (Key in the code [411]) Press [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory). "100% A" is displayed Press [1] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes (approx. 0.4 mm/10 steps). 6. After the adjustment for the code 411 is completed, apply the same adjustment value for the code 410. <Procedure> (Adjustment mode) (Key in the code [411]) Press [START] (Key in the same value in the step 5 above) Press [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory). Note: Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3-9

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

(c) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of transport motor rotation speed (Printer)) 1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode) 2. Press [1] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower drawer.) 3. Measure the distance C from the 6th line at the leading edge of the paper to the 26th line of the grid pattern. 4. Check if the distance C is within 200 0.5 mm. 5. If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance C again. <Procedure> (Adjustment mode) (Key in code [426]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) "100% A" is displayed Press [1] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) ** The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes (approx. 0.5 mm/9 steps). (d) Secondary scanning data laser writing start position This adjustment has to be performed for each paper source. The following table shows the order of the paper source to be adjusted, code, paper size and acceptable values.
Order for adjustment 1 2 3 4 5 Paper source Lower drawer Upper drawer PFP or LCF Bypass feed Duplexing Code 441 440 444/443 442 445 Paper size A3/LD A4/LT A4/LT A4/LT A3/LD Acceptable value 0 to 255 0 to 40 0 to 40 0 to 40 0 to 40 Paper fed from the lower drawer Remarks

1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode) 2. Press [1] ([3] for duplexing) [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10mm squares is printed out.) 3. Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern. *At the duplexing, measure it on the top side of the grid pattern. 4. Check if the distance D is within 52 0.5 mm. 5. If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again. <Procedure> (Adjustment mode) (Key in the code shown above) [START] (Key in an acceptable value shown above) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) "100% A" is displayed Press [1] ([3] for duplexing) [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the shorter the distance D becomes (approx. 0.2 mm/step).
e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3 - 10 August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(e) Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing Note: Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished. (e-1) Adjustment for long-sized paper 1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode) 2. Press [3] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower drawer.) 3. Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the front edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern. 4. Check if the distance E is within 52 0.5 mm. 5. If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again. <Procedure> (Adjustment mode) (Key in code [498]) [0] [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) "100% A" is displayed. [Press [3] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) ** The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes (approx. 0.4 mm/10 steps). (e-2) Adjustment for short-sized paper 1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode) 2. Press [3] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A4/LT from the upper drawer.) 3. Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the front edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern. 4. Check if the distance E is within 52 0.5 mm. 5. If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again. <Procedure> (Adjustment mode) (Key in the code [498]) Press [1] [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory). "100% A" is displayed Press [3] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes (approx. 0.4 mm/10 steps).

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 11

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

1 A 6 B, E

21

Feeding direction

26

[Grid pattern]

<Adjustment order> [0] [5] [Power ON] [1] ([3](05-445, 498) for duplexing) [FAX] A: 05-401 (Lower drawer, A3/LD) 200 0.5 mm (0.5 mm/5 steps) B: 05-411 (Lower drawer, A3/LD) 52 0.5 mm (0.4 mm/10 steps) Key in the same value for 05-410. C: 05-426 (Lower drawer, A3/LD) 200 0.5 mm (0.5 mm/9 steps) D: 05-440 (Upper drawer, A4/LT) 55 0.5 mm (0.2 mm/step), 441 (Lower drawer, A3/LD), 442 (Bypass feed, A4/LT), 443 (LCF, A4/LT), 444 (PFP, A4/LT), 445 (Duplexing, A3/LD) E: 05-498-0 (Lower drawer, A3/LD), 52 0.5 mm (0.4 mm/10 steps) 498-1 (Upper drawer, A4/LT)
e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3 - 12 August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

3.4.4 Scanner related adjustment (a) Image distortion


Feeding direction

Step 1

Feeding direction

Step 2

C 1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. 2. Press [FAX] to make a copy of any image on a sheet of A3/LD paper. 3. Key in [308] and press the [START] button to move the carriage to the adjustment position. 4. Make an adjustment in the order of step 1 and 2. Step 1 In case of A: Tighten the mirror-3 adjustment screw (CW). In case of B: Loosen the mirror-3 adjustment screw (CCW). Step 2 In case of C: Tighten the mirror-1 adjustment screw (CW). In case of D: Loosen the mirror-1 adjustment screw (CCW).

D
Adjustment screw for the mirror-3 (Rear)

Carriage-2 Adjustment screw for the mirror-1 (Rear)

Carriage-1

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 13

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

The following adjustments (b) to (e) should be performed with Test Chart No. TCC-1. (Refer to page 3-18.) (b) Reproduction ratio adjustment of primary scanning direction 1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode) 2. Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side). 3. Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, black and text/photo. 4. Measure the distance A between M1 and M2 on the copy with a ruler. 5. Check if the distance A is within 200 0.5 mm. 6. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above. <Procedure> (Adjustment mode) (Key in code [405]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values : 0 to 255) with digital keys) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance A becomes (approx. 0.1 mm/step). (c) Image location of primary scanning direction 1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode) 2. Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side). 3. Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, black and text/photo. 4. Measure the distance B from the left paper edge to the 5 mm line of left grid pattern on the copy with a ruler. 5. Check if the distance B is within 5 0.5 mm. 6. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above. <Procedure> (Adjustment mode) (Key in code [306]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values : 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) * The larger the adjustment value is, the shorter the distance B becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/step). (d) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction 1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode) 2. Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side). 3. Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, black and text/photo. 4. Measure the distance C between M3 and M4 on the copy with a ruler. 5. Check if the distance C is within 150 0.5 mm. 6. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above. <Procedure> (Adjustment mode) (Key in code [340]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values : 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes (approx.0.22 %/step).
e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3 - 14 August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(e) Image location of secondary scanning direction 1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode) 2. Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side). 3. Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, black and text/photo. 4. Measure the distance D from the top paper edge to the 10 mm line of top grid pattern on the copy with a ruler. 5. Check if the distance D is within 10 0.5 mm. 6. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above. <Procedure> (Adjustment mode) (Key in code [305]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values : 92 to 164)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes (approx. 0.14/step). (f) Top margin 1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] aimultaneously, turn the power on. (Adjustment mode) 2. Open the platen cover or RADF. 3. Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, black, text/photo and lower drawer. 4. Measure the blank area E at the leading edge of the copied image. 5. Check if the blank area E is within the range of 30.5 mm. 6. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above. <Procedure> (Adjustment mode) (Key in the code [430]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values : 0 to 255)) Press the [ENTER] icon or the [INTERRUPT] (stored in memory). (100% A is displayed.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area becomes (approx. 0.4mm /10 steps).
Feeding direction

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 15

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

(g) Right margin 1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode) 2. Open the platen cover or RADF. 3. Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, black, text/photo and lower drawer. 4. Measure the blank area F at the right side of the copied image. 5. Check if the blank area F is within the range of 2+1 mm, 2-0.5 mm. 6. If not, use the following procedure to chage values and repeat the steps 3 to 5 until the area falls within range. <Procedure> (Adjustment mode) (Key in the code [432]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values : 0 to 255)) Press the [ENTER] icon or the [INTERRUPT] (stored in memory). (100% A is displayed.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the right side becomes (approx. 0.4 mm/10 steps).
Feeding direction

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 16

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(h) Bottom margin 1. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode) 2. Open platen cover or RADF. 3. Press the [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, black, text/photo and lower drawer. 4. Measure the blank area G at the trailing edge of the copied image. 5. Check if the blank area G is within the range of 20.5 mm. 6. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 2. to 4. above. <Procedure> (Adjustment mode) (Key in the code [433]) [START] (Key in value (acceptable values : 0 to 255)) Press the [ENTER] icon or the [INTERRUPT] (stored in memory). (100% A is displayed.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the trailing edge becomes (approx. 0.4 mm/10 steps).

Feeding direction

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 17

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

Feeding direction

[Chart TCC-1]

<Adjustment order> [0] [5] [Power ON] (Chart TCC-1) [FAX] [START] (A4/LT, 100%, black and text/photo) A: 05-405 200 0.5 mm (0.1 mm/step) B: 05-306 5 0.5 mm (0.04 mm/step) C: 05-340 150 0.5 mm (0.22 %/step) D: 05-305 10 0.5 mm (0.14 mm/step)

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 18

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[9]

[1]

[8]

[10]

[3]

[2]
TOSHIBA COLOR CHART No.TCC-1

[5] [7]

[2]

[3] [2] [1]

[1] [6] [4] [6]

[3] [14] [7] [2] [13] [11] [7] [12] [7]

[1]

[8]

[1] [2] [3] [4]

Grid patterns YMCK patches Resolution patterns Gradation pattern

: : : :

[5] Color registration pattern [6] Pictures [7] Magnification lines [8] Center lines [9] Arrow [10] [11] [12] [13]

: : : : :

Halftone band : White text on the black solid : Text : Thin lines : :

[14] Note area

For adjusting margin (void) and scanner section For checking uniformity For checking resolution Gradation pattern of seven colors (Y, M, C, R, G, B and K) Coverage: 10 - 100% For adjusting the halftone reproduction and gray balance For checking color registration For checking color reproduction and moire For checking the magnification error of primary and secondary scanning directions Center lines for A4/LT sizes A mark for placing the chart properly onto the original glass (place it to the left rear corner of the original glass.) For checking uniformity For checking the reproduction of white text on black solid For checking reproduction of text For checking reproduction of the thin lines (line width: 100m) For recording the date, conditions, etc.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 19

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3.5 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function)


3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate, the gradation reproducibility of all colors Y, M, C and K can be corrected by performing this automatic gamma adjustment. In case the gradation reproduction of the image checked is not satisfactory, make this adjustment as described below at parts replacement. (1) When unpacking or any of the following parts has been or replaced, be sure to make this adjustment: Laser optical unit Photoconductive drum Developer material When any of the following parts are replaced or adjusted, make a copy and check the image to determine if adjustment is necessary: Main charger Transfer belt 1st transfer roller 2nd transfer roller Notes: 1. Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing the image adjustment in "3.3 Adjustment of Image Quality Control" and "3.4 Image Dimensional Adjustment". 2. Normally, only the adjustment of color/black mixed pattern is needed. When the adjustment of "3.5.12 Beam level conversion setting" is made, color pattern and black pattern need to be adjusted individually.
Code 1642 1643 580 Item to be adjusted Automatic gamma adjustment <Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. Adjustment mode (2) Select the A4/LT drawer. Key in the pattern number and press [FAX] button and output a Patch chart for gamma adjustment. Pattern No. 3 4 5 Pattern Black Remarks When performing code 580 Contents

(2)

Color/black integrated When performing code 1642 Color When performing code 1643

(3) Place the patch chart for adjustment produced in step (2) face down on the original glass, with its side, on which a black band is present, aligned against the original scale. (4) Enter a code with digital keys and press the [START] button. The scanner reads the chart automatically and performs automatic gamma adjustment calculation (approx. 30 sec.). (5) When the adjustment has finished normally, SET is shown. Press the [ENTER] button to have the adjustment results reflected. (To cancel the reflection of adjustment results, press the [STOP] button.) In the case of an abnormal ending, ADJUSTMENT ERROR is shown. Press the [CLEAR] to clear the error display. When it is cleared, the control panel display will return to the ready state. Then, check if the patch chart on the original glass is placed in the wrong direction or if it is placed inclined on the original glass, and then repeat step (3) and afterward. e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3 - 20 August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

3.5.2 Density adjustment The center density and the density variation controlled by density adjustment keys can be adjusted as follows.
Color Original mode mode Text/Photo Text Printed image Photo 1550 1551 1552 1553 Map 1554 Item to be Remarks adjusted Manual density mode The larger the value is, the darker the image becomes. center value Aceptable values: 0 to 255 Manual density mode The larger the value is, the dark step value darker the dark side becomes. Aceptable values: 0 to 255 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 Manual density mode The larger the value is, the lighter the light side becomes. light step value Automatic density mode Aceptable values: 0 to 255 The larger the value is, the darker the image becomes. Aceptable values: 0 to 255

Full color

1560

1561

1562

1563

1564

1580

1581

1582

1583

1584

Color mode

Text/Photo 503

Original mode Text 504

Photo 501

Item to be Remarks adjusted Manual density mode The larger the value is, the center value darker the image becomes. Aceptable values: 0 to 255 Manual density mode The larger the value is, the

508
Black

510

509

dark step value

darker the dark side becomes. Aceptable values: 0 to 255

505

507

508

Manual density mode The larger the value is, the light step value lighter the light side becomes. Aceptable values: 0 to 255 The larger the value is, the

514

515

512

Automatic density

darker the image becomes. Aceptable values: 0 to 255

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. Note: Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing "3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment. <Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) Key in a code and press the [START] button. (3) Key in an adjustment value (acceptable values: 0 to 255). (To correct an entered value, press the [CLEAR] button.) (4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to the ready state. (5) Press the [FAX] button and then press the [START] button to make a test copy. (6) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 21

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3.5.3 Color balance adjustment The color balance is adjusted by adjusting the density of each color at full color mode. The adjustment is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.
Original mode Text Printed image Photo 1780-0 1781-0 1782-0 1780-1 1781-1 1782-1 1780-2 1785-0 1785-1 1785-2 1790-0 1790-1 1790-2 1795-0 1795-1 1795-2 1781-2 1786-0 1786-1 1786-2 1791-0 1791-1 1791-2 1796-0 1796-1 1796-2 1782-2 1787-0 1787-1 1787-2 1792-0 1792-1 1792-2 1798-0 1798-1 1798-2 Item to be adjusted Low density Medium density High density Low density Medium density High density Low density Medium density High density Low density Medium density High density Remarks The larger the value is, the darker the color to be adjusted becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255.

Yellow

Text/Photo 1779-0 1779-1 1779-2 1784-0

Map 1783-0 1783-1 1783-2 1788-0 1788-1 1788-2 1793-0 1793-1 1793-2 1798-0 1798-1 1798-2

Magenta

1784-1 1784-2 1789-0 1789-1 1789-2 1794-0

Cyan

Black

1794-1 1794-2

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. Note: Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment. <Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) Key in the code of the mode to be adjusted (color and original mode) and press the [START] button. (3) Select the density area to be adjusted with digital keys (0, 1 or 2), and press the [START] button. 0 : Low density (L) 1 : Medium density (M) 2 : High density (H) (4) Key in an adjustment value. (To correct a keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.) (5) Press the [ENTER] button to store the value in memory. Returns to the display in step (3). (6) For resetting the value, repeat step (3) to (5). (7) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes back to the ready state. (8) Press the [FAX] button and then press the [START] button to make a test copy. (9) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (8).

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 22

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

3.5.4 Gamma balance adjustment The density adjustment at black mode is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.
Color mode Black Original mode Text/Photo Text 590-0 591-0 590-1 590-2 591-1 591-2 Item to be adjusted Low density Medium density High density

Photo
592-0 592-1 592-2

Remarks The larger the value is, the density of the item to be adjusted becomes darker. Acceptable values: 0 to 255.

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. Note: Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment. <Procedure> Procedure is same as that of 3.5.3 Color balance adjustment.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 23

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3.5.5 Offsetting adjustment for background processing The density of background and text can be adjusted as follows.
Color mode Text/Photo Original mode Text Printed image Photo Item to be adjusted Automatic density adjustment for background Automatic density 1693
Full color

Map

Remarks The larger the value is, the darker the background becomes. (Automatic) Acceptable values: 0 to 255. The larger the value is, the darker the text becomes. (Automatic) Acceptable values: 0 to 255. The larger the value is, the darker the background becomes. (Manual) Acceptable values: 0 to 255. The larger the value is, the darker the text becomes. (Manual) Acceptable values: 0 to 255.

1688

1689

1690

1691

1692

1694

1695

1696

1697

adjustment for text Manual density

1698

1699

1700

1701

1702

adjustment for background Manual density

1708

1709

1710

1711

1712

adjustment for text

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. <Procedure for automatic density adjustment> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) Key in the code of the mode to be adjusted (original mode and item to be adjusted) with digital keys and press the [START] button. <Procedure for manual density adjustment> Procedure is same as that of "3.5.2 Density adjustment"

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 24

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

3.5.6 Judgment threshold for ACS The judgment level is adjusted for the automatic identification of whether the original set on the glass is black-and-white or color. Namely, this is to adjust the judgment level used when Auto-color is selected at a color mode. The adjustment is available for each of the manually-set original and the original used with the RADF.
Code 1675 Item to be adjusted Judgment threshold for ACS when original is set manually 1676 Judgment threshold for ACS when original is set on RADF Contents The larger the value is, the more an original tends to be judged as black even at an auto-color mode. The smaller value is, the more it tends to be judged as color. Acceptable values: 0 to 255.

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary and make adjustment. <Procedure> Procedure is same as that of "3.5.2 Density adjustment"

3.5.7 Sharpness adjustment If you want to make copy images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment. The adjustment can be made for each of the color modes and original modes independently.
Code 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 604 605 606 Black Color mode Full color Original mode Text/Photo Text Printed image Photo Map Text/Photo Text Photo Contents The larger the value is, the sharper the image becomes; while the smaller the value is, the softer the image becomes. The smaller the value is, the less moire tends to appear. The acceptable values are 0 to 31. The center value is 16. However, 0 is equivalent to the center value. Note: You have to make adjustment by balancing between moire and sharpness.

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment. <Procedure> Procedure is same as that of "3.5.2 Density adjustment"

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 25

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3.5.8 Setting range correction The values of the background peak/text peak in the range correction at a black mode can be switched to "varied" or "fixed" in the following codes. If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak affects the reproduction of the background density, and the values of the text peak affects that of the text density.
Original mode Photo 571 Item to be adjusted Range correction for original manually set on the original glass 693 694 695 Range correction for original set on the RADF Remarks The following are the default values set for each original mode. Text/Photo: 22, Photo: 12, Text: 22 Each digit stands for: Ones place: Automatic density mode Tens place: Manual density mode The setting conditions possible are as follows: 1: 2: 3: 4: Background peak fixed varied fixed varied Text peak fixed fixed varied varied

Text/Photo 570

Text 572

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment. <Procedure> Procedure is same as that of "3.5.2 Density adjustment"

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 26

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

3.5.9 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) The levels of the background peak for the range correction at a black mode can be set at the following codes.
Original mode Text/Photo Photo 532 533 Item to be adjusted Background peak for range correction Remarks When the value increases, the background (low density area) of the image is not output. Accept table values: 0 to 255.

Text 534

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment. <Procedure> Procedure is same as that of "3.5.2 Density adjustment" 3.5.10 Adjustment of blurred/thin spotted text The blurred/thin spotted text at a black mode can be set at the following codes.
Original mode Text/Photo 648 Item to be adjusted Adjustment of blurred/ thin spotted text Remarks When the value increases, the thin spotted text is improved. When the value decreases, the blurred text is improved. Accept table values: 0 to 255. Note: Remember the image specifications and life span of the replacing parts may not meet the standard when the setting value is changed from the default value.

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment. <Procedure> Procedure is same as that of "3.5.2 Density adjustment"

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 27

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3.5.11 Adaptation to highlighter Four modes of one touch adjustment are performed and each mode can be switched into two modes; highlighter 1 or 2. This adjustment is performed when the reproduction mode for highlighter is needed.
Code 1769 1770 1771 1772 One touch adjustment Vivid Clear Warm Cool 0: Default 1: Highlighter 1 2: Highlighter 2 Remarks

Note: The color may not always be reproduced precisely due to the characteristics of fluorescent ink. 3.5.12 Beam level conversion setting The beam level for 4 divided smoothing is set at black mode. This adjustment enables to adjust the dot size.
Code 667 Item to be adjusted Beam level at black mode Remarks The smaller the value is, the smaller the beam diameter becomes. Therefore, the smaller dot is reproduced accordingly. Acceptable values: 0 to 255.

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. <Procedure> Procedure is same as that of 3.5.2 Density adjustment Notes: 1. When this adjustment is performed, 3.5.1 Automatic gamma balance (Black mode) needs to be performed since the reproduction of density at black/white mode varies. The result of this adjustment is not reflected to color/black mixed pattern. Namely, each automatic gamma adjustment of black mode or of color mode needs to be performed individually after this adjustment. 2. After this adjustment, set 1 from 08-595 so that the correction result of black/white mode is not reflected on User gradation correction. 3.5.13 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type The maximum toner amount adhering to the paper can be controlled.
Code 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 Paper type Normal paper Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film Remarks The smaller the value is, the toner amount adhered decreases of the high density area (ex. prevention of fusing offsetting, etc). Acceptable values : 0 to 255.

Note: The larger the value is, the more frequently fusing offsetting occurs.
e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3 - 28 August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

3.6 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Functions)


3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate, the gradation reproducibility of all colors Y, M, C and K can be corrected by performing this automatic gamma adjustment. In case the gradation reproduction of the image checked is not satisfactory, make this adjustment as described below at parts replacement. (1) When unpacking or any of the following parts has been unpacked or replaced, be sure to make this adjustment: Laser optical unit Photoconductive drum Developer material When any of the following parts are replaced or adjusted, make a copy and check the image to determine if adjustment is necessary: Main charger Transfer belt 1st transfer roller 2nd transfer roller Note: Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing the image adjustment in "3.3 Adjustment of Image Quality Control" and "3.4 Image Dimensional Adjustment".
Adjustment item Automatic gamma adjustment Contents <Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. Adjustment mode (2) Select the A4/LT drawer. Key in the pattern number and press [FAX] button and output a Patch chart for gamma adjustment. Pattern No. Language/Resolution Remarks 47 48 49 50 PS/600x600dpi PS/1200x600dpi PCL/600x600dpi PCL/1200x600dpi When performing code 1000 When performing code 1001 When performing code 1002 When performing code 1003

(2)

Code 1000 1001 1002 1003

(3) Place the patch chart for adjustment produced in step (2) face down on the original glass, with its side, on which a black band is present, aligned against the original scale. (4) Key in a code and press the [START] button. The scanner reads the chart automatically and performs automatic gamma adjustment calculation (approx. 30 sec.). (5) When the adjustment has finished normally, SCAN COMPLETE is shown. Press the [START] button to have the adjustment results reflected. (To cancel the reflection of adjustment results, press the [STOP] button.) Note: After the [START] button is pressed, the printer section will operate for about 15 seconds and the density of the standard pattern for image quality control will be measured. In the case of an abnormal ending, ADJUSTMENT ERROR is shown. Press the [STOP] button to clear the error display. When it is cleared, the control panel display will return to the ready state. Then, check if the patch chart on the original glass is placed in the wrong direction or if it is placed inclined on the original glass, and then repeat step (3) and afterward.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 29

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3.6.2 Gamma balance adjustment The gamma balance is adjusted by adjusting the density at black mode. The adjustment is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.
Item to be adjusted Low density Medium density High density

Original mode
Photo(PS) 596-0 596-1 596-2 Text(PS) 597-0 597-1 597-2 Photo(PCL) 598-0 598-1 598-2 Text(PCL) 599-0 599-1 599-2

Remarks The larger the value is, the density of the item to be adjusted becomes darker. Acceptable values: 0 to 255.

<Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) Key in the codes to be adjusted (color, language, resolution and image mode) and press the [START] button. (3) Key in the value corresponding to the density area to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2) and press the [START] button. 0: Low density (L) 1: Medium density (M) 2: High density (H) (4) Key in the adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed-in, press [CLEAR] button.) (5) Press the [ENTER] button to store the value in memory. Returns to the display in step (3). (6) For resetting the value, repeat step (3) to (5). (7) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes back to the ready state. (8) Let the equipment restart and perform printing job. (9) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (8).

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 30

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

3.6.3 Color balance adjustment The color balance is adjusted by adjusting the density of each color. The adjustment is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.
PS PCL Density Remarks

Yellow

600x600dpi 1200x600dpi 600x600dpi 1200x600dpi Photo Text Photo Text Photo Text Photo Text 1010-0 1014-0 1018-0 1022-0 1026-0 1030-0 1034-0 1038-0 1010-1 1014-1 1018-1 1022-1 1026-1 1030-1 1034-1 1038-1 1010-2 1014-2 1018-2 1022-2 1026-2 1011-0 1015-0 1019-0 1023-0 1027-0 1030-2 1034-2 1038-2 1031-0 1035-0 1039-0 1031-1 1035-1 1039-1 1031-2 1035-2 1039-2 1032-0 1036-0 1040-0 1032-1 1036-1 1040-1 1032-2 1036-2 1040-2 1033-0 1037-0 1041-0 1033-1 1037-1 1041-1 1033-2 1037-2 1041-2

Low The larger the Medium value is, the High Low darker the color to be adjusted

Magenta

1011-1 1011-2

1015-1 1019-1 1023-1 1027-1 1015-2 1019-2 1023-2 1027-2

Medium becomes. Acceptable High Low values: 0 to Medium 255. High Low Medium High

Cyan

1012-0 1016-0 1020-0 1024-0 1028-0 1012-1 1016-1 1020-1 1024-1 1028-1 1012-2 1016-2 1020-2 1024-2 1028-2 1013-0 1017-0 1021-0 1025-0 1029-0

Black

1013-1 1017-1 1021-1 1025-1 1029-1 1013-2 1017-2 1021-2 1025-2 1029-2

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. Note: Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment. <Procedure> Procedure is same as that of "3.6.2 Gamma balance adjustment".

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 31

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3.6.4 Adjustment of binary image shaving level The binary image shaving level of text output at black mode is adjusted.

Original mode PS 654 PCL 655

Remarks The larger the value is, the narrower the width of text becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 9

<Procedure> Procedure is same as that of 3.6.2 Gamma balance adjustment.

3.6.5 Upper limit value at toner saving mode The upper limit value is adjusted at toner saving mode.
Black mode PS 664 PCL 665 Color mode PS PS PCL PCL 600x600dpi 1200x600dpi 600x600dpi 1200x600dpi 1055 1056 1057 1058 Remarks The smaller the value is, the lighter the density mode of text becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255.

<Procedure> Procedure is same as that of 3.6.2 Gamma balance adjustment.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 32

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

3.7 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function)


3.7.1 Gamma balance adjustment The gamma balance is adjusted by adjusting the density at black mode. The adjustment is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.
Original mode Black Text 881-0 881-1 881-2

Item to be adjusted Low density Medium density High density

Black Text/Photo 880-0 880-1 880-2

Black Photo 882-0 882-1 882-2

Gray scale mode 883-0 883-1 883-2

Remarks The larger the value is, the density of the item to be adjusted becomes darker. Acceptable values: 0 to 255.

<Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) Key in the code corresponding to the desired original mode and press the [START] button. (3) Key in the value corresponding to the density area to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2) and press the [START] button. 0: Low density (L) 1: Medium density (M) 2: High density (H) (4) Key in the adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed-in, press [CLEAR] button.) (5) Press the [ENTER] button to store the value in memory. Returns to the display in step (3). (6) For resetting the value, repeat step (3) to (5). (7) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes back to the ready state. (8) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job. (9) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (8).

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 33

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3.7.2 Density adjustment (Black mode) Adjusts the center density and the variation of density adjustment keys.
Color mode Original mode Text 846 Item to be adjusted Manual density center value Manual density dark step value Manual density 850 851 852 light step value

Text/Photo 845

Photo 847

Remarks The larger the value is, the darker the image becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 The larger the value is, the darker the dark side becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 The larger the value is, the lighter the light side becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 The larger the value is, the darker the image becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255

855
Black

856

857

860

861

862

Automatic density

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. <Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) Key in a code and press the [START] button. (3) Key in an adjustment value (acceptable values: 0 to 255). (To correct a keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.) (4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to the ready state. (5) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job. (6) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 34

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

3.7.3 Background adjustment (Gray scale mode) The adjustment level of background center value and the control of background adjustment key are adjusted.
Code 848 Item to be adjusted Center value Remarks The larger the value is, the background becomes darker. The smaller the value is, the background becomes lighter. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 The larger the value is, the image of the dark steps becomes darker. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 The larger the value is, the image of the light steps becomes lighter. Acceptable values: 0 to 255

858 853

Dark step value Light step value

<Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) Key in the codes and press the [START] button. (3) Key in the adjustment values. Acceptable values : 0 to 255. (To correct the value once keyed-in, press [CLEAR] button.) (4) Press the [SET] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes back to the ready state. (5) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job. (6) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5). 3.7.4 Background adjustment (Color mode) The adjustment level of background center value is adjusted. The control value of background adjustment key is automatically adjusted to the same level as the adjusted center value. For example, when the control value of background adjustment key ranges from 0 to 6, the background center value (-2 to +2) is used to be the range from 6 to 14 accordingly.
Before adjustment +2 +1 0 -1 -2

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 After adjustment Code 1070 1071 1072 Original mode Text Printed image Photo +2 +1 0 -1 -2

Remarks The larger the value is, the background becomes lighter. Acceptable values: 0 to 50

<Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) Key in the codes and press the [START] button. (3) Key in the adjustment values. Acceptable values : 0 to 50. (To correct the value once keyed-in, press [CLEAR] button.) (4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes back to the ready state. (5) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job. (6) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).
August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 3 - 35 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3.7.5 Judgment threshold for ACS The judgment level is adjusted for the automatic identification of whether the original set on the glass is black or color. Namely, this is to adjust the judgment level used when Auto color selection is selected at a color mode. The adjustment is available for both the manually-set original and the original used with the RADF.
Code 1065 Item to be adjusted Judgment threshold for ACS when original is set manually 1066 Judgment threshold for ACS when original is set on RADF Contents The larger the value is, the more an original tends to be judged as black even at an auto-color mode. The smaller the value is, the more it tends to be judged as color. Acceptable values: 0 to 255

<Procedure> Procedure is same as that of "3.7.2 Density adjustment (Black mode)"

3.7.6 Sharpness adjustment If you want to make scan images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment. The adjustment can be made for each of the color modes and original modes independently.
Code 1086 1087 1088 840 841 842 843 Gray scale Color mode Full color Original mode Text Printed image Photo Text/Photo Text Photo Contents The larger the value is, the sharper the image becomes; while the smaller the value is, the softer the image becomes. The smaller the value is, the less moire tends to appear. The acceptable values are 0 to 31. The center value is 16. However, 0 is equivalent to the center value. Note: You have to make adjustment by balancing between moire and sharpness.

Black

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment. <Procedure> Procedure is same as that of "3.7.2 Density adjustment (Black mode)"

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 36

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

3.7.7 Setting range correction The values of the background peak / text peak in the range correction at a black mode can be switched to "varied" or "fixed" in the following codes. If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak affects the reproduction of the background density and the values of the text peak affects that of the text density.
Black Original mode Text/Photo Text Photo 825 826 827

Gray scale 828

Item to be adjusted Range correction for original manually set on the original glass

Remarks The following are the default values set for each original mode. Photo/Text: 12, Text: 12, Photo: 12, Gray scale: 12 Each digit stands for: Ones place: Automatic density mode

830

831

832

833

Range correction for original set on the RADF

Tens place: Manual density mode The setting conditions possible are as follows: Background peak 1: 2: 3: 4: fixed varied fixed varied Text peak fixed fixed varied varied

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment. <Procedure> Procedure is same as that of "3.7.2 Density adjustment (Black mode)" 3.7.8 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) The levels of the background peak for the range correction at a black mode can be set at the following codes.
Black Original mode Text/Photo Text Photo 835 836 837

Gray scale 838

Item to be adjusted Background peak for range correction

Remarks When the value increases, the background (low density section) of the image is not output. Acceptable vales: 0 to 255

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment. <Procedure> Procedure is same as that of "3.7.2 Density adjustment (Black mode)"

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 37

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3.7.9 Fine adjustment of black density The density of black side on scanned image is adjusted at color-scanning.
Code 1075 1076 1077 Original mode Text Printed image Photo Acceptable values: 0 to 255 Remarks The larger the value is, the black side of the image becomes darker.

Note: Be careful for the value not to be too large since gradation reproducibility error occurs in darker side. <Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) Key in the codes and press the [START] button. (3) Key in the adjustment values. Acceptable values : 0 to 4. (To correct the value once keyed-in, press [CLEAR] button.) (4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes back to the ready state. (5) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job. (6) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).

3.7.10 RGB conversion method selection The color space conversion method of image to be printed out is decided at color-scanning.
Code 1080 1081 1082 Original mode Text Printed image Photo 0: sRGB 1: AppleRGB Remarks 2: ROMMRGB 3: AdobeRGB

<Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) Key in the codes and press the [START] button. (3) Key in the adjustment values. Acceptable values : 0 to 3. (To correct the value once keyed-in, press [CLEAR] button.) (4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes back to the ready state. (5) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job. If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 38

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

3.8 High-Voltage Transformer Setting


3.8.1 General description The high-voltage transformers (PS-HVT-359) supply high-voltage to the parts related to charge, development, transfer and drum cleaning. The main high-voltage transformer has the following high-voltage outputs. CH1: CH2: CH3: CH4: CH5: CH6: CH7: Main charger wire Main charger grid bias Color developer bias Black developer bias 1st transfer roller bias 2nd transfer roller bias Cleaning blade bias

Note: Make sure not to lose the data sheets which are attached to the high-voltage transformers. Use these sheets for the following setting. Never move the fixed volumes of resistors since output adjustment is performed when the devices are shipped.

3.8.2 Setting at the replacement of high-voltage transformer After replacing a high-voltage transformer, be sure to enter the data shown on the data sheets (main charger grid bias, color/black developer biases and 1st/2nd transfer roller biases) noted above according to the following procedure. (1) (2) (3) While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn ON the power. Key in the adjusting codes in the table below and press the [START] button. Key in the adjusting value corresponding to each code on the attached sheets, and then press [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT].
Item to be adjusted Main charger grid bias lower limit value Main charger grid bias upper limit value Color developer bias lower limit value Color developer bias upper limit value Black developer bias lower limit value Black developer bias upper limit value 1st transfer roller bias lower limit value 1st transfer roller bias upper limit value 2nd transfer roller bias lower limit value (+) 2nd transfer roller bias upper limit value (+) 2nd transfer roller bias lower limit value (-) 2nd transfer roller bias upper limit value (-) Adjusting value Refer to the data sheets

Adjusting code 334 335 338 339 372 373 250 251 252 253 254 255

(4) (5)

Key in all the codes in the above table by repeating (2) and (3). Turn OFF the power.
3 - 39 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3.9 Adjustment of the Scanner Section


3.9.1 Carriages (1) Installing carriage wires When replacing the carriage wires, refer illustrations below:

[Front side]
Carriage wire Carriage-2 Bracket for carriage-1 Tension spring Hook Idler pulley

Wire pulley

[Rear side]
Carriage-2

Carriage wire Bracket for carriage-1

Idler pulley Hook

Wire pulley

Tension spring

Adjustment of the carriage wire tension is not necessary since a certain tension is applied to the carriage wires by the tension springs. Note: Make sure the tension applied to the wire is normal.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 40

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(2)

Adjusting carriages-1 and -2 positions a. Move the carriage-2 toward the exit side. b. Loosen the screws fixing the front side pulley bracket, make the sections A and B of the carriage-2 touch with the inside of the exit side frame and screw them up.
Carriage-2 Pulley bracket

[Rear]

[Front]

Exit side frame

Enlarged view of carriage


B A

c. Put the carriage-1 on the rail, make the sections C and D of the exit side frame touch with the inside of the exit frame and screw up the front/rear sides of the bracket to fix it.
Carriage-1

[Rear]

[Front]

Exit side frame

Bracket

Bracket

Enlarged view of carriage

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 41

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

(3)

Assembling carriage wires Winding the wire around the wire pulley: a. Pull the 3 ball terminal located at the center of the wire into a hole on the wire pulley. One end of the wire with a hook attached comes to the outside. b. Wind the wires around the wire pulleys of the front and rear sides. The number of turns to be wound are as follows: 2 turns toward the opposite side of the boss 4 turns toward the boss side Notes: Pay attention to the following when the wires are wound around the pulleys: Do not twist the wire. Wind the wires tightly so that they are in complete contact with the surface of the pulleys. Each turn should be pushed against the previously wound turn so that there is no space between them. 4 turns 2 turns
4 turns 2 turns

Ball terminal
No space between turns

Ball terminal

Hook
Color: Silver

Hook

Color: Black

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 42

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

c. After winding the wires around the pulleys, attach the wire holder jigs not to loosen the wires. Notes: 1. When the wire holder jig is attached, make sure that the wire is not shifted or loosened. 2. The wire should come out of the slot of the wire holder jig and be passed under the arm of it.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 43

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3.9.2 Lens unit (1) Replacing the lens unit The lens unit and some part of its components must not be readjusted or replaced in the field since the unit is precisely adjusted. If any of the components is defective, replace the whole unit. When replacing the unit, do not loosen or remove the 4 screws indicated with the arrows.

Handle the unit with care. Do not hold the lens and adjusted part (hold the unit as shown below).

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 44

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(2)

Installation of lens unit Follow the procedure below when installing and replacing the lens unit. <Procedure> 1. Attach the lens unit and fix it temporarily with 2 screws. 2. Match the center scale of the plate in which the unit is to be installed and the rightmost scale of the adjusting hole on the lens unit plate. [Rear]

Screw

[Front]

3. Tighten 2 screws securely to fix the lens unit while pushing it to the rear side.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 45

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3.10 Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System


3.10.1 Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding <Procedure> The center of the printed image shifts to the front side. Move the guide to the front side (Arrow (A) direction in the lower figure). The center of the printed image shifts to the rear side. Move the guide to the rear side (Arrow (B) direction in the lower figure).

Feeding direction Center

Feeding direction Center

[Front]

[Front]

Bypass feeding

Drawer feeding

(B)

(A) (A) (B)

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 46

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

3.11 Adjustment of the Developer Unit


3.11.1 Doctor-to-sleeve gap (black developer unit) Adjustment tool to use: Doctor-sleeve jig Adjusting procedure: (1) Take off the black developer unit from the equipment. (2) Remove 2 screws and take off the developer material cover. Then discharge the developer material.

Developer material cover

Screw

(3)

Remove 2 screws and take off the doctor blade cover.


Screw

Doctor blade cover Screw

(4)

Loosen 2 doctor blade fixing screws. Insert the gauge 0.55 of the doctor sleeve jig between the developer sleeve and doctor blade to adjust the gap, and tighten the screws.

Screw Developer sleeve

Doctor blade Doctor-sleeve jig

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 47

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

(5)

Insert the gauge 0.50 of the doctor sleeve jig into the gap between the developer sleeve and doctor blade and make sure that the gauge can move smoothly in the front/ rear direction. In addition, confirm that the gauge 0.60 cannot be inserted into the gap.
Doctor-sleeve jig

Developer sleeve

Doctor blade

Notes: 1. When confirming and adjusting the gap between the developer sleeve and the doctor blade, insert the gauges into the gap after rotating the developer sleeve so that its marking faces the doctor blade. 2. While reattaching the black developer unit cover, set the latches securely.

3.11.2 Doctor-to-sleeve gap (color developer unit) Adjustment tool to use : Doctor-sleeve jig Adjusting procedure: (1) Take off the color developer unit from the equipment. (2) Remove 2 screws and take off the developer material cover. Then discharge the developer material.
Developer material cover Screw Screw

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 48

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(3)

Remove 4 screws and the toner-scattering prevention seal holder.

Screw

Toner-scattering prevention seal holder

(4)

Loosen 2 doctor blade fixing screws. Insert the gauge 0.55 of the doctor sleeve jig between the developer sleeve and doctor blade to adjust the gap, and tighten the screws.

Developer sleeve

Screw

Doctor blade Doctor-sleeve jig

(5)

Insert the gauge 0.50 of the doctor sleeve jig into the gap between the developer sleeve and doctor blade and make sure that the gauge can move smoothly in the front/ rear direction. In addition, confirm that the gauge 0.60 cannot be inserted into the gap.
Doctor sleeve jig

Developer sleeve

Doctor blade

Notes: 1. When confirming and adjusting the gap between the developer sleeve and the doctor blade, insert the gauges into the gap after rotating the developer sleeve so that its marking faces the doctor blade. 2. While reattaching the color developer unit cover, set the latches securely.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 49

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3.12 Adjustment of the Transfer Section


3.12.1 Adjusting the 2nd transfer roller contact position Perform this adjustment every time the transfer belt unit or 2nd transfer unit is taken off. Adjusting procedure: (1) Loosen 2 screws of the 2nd transfer unit.
2nd transfer unit

Screw

(2)

Open the 2nd transfer unit.

2nd transfer unit

(3)

Remove the harness clamp fixing the highvoltage harness.

Clamp

2nd transfer unit

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 50

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(4)

Rotate the gear and release the clutch while pushing the plate of the clutch with a flathead screwdriver. Make the 2nd transfer roller most protruded.

Gear

Clutch plate

2nd transfer roller

(5)

Close the 2nd transfer unit and tighten 2 screws.

2nd transfer unit

Screw

manuals4you.com

(6)

Open the 2nd transfer unit and fix the harness clamp released at step (3).

Clamp

2nd transfer unit

(7)

Close the 2nd transfer unit.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 51

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3.13 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3015)


TBD

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 52

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

3.14 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1022)


3.14.1 Adjusting the jogging plate width

(1) (2)

Remove the right inner cover and the rear cover. Adjust the front jogging plate to the home position. 1 Set SW1 on the finisher controller PC board as shown in Fig. 3-101. 2 Press SW2 twice on the finisher controller PC board. The front jogging plate moves to the home position. Adjust the rear jogging plate to the home position. 1 Set SW1 on the finisher controller PC board as shown in Fig. 3-102. 2 Press SW2 twice on the finisher controller PC board. The rear jogging plate moves to the home position.

ON

Fig. 3-101

(3)

ON

Fig. 3-102

Rear jogging plate home position

Fig. 3-103

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 53

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

(4) (5) (6)

Measure the jogging width (standard at 317 mm). Remove the processing tray. Loosen the screw on the home position sensor plate at the front.

Screw

Home position sensor plate

Fig. 3-104

(7)

Adjust the position of the front jogging plate home position sensor (S6) with reference to the index. EX. 1 If the width is 319 mm in step (2), the difference from the standard is +2 mm, it requires relocation of the sensor [3] in the direction of arrow A by 2 mm. EX. 2 If the width is 316 mm in step (2), the difference from the standard is -1 mm; it requires relocation of the sensor [3] in the direction of arrow B by 1 mm.

Sensor

Fig. 3-105

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 54

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

3.14.2 Adjusting the angle of the jogging plate (1) Without removing the processing tray unit, loosen the 2 mounting screws of the rear jogging plate.
Screw Rear jogging plate

Fig. 3-106

(2)

Place several sheets of A4/LT paper on the processing tray, and adjust the rear jogging plate. (At this time, adjust the gap between the paper and the front end of the rear jogging plate so that it is 0 to 0.5 mm.)

0 to 0.5 mm Paper Screw

Butted

Rear jogging plate

Fig. 3-107

(3)

With reference to the rear jogging plate adjusted in step (2), adjust the front jogging plate in the same manner.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 55

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3.14.3 Adjusting the overlap of the sensor flag If the overlap between the sensor and the flag is wrong for some reason, perform the following adjustment (1) (2) Remove the processing tray unit. Loosen the mounting screw of the front/rear jogging plate adjusting plate; then, move the adjusting plate to the left and the right.
Jogging plate adjusting plate

Screw

Adjusting plate

Screw

Jogging plate Adjusting plate adjusting plate

Fig. 3-108

(3)

Tighten the screw so that the overlap between the flag of the front/rear jogging rack plate and the sensor is 1.5 to 2.0 mm.

Sensor

Sensor flag

1.5 to 2.0 mm

Fig. 3-109

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 56

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

3.14.4 Adjusting the tension of the stack processing motor belt (1) (2) Remove the inside right cover and the rear cover. Remove the two mounting screws, and detach the grip unit.
Screw Screw

Grip unit

Fig. 3-110

(3)

Loosen the screw on the tension arm plate. (The tension arm plate will be pulled under tension by the tension spring.)

Screw

Tension arm plate

Fig. 3-111

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 57

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

(4)

Move the returning roller shaft to its lower limit (the slack of a belt is lightly taken); then, tighten the screw on the tension arm plate.

Screw

Tension arm plate

Returning roller shaft

Fig. 3-112

Returning roller shaft

(5)

Check to make sure that the returning roller shaft moves smoothly.

Fig. 3-113

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 58

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

3.14.5 Releasing the stack tray guide lever fixing plate (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Remove the right inner cover and the rear cover. Remove the finisher control PC board, PC board bracket and sensor PC board. Remove the stack tray. Remove the stack tray drive unit. Place the stack tray guide lever fixing plate so that it is in view through the hole in the side plate (front, rear). Then remove the fixing screw. (Perform the same for the front and the rear.)

Screw

Note: When removing the mounting screw, be sure to hold the stack tray guide lever up from below.

Stack tray guide lever fixing plate

Fig. 3-114

Stack tray guide lever

Fig. 3-115

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 59

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3.14.6 Adjustment of the upper tray angle (1) Remove the front cover.

Fig. 3-116

(2)

Loosen the screw denoted with the arrow.

Fig. 3-117

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 60

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(3)

The tension becomes loose. While pushing the bracket down, hold the tray and move it up or down, to adjust the angle so that the tray becomes parallel by a visual check.

Fig. 3-118

(4)

After the height adjustment, tighten the fixing screw of the bracket. Note: If the fixing screw of the bracket is not fixed, the belt is loosened which may cause a skipped tooth.

Fig. 3-119

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 61

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3.14.7 DIP switch functions You can simulate various functions by setting the DIP switch (SW1) on the finisher controller PC board appropriately. Initiating Operations 1) Remove any obstacles from the area of operation. 2) Set the DIP switch (SW1) as shown, and turn ON the power (so that LED1 will start to flash). 3) Press the pushing switch (SW2) twice to initiate the operation in question. (LED2 will remain on during operation).
Setting
ON

Item Delivery motor

Operation The delivery roller rotates in a specific speed. The stack delivery lever moves to its home position and stops. The returning roller moves to the home position and stops. When not at the The front jogging plate moves to its home home position When at the home position position and stops. The front jogging plate moves over a specific position and stops at

To stop Press SW2 again. Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4).

1 ON

Stack processing
2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 ON

motor (stack delivery lever) Stack processing motor

1 ON

(returning roller) Front jogging plate motor

ON

Rear jogging plate motor


2 3 4 5 6 7 8

the home position. When not at the The rear jogging plate home position moves to the home position and stops. When at the home position The rear jogging plate moves over a specific

Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Press SW2 again. Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Press SW2 again. Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4).

ON

Upper stack tray motor (up)


2 3 4 5 6 7 8

distance and stops. The upper stack tray moves up and stops when the upper stack tray upper limit sensor turns ON.

ON

Upper stack tray motor (down)


2 3 4 5 6 7 8

The upper stack tray moves down and stops when the lower stack tray lower limit sensor turns ON.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 62

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

Setting
ON

Item Lower stack tray motor (up)


7 8

Operation The lower stack tray moves up and stops when the lower stack tray upper limit sensor is turned ON. The lower stack tray moves down and stops when the lower stack tray lower limit sensor is turned ON. The stapler motor stops after the stapling operation.

To stop Press SW2 again. Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Press SW2 again. Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Press the stapler safety switch (S14). Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4).

1 ON

Lower stack tray motor (down)


2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 ON

Stapler motor
2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

Shipping position operation


2 3 4 5 6 7 8

The upper and lower stack trays move to the shipping position and stop.

Note: Perform the shipping position operation when the finisher is packed again.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 63

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3.15 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1023/24)


TBD

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 64

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

3.16 Key Copy Counter (MU-8, MU-10)


To make a key copy counter available, the following 2 components must be installed to the equipment.

Key copy counter MU-8

Counter socket MU-10

<Installation procedure> (1) Remove the right rear cover, and cut open the window for the key copy counter. (2) Remove the right upper cover.
Right upper cover

Right rear cover

(3)

Pull out the harness connector from the hole of the machine frame, and cut the short harness of the connector. (Treat the cut harness properly to avoid it causing a shortcircuit with the machine frame.) Then, disconnect the dummy connector.

Harness connector Dummy connector

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

3 - 65

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

(4)

(5) (6)

Connect the connector of the counter socket to the harness connector of the equipment side. Install the counter socket to the machine frame with two M3 screws. Reattach the cover.

Harness connector

Screw

Counter socket

(7)

Insert the key copy counter with its arrow mark pointing the rear side of the equipment.
Key copy counter

(8)

Key in the value 3 in the setting mode (08222).

e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT

3 - 66

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)


4.1 PM Support Mode
4.1.1 General description The timing for the parts replacement usually depends on the number of output pages ever printed after they were replaced before. However, the life span of them changes depending on the general use of users and the environment in which the equipment is placed. Therefore, it is necessary to consider not only the number of output pages but also the driving counts when deciding the timing for the parts replacement in order to utilize the parts and materials effectively. In addition, the drum rotates 4 times at color mode to transfer the images of 4 colors on the transfer belt, overlaying one after another. Therefore, the number of output pages is counted as 4 for 1 page. This equipment has the PM support mode, which makes it possible to see the general use of each part (the number of output pages, driving counts) and replacement record and to do a counter clearing operation more efficiently when replacing. The replacement record can be printed out in the list printing mode (9S-103). 4.1.2 Operational flow and operational screen (1) Operational flow
PM support mode activated [6]+[START]+[POWER]ON [RETURN] pressed [2] [1] [START] Auto-toner automatical adjustment performed ( Chapter 3.2)

Adjustment finished

[START] Main unit chosen [SUB UNIT] pressed

Main screen Main unit list displayed

[RETURN] pressed Main unit chosen [RESET]

[CANCEL] pressed

Sub screen Sub unit list displayed

Clear finished

Clear screen Counter clear confirmation displayed

[CANCEL] pressed Sub unit chosen [RESET] pressed

[INITIALIZE] pressed Clear finished Counter clear performed

* The screen goes back to the main screen when the counter clear is performed or the [CANCEL] button is pressed after moving from the main screen, while it goes back to the sub screen after moving from the sub screen.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

4-1

e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

(2) (a)

Operational screen Main screen

10

Displaying of the main unit name Back to the PM support mode activation screen Clearing of the chosen unit counters (all the sub unit (parts) counters belonging to that unit) All counters are cleared when the unit is not selected Moving to the sub screen Moving to the next/previous page Displaying of the standard number of output pages/develop counts (x1000) to replace the unit parts Displaying of the present driving counts (x1000) Displaying of the standard number of driving counts (x1000) to replace the unit parts Displaying of the present number of output pages/develop counts (x1000) When there are differences among the sub units (parts), _ is displayed and CHECK SUBUNIT is displayed at the top Displaying of the number of output pages/develop counts (Page/D. cnt), driving counts (Cnt.) and previous replacement date (Chg.) for a chosen unit When the replacement date for the sub unit is different, press the [SUB UNIT] button to move to the sub screen and see each information, otherwise information is not displayed Notes: 1. is always displayed at the driving time section for the reversing automatic document feeder (RADF) and feed unit. 2. is displayed at the numeric section for the paper source which is not installed since the paper source is different depending on the structure of options.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

4-2

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(b)

Sub screen

Displaying of the sub unit (parts) name Back to the main screen Clearing of the chosen sub unit (parts) counters Moving to the next/previous page Displaying of the present number of output pages/develop counts (x1000) Displaying of the standard number of output pages/develop counts (x1000) to replace the sub unit (parts) Displaying of the present driving counts (x1000) Displaying of the standard number of driving counts (x1000) to replace the subunit (parts) Displaying of the number of output pages/develop counts, driving counts and previous replacement date for a chosen sub unit

(c)

Clear screen

When the [INITIALIZE] button is pressed, Present number of output pages/develop counts and Present driving counts are cleared and Previous replacement date is updated.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

4-3

e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

(3)

Access tree Note: The name inside [ ] is displayed on the LCD screen. Main screen Drum/cleaner unit [CLEANER/DRUM] Main charger unit [MAIN CHARGER] Sub screen Drum [DRUM] Drum cleaning blade [DRUM BLADE] Drum cleaning brush [DRUM BRUSH] Main charger grid [GRID] Main charger wire [MAIN CHARGER WIRE] Main charger wire pad [WIRE CLEANING PAD] Ozone filter [OZONE FILTER]

Ozone filter [FILTER] Black developer unit [BLACK DEVELOPER] Color developer unit [COLOR DEVELOPER]

Developer material K [BLACK DEVELOPER]

Developer material Y [YELLOW DEVELOPER] Developer material M [MAGENTA DEVELOPER] Developer material C [CYAN DEVELOPER] 1st transfer roller [1st TRANSFER ROLLER] Transfer belt [TRANSFER BELT] Transfer belt cleaning blade [BELT BLADE] 2nd transfer roller [2nd TRANSFER ROLLER] 2nd transfer roller cleaning brush [2nd TRANSFER BRUSH] Fuser belt [FUSER BELT] Pressure roller [PRESS ROLLER] Oil roller [OIL ROLLER] Cleaning roller [CLEANING ROLLER] Separation finger [PRESS ROLLER FINGER] Fuser belt guide [BELT GUIDE] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(1st CST.)] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(1st CST.)] Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(1st CST.)] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(2nd CST.)] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(2nd CST.)] Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(2nd CST.)] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(SFB)] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(SFB)] Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(SFB)] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(RADF)] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(RADF)] Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(RADF)]

Transfer belt unit [1st TRANSFER]

2nd transfer roller unit [2nd TRANSFER] Fuser unit [FUSER]

Upper drawer [1st CST.]

Lower drawer [2nd CST.]

Bypass unit [SFB]

RADF [RADF]

e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

4-4

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

LCF [LCF]

Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(LCF)] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(LCF)] Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(LCF)] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(3rd CST.)] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(3rd CST.)] Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(3rd CST.)] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(4th CST.)] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(4th CST.)] Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(4th CST.)]

PFP upper drawer [3rd CST.]

PFP lower drawer [4th CST.]

ma
August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

.c 4you nuals
4-5

om

e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

4.1.3 Work flow of parts replacement The timing for the parts replacement usually depends on the number of printouts ever made after they were replaced before. However, its driving time is also to be considered when replacing the parts. Even if the number of printouts has reached the level of replacement, for instance, the part may still be usable with its driving time not reaching the specified driving count. On the other hand, the part may need replacement even if the number of printouts has not reached the level of replacement with its driving time exceeding the specified driving count. The life span of some parts such as feed roller is heavily dependent on the number of printouts rather than the driving count. The following work flow diagram shows how to judge the timing of replacement with the number of printouts and the driving count. The number of output pages is counted as 4 for 1 page at color mode. Example 1: When the number of printouts has reached the specified level The parts in RADF The parts in feeding system The parts in the drum/cleaner unit The parts in the transfer belt unit Toner bag The parts in the fuser unit

Replace the part. Check the driving time count at PM support mode. Does it exceed the specified driving time count? No The part is still usable. Yes

Replace the part.

Replace the part after the driving count has reached the specified count. Example 2: When the image failure occurred before the number of printouts has reached the specified level Check the driving time count of all parts at PM support mode.

Does it exceed the specified driving time count?

Replace the part.

Check the part and equipment according to the TROUBLE SHOOTING.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

4-6

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

4.2 General Descriptions for PM Procedure


(1) Preparation a. Ask the user about the current conditions of the equipment and note them down. b. Before starting maintenance, make some sample copies and store them. c. See the replacement record and check the parts to be replaced in the PM support mode (6S2) or list printing mode (9S-103). 6S-2 : [6]+[START]+[POWER]ON [2] [START] 9S-103 : [9]+[START]+[POWER]ON [103] [START] d. Turn OFF the power and make sure to unplug the equipment. Perform a preventive maintenance using the following checklist and illustrations. Refer to the Service Manual if necessary. Plug in the equipment after the maintenance has been finished. Then turn ON the power and make some copies to confirm that the equipment is working properly.

(2) (3)

4.3 Operational Items in Overhauling


(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Replace all the supplies. Check the components in the drive section (gears, pulleys, timing belts, etc.). Replace them with new ones if they are damaged. Check all the adhesives such as tape and Mylars if they are damaged or have become unstuck. Replace them with new ones if necessary. Check the performance of all the switches and sensors. Replace them with new ones if necessary. Clean inside the equipment thoroughly.

4.4 Preventive Maintenance Checklist


Symbols used in the checklist
Cleaning A Clean with alcohol Clean with soft pad, cloth or vacuum cleaner SI W L Lubrication Launa 40 Coating Silicon oil White grease (Molycoat) AV Alvania No.2 Replacement The number of sheets or developments consumed before replacement (Value x 1,000) Replace if deformed or damaged Operation check After cleaning or replacement, confirm there is no problem. Date User name Serial No. Inspectors name Remarks

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

4-7

e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

[Preventive Maintenance Checklist] Notes: 1. Perform cleaning and lubricating in every 120,000 copies for the e-STUDIO3511, and every 150,000 copies for the e-STUDIO4511. Lubricate the replacement parts following to the replacement cycle. 2. Values under Replacement indicate the replacement cycle for the e-STUDIO3511/e-STUDIO4511. 3. The replacement cycle of the parts in the feeding section equals to the number of sheets fed from each paper source. 4. Be careful not to put oil on the rollers, belts and belt pulleys when lubricating.

A. Scanner
Items to check A1. Original glass A2. ADF original glass A3. Mirror-1 A4. Mirror-2 A5. Mirror-3 A6. Reflector A7. Lens A8. Exposure lamp A9. Automatic original detection sensor A10. Slide sheet (front and rear) Cleaning or A or A Lubrication Replace- Operation Parts list ment Remarks check <P-I> (x1,000
sheets)

*a1

or A

B. Laser unit
Items to check B1. Slit glass Cleaning Lubrication Replace- Operation Parts list Remarks ment check <P-I> (x1,000
sheets)

C. Feed unit
Items to check C1. C2. C3. C4. C5 C6. C7. C8. C9. Pickup roller Feed roller Separation roller Transport roller Paper guide Drive gear (tooth face and shaft) GCB bushing bearing Registration roller Paper dust removal brush Cleaning Lubrication W W A W L A *c1 Replace- Operation Parts list Remarks ment check <P-I> (x1,000
sheets)

80/80 80/80 80/80

P18-I20 P18-I24 P18-I5

e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

4-8

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

D. Automatic duplexing unit


Items to check D1. Transport roller (upper, middle and lower) D2. One side of the GCB bushig to which the shaft is inserted D3. One side of the plastic bushing to which the shaft is inserted D4. Paper guide Cleaning A Lubrication Replace- Operation Parts list Remarks ment check <P-I> (x1,000
sheets)

L W

E. Bypass feed unit


Items to check E1. E2. E3. E4. E5. E6. Pickup roller Feed roller Separation roller Bypass tray Drive gear (tooth face and shaft) GCB bushing bearing Cleaning Lubrication Replace- Operation Parts list ment Remarks check <P-I> (x1,000
sheets)

80/80 80/80 80/80 W L

P22-I26 P22-I37 P22-I1

F. Main charger
Items to check F1. F2. F3. F4. F5. Main charger case Main charger wire Contact point of terminals Charger wire cleaning pad Main charger grid Cleaning Lubrication Replace- Operation Parts list Remarks ment check <P-I> (x1,000
developments)

160/200 160/200 160/200

P28-I19 P28-I26

*f1 *f1

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

4-9

e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

G. Drum/cleaner related section


Items to check G1. G2. G3. G4. G5. G6. G7. G8. G9. Photoconductive drum Drum shaft bearing Whole cleaner unit Drum cleaning blade Drum cleaning brush Recovery blade Used toner auger drive section Discharge lamp Ozone filter Cleaning Lubrication Replace- Operation Parts list Remarks ment check <P-I> (x1,000
developments)

160/200

160/200 160/200 W 160/200

P32-I38 P32-I29

*g1 *g1 *g2

P14-I50

H. Toner bag
Items to check H1. Toner bag Cleaning Lubrication Replace- Operation Parts list Remarks ment check <P-I> (x1,000
developments)

50/50

I. Black developer unit


Items to check I1. I2. I3. I4. I5. I6. I7. I8. Whole black developer unit Black developer unit drive section Developer material (K) Front shield Oil seal (6pcs.) Guide roller Toner cartridge drive gear Side shield Cleaning Lubrication Replace- Operation Parts list Remarks ment check <P-I> (x1,000
developments)

W 120/150 AV or A W 360/450 *i1 *i2

e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

4 - 10

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

J. Color developer unit/Revolver unit


Items to check J1. Whole color developer unit (Y, M and C) J2. Color developer unit drive section (Y, M and C) J3. Developer material (Y, M, and C) J4. Front shield (Y, M and C) J5. Oil seal (6pcs. for each color) J6. Guide roller (Y, M and C) J7. Toner cartridge drive gear (Y, M and C) J8. Revolver drive gear J9. Color auto-toner sensor J10. Side shield Cleaning Lubrication Replace- Operation Parts list Remarks ment check <P-I> (x1,000
developments)

W 30/37.5 AV or A W W AV 360/450 *j1 *j2

*j3

K. Transfer belt unit


Items to check K1. K2. K3. K4. K5. K6. K7. Transfer belt 1st transfer roller Transfer belt drive roller Transfer belt driven roller Transfer belt cleaning blade Image quality sensor Transfer belt home position sensor (2 pcs.) K8. Transfer belt recovery blade Cleaning Lubrication Replace- Operation Parts list ment Remarks check <P-I> (x1,000
developments)

240/300 240/300 A A 240/300

P30-I34 *k1 *k1 P31-I11 *k2 *k3 *k4

L. 2nd transfer roller unit


Items to check L1. 2nd transfer roller L2. 2nd transfer roller cleaning brush Cleaning Lubrication Replace- Operation Parts list Remarks ment check <P-I> (x1,000
sheets)

120/150 120/150

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 11

e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

M. Fuser unit
Items to check M1. M2. M3. M4. M5. M6. M7. M8. M9. Fuser belt Pressure roller Separation finger Oil roller Cleaning roller Thermistor (3pcs.) Fuser unit drive gear Exit roller Fuser belt guide Cleaning Lubrication Replace- Operation Parts list ment Remarks check <P-I> (x1,000
sheets)

120/150 120/150 120/150 120/150 120/150 A W A 120/150

P40-I1 P39-I25 *M2

*M1

N. RADF (MR-3015)
Items to check N1. Pickup roller N2. Feed roller N3. Separation roller N4. Original length sensor N5. Registration roller N6. First roller N7. 2nd roller N8. Read sensor N9. Read guide N10. Read roller N11. 3rd roller N12. 4th roller N13. Reverse sensor N14. Exit roller N15. Reverse roller N16. Platen sheet Cleaning Lubrication Replace- Operation Parts list Remarks ment check <P-I> (x1,000
sheets)

80/80 80/80 80/80 A A A

A A A A A or A

e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

4 - 12

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

O. PFP (KD-1011)
Items to check O1. O2. O3. O4. Pickup roller (upper/lower) Feed roller (upper/lower) Separation roller (upper/lower) Drive gear (tooth face) Cleaning A A A Lubrication Replace- Operation Parts list ment Remarks check <P-I> (x1,000
sheets)

AV W

80/80 80/80 80/80

P. LCF (KD-1012)
Items to check O1. O2. O3. O4. Pickup roller Feed roller Separation roller Drive gear (tooth face) Cleaning A A A W Lubrication Replace- Operation Parts list Remarks ment check <P-I> (x1,000
sheets)

160/160 160/160 160/160

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 13

e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

A2 A4 A5

A8 A6

A3

A1

A7

A10

J9

G1 G2

A9 K5 K4 K6 K2

M8 K4 G3 M5 G7 M4 G6 M6

M9

M1 M3

M2 D1 D4 G9 K6 D1 K3 L1 L2 C8 D1 E1 E4

G5

J1 J3 J4 J5 J10

I1 I3 I4 I5 I8 C4 C2 C3

E2 E3 C4 C2 C3

F5

F2 F4

F1 G8 F3

K1 H1 B1 C1

C5

[Front side]

e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

4 - 14

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

N5

N4

N2

N3 N1

N6 N8 N7

N9 N10 N11 N12

N13

N14

N15

N16

[Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF)]


O1 O2

O3

O2 O3

O1

[Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP)]


P1 P2

P3

[Large Capacity Feeder (LCF)]


August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 4 - 15 e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Remarks * in the Preventive Maintenance Check List *a1. Original glass Clean both sides of the original glass. Note: Make sure that there is no fingerprints or oil staining on part of the original glass on where the original scale is mounted since the shading correction plate is located below the scale to be scanned. *c1. Drive gears in the paper feeding section (teeth of gears and shafts) Apply some white molycote to the teeth of gears and shafts of the drive gears. Note: Make sure that oil is not running over or scattered around as the gear is rotated coming into the clutch after applying molycote to the gear which is located near the clutch. The quantity of molycote should be smaller than that to be applied to the other parts. *f1. Main charger case/Main charger wire Clean the main charger case and wire with a cloth soaked in water and squeezed tightly, and then wipe them with a dry cloth. Note: Be careful of the following when attaching a new wire (length: 371mm). Insert the wire securely into the V-grooves of the front and rear sides. Do not twist the wire. Do not touch the wire with your bare hand. *g1. Drum cleaning blade/Drum cleaning brush Since the edge of the blade is vulnerable and can be easily damaged by factors such as the adherence of paper dust. Replace the cleaning blade and brush with new ones if poor images are copied due to the damaged blade regardless of the number of copies which have been made. Recovery blade Replace the recovery blade regardless the number of copies if the edge of the blade get damaged Developer material After replacing the developer material, be sure to perform the auto-toner adjustment and then enforced performing of image quality closed-loop control. ( Chapter 3.2 ).

*g2.

*i1, j1.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

4 - 16

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

*i2.

Oil seal (Black developer unit) Mixer unit (Shafts of mixers-1 & -2) Developer sleeve Oil seal (Color developer unit) Mixer unit (Shafts of mixers-1 & -2) Developer sleeve

4 pcs. 2 pc.

*j2.

4 pcs. 2 pc.

Note: Lubricate the oil seal only when the oil seal is replaced. During replacement, coat the oil seal with grease (Alvanian No.2). (1) Push in a new oil seal parallel to the mounting hole section of the developer frame or outside of the nozzle mixer. * Pay attention to the direction in which the oil seal is attached. (See figure on right.) (2) Apply an even coat of grease to the inside of the oil seal. Inside Amount: About two small drops (3) Wipe off any grease exuded from the inside.

Developer frame (Nozzle mixer)

Outside

Grease

Oil seal

*k1.

Transfer belt drive roller/Transfer belt driven roller Fully clean up the toner and such adhered to the roller with alcohol since an image failure may occur if there are any bolts remaing on the roller.

Blot *k2. Area around image quality sensor Clean the shutter of the image quality sensor and around it. Do not touch the sensor head inside the shutter. Clean each surface of transfer belt home position sensors (2 pcs.) with a dry cloth when replacing the transfer belt. Clean the surface of transfer belt recovery blade with a cloth soaked in water and tightly squeezed, and the wipe it with a dry cloth when replacing the transfer belt cleaning blade.
4 - 17 e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

*k3.

*k4.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

*j3.

The head of color auto-toner sensor is to be cleaned with a cotton swab or soft cloth. The reference plate is to be cleaned by blowing off the adhered toner with an air-spray type cleaner such as a blower brush or air duster. During replacement, coat the shaft of sensor shutter with the grease (Alvania No.2).
Color auto toner sensor unit

Color auto toner sensor unit Reference plate Head of color auto toner sensor

Note: Never clean the reference plate by touching it directly (e.g. brushing away the dust) since the surface of reference plate will be scratched. *M1. Separation finger The paper jam may be caused if the tip of the finger is damaged or deformed. If there is any problem with it, replace the finger with a new one regardless of the number of copies which have been made. Do not damage the tip of the finger during the cleaning. The finger may be damaged if the toner adhering to the tip of it is scraped off forcibly. Replace the finger if the toner is sticking to it heavily. Thermistor Clean the thermistor with alcohol if the toner or dirt is sticking to it when the fuser roller is replaced. Do not deform or damage the thermistor during the cleaning. Replace the thermistor with a new one if it is damaged or deformed regardless of degree.

*M2.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

4 - 18

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

4.5 PM KIT
Item EPU-KIT-3511 Product name Drum cleaning blade Main charger wire Main charger grid Drum cleaning brush Ozone filter Charger wire cleaning pad DEV-KIT-3511CLR Developer material (Y) Developer material (M) Developer material (C) Cleaning jig TBU-KIT-3511 Transfer belt Transfer belt cleaning blade 1st transfer roller DEV-KIT-3511 Developer material (K) Cleaning jig 2nd transfer roller 2nd transfer roller cleaning brush FR-KIT-3511 Fuser belt Pressure roller Separation finger Oil roller Cleaning roller Fuser belt guide ROL-KIT-16CST Pick up roller Feed roller Separation roller ROL-KIT-1010 Pick up roller Feed roller Separation roller DF-KIT-3015 Pick up roller Feed roller Separation roller BL-3511D WIRE-CHARGR-373 GRID-220 B-3511 FILTER-OZ-TK ASYS-PAD-CHARGR-350 D-3511-Y D-3511-M D-3511-C JIG-CLEAN-DOC BT-3511TR BL-3511TR CR-3511TR1 D-3511-K JIG-CLEAN-DOC CR-3511TR2 FP-3511TR2 BT-3511-FU HR-3511-L SCRAPER-HR SR-3511U B-3511U COLOR-HR-IN ROLLER-PICK-AT K-ROLL-FEED K-ROLL-SPT ROL-PICK-UP ROL-PAPER-FED-F ROL-PAPER-FED-S ROL-PICK-UP ROL-FEED ROL-SPT-513 Part name Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 19

e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

4.6 Jig List


Parts list Item Page Door switch jig Test chart (A4) Test chat (LT) Test chart No. TCC-1 (A4) Test chart No. TCC-1 (LT) Doctor blade cleaning jig Downloading jig (DLM board) Wire holder jig Download JIG-2 (6 Flash ROMs) Download JIG-1 (6 Flash ROMs) ROM writer adapter (For 1881) ROM writer adapter (For 1931) Doctor sleeve jig Developer material nozzle 101 101 101 101 101 101 102 101 102 102 102 102 101 101 Item 1 3 3 2 2 4 1 5 2 3 4 5 7 6

4.7 Grease List


Grease name SI Silicon oil L Launa 40 W White grease (Molykote HP-300) W White grease (Molykote HP-300) AV Alvania No.2 Part name ASM-SILOCON-1M OIL-LAUNA40-100 ASM-PG-HP300-S GREASE-HP-S ASM-GE334C-S Volume 100cc 100cc 100g 10g 100g Container Bottle Oiler Bottle Bottle Tube Parts list Page 101 101 101 101 101 Item 8 9 10A 10B 11

e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

4 - 20

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

4.8 Precautions for Storing and Handling Supplies


4.8.1 Precautions for storing TOSHIBA supplies A. Toner/Developer Toner and developer should be stored in a place where the ambient temperature is between 10 to 35C (no condensation), and should also be protected against direct sunlight during transportation. B. Photoconductive drum Like the toner and developer, photoconductive drum should be stored in a dark place where the ambient temperature is between 10 to 35C (no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where drums may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes. Drum cleaning blade/Transfer belt cleaning blade This item should be stored in a flat place where the ambient temperature is between 10 to 35C, and should also be protected against high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes. Transfer belt/Transfer roller/Fuser belt/Pressure roller Avoid places where the rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes. Oil roller/Cleaning roller Avoid places where the rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes. They should also be stored horizontally on a flat surface. Copy paper Avoid storing copy paper in places where it may be subjected to high humidity. After a package is opened, be sure to place and store it in a storage bag.

C.

D.

E.

F.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

4 - 21

e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

4.8.2 Checking and cleaning of photoconductive drum (1) Use of gloves If fingerprints or oil adhere to the drum surface, the property of the photosensitive drum may degrade, affecting the quality of the copy image. So, do not touch the drum surface with bare hands. (2) Handling precautions As the photoconductive drum surface is very sensitive, be sure to handle the drum carefully when installing and removing it so as not damage its surface. Be sure to apply patting powder (lubricant) to the entire surface of the drum and separation claws on the cleaner before installing the drum into the equipment. When the drum has been replaced with a new one, the drum counter (setting mode 08, code 1150) must be cleared to 0 (zero). Notes: 1. Application of the patting powder is for reducing the friction between the drum, cleaning blade, and separation fingers. If the application of patting powder is neglected, the drum and cleaning blade may be damaged. 2. When paper fibers or dint adhere to the cleaning blade edge, they may reduce the cleaning efficiency and, in addition, may damage the blade and the drum. Be sure to remove any fibers found adhering to the blade. (3) Installation of equipment and storage of drum Avoid installing the equipment where it may be subjected to high temperature, high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes. Do not place the drum in a location where it is exposed to direct sunlight or high intensity light such as near a window. Otherwise the drum will fatigue, and will not produce sufficient image density immediately after being installed in the equipment. Cleaning the drum At periodic maintenance calls, wipe the entire surface of the drum clean using the designated cleaning cotton. Use sufficiently thick cleaning cotton (dry soft pad) so as not to scratch the drum surface inadvertently with your fingertips or nails. Also, remove your rings and wristwatch before starting cleaning work to prevent accidental damage to the drum. Do not use alcohol, selenium refresher and other organic solvents or silicon oil as they will have an adverse effect on the drum. Scratches on photoconductive drum surface If the surface is scratched in such a way that the aluminum substrate is exposed, no copy image will be produced on this area. In addition, the cleaning blade will be damaged so replacement with a new drum will be necessary. Collecting used photoconductive drums Regarding the recovery and disposal of used photoconductive drums, we recommend following the relevant local regulations or rules.

(4)

(5)

(6)

e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

4 - 22

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

4.8.3 Checking and cleaning of drum cleaning blade and transfer belt cleaning blade (1) Handling precautions Pay attention to the following points as the cleaning blade life is determined by the condition of its edge: Do not allow hard objects to hit or rub against blade edge. Do not rub the edge with a cloth or soft pad. Do not leave oil (or fingerprints, etc.) on the edge. Do not apply solvents such as paint thinner to the blade. Do not allow paper fibers or dirt to contact the blade edge. Do not place the blade near a heat source. (2) Cleaning procedure Clean the blade edge with a cloth moistened with water and squeezed lightly.

4.8.4 Handling of drum cleaning brush and transfer roller cleaning brush Do not touch the brush surface with bare hands. 4.8.5 Handling of transfer belt (1) Do not touch the belt surface with bare hands. (2) Prevent oil or other foreign matter from adhering to the belt surface. (3) Do not touch the transfer belt with alcohol or other organic solvents. (4) Do not apply external pressure that might scratch the transfer belt. 4.8.6 Checking and cleaning of fuser belt and pressure roller (1) Handling precautions Fuser belt Do not touch the belt surface with bare hands. Prevent oil or other foreign matter from staining the belt surface. Do not allow alcohol or any other organic solvent to contact with the fuser belt. Do not apply external pressure that might scratch the fuser belt. Pressure roller Do not leave any oil (fingerprints, etc.) on the pressure roller. Be careful not to allow any hard object to hit or rub against the pressure roller, or it may be damaged, possibly resulting in poor cleaning. (2) Checking Check for stain and damage on the fuser belt and pressure roller, and clean if necessary. Check the separation guide and fingers and check for chipped tips. Check the cleaning effect of the cleaning roller. Check the thermistors for proper contact with the pressure roller. Check the fused and fixed condition of the toner. Check the gap between the inlet guide and pressure roller. Check the fuser belt for proper transportation. Check the pressure roller for proper rotation.
4 - 23 e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

(3)

Cleaning procedure When fuser belt and pressure roller become dirty, they will cause jamming. If this happens, wipe the surface clean with a suitable cloth. For easier cleaning, clean the belt and roller while they are still warm. Note: Be careful not to rub the fuser belt and pressure roller surface with your nails or hard objects because it can be easily damaged. Do not use silicone oil on the fuser belt and pressure roller.

(4)

Checking after the assembly of the fuser belt unit After the assembly, rotate the fuser belt for a round to confirm that the belt is neither folded nor scratched. A folded or scratched belt may be broken when it is in use.

4.8.7 Checking and replacing the oil roller and cleaning roller (1) Handling precautions Never allow solvents such as point thinner to touch to the oil/cleaning rollers. (2) Poor cleaning and corrective treatment Judgment should be made depending on how much toner has been deposited on the fuser belt surface. When its surface is stained with toner, check the oil roller and cleaning roller. If toner is heavily adhered on the oil/cleaning rollers, it means the cleaning performance is declined and the oil/cleaning rollers should be replaced with new ones. The oil/cleaning rollers are gradually degraded due to subjection to the heat from the fuser belt over a long period of time. Replace them after the specified number of printouts have been made.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

4 - 24

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

5. TROUBLESHOOTING
<CAUTION IN REPLACING PC BOARDS> The ID for each equipment is registered on the LGC board, the DRV board, and the SYS board. So, if their replacement is required, be sure to replace only one board at a time If more than one of the LGC board, the DRV board and the SYS board require replacement, replace them in the following procedure. 1. First, replace one of the board to be replaced. 2. Turn the power ON and confirm that "READY" is displayed. 3. Turn the power OFF. 4. Replace another board that requires replacement. 5. Repeat steps 2 to 4.

5.1 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code


5.1.1 Paper transport jam (paper exit section) [E010] Jam not reaching the exit sensor [E020] Stop jam at the exit sensor Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper on the transport path? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[H]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the exit sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN358 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the exit sensor. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the registration clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-108/158) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the registration clutch is disconnected. Check if the connector CN362 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the registration clutch. Replace the LGC board.

YES Check the registration roller. Replace it if it is worn out.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5-1

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1.2 Paper misfeeding [E110] ADU misfeeding (paper not reaching the registration sensor)

Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the registration sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check:03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the registration sensor. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the ADU clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-xxx) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the ADU clutch is disconnected. Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the ADU clutch. Replace the LGC board.

YES Check the rollers in the ADU. Replace them if they are worn out. [E120] Bypass misfeeding (paper not reaching the registration sensor) Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the registration sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check in: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open-circuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the registration sensor. 6. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the bypass feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-204) NO 1. Check if the connector of the bypass feed clutch is disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open-circuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the bypass feed clutch. 6. Replace the LGC board.

YES Check the bypass feed roller and separation pad. Replace them if they are worn out.
e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING 5-2 August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[E130] Upper drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor) Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the upper drawer feed sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the upper drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the upper drawer feed sensor. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the upper drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-201) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed clutch is disconnected. Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the upper drawer feed clutch. Replace the LGC board.

YES Check the upper drawer feed roller and separation roller. Replace them if they are worn out. [E140] Lower drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor) Open the side cover. Is there any paper in front of the lower drawer feed sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the lower drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the lower drawer feed sensor. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the lower drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-202) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed clutch is disconnected. Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the lower drawer feed clutch. Replace the LGC board.

YES Check the lower drawer feed roller and separation roller. Replace them if they are worn out.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5-3

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[E150] PFP upper drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor) Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the PFP upper drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor is disconnected. 2. Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 6. Replace the PFP upper drawer feed sensor. 7. Replace the PFP board. 8. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the PFP upper drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-226) NO 1. Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed clutch is disconnected. 2. Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 6. Replace the PFP upper drawer feed clutch. 7. Replace the PFP board. 8. Replace the LGC board.

YES Check the PFP upper drawer feed roller and separation roller. Replace them if they are worn out.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5-4

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[E160] PFP lower drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP lower drawer feed sensor) Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP lower drawer feed sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the PFP lower drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the PFP lower drawer feed sensor is disconnected. 2. Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short- or opencircuited. 6. Replace the PFP lower drawer feed sensor. 7. Replace the PFP board. 8. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the PFP lower drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-228) NO 1. Check if the connector of the PFP lower drawer feed clutch is disconnected. 2. Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 6. Replace the PFP lower drawer feed clutch. 7. Replace the PFP board. 8. Replace the LGC board.

YES Check the PFP lower drawer feed roller and separation roller. Replace them if they are worn out.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5-5

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[E190] LCF misfeeding (paper not reaching the LCF feed sensor) Open the LCF side cover. Is there any paper in front of the LCF feed sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the LCF feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[G]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the LCF feed sensor is disconnected. 2. Check if either of the connectors CN100 or CN104 on the LCF board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 6. Replace the LCF feed sensor. 7. Replace the LCF board. 8. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the LCF feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-209) NO 1. Check if the connector of the LCF feed clutch is disconnected. 2. Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN101 and CN103 on the LCF board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 6. Replace the LCF feed clutch. 7. Replace the LCF board. 8. Replace the LGC board.

YES Check the LCF feed roller and separation roller. Replace them if they are worn out.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5-6

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

5.1.3 Paper transport jam (paper pickup and transport section) [E200] Upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor) Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the registration sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the registration sensor. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the upper drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-201) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed clutch is disconnected. Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board for short- or open-circuited. Replace the upper drawer feed clutch. Replace the LGC board.

YES Check the upper drawer feed roller and separation roller. Replace them if they are worn out.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5-7

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[E220] [E300] [E330] [E3C0]

Lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor) PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor) PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor) LCF transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)

Open the jam access cover. Is there paper in front of the registration sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the registration sensor. Replace the LGC board.

YES Are the upper transport clutches (high/low speed) working? (Perform the output check: 03-203, 205) NO 1. Check if the connectors of the upper transport clutches (high/low speed) are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN362 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the upper transport clutches (high/low speed). 6. Replace the LGC board.

YES Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5-8

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[E210] [E310] [E340] [E3D0]

Lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor) PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor) PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor) LCF transport jam (not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor)

Open the jam access cover. Is there paper in front of the upper drawer feed sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the upper drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the upper drawer feed sensor. Replace the LGC board.

YES Are the lower transport clutches (high/low speed) working? (Perform the output check: 03-203, 205) NO 1. Check if the connectors of the lower transport clutches (high/low speed) are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the lower transport clutches (high/low speed). 6. Replace the LGC board.

YES Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5-9

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[E320] PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor) [E350] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor) [E3E0] LCF transport jam (not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor) Open the side cover. Is there paper in front of the lower drawer feed sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the lower drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the lower drawer feed sensor. Replace the LGC board.

YES Are the lower transport clutches working? (Perform the output check: 03-203, 205) NO 1. Check if the connectors of the lower transport clutches (high/low speed) are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the lower transport clutches (high/low speed). 6. Replace the LGC board.

YES Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 10

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[E360] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor) Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the PFP upper feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor is disconnected. 2. Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 6. Replace the PFP upper drawer feed sensor. 7. Replace the PFP board. 8. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the PFP transport clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-225) NO 1. Check if the connector of the PFP transport clutch is disconnected. 2. Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 6. Replace the PFP transport clutch. 7. Replace the PFP board. 8. Replace the LGC board.

YES Check the PFP transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 11

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[E510] ADU transport stop jam Open the ADU. Is there any paper in front of the ADU exit sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the ADU exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[H]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the ADU exit sensor is disconnected. 2. Check if either of the connectors CN211 or CN213 on the ADU board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 6. Replace the ADU exit sensor. 7. Replace the ADU board. 8. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the ADU clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-xxx) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the ADU clutch is disconnected. Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the ADU clutch. Replace the LGC board.

YES Check the rollers in the ADU. Replace them if they are worn out.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 12

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[E520] Stop jam in the ADU Open the ADU. Is there any paper in front of the ADU entrance sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the ADU entrance sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[G]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the ADU entrance sensor is disconnected. 2. Check if either of the connectors CN211 or CN214 on the ADU board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 6. Replace the ADU entrance sensor. 7. Replace the ADU board. 8. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the exit motor (rotating in reverse) working? (Perform the output check: 03-121/171) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check if the connector of the exit motor is disconnected. Check if the connectors CN437 and J434 on the DRV board is disconnected. Check if the connector CN360 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor patterns on the DRV board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 6. Replace the exit motor. 7. Replace the DRV board. 8. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the ADU motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-110/160) NO 1. Check if the connector of the ADU motor is disconnected. 2. Check if any of the connectors CN211, CN212 and CN215 on the ADU board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 6. Replace the ADU board. 7. Replace the LGC board.

YES Check the rollers in the ADU and the exit roller of the equipment. Replace them if they are worn out.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 13

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[EB50] Paper remaining on the transport path due to multiple feeding When the paper is fed from any of the upper drawer, bypass feed unit or ADU: Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the registration sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the registration sensor. Replace the LGC board.

YES Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out. When the paper is fed from any of the lower drawer, PFP or LCF: Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the upper drawer feed sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the upper drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the upper drawer feed sensor. Replace the LGC board.

YES Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out. [EB60] Paper remaining on the transport path due to multiple feeding Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the registration sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the registration sensor. Replace the LGC board.

YES Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 14

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

5.1.4 Other paper jam [E030] Power-ON jam Open the cover of the unit/area whose picture is flashing on the control panel. Is there any paper on the transport path? (Refer to the following table) YES Remove the paper. NO Is the sensor in the jamming area working? (Perform the input check: Refer to the following table.) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected. Check if any of the connectors on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the sensor. Replace the LGC board.

YES Replace the LGC board. Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors/covers (If a jam is occurring in the ADU, LCF or PFP, check the board in each unit.)
Jamming area Registration area Exit area ADU Feeding area (equipment) LCF PFP Bridge unit Cover Jam access cover Jam access cover ADU Side cover LCF side cover PFP side cover Sensor Registration sensor Upper drawer feed sensor Exit sensor ADU entrance sensor ADU exit sensor Lower drawer feed sensor LCF feed sensor PFP upper drawer feed sensor PFP lower drawer feed sensor Bridge unit transport sensor-1 Bridge unit transport sensor-2 Test mode/Input check 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E] 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H] 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[H] 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[H] 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[G] 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G] 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[G] 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D] 03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D] 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[C] 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[A]

Bridge unit

[E090] Paper jam by HDD abnormality (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Check if the error is cleared by turning the power OFF and then back ON. Check if the connectors of the HDD are disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Replace the HDD. Replace the SYS board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 15

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[E550] Paper remaining on the transport path when CRUN is OFF Open the cover of the unit/area whose picture is flashing on the control panel. Is there any paper on the transport path? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the sensor in the jamming area working? (Perform the input check: Refer to the following table) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected. Check if any of the connectors on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the sensor. Replace the LGC board.

YES Replace the LGC board. Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors/covers (If a jam is occurring in the ADU, LCF or PFP, check the board in each unit.)
Jamming area Registration area Exit area ADU Feeding area (equipment) LCF PFP Bridge unit Finisher Cover Jam access cover Jam access cover ADU Side cover LCF side cover PFP side cover Sensor Registration sensor Upper drawer feed sensor Exit sensor ADU entrance sensor ADU exit sensor Lower drawer feed sensor LCF feed sensor PFP upper drawer feed sensor PFP lower drawer feed sensor Bridge unit transport sensor-1 Bridge unit transport sensor-2 Sensors in the finisher Test mode/Input check 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E] 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H] 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[H] 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[H] 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[G] 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G] 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[G] 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D] 03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D] 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[C] 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[A] -

Bridge unit Finisher door

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 16

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

5.1.5 Cover open jam [E400] Jam access cover open Is the jam access cover open? YES Remove paper if there is any, then shut the cover. NO Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX] ON/[1]/[H]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check if the connector for 24V power supply is disconnected. Check if the connector CN350 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the LGC board.

YES Replace the LGC board. [E410] Front cover open jam Is the front cover open? YES Shut the cover. NO Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX] ON/[1]/[H]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check if the connector for 24V power supply is disconnected. Check if the connector CN350 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the front cover opening/closing switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[F] NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the front cover opening/closing switch is disconnected. Check if the connector CN343 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the front cover opening/closing switch. Replace the LGC board.

YES Replace the LGC board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 17

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[E420] PFP side cover open jam Is the PFP side cover open? YES Remove the paper if there is any, then shut the cover. NO Is the PFP side cover opening/closing switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[F]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the PFP side cover opening/closing switch is disconnected. 2. Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 6. Replace the PFP side cover opening/closing switch. 7. Replace the PFP board. 8. Replace the LGC board.

YES 1. Replace the PFP board. 2. Replace the LGC board.

[E430] ADU open jam Is the ADU open? YES Remove the paper if there is any, then shut the ADU. NO Is the ADU opening/closing switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[F]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the ADU opening/closing switch is disconnected. 2. Check if either of the connectors CN211 or CN217 on the ADU board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 6. Replace the ADU opening/closing switch. 7. Replace the ADU board. 8. Replace the LGC board.

YES 1. Replace the ADU board. 2. Replace the LGC board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 18

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[E440] Side cover open jam Is the side cover open? YES Remove the paper if there is any, then shut the cover. NO Is the side door switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[E]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the side door switch is disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the side door switch. Replace the LGC board.

YES Replace the LGC board. [E450] LCF side cover open jam Is the LCF side cover open? YES Remove the paper if there is any, then shut the cover. NO Is the LCF side cover opening/closing switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[D]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the LCF side cover opening/closing switch is disconnected. 2. Check if either of the connectors CN100 or CN106 on the LCF board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 6. Replace the LCF side cover opening/closing switch. 7. Replace the LCF board. 8. Replace the LGC board.

YES 1. Replace the LCF board. 2. Replace the LGC board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 19

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[E480] Bridge unit open jam Is the Bridge unit open? YES Remove the paper if there is any, then close the unit. NO Is the bridge unit opening/closing switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[B]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the bridge unit opening/closing switch is disconnected. Check if the connector CN351 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the bridge unit opening/closing switch. Replace the LGC board.

YES Replace the LGC board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 20

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

5.1.6
Note:

RADF jam

When performing the RADF related troubleshooting, be sure to perform Automatic adjustment of RADF sensor and EEPROM initialization (05-356) at adjustment mode whenever the RADF board, original length sensor, read sensor or reverse sensor has been replaced.

[E711] Jam not reaching the original length sensor [E712] Jam not reaching the registration sensor [E713] Stop jam at the original length sensor Are the pickup roller, feed roller and separation roller stained or worn out? YES Clean the rollers or replace them. NO Is the original excessively curled or folded? YES Flatten and set it again. NO Are the original length sensor and registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[8]/[E], [7]/[H]) NO 1. Check if the connectors of the original length sensor and registration sensor are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN3 on the RADF board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the original length sensor and registration sensor. 6. Replace the RADF board.

YES Replace the RADF board.

[E714] Feed signal reception jam Is the empty sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[B]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Check if the lever of empty sensor is working normally. Check if the connector of the empty sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN5 on the RADF board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the empty sensor. Replace the RADF board.

YES Replace the RADF board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 21

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

manuals4you.com

[E721] Jam not reaching the read sensor Are the registration roller and read roller stained? YES Clean the rollers. NO Is the read sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[G]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the read sensor are disconnected. Check if the connector CN6 on the RADF board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the read sensor. Replace the RADF board.

YES Replace the RADF board.

[E722] Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during scanning) [E723] Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (during scanning) Is the read roller stained? YES Clean the roller. NO Are the exit sensor and reverse sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[E], [7]/[F]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connectors of the exit sensor and reverse sensor are disconnected. Check if the connector CN4 on the RADF board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the exit sensor and reverse sensor. Replace the RADF board.

YES Replace the RADF board.

[E724] Stop jam at the registration sensor Is the registration roller stained? YES Clean the roller. NO Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[H]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN3 on the RADF board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the registration sensor. Replace the RADF board.

YES Replace the RADF board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 22

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[E725] Stop jam at the read sensor Is the read roller stained? YES Clean the roller. NO Is the read sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[G]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the read sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN6 on the RADF board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the read sensor. Replace the RADF board.

YES Replace the RADF board.

[E726] Transport/exit signal reception jam 1. If the original is remained in the RADF, remove it. 2. If any paper is remained in the copier, remove it. 3. Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the jam still occurs, lead the following procedure. 4. Check the connection between the RADF board and SLG board, and the connection between the RADF board and switching power supply. - Are the connection of the connectors and joint connectors normal? - Are the connector pins disconnected or are the harnesses open-circuited? 5. Check if the 24V and 5V outputs of the switching power supply are normal. 6. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. 7. Replace the RADF board. 8. Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short- or open-circuited. 9. Replace the SLG board.

[E731] Stop jam at the exit sensor Is the exit roller stained? YES Clean the roller. NO Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[E]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the exit sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN4 on the RADF board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the exit sensor. Replace the RADF board.

YES Replace the RADF board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 23

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[E741] Stop jam at the reverse sensor Are the read roller and reverse roller stained? YES Clean the rollers. NO Is the reverse sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[F]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the reverse sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN4 on the RADF board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the reverse sensor. Replace the RADF board.

YES Replace the RADF board.

[E742] Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (feeding in reverse) Is the reverse roller stained? YES Clean the roller. NO Is the reverse sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[F]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the reverse sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN4 on the RADF board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the reverse sensor. Replace the RADF board.

YES Replace the RADF board.

[E743] Jam not reaching the exit sensor (feeding in reverse) Are the reverse roller and read roller stained? YES Clean the rollers. NO Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[E]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the exit sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN4 on the RADF board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the exit sensor. Replace the RADF board.

YES Replace the RADF board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 24

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[E860] Jam access cover open Is the jam access cover opened? YES Remove the original, if any, and close the jam access cover. NO Is the jam access cover switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[C]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the jam access cover switch is disconnected. Check if the connector CN8 on the RADF board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the jam access cover switch. Replace the RADF board.

YES Replace the RADF board.

[E870] RADF open jam Is the RADF opened? YES Remove the original, if any, and close the RADF. NO Is the RADF opening/closing sensor adjusted within the specified range? NO Adjust the RADF opening/closing sensor. YES Is the RADF opening/closing sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[D]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the RADF opening/closing sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN6 on the RADF board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the RADF opening/closing sensor. Replace the RADF board.

YES Replace the RADF board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 25

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1.7 Finisher jam (1) Jam in bridge unit Paper not reaching the bridge unit transport sensor-1 Paper stopping at the bridge unit transport sensor-1 Paper not reaching the bridge unit transport sensor-2 Paper stopping at the bridge unit transport sensor-2

[E910] [E920] [E930] [E940]

Is there any paper remaining inside the bridge unit? YES Remove the paper. NO Are the bridge unit transport sensors-1 and -2 working? (Perform the input check:03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[C], /[0]/[A]) NO 1. Check if the connectors of the bridge unit transport sensors-1 and -2 are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector J510 of the bridge unit is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN351 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 6. Replace the bridge unit transport sensors-1 and -2. 7. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the bridge unit gate solenoid working? (Perform the output check: 03-232) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check if the connector J510 of the bridge unit is disconnected. Check if the connector CN351 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Replace the bridge unit gate solenoid. Replace the LGC board.

YES Does the transport roller of the bridge unit work when the main motor is rotated? (Perform the output check: 03-101/151) NO Check the drive system of the equipment and bridge unit. YES Check if the rollers in the bridge unit are worn out.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 26

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(2)

Paper jam in finisher section

[EA10] Paper transport delay jam MJ-1022 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (S2) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the inlet sensor working normally? (Check the movement of the actuator.) NO 1. Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely. 2. Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place. 3. Replace the inlet sensor.

YES Replace the finisher controller PC board.

MJ-1023/1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the connector J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI33) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.) NO 1. Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely. 2. Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place. 3. Replace the inlet sensor.

YES Replace the finisher controller PC board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 27

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[EA20] Paper transport stop jam MJ-1022 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (S2) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.) NO 1. Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely. 2. Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place. 3. Replace the inlet sensor.

YES Replace the finisher controller PC board.

MJ-1023/1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is any of the connectors (J707, J708 and J722B) on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and each sensor (the inlet sensor [PI33], the transport path sensor [PI34], the transaction tray paper sensor [PI38]) open-circuited? YES Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses. NO Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, the transport path sensor and the transaction tray paper sensor) working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.) NO 1. Connect the connectors of the sensors securely. 2. Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place. 3. Replace the sensors.

YES Replace the finisher controller PC board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 28

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[EA30] Power-ON jam MJ-1022 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (S2) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.) NO 1. Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely. 2. Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place. 3. Replace the inlet sensor.

YES Replace the finisher controller PC board.

MJ-1023/1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher? YES Remove the paper. NO Is any of the connectors J707, J708 and J722B on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and each sensor (the inlet sensor [PI33], the transport path sensor [PI34], the transaction tray paper sensor [PI38], open-circuited? YES Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses. NO Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, the transport path sensor and the transaction tray paper sensor) working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.) NO 1. Connect the connectors of the sensors securely. 2. Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place. 3. Replace the sensors.

YES Replace the finisher controller PC board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 29

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[EA40] Finisher front door open jam MJ-1022 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the finisher connected with the equipment? NO Connect the finisher with the equipment. YES Is the connector J11 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and joint sensor (S4) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the joint sensor working properly? NO 1. Connect the connector of the joint sensor securely. 2. Replace the joint sensor.

YES Replace the finisher controller PC board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 30

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

MJ-1023/1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is either of the covers upper or front of the finisher closed? NO Close the door. YES Is any connectors J707 and J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and upper/front cover opening sensors (PI31 and PI32) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the upper/front cover opening sensor working properly? NO 1. Connect the connector of the upper/front cover opening sensor securely. 2. Replace the upper/front cover opening sensor.

YES Is the connector J719 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and front cover switch (MS31) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the front cover switch working properly? NO 1. Connect the connector of the front cover switch securely. 2. Replace the front cover switch.

Is the connector J5 on the punch controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and upper door switch (MS1P) open-circuited? Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and front door switch (MS2P) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Are the upper and front door switches working properly? NO 1. Connect the connectors of the upper and front door switches securely. 2. Replace the upper/front door switches.

YES Replace the finisher controller PC board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 31

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[EA50] Stapling jam MJ-1022 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment or on the stapling tray? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staple sheet slid from the staple case? YES End. NO Is the connector J8 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and stapling home position sensor (S17) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the stapling home position sensor working properly? NO 1. Connect the connector of the stapling home position sensor securely. 2. Replace the stapling home position sensor.

YES Replace the finisher controller PC board.

MJ-1023/1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment or on the stapling tray? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staple sheet slid from the staple case? YES End. NO Is the connector J721B on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and staple home position sensor (PI40) opencircuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the staple home position sensor working properly? NO 1. Connect the connector of the staple home position sensor securely. 2. Replace the staple home position sensor.

YES Replace the finisher controller PC board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 32

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[EA60] Early arrival jam MJ-1022 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (S2) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.) NO 1. Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely. 2. Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place. 3. Replace the inlet sensor.

YES Replace the finisher controller PC board.

MJ-1023/1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the connector J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI33) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.) NO 1. Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely. 2. Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place. 3. Replace the inlet sensor.

YES Replace the finisher controller PC board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 33

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[EA70] Stack delivery jam MJ-1022 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the connector J9 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and stack delivery lever home position sensor (S8) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the stack delivery lever home position sensor working properly? NO 1. Connect the connector of the stack delivery lever home position sensor securely. 2. Replace the stack delivery lever home position sensor.

YES Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[EAF0] Stack return jam MJ-1022 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and returning roller home position sensor (S3) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the returning roller home position sensor working properly? NO 1. Connect the connector of the returning roller home position sensor securely. 2. Replace the returning roller home position sensor.

YES Replace the finisher controller PC board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 34

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(3) Paper jam in saddle stitcher section [EA80] Stapling jam MJ-1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path or the stapling tray in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staples stuck in the stapling unit? YES End. NO Is the connector J8 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and stitcher home position sensor (rear: MS5S, front: MS7S) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Are the stitcher home position sensors working properly? NO 1. Connect the connectors of the stitcher home position sensors securely. 2. Replace the stitcher home position sensors.

YES Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.

[EA90] Door open jam MJ-1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the saddle stitcher door closed? NO Close the door. YES Is either of the connectors J10 or J11 on saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected? Are the harnesses between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and cover opening sensors (front door opening sensor [PI2S], delivery cover sensor [PI3S], inlet cover sensor [PI9S]) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is each of the sensors (front door opening sensor, delivery cover sensor, inlet cover sensor) working properly? NO 1. Connect the connectors of the each sensor securely. 2. Replace the sensors.

YES Replace the finisher controller PC board.


August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 5 - 35 e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[EAA0] Power-ON jam MJ-1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or saddle stitcher section? YES Remove the paper. NO Is any of the connectors J9, J10 and J13 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and each sensor (No.1 paper sensor [PI19S], No.2 paper sensor [PI20S], No.3 paper sensor [PI21S], the vertical path paper sensor [PI17S] and the delivery sensor[PI11S]) open-circuited? YES Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses. NO Is each of the sensors (No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor, the vertical path paper sensor, and the delivery sensor) working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.) NO 1. Connect the connectors of the sensors securely. 2. Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place. 3. Replace the sensors.

YES Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.

[EAB0] Paper transport stop jam MJ-1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the connector J708 on finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor [PI33] open-circuited? Is either of the connectors J9 or J10 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and each sensor (No.1 paper sensor [PI19S], No.2 paper sensor [PI20S], No.3 paper sensor [PI21S] and the delivery sensor [PI11S]) opencircuited? YES Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses. NO Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor and the delivery sensor) working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.) NO 1. Connect the connectors of the sensors securely. 2. Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place. 3. Replace the sensors.

YES Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 36

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[EAC0] Transport delay jam MJ-1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the connector J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI33) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.) NO 1. Connect the connector of the sensor securely. 2. Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place. 3. Replace the sensor.

YES Replace the finisher controller PC board.

(4) Paper jam in puncher unit [E9F0] Punching jam MJ-1023/1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the connector J1B on the punch controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and punch home position sensor (PI3P) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the punch home position sensor working properly? NO 1. Connect the connector of the punch home position sensor securely. 2. Replace the punch home position sensor.

YES Replace the punch controller PC board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 37

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

(5) Other paper jam [EAD0] Print end command time-out jam Is the main motor rotating normally? NO 1. Replace the SYS board. 2. Replace the LGC board.

[EAE0] Receiving time time-out jam Is the finisher working? YES Replace the finisher controller PC board. NO 1. Check if the voltage (24V) is being supplied to the finisher. 2. Check the connection of the LGC board and IPC board. 3. Check if the harness connecting the IPC board and finisher I/F connector of the equipment side is open-circuited. 4. Check if the harness connecting the I/F connector of the finisher side and finisher controller PC board is open-circuited. 5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[EB30] Ready time time-out jam Is there paper in the equipment? NO Replace the LGC board. YES Are the IPC board and LGC board properly connected to each other? NO Connect them properly. YES Is the harness securely connected to the IPC board? NO Connect the harness properly. YES Is any of the connector pins of the harness connecting the equipment and finisher disconnected or any of those harnesses open-circuited? NO Connect the pin or replace the harness. YES 1. Replace the IPC board. 2. Replace the LGC board. 3. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 38

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

5.1.8 Drive system related service call [C010] Main motor abnormality Is the main motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-101/151) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. Check if the connector J581 of the main motor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN347 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor patterns on the main motor board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the main motor. 6. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the LED on the main motor board lit without flickering? NO 1. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 2. Check if the conductor patterns on the main motor board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 3. Replace the main motor. 4. Replace the LGC board.

YES 1. Check if the PLL lock signal CN347-8 pin output from the LGC board is always level L. 2. Check if the voltage supplied to the microcomputer input terminal IC38-152 pin is always L. 3. Replace the LGC board. [C020] Developer motor abnormality Is the developer unit motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-112/162) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. Check if the connector J578 of the developer motor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN348 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor patterns on the developer motor board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the developer motor. 6. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the LED on the developer motor board lit without flickering? NO 1. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 2. Check if the conductor patterns on the developer motor board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 3. Replace the developer motor. 4. Replace the LGC board.

YES 1. Check if the PLL lock signal CN348-B6 pin output from the LGC board is always level L. 2. Check if the voltage supplied to the microcomputer input terminal IC38-150 pin is always L. 3. Replace the LGC board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 39

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[C030] Transport motor abnormality Is the transport motor working? NO 1. 2. 3. 4. Check if the connector J582 of the transport motor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN348 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor patterns on the transport motor board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the transport motor. 6. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the LED on the transport motor board lit without flickering? NO 1. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 2. Check if the conductor patterns on the transport motor board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 3. Replace the transport motor. 4. Replace the LGC board.

YES 1. Check if the PLL lock signal CN348-A7 pin output from the LGC board is always level L. 2. Check if the voltage supplied to the microcomputer input terminal IC38-149 pin is always L. 3. Replace the LGC board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 40

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

5.1.9 Paper feeding system related service call [C040] PFP motor abnormality Is the PFP motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-109/159) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Check if the signal line connector CN503 of the PFP motor is disconnected. Check if the power line connector CN502 of the PFP motor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN246 on the PFP board is disconnected. Check if the signal line connector CN241 on the PFP board is disconnected. Check if the power line connector CN242 on the PFP board is disconnected. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP motor board, PFP board and LGC board are short- or open circuited. 9. Replace the PFP motor. 10. Replace the PFP board. 11. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the LED on the PFP motor board lit without flashing? NO 1. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 2. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP motor board, PFP board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 3. Replace the PFP motor. 4. Replace the PFP board. 5. Replace the LGC board.

YES 1. Check if the PLL lock signal CN246-8 pin output from the PFP board is always L level. 2. Check if the voltage supplied to the microcomputer input terminal IC5-17 pin is always L level. 3. Replace the PFP board. 4. Replace the LGC board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 41

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[C130] Upper drawer tray abnormality [C140] Lower drawer tray abnormality Does the tray go up? (Perform the output check: 03-242, 243) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check if the connector of the tray-up motor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the tray-up sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[6]/[H], /[6]/[G]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the slit reaches the sensor. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the LGC board.

YES 1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 2. Replace the LGC board. [C150] PFP upper drawer tray abnormality [C160] PFP lower drawer tray abnormality Does the tray go up? (Perform the output check: 03-278, 280) NO 1. Check if the connector of the tray-up motor is disconnected. 2. Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 6. Replace the PFP board. 7. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the tray-up sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[H], /[4]/[H]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected. 2. Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN247 and CN248 on the PFP board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the slit reaches the sensor. 5. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 6. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 7. Replace the PFP board. 8. Replace the LGC board.

YES 1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 2. Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 - 42 August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[C180] LCF tray motor abnormality Does the tray move? (Perform the output check: 03-271) NO 1. Check if the connector of the LCF tray motor is disconnected. 2. Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN101 and CN103 on the LCF board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 6. Replace the LCF board. 7. Replace the LGC board.

YES Are the LCF tray-up sensor and LCF tray bottom sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[F], /[3]/[A]) NO 1. Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected. 2. Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN104 and CN105 on the LCF board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the slit reaches the sensors. 5. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 6. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 7. Replace the LCF board. 8. Replace the LGC board.

YES 1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 2. Replace the LGC board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 43

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[C1A0] LCF end fense motor abnormality Is the LCF end fence motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-207) NO 1. Check if the connector of the LCF end fence motor is disconnected. 2. Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN101 and CN103 on the LCF board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 6. Replace the LCF board. 7. Replace the LGC board.

YES Are the LCF end fence home/stop position sensors working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[A], /[5]/[B]) NO 1. Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected. 2. Check if either of the connectors CN100 or CN107 on the LCF board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the slit reaches the sensors. 5. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 6. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 7. Replace the LCF board. 8. Replace the LGC board.

YES 1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 2. Replace the LGC board. [C1B0] LCF transport motor abnormality Is the LCF transport motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-122/172) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Check if the connector CN112 of the LCF transport motor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN102 on the LCF board is disconnected. Check if the signal line connector CN100 on the LCF board is disconnected. Check if the power line connector CN101 on the LCF board is disconnected. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF transport motor board, LCF board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 8. Replace the LCF transport motor. 9. Replace the LCF board. 10. Replace the LGC board.

YES 1. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 2. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF transport motor board, LCF board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 3. Check if the PLL lock signal CN102-3 pin output from the LCF board is always L level. 4. Check if the voltage supplied to the microcomputer input terminal IC103-17 pin is always L level. 5. Replace the LCF transport motor. 6. Replace the LCF board. 7. Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 - 44 August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

5.1.10 Scanning system related service call [C260] Peak detection error Does the exposure lamp light? (Perform the output check: 03-267) YES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connectors on the CCD and SLG boards are disconnected. Check if the shading correction plate is dirty. Check if the conductor pattern on the CCD board is short- or open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the lens unit. Replace the SLG board.

NO 1. Check if the connectors of the exposure lamp and inverter are disconnected. 2. Check the SLG board if the connector pin CN21 is disconnected or the harness is short- or opencircuited. 3. Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short- or open-circuited. 4. Replace the SLG board. 5. Replace the inverter. 6. Replace the exposure lamp. [C270] Carriage home position sensor not going OFF within a specified time [C280] Carriage home position sensor not going ON within a specified time Remove the original glass and move the carriages to the paper feeding side. Turn ON the power and check the following items. [C270] Are the carriages slightly moved to the feeding direction?/Are the carriages staying at a position other than home position? YES Check if the circuits of the SLG and SDV boards are abnormal. NO 1. Check if the connector pin is disconnected or the harness is short- or open-circuited. 2. Check if the conductor pattern on the SDV board is short- or open-circuited. 3. Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short- or open-circuited. 4. Replace the SDV board. 5. Replace the SLG board. [C280] Do the carriages make a big noise after they arrive at the home position? YES The carriage home position sensor is not turned ON. 1. Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected. 2. Check if the circuits of the SDV and SLG boards are abnormal.

NO The carriages are stopped at the home position and do not move. 1. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are short- or open-circuited. 2. Check if the conductor pattern on the SDV board is short- or open-circuited. 3. Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short- or open-circuited. 4. Replace the SDV board. 5. Replace the SLG board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 45

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1.11 Fuser unit related service call CAUTION: CAUTION:


Be sure to turn OFF the power and unplug the power cable beforehand when checking the IH control circuit and IH coil. The fuser unit itself or the part of the unit remains heated and the capacitors are still charged after a while the power cable is unplugged. So make sure the unit is cooled down enough before checking.

[C410] Thermistor or heater abnormality at power ON 1. Check the thermistors (1) Check if the connectors are disconnected. (2) Check if the center, rear and front thermistors are in contact with the surface of the fuser belt properly? (3) Check if the harnesses of the center, rear and front thermistors are open-circuited. 2. Check the IH control board and IH coil (1) Check if the IH coil is broken. (2) Check if the connector of the IH coil is disconnected. (3) Check if the thermostats are blown. (4) Check if the connectors on the IH control board are disconnected (AC input connectors CN450, 451 and LGC I/F connectors CN455, 456). (5) Check if the IH control board or the switching power supply unit is abnormal. 3. Check the LGC board (1) Check if the connector CN358 is disconnected. (2) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. (3) Replace the LGC board. 4. Clear the status counter After repairing the matter which caused the error [C410], perform the following: (1) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously. (2) Key in 400, then press the [START] button. (3) Change the current status counter value 1 or 2 to 0, then press the [ENTER] button or [INTERRUPT] button (to cancel [C410]). (4) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Make sure that the equipment enters the normal ready state.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 46

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[C430] Thermistor abnormality after abnormality judgment [C440] Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment 1.2.3. Check the thermistors, IH control board, IH coil and LGC board Check the above components following the procedure 1, 2 and 3 for [C410]. 4. Clear the status counter Change the current status counter value (08-400) 4 to 0 for [C430] and 5, 7 or 9 to 0 for [C440], taking the same procedure as that for [C410]. * The status counter value is as follows in the following cases. Change them to "0" respectively. The error occurred during warming-up : "4" or "5" The error occurred after the equipment has become ready: "7" The temperature detected by the center thermistor is 210C or higher: "9" The temperature detected by the rear thermistor is 220C or higher: "9"

[C450] Thermistor abnormality during printing 1. Check the front thermistor (1) Check if the connector is disconnected. (2) Check if the front thermistor is in contact with the surface of the fuser belt properly. (3) Check if the harness of the front thermistor is open-circuited. 2. Check the LGC board (1) Check if the connector CN358 is disconnected. (2) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short- or open-circuited. (3) Replace the LGC board. 3. Clear the status counter Change the current status counter value (08-400) 6 to 0.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 47

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[C470] IH initialization or IH power voltage abnormality 1. Check the AC input voltage Check if the AC input voltage is within the specified range. (especially when the heater becomes ON after the power is turned ON [the equipment is warming up]) 2. Check the thermostats Check if the thermostats are blown. 3. Check the IH control board (1) Check if the AC input connectors CN450, 451 on the IH control board or the LGC I/F connectors CN455, 456 are disconnected? (2) Check if the fuse on the IH control board has blown. (3) Replace the IH control board. 4. Check the LGC board (1) Check if the connector CN358 is disconnected. (2) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short- or open-circuited. (3) Replace the LGC board. 5. Clear the status counter Change the values 10, 11, 14 or 17 of the status counter (08-400) to 0. * The status counter value is as follows in the following cases. Change them to "0" respectively. The error occurred immediately after the power was turned ON: "10" The error occurred before the temperature of the fuser roller reaches 40C: "11" The error occurred before the equipment has become ready: "14" The error occurred when the equipment is in the ready state: "17"

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 48

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[C480] Overheating of IGBT 1. Check the operation of the IH control board cooling fan Check if the IH control board cooling fan is rotating normally. (Is the connector securely connected?) 2. Check the IH board (1) Check if the IGBT or IGBT radiation plate is normal. (Is the radiation plate securely attached?) (2) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short- or open-circuited. (3) Replace the IH board. 3. Clear the status counter Change the values 12, 15 or 18 of the status counter (08-400) to 0. * The status counter value is as follows in the following cases. Change them to "0" respectively. The error occurred before the temperature of the fuser roller reaches 40C: "12" The error occurred before the equipment has become ready: "15" The error occurred when the equipment is in the ready state: "18"

[C490] IH control circuit or IH coil abnormality 1. Check the IH board (1) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short or open-circuited. (2) Replace the IH board. 2. Check the IH coil (1) Check if the coil is broken or short out. (2) Replace the IH coil. 3. Clear the status counter Change the values 13, 16 or 19 of the status counter (08-400) to 0. * The status counter value is as follows in the following cases. Change them to "0" respectively. The error occurred before the temperature of the fuser roller reaches 40C: "13" The error occurred before the equipment has become ready: "16" The error occurred when the equipment is in the ready state: "19"

When the problem is solved, [C470], [C480] and [C490] can be cleared by turning OFF and ON the main switch so the status counter does not have to be changed to "0". The value of the status counter remains the same until the next service call overwrites the value.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 49

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1.12 Communication related service call [C550] RADF I/F error (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Check if the harness connecting the RADF board and SLG board is disconnected or open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the RADF board. Replace the SLG board.

[C570] Communication error between Engine-CPU and IPC board (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Check if the LGC board and IPC board are connected properly. Check if the conductor pattern on the IPC board is short- or open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the IPC board. Replace the LGC board.

[C580] Communication error between IPC board and finisher (1) Check if the specified finisher is attached. (2) Check if the harness connecting the IPC board and the finisher controller PC board is disconnected or open-circuited. (3) Check if the conductor pattern on the IPC board is short- or open-circuited. (4) Check if the conductor pattern on the finisher controller PC board is short- or open-circuited. (5) Replace the IPC board. (6) Replace the finisher controller PC board. [F070] (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Communication error between System-CPU and Engine-CPU

Check if the harness connecting the SYS board and LGC board is disconnected or open-circuited. Check the version of the system ROM on the SYS board. Check the version of the engine ROM version on the LGC board. Replace the SYS board. Replace the LGC board. Communication error between System-CPU and Scanner-CPU

[F110] (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Check if the harness connecting the SYS board and SLG board is disconnected or open-circuited. Check the version of the system ROM on the SYS board. Check the version of the scanner ROM version on the SLG board. Replace the SYS board. Replace the SLG board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 50

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

5.1.13
Note:

RADF related service call

When performing the RADF related troubleshooting, be sure to perform Automatic adjustment of RADF sensor and EEPROM initialization (05-356) at adjustment mode whenever the RADF board, original length sensor, read sensor or reverse sensor has been replaced.

[C730] EEPROM initialization error (1) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. (2) Replace the RADF board. [C810] Fan motor abnormality (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Check if the load on the motor shaft is normal. Remove any foreign matter. Check if the harness connecting the fan motor and RADF board is open-circuited. Check if the power is supplied to the pin 1 of the CN9 on the RADF board during the operation. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is open- or short-circuited. Replace the fan motor. Replace the RADF board.

[C820] Read sensor adjustment error (1) Check if there is any foreign matter between the read sensor and the reflecting mirror. Check if the reflecting mirror is dirty. (2) Check if the harness connecting the read sensor and the RADF board is open-circuited. (3) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF is short- or open-circuited. (4) Replace the read sensor. (5) Replace the RADF board. [C830] Original length sensor adjustment error (1) Check if there are any foreign objects between the original length sensor and the reflecting mirror. Check if the reflecting mirror is dirty. (2) Check if the harness connecting the original length sensor and the RADF board is open-circuited. (3) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. (4) Replace the original length sensor. (5) Replace the RADF board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 51

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1.14 Circuit related service call [C900] SLG, SYS, LGC board abnormality

T.B.D.
[C940] Engine-CPU abnormality Does service call still occur even after turning OFF the main switch then back ON? NO Leave it for a while and see how. YES 1. Check if the conductor pattern between the Engine-CPU and FROM is short- or open-circuited. 2. Replace the LGC board if it frequently occurs.

[C950] LGC board abnormality

T.B.D.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 52

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[C960] DRV board abnormality

T.B.D.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 53

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1.15 Laser optical unit related service call [CA10] Polygonal motor abnormality Is the polygonal motor rotating? NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check if the connector CN352 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the harness is open-circuited or the connector pin is disconnected. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the laser optical unit. Replace the LGC board.

YES 1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 2. Replace the LGC board. [CA20] H-Sync detection error Are the harness between the connector (CN334) on the LGC board and connector (CN201) on the LDR board open-circuited? YES Replace the harness. Connect the disconnected connectors. NO 1. Replace the LGC board. 2. Replace the laser optical unit.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 54

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

5.1.16 Finisher related service call [CB20] Delivery motor abnormality MJ-1022 Rotate the delivery roller by hand. Does it rotate smoothly? NO Fix the mechanism. YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and delivery motor correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Is the delivery motor clock sensor (S1) working properly? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the problem solved by replacing the delivery motor (M1)? NO Replace the finisher controller PC board. YES Replace the motor. [CB30] Tray 1/2 shift motor abnormality MJ-1023/1024 Are the tray 1 shift area sensors 1-3 and tray 2 shift area sensors 1-3 normal? NO Replace the tray 1/2 shift area sensor boards. YES Are the wirings between the finisher controller PC board and the tray 1/2 shift motors (M37/M38) correct? NO Correct the wirings. YES Is there any problem with the tray lift mechanism? NO Fix the lift mechanism. YES 1. Replace the tray 1/2 shift motors. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

ma
August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 5 - 55

u.c ls4yo nua

om

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[CB40] Rear aligning plate motor abnormality MJ-1023/1024 Is the rear aligning plate home position sensor (PI37) normal? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the rear aligning plate motor (M34) correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Is there any mechanical problem with the path of aligning plate? NO Fix the mechanism. YES 1. Replace the rear aligning plate motor. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[CB50] Staple motor abnormality MJ-1022/1023/1024 Is the wiring between the stapler and finisher controller PC board correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES 1. Replace the stapler. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[CB60] Stapler unit shift motor abnormality MJ-1023/1024 Is the stapler shift home position sensor (PI40) working normally? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the stapler shift motor (M35) correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Is there any mechanical problem with the stapler stand motion path? YES Fix the mechanism. NO 1. Replace the stapler shift motor. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 56

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[CB80] Backup RAM data abnormality MJ-1023/1024 Is the problem solved by turning the power of the equipment OFF and ON? YES End. NO 1. Replace the finisher controller PC board. 2. Replace the punch controller PC board.

[CB90] Saddle stitcher paper pushing plate motor abnormality MJ-1024 Are the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14S), paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15S) and paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1S) working normally? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the paper pushing plate drive mechanism normal? NO Fix the mechanism. YES 1. Replace the paper pushing plate motor (M8S). 2. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 57

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[CBA0] Saddle stitcher stitch motor (front) abnormality [CBB0] Saddle stitcher stitch motor (rear) abnormality MJ-1024 Are the front and rear stitchers and their stands installed properly? NO Install them properly. YES Are the stitcher home position switches (PS7S/PS5S) on the front and rear stitchers working normally? NO Replace the front or rear stitcher. YES 1. Replace the stitcher motor (M7S). 2. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.

[CBC0] Saddle stitcher alignment motor abnormality MJ-1024 Is the alignment plate home position sensor (PI5S) working normally? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the alignment plate drive mechanism normal? NO Fix the mechanism. YES 1. Replace the alignment motor (M5S). 2. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 58

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[CBD0] Saddle stitcher guide motor abnormality MJ-1024 Is the guide home position sensor (PI13S) working normally? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the guide plate drive mechanism normal? NO Fix the mechanism. YES 1. Replacing the guide motor (M3S). 2. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.

[CBE0] Saddle stitcher paper folding motor abnormality MJ-1024 Are the paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4S) and paper folding home position sensor (PI21S) working normally? NO Replace the sensors. YES Is the paper folding roller drive mechanism normal? NO Fix the mechanism. YES 1. Replacing the paper folding motor (M2S). 2. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.

[CBF0] Saddle stitcher paper positioning plate motor abnormality MJ-1024 Is the paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7S) working normally? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the paper positioning plate drive mechanism normal? NO Fix the mechanism. YES 1. Replacing the paper positioning plate motor (M4S). 2. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 59

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[CC00] Connection abnormality in saddle stitcher sensor connector MJ-1024 Are the guide home position sensor (PI13S), paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14S) and paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15S) connected to the saddle stitcher controller PC board? NO Connect them to the board. YES Is the wiring between the sensors and the saddle stitcher correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Is 5V DC being supplied from the connector pins J9-7, -10 and -13 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board? NO Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board. YES Are the connector pins J9-8, -11 and -14 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board correctly connected to the ground? NO YES End. [CC10] Saddle stitcher microswitch abnormality MJ-1024 Are the front cover switch (MS31), inlet door switch (MS1S) and delivery door switch (MS3S) normal? NO Replace the switches. YES Measure the voltage between J704-1 (+) and J704-2 (-) on the finisher controller PC board. Is it 24V? NO Replace the finisher controller PC board. YES Is the wiring between Jxxx on the finisher controller PC board and Jxxx on the saddle stitcher controller PC board correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 60

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[CC20] Communication error between finisher and saddle stitcher MJ-1024 Is the problem solved by turning OFF and ON the power switch of the equipment? YES End. NO Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the saddle stitcher controller PC board connected? NO Connect the wiring. YES 1. Replace the finisher controller PC board. 2. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.

[CC30] Stack processing motor abnormality MJ-1022 [Procedure 1] Is the tension of the drive belt normal? NO Loosen the adjustment screw to adjust its tension. YES Does the bushing attached to the returning roller shaft smoothly move up and down? NO Apply grease on the cut-out part of the front side frame with where the bushing contacts. YES Is the spring of the returning roller detached? YES Attach the spring. NO Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and stack delivery motor correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Is the stack delivery lever home position sensor (S8) working properly? NO Replace the sensor. YES 1. Replacing the stack processing motor. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 61

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[Procedure 2] Does the bushing attached to the returning roller shaft smoothly move up and down? NO Apply grease on the cut-out part of the front side frame with where the bushing contacts.

YES Is the spring of the returning roller detached? YES Attach the spring. NO Is the tension of the stack processing motor drive belt normal? NO Loosen the adjustment screw to adjust its tension. YES Is the returning roller home position sensor (S3) working properly? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the problem solved by replacing the stack delivery motor? NO YES End. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[CC40] Swing motor abnormality MJ-1023/1024 Is the swing unit home position sensor (PI35) normal? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the swing motor (M36) correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES 1. Replace the swing motor. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 62

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[CC50] Horizontal registration motor abnormality MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed) Is the horizontal registration home position sensor (PI1S) working normally? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the wiring between the horizontal registration home position sensor and finisher controller PC board correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Is the horizontal registration mechanism normal? NO Fix the mechanism. YES 1. Replace the horizontal registration motor (M2P). 2. Replace the punch controller PC board. 3. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[CC60] Punch motor abnormality MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed) Are the punch home position sensor (PI3P) and punch motor clock sensor (PI2P) working normally? NO Replace the sensors. YES Is the wiring between the sensors and finisher controller PC board correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Is the punching mechanism normal? NO Fix the mechanism. YES 1. Replace the punch motor (M1P). 2. Replace the punch controller PC board. 3. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 63

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[CC80] Front jogging motor abnormality/Front aligning plate motor abnormality MJ-1022 (Front jagging motor abnormality) Is the front jogging plate home position sensor (S6) working properly? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and front jogging motor correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Has the rack run over the stopper of the roll? YES Fix it. NO 1. Replace the front jogging motor. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

MJ-1023/1024 (Front aligning plate motor abnormality) Is the front aligning plate home position sensor (PI36) normal? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the front aligning plate motor (M33) correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Is there any mechanical problem with the path of aligning plate? NO Fix the mechanism. YES 1. Replace the front aligning plate motor. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 64

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[CC90] Upper stack tray lift motor abnormality MJ-1022 Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and upper stack tray lift motor correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Are the front and rear sides of the upper stack tray leveled? NO Level them. YES Is the upper stack tray lift motor clock sensor (S19) working properly? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the stack tray paper height sensor (S10) working properly? NO Replace the sensor. YES Are the upper stack tray upper limit sensor (S25), upper stack tray full sensor (S23) and stack processing safety switch (S26) working properly? NO Replace the sensor or sensor controller PC board. YES Does the voltage between the pins J14-1 pin and -2 pin on the finisher controller PC board become 24V when the upper stack tray lift motor starts rotating? NO Replace the finisher controller PC board. YES Check the wiring between the upper stack tray lift motor and finisher controller PC board. If there is no problem, replace the upper stack tray lift motor.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 65

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[CCA0] Lower stack tray lift motor abnormality MJ-1022 Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and lower stack tray lift motor correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Are the front and rear sides of the lower stack tray leveled? NO Level them. YES Is the lower stack tray lift motor clock sensor (S9) working properly? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the stack tray paper height sensor (S10) working properly? NO Replace the sensor. YES Are the lower stack tray upper limit sensor (S13) and lower stack tray full sensor (S23) working properly? NO Replace the sensor or sensor controller PC board. YES Does the voltage between the pins J3-1 pin and -2 pin on the finisher controller PC board become 24V when the lower stack tray lift motor starts rotating? NO Replace the finisher controller PC board. YES Check the wiring between the upper stack tray lift motor and finisher controller PC board. If there is no problem, replace the motor.

[CCB0] Rear jogging motor abnormality MJ-1022 Is the rear jogging plate home position sensor (S7) working properly? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and rear jogging motor correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Has the rack run over the stopper of the roll? YES Fix it. NO 1. Replace the rear jogging motor. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 66

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[CCD0] Stack ejection motor abnormality MJ-1023/1024 Is the shutter home position sensor (PI45) normal? NO Replace the sensor. YES Are the wirings between the finisher controller PC board and the stack ejection motor (M32)/shutter clutch (CL31) correct? NO Correct the wirings. YES Is there any problem with the shutter mechanism? YES Fix the shutter mechanism. NO 1. Replace the stack ejection motor and shutter clutch. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[CCE0] Rear end assist motor abnormality MJ-1023/1024 Is the rear end assist guide home position sensor (PI39) normal? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the rear end assist motor (M39) correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Is there any problem with the rear end assist mechanism? YES Fix the rear end assist mechanism. NO 1. Replace the rear end assist motor. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 67

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[CCF0] Gear change motor abnormality MJ-1023/1024 Is the gear change home position sensor (PI49) normal? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the gear change motor (M40) correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Is there any problem with the gear change mechanism? YES Fix the gear change mechanism. NO 1. Replace the gear change motor. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[CE00] Communication error between finisher and puncher unit MJ-1023/1024 (When MJ-6004 is installed) Is the problem solved by turning OFF and ON the power of the equipment? YES End. NO Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and punch controller PC board correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES 1. Replace the finisher controller PC board. 2. Replace the punch controller PC board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 68

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

5.1.17 Image control related service call (1) After checking [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40], and taking appropriate action, perform the forced performing of image quality closed-loop control. 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn ON the power. 2. Key in [395], and then press the [START] button. 3. Turn OFF and then back ON the power, and check that the equipment becomes ready normally. After confirming the items in (1), clear the abnormal detection counter of image quality control. 1. While pressing [0] and [8] simultaneously, turn ON the power. 2. Key in [573], and then press the [START] button. 3. Rewrite the displayed status counter from "1" - "16" to "0", and then press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button. 4. Key in [574], and then press the [START] button. 5. Rewrite the displayed status counter from "1" - "16" to "0", and then press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button. 6. Key in [575], and then press the [START] button. 7. Rewrite the displayed status counter from "1" - "16" to "0", and then press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button. 8. Key in [576], and then press the [START] button. 9. Rewrite the displayed status counter from "1" - "16" to "0", and then press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button. 10. Turn OFF and then back ON the power, and check that the equipment becomes ready normally.

(2)

[CE10] Image quality sensor abnormality (OFF level) Is the connector of the image quality sensor, or the connector CN345 or CN338 on the LGC board, or the connector CN117 on the SYS board disconnected? Is the harness between the LGC board and the image quality sensor, or the harness between the LGC board and the SYS board, or the harness between the LGC board and the switching power supply opencircuited?

YES

Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.

NO Is the output voltage from the 12V-power supply normal? YES Check the power supply system and replace the switching power supply.

NO 1. Replace the image quality sensor. 2. Replace the LGC board. 3. Replace the SYS board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 69

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[CE20] Image quality sensor abnormality (no pattern level) 1. 2. 3. 4. Check if the transfer belt unit is securely locked. Check if the transfer belt unit is securely inserted. Check for any abnormal stain, large flaw or break on the transfer belt surface. Check if the drum and the transfer belt are rotating. If any abnormality is found, correct any mechanical problem.

Is any of the connectors, CN345 and CN338 on the LGC board disconnected? Is the connector CN117 on the SYS board disconnected? Is the harness between the LGC board and the SYS board open-circuited? Is the connector of the image quality sensor disconnected or stained? Is the harness between the LGC board and the image quality sensor open-circuited? Is the high-voltage transformer connector disconnected? Is the harness between the LGC board and the high-voltage transformer open-circuited? Is any of the high-voltage contact points of the transfer belt unit in faulty contact? Is any contact points stained? Is the harness of high-voltage transformer disconnected? Is the harness open-circuited? YES Connect the harness securely. Replace the harness. Clean the connector and correct the contact point.

NO Is the output voltage from the 12V-power supply normal? YES Check the power supply system, and replace the switching power supply.

NO 1. Replace the image quality sensor. 2. Replace the LGC board. 3. Replace the SYS board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 70

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[CE40] Image quality control test pattern abnormality (1) Use "Image quality control abnormal detection counter Y to K display/0 clearing (08-573 to 576)" to check the abnormal occurring condition for each color. (2) Check "Output value display of image quality sensor/Low-density pattern (05-391-0 to 3)" to confirm if the value is under 300 (low-density pattern abnormal) for each color. under 300 Poor cleaning of the transfer belt Check the transfer belt. If the cleaning is poor, correct the transfer belt around its cleaning blade.

300 or above

To (8)

(3) Check "Output value display of image quality sensor/High-density pattern (05-390-0 to 3)" to confirm if the value is 600 or above (high-density pattern abnormal) and identify the color which pattern is abnormal. (4) Set the values of "Image quality open-loop control 1 (98-549)" and "Image quality open-loop control 2 (08-551)" to "0" (disabled). (5) Output the image quality control test pattern (04-270) and check the patch of the color identified in step (3) to see if the image is abnormal (image omitted, all blank, all solid, etc.). Abnormal Correct the items related to the image. Normal To (8) (6) (7) Replace the image quality sensor. Set the values of "Image quality open-loop control 1 (08-549)" and "Image quality open-loop control 2 (08-551)" to "1" (enabled). Perform "Forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (05-395)"and make sure it is completed normally (Error [CE40] does not appear). Clear all "Image quality control abnormal detection counter Y to K display/0 clearing (08-573 to 576)".

(8)

(9)

(10) If any of the specified parts has been replaced, perform "Automatic initialization of image quality control (05-396)" ( Chapter 3.3) and then perform "Automatic gamma adjustment" ( Chapter 3.5.1 and 3.6.1).

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 71

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[CE50] Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality Is the connector CN361 on the LGC board or the connector of the temperature/humidity sensor disconnected? Is the harness between the LGC board and the temperature/humidity sensor disconnected ? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO 1. Replace the temperature/humidity sensor. 2. Replace the LGC board.

[CE90] Drum thermistor abnormality Is the connector CN361 on the LGC board, or the connector of the drum thermistor disconnected? Is the harness between the LGC board and the drum thermistor disconnected? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO 1. Replace the drum thermistor. 2. Replace the LGC board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 72

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

5.1.18 Copy process related service call [C360] Charger cleaner motor abnormality (1) Check if the main charger is installed normally. (2) Check if any of the connector pins of the charger cleaner motor is disconnected. (3) Replace the charger cleaner motor. (4) Replace the LGC board.

[C970] High-voltage transformer abnormality (1) (2) (3) (4) Is the main charger installed securely? Check if the spring of high-voltage supply contact point is deformed. Check if the charger wire is broken or the main charger grid is deformed. Check if any foreign matter is on the charger wire or main charger grid.

[CEA0] Revolver home position detection abnormality Is the revolver home position sensor working properly? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[C]) NO 1. Check if the connector or joint connector of the revolver home position sensor is disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN361 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are opencircuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the revolver home position sensor. 6. Replace the LGC board.

YES 1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 2. Replace the LGC board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 73

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[CEB0] Black developer unit lifting movement abnormality Is the black developer lifting clutch working properly? (Perform the output check: 03-433) YES 1. Check if the connector of the black developer lifting clutch is disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN362 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are opencircuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the black developer lifting clutch. 6. Replace the LGC board.

NO Are the black developer contact position detection sensor and black developer contact timing detection sensor working properly? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[C], /[1]/[B] NO 1. Check if the connectors of the black developer contact position detection sensor or black developer contact timing detection sensor are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN361 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are opencircuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the black developer contact position detection sensor and black developer contact timing detection sensor. 6. Replace the LGC board.

YES 1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 2. Replace the LGC board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 74

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[CEC0] 2nd transfer roller position detection abnormality Is the 2nd transfer roller contact clutch working properly? (Perform the output check: 03-435) NO 1. Check if the connector or joint connectors of the 2nd transfer contact clutch are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN343 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are opencircuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the 2nd transfer roller contact clutch. 6. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor working properly? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[A]) NO 1. Check if the connector or joint connectors of the 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN343 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are opencircuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor. 6. Replace the LGC board.

YES 1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 2. Replace the LGC board.

[CEE0] Transfer belt position detection abnormality (Normal speed) [CEE1] Transfer belt position detection abnormality (When decelerating) Is there any stain or scratch on the reflection tape inside the transfer belt? YES Clean the transfer belt or replace it. Replace the cleaning pad if it is excessively stained.

NO Are the transfer belt home position sensors-1 and -2 stained? YES Clean them. NO Are the transfer belt home position sensors-1 and -2 working properly? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[H], /[]/[]) NO 1. Check if the connectors or joint connectors of the transfer belt home position sensors-1 and -2 are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN361 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are opencircuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the transfer belt home position sensor-1 and -2. 6. Replace the LGC board.

YES 1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 2. Replace the LGC board.
August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 5 - 75 e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[CEF0] Revolver motor abnormality Is the revolver motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-450) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check if the connector of the revolver motor is disconnected. Check if the connectors CN435 and J434 on the DRV board are disconnected. Check if the connector CN360 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor patterns on the DRV board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 6. Replace the revolver motor. 7. Replace the DRV board and LGC board.

YES 1. Check if the conductor patterns on the DRV board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 2. Replace the DRV board and LGC board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 76

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

5.1.19 Toner density control related service call [CF20] Toner density detection voltage abnormality Is the developer material transported properly? Is the form of magnetic brush is normal? NO 1. Check if the amount of the developer material is normal or any foreign matter is mixed in. 2. Correct the transport mechanism of developer material. 3. Check the pole position and correct if necessary.

YES Is the color auto-toner sensor stained? YES Clean it. NO Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid working normally? (Perform the output check: 03-125/ 175) Is the color auto-toner sensor working? NO 1. Check if the connectors or joint connectors of the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid and color auto-toner sensor are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN356 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid and color auto-toner sensor. 6. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter opening position correct? (Perform the output check: 03-125/175) NO Adjust the install position of solenoid so that the sensor holder will touch and face the positioning component when opening the shutter.

YES 1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 2. Replace the LGC board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 77

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[CF30] Reference plate detection voltage abnormality Are the reference plate and color auto-toner sensor stained? YES Clean them. NO Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid working normally? (Perform the output check: 03-125/ 175) Is the color auto-toner sensor working? NO 1. Check if the connectors or joint connectors of the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid and color auto-toner sensor are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN356 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid and color auto-toner sensor. 6. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter closing position correct? (Perform the output check: 03-125/175) NO Adjust the install position of solenoid so that the gap between the sensor holder and stopper will be 1.0 mm when closing the shutter.

YES 1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 2. Replace the LGC board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 78

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

[CF40] Light amount correction voltage abnormality Is the developer unit inserted properly? NO Insert it properly. YES Is the developer material transported properly? Is the form of magnetic brush is normal? NO 1. Check if the amount of the developer material is normal or any foreign matter is mixed in. 2. Correct the transport mechanism of developer material. 3. Check the pole position and correct if necessary.

YES Is the color auto-toner sensor stained? YES Clean it. NO Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid working normally? (Perform the output check: 03-125/ 175) Is the color auto-toner sensor working? NO 1. Check if the connectors or joint connectors of the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid and color auto-toner sensor are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN356 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid and color auto-toner sensor. 6. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter opening position correct? (Perform the output check: 03-125/175) NO Adjust the install position of solenoid so that the sensor holder will touch and face the positioning component when opening the shutter.

YES 1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 2. Replace the LGC board.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 79

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

[CF50] Color auto-toner sensor abnormality Are the connector of color auto-toner sensor, joint connector and connector CN356 on the LGC board connected normally? NO 1. Reconnect the connectors. 2. Correct or replace if the connector pins are disconnected or harnesses are opencircuited.

YES Are the color auto-toner sensor and reference plate stained? YES Clean them. NO Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid working normally? (Perform the output check: 03-125/ 175) NO 1. Check if the connectors or joint connectors of the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid and color auto-toner sensor are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN356 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid. 6. Replace the LGC board.

YES Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter closing position correct? (Perform the output check: 03-125/175) NO Adjust the install position of solenoid so that the gap between the sensor holder and stopper will be 1.0 mm when closing the shutter.

YES 1. Replace the color auto-toner sensor. 2. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 3. Replace the LGC board.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 80

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

5.1.20 Other service call [F100] (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) HDD format error

Format the HDD. (Key in "2" at 08-690.) Check if the HDD is mounted. Check if the specified HDD is mounted. Check if the connector pins of the HDD are bent. Check if the connectors CN112, CN113 on the SYS board is disconnected. Replace the HDD. Replace the SYS board. Replace the harness.

[F101] [F102] [F103] [F104] [F105]

HDD unmounted HDD start error HDD transfer time-out HDD data error HDD other error

(1) Check if the connectors of the HDD are disconnected. (2) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are open-circuited. (3) Perform the bad sector check (08-694). If the check result is OK, recover the data in the HDD. If the check result is failed, replace the HDD. (4) Replace the SYS board.

manuals4you.com
August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 81

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5.2 Troubleshooting of Image


(1) Color deviation <Symptoms>
Location Phenomena Color blurred in outline of Color white text or illustration deviation on a colored background Outline in black text on a Text mode White void Text/Photo mode colored background Photo mode Color blurred in outline of Color Map mode line or text deviation Original mode All modes

ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC

Section

Step 1 2

Main Classification Drum rotation

Cause Sub Classification Unstable

Specific Classification

Check Item

Drum drive system

Main motor rotation speed Drum coupling

Inadequate Loose coupling Damage Deformation Deformation or damage

Output the built-in pattern on A3/LD. Motor abnormal Check main motor operation in the test mode (03). Check main motor operation in the test Control circuit abnormal mode (03). Adjustment Recheck values set for main motor error rotation speed. Check the grid pattern.

Transfer belt system

Transfer belt

Check the grid pattern. Check the condition of transfer belt edge.

Reflection tape Transfer belt home position sensor Drive roller Stain

Stain Damage

Slipping

Stain

Check the grid pattern. Check the condition of roller surface.

Laser optical unit

Large driving load Reflection mirror warp f lens characteristic defect

Cleaning blade

Peeling Check the grid pattern. Check the grid pattern.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 82

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

Criteria Perform following procedures from 2 and after.

Measures

Replace the main motor. Reconnect the connectors. Replace the harnesses. Replace the LGC board. Reset main motor speed to 128.

Is the value significantly different from the default value 128?

Tighten the screws. Replace the couplings. Replace the couplings. Is the misalignment of the secondary-scanning direction Replace the belt (troubleshoot the transfer belt). varied? Is the belt edge damaged or folded? Is there any stain on the reflection tape? Is the reflection tape damaged? Is lens section of the sensor stained? Clean the reflection tape or replace the transfer belt. Replace the transfer belt. Clean the lens section or replace the sensor.

Is the misalignment of the primary-scanning direction varied? Is there any stain?

Clean it.

Replace the cleaning blade. Are the lines of the primary-scanning direction warped? Are the lines of the primary-scanning direction warped? Replace the unit. Replace the unit.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 83

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

(2)

Uneven pitch and jitter image


Feeding direction

<Symptoms>
Original mode All modes Location Occurs cyclically at right angles to paper feeding direction Phenomena Uneven pitch

Section

Step 1

Main Classification

Cause Sub Classification

Specific Classification

Check Item Output the built-in halftone and grid patterns on A3/LD. Check the halftone pattern. Check the drum surface. Check the drum surface.

Drum drive system

Drum

Surface condition

Drum rotation

Unstable

Main motor rotation speed Drum coupling

Inadequate Loose coupling Damage Deformation Timing belt Deformation or damage Slipping

Damage Attached foreign matter Motor abnormal Check main motor operation in test mode (03). Check main motor operation in test Control circuit abnormal mode (03). Adjustment Recheck values set for main motor error rotation speed. Check the halftone pattern.

Transfer belt system

4 5

Drive unit Transfer belt

Tension looseness

Check the halftone pattern. Check the halftone pattern. Check the condition of transfer belt edge. Check the halftone pattern. Check the condition of roller surface.

Drive roller

Stain

Laser optical unit

Large driving load Polygonal mirror

Cleaning blade

Peeling Check the halftone pattern.

Surface inclined Deformation

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 84

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

Criteria Perform following procedures from 2 and after. Are there uneven pitches approx. 283 mm? Is there any damage? Is there any attached foreign matter?

Measures

Replace the drum. Replace the drum. Clean or replace the drum. Replace the main motor. Reconnect the connectors. Replace the harnesses. Replace the LGC board. Reset main motor rotation speed to 128. Retighten the screws. Replace the couplings. Replace the couplings. Retighten the screws to fix the tension arm. Replace the transfer belt.

Is the value significantly different from the default value 128?

Are there uneven pitches approx. 2.5 mm in the whole image? Are there uneven pitches approx. 75 mm in the whole image? Is the belt edge damaged or folded? Are there uneven pitches approx. 75 mm in the whole image? Is there any stain?

Clean it.

Replace the cleaning blade. Are there uneven pitches approx. 0.3 mm in the whole image? Replace the unit.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 85

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

(3)

Poor image density, color reproduction and gray balance


Check image density.

Check gray balance.

Check color reproduction.

Cause/Section Density/Color reproduction/Gray balance

Step Check items 1 Check the image density/color reproduction/gray balance.

Printer density

Check the density of printer output image.

Scanner Parameter adjustment value Printer output image abnormal

3 4

Check if the original glass, mirrors or lens is dirty. Check the image processing parameters. Is there any faded image (low density)? Is there any fog in the background? Is there any blotch image?

Measures Remarks Perform the forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (05-395) and then automatic gamma adjustment. Output the test patterns and See step 5 if check them. defect occurs. Color: using 04-231 for each color Black: using 04-113 Clean it. Adjust the color balance (color) and gamma balance (black). Adjust the image density. Perform the troubleshooting procedures against the faded image. Perform the troubleshooting procedures against the background fogging. Perform the troubleshooting procedures against the blotch image. Perform the troubleshooting procedures against the poor transfer. Correct the transfer belt area. (Refer to Service Manual)

Is there any poor transfer?

Is there any poor cleaning of the transfer belt? (check inside the equipment.) e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 - 86

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(4)

Background fogging

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 87

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

Cause/Section Density reproduction

Step Check items 1 Check the gradation reproduction.

Printer section

Check the printer output image.

Scanner Parameter adjustment value

3 4

Check if the original glass, mirrors or lens is dirty. Check the image processing parameters.

Measures Remarks Perform the forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (05-395) and then automatic gamma adjustment. See step 6 if Output the test patterns and defects occur. check them. Color: using 04-231 for each color Black: using 04-113 Clean it. Check the value of offsetting adjustment for background processing (color) and background peak adjustment for range correction (black). While checking the above encircled image, adjust the reproduction level by the offsetting adjustment for background processing (color) and background peak adjustment for range correction (black). Correct it.

Adjust the image processing parameters.

Cover

Auto-toner

7 8

Main charger output Developer bias Developer unit Developer material/ Toner/Drum

9 10 11 12 13 14

Drum cleaning blade Transfer belt cleaning blade

15 16

17

Toner dusting

18

Is the cover installed properly? (Is the drum exposed to the external light?) Is the auto-toner sensor normal? Check the operation of autotoner sensor and readjust. Is the toner supply operating Check the motor and circuits. constantly? Is the main charger output Check the circuits. normal? Is the developer bias proper? Check the circuits. Is the contact between the drum Check the doctor-to-sleeve gap and developer material proper? and pole position. Using the specified developer Use the specified developer material, toner and drum? material, toner and drum. Have the developer material and Replace the developer material drum reached their PM life? and drum. Is the storage environment of the Use the toner cartridge stored in toner cartridge 35oC or less the environment within specificawithout dew? tion. Is the drum cleaned properly? Check the drum cleaning blade pressure. Is the transfer belt cleaning blade Check if the spring of the transfer contacted and released properly? belt cleaner clutch is removed or if any connector is disconnected. Otherwise replace the clutch. Is the transfer belt cleaning blade Check if the blade pressure in proper contact with the transfer spring is installed. belt? Is the toner accumulated on the Remove the toner and clean the seals of the developer unit? seals. 5 - 88 August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

manuals4you.com

(5)

Moire/lack of sharpness

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 89

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

Moire
Cause/Section Density reproduction Step Check items 1 Check the gradation reproduction. Measures Perform the forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (05-395) and then automatic gamma adjustment. Check the sharpness adjustment value. While checking the above encircled images A and B, decrease moire by sharpness adjustment. Output the test patterns and check them. Color: using 04-231 for each color Black: using 04-113 Remarks

Parameter adjustment value

2 3

Check the image processing parameters. Adjust the image processing parameters.

Printer section

Check the printer output image.

When defects occur, perform the corresponding troubleshooting procedures.

Lack of sharpness
Cause/Section Density reproduction Step Check items 1 Check the gradation reproduction. Measures Perform the forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (05-395) and then automatic gamma adjustment. Check the sharpness adjustment value. While checking the above encircled image A, increase sharpness by sharpness adjustment. Output the test patterns and check them. Color: using 04-231 for each color Black: using 04-113 Remarks

Parameter adjustment value

2 3

Check the image processing parameters. Adjust the image processing parameters.

Printer section

Check the printer output image.

When defects occur, perform the corresponding troubleshooting procedures.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 90

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(6)

Toner offset

Black solid

Feeding direction

Approx. 188mm

Shadow image

Toner offset (Shadow image appears approx. 188 mm behind the high density image.)
Cause/Section Fuser unit Step Check items 1 Is the pressure between the fuser belt and pressure roller proper? 2 Is the thermostat in contact? 3 Is there scratch on the fuser belt or pressure roller surface? 4 Has the fuser belt or pressure roller reached its PM life? 5 Is the fuser roller temperature proper? 6 Is the paper type corresponding to its mode? 7 Using recommended paper? 8 Is the specified developer used? 9 10 11 Are the mirrors, original glass or lens dirty? Is the control activated? Is the density too high? Measures Check the pressure removal parts and pressure mechanism. Establish its contact. Replace the fuser belt or the pressure roller. Replace the fuser belt or the pressure roller. Check and correct the control circuit. Use the proper type of paper or select the proper mode. Use the recommended paper. Use the specified developer and toner. Clean them. Check the image quality control related codes. Perform the forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (05-395) and then automatic gamma adjustment. Output the test patterns and check them. Color: using 04-231 for each color Black: using 04-113 Remarks

Paper

Developer material Scanner Image quality control Density

Printer density

12

Check the density of printer output image.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 91

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

(7)

Blurred image

Cause/Section Scanner Drum

Feeding direction

Step Check items 1 Is the scanner bedewed? 2 Is the drum bedewed or dirty?

Ozone exhaust

3 4

Is the ozone exhaust fan operating properly? Is the ozone filter stained or damaged?

Measures Clean it. Wipe the drum with dry cloth. * Be sure never use alcohol or other organic solvents because they have bad effect on the drum. Check the connection of the connector. Replace it.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 92

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(8)

Poor fusing

Cause/Section IH electric power/ control abnormal

Step Check items 1 Check if the connector contacts properly. 2 Is the IH coil shorted or broken? Is the IH control board normal? 3 Are the connectors on the LGC board and joint connectors connected properly? 4 Is the LGC board normal? Pressure between 5 Are the pressure springs working properly? fuser belt and pressure roller improper Fuser roller 6 Is the temperature of fuser roller too temperature low?

Feeding direction

Measures Correct it. Replace the IH coil or IH control board. Reconnect them.

Replace the LGC board. Check/adjust the pressure springs.

Developer material and toner Paper

7 8 9 10

Using the specified developer material and toner? Is the paper damp? Is the paper type corresponding to its mode? Using the recommended paper?

Check/correct the setting value of fuser roller temperature. Clean or replace the thermistors. Check/correct the related circuit. Use the specified developer material and toner. Change the paper. Use the proper type of paper or select the proper mode. Use the recommended paper.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 93

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

(9)

Blank copy

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

Feeding direction

5 - 94

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

Cause/Section Step Check items High-voltage 1 Is the high-voltage transformer output transformer defective? (1st/2nd transfer roller and developer bias) 2 Are the connector of the high-voltage harness securely connected? Is the harness open-circuited? Developer unit 3 Is the developer unit installed securely? 4 5 6 7 Drum 8 9 Transfer unit 10 Do the developer sleeve and mixer rotate? Is the developer material properly transported? Is there any magnetic brush phase error? Is the doctor sleeve gap incorrect?

Measures Adjust the output and correct the circuit, or replace the transformer.

Reconnect the harness securely. Replace the high-voltage harness. Check/correct the developer sleeve coupling engaging. Check/correct the developer drive system. Remove foreign matter from the developer material, if any. Check the developer pole position.

11 12

13

Switching power supply Harnesses for SLG, SYS, LGC and LDR boards Laser optical unit

14 15

16

Adjust the gap with the doctor-sleeve jig. Check that the drum shaft is inserted. Is the drum rotating? Check the drum drive system. Check the contact of the grounding Is the drum grounded? plate. Is the transfer belt in proper contact with Check if the contact releasing lever is at releasing position. Check the installation the drum? of the transfer belt. Check the installation of the transfer belt Is the transport of the transfer belt normal? or transport mechanism. Is the releasing movement of the Check the installation of the transfer belt transfer belt cleaner is normal? (Does cleaning blade. Check the operation of the cleaning blade stay in contact?) the transfer belt cleaner clutch. Is the 2nd transfer roller contacted and Check the connection of the connector released properly? of 2nd transfer roller contact clutch and open-circuit of harness. Replace the switching power supply. Is the power supply output (5.1VD) normal? Are the connectors securely connected? Reconnect the connectors securely. Is any harness between the boards Replace the harness. open-circuited? Was the protection seal of slit removed Remove the protection seal. when replacing the unit?

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 95

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

(10) Solid copy

Cause/Section Exposure lamp Inverter

Feeding direction

Step Check items 1 Does the exposure lamp light?

Main charger High-voltage transformer (main charger wire/ grid bias)

2 3 4

Measures Check the contact of the inverter connector. If the inverter does not work, replace it. If the lamp does not work, replace it. Is the main charger securely installed? Reinstall it securely. Is the main charger wire open-circuited? Replace it. Is the high-voltage transformer output Adjust the output and correct the circuit, defective? or replace the high-voltage transformer.

Harnesses for SLG, SYS and LGC boards Scanner Bedewing of scanner and drum

7 8

Are the connector of the high-voltage harness securely connected? Is the harness open-circuited? Are the connectors securely connected? Is any harness between the boards open-circuited ? Is there foreign matter in the optical path? Is the scanner or the drum bedewed?

Reconnect the harness securely. Replace the high-voltage harness. Reconnect the connectors securely. Replace the harness. Remove it. Clean the mirrors, lens and drum. Keep the power cord plugged so that the damp heater can work.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 96

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(11) White banding (in feeding direction)

Cause/Section Laser optical unit Main charger grid Developer unit

Feeding direction

Drum Transfer unit

Step Check items 1 Is there foreign matter or dust on the slit glass? 2 Is there foreign matter on the charger grid? 3 Is there foreign matter inside the doctor blade? 4 Is there foreign matter on the drum seal? 5 Is the drum seal of developer unit in proper contact with the drum? 6 Is there scratch or foreign matter on the drum surface? 7 Is there scratch or foreign matter on the transfer belt surface? 8 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade contacted and released properly?

Measures Clean the slit glass. Remove foreign matter. Remove foreign matter. Remove foreign matter. Modify the position of drum seal or replace it. Replace the drum. Replace the transfer belt. Check if the spring of the transfer belt cleaner clutch is removed or if any connector is disconnected. Otherwise replace the clutch. Check if the blade pressure spring is installed. Replace the 1st/2nd transfer roller. Remove foreign matter.

9 10 Transport path 11

Discharge lamp Scanner

12 13

Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in proper contact with the transfer belt? Is there any scratch or hole on the 1st/ 2nd transfer roller? Does the toner image touch foreign matter after transfer, before entering the fuser unit? Has any LED of discharge lamp gone out? Is there foreign matter or dust in the optical path?

Replace the discharge lamp. Clean the lens and mirrors.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 97

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

(12) White banding (at right angles to feeding direction)

Cause/Section Main charger Drum

Feeding direction

Step Check items 1 Is there foreign matter on the charger? 2 Is the terminal contact poor? 3 Is there any abnormalities on the drum surface? 4 Is the drum grounded? 5 6

Measures Remove foreign matter. Clean or adjust the terminals. Replace the drum.

Discharge lamp Developer unit

7 Drive systems High-voltage transformer (main charger wire/ grid, 1st/2nd transfer roller and developer bias) 8 9

Check the contact of the grounding plate. Is the discharge lamp lighting properly? Replace the discharge lamp or clean terminals. Check the developer drive system, or Is the developer sleeve rotating correctly? Is there any abnormalities on the clean the sleeve surface. sleeve surface? Is the connection of developer bias Correct it. supply terminal normal? Is the drum, scanner or transfer belt Check each drive system. jittery? Is the high-voltage transformer output Check/correct any electric leakage and defective? related circuits. If the high-voltage transformer does not work, replace it.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 98

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(13) Skew (slantwise copying)

Cause/Section Drawer/LCF

Feeding direction

Paper feed roller Rollers Aligning amount Registration roller Pre-registration guide Pre-2nd transfer guide

Step Check items 1 Is the drawer or LCF properly installed? 2 Is too much paper loaded in the drawer or LCF? 3 Is the paper corner folded? 4 Are the drawer or LCF side guides properly set? 5 Is the surface of paper feed roller dirty? 6 7 8 9 10

Measures Reinstall the drawer or LCF properly. Reduce paper to 550 sheets or less. (2500 sheets or less/stack for LCF) Change the paper direction and reinsert it. Adjust the side guides.

Clean the roller surface with alcohol, or replace the roller. Check and reinstall E-rings, pins, clips Is each roller improperly fixed to the shaft? and setscrews. Is the aligning amount proper? Increase the aligning amount. Is the registration roller spring removed? Mount the spring correctly. Clean the roller if it is dirty. Correct it. Is the pre-registration guide improperly installed? Is the pre-2nd transfer guide installed Correct it. properly?

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 99

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

(14) Color banding (in feeding direction)

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

Feeding direction

5 - 100

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

Cause/Section Scanner

Main charger

Cleaner

Step Check items 1 Is there foreign matter in the optical path? 2 Is there dust or stain on the shading correction plate? 3 Is there foreign matter on the charger grid? 4 Is the charger grid dirty or deformed? 5 Is there foreign matter on the main charger? 6 Is the charger wire dirty or deformed? 7 Is there foreign matter inside the charger case? 8 Is the inner surface of charger case dirty? 9 Are the pads of charger wire cleaner stopping at the position other than their home position? 10 Is there paper dust on the cleaning blade edge? 11 12 13 14 15 Is the cleaning blade contact improper? Is toner recovery defective? Are the harness or foreign matters in contact with the transfer belt surface? Is there paper dust on the edge of transfer belt cleaning blade? Is the transfer belt cleaning blade contacted and released properly?

Measures Clean the slit, lens and mirrors. Clean the plate. Remove foreign matter. Clean or replace the charger grid. Remove foreign matter. Clean or replace the charger wire. Remove foreign matter. Clean inside. Correct the position.

Transfer unit

Clean or replace the paper dust removal brush for the registration roller. Clean or replace the cleaning blade. Correct it. Clean the toner recovery auger section. Correct or remove them. Clean or replace it. Check if the spring of the transfer belt cleaner clutch is removed or if any connector is disconnected. Otherwise replace the clutch. Check if the blade pressure spring is installed. a. Clean or replace them. b. Clean the thermistor. Replace the drum. Remove foreign matter or dust.

16 Fuser unit 17

Drum Laser optical unit

18 19

Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in proper contact with the transfer belt? a. Is there dirt or scratches on the fuser belt and pressure roller surface? b. Is the thermistor dirty? Are there scratches on the drum surface? Is there foreign matter or dust on the slit glass?

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 101

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

(15) Color banding (at right angles to feeding direction)

Cause/Section Main charger Fuser unit High-voltage transformer (main charger wire/grid and transfer roller bias)

Feeding direction

Step Check items 1 Is the charger wire dirty or deformed? 2 Is the fuser belt, pressure roller or oil roller dirty? 3 Is the high-voltage transformer output defective?

Measures Clean or replace the charger wire. Clean them. Check the circuit and replace the highvoltage transformer if not working.

Drum

6 7 2nd transfer roller Scanner 8 9

Is each joint of high-voltage output Reconnect each joint. loosened? (Check if any electric leakage is causing noise.) Is there deep scratch on the drum Replace the drum, especially if the surface? scratch has reached the aluminum base. Check and correct the contact of Are there fine scratches on the drum surface (drum pitting)? cleaning blade and recovery blade. Is the drum grounded? Check the contact of the grounding plate. Clean the roller area or replace the Is the 2nd transfer roller rotating normally? roller. Is there foreign matter on the carriage Remove foreign matter. rail?

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 102

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(16) White spots

Cause/Section Developer unit/Toner cartridge

Feeding direction

Developer material/ Toner/Drum

Transfer unit

Main charger High-voltage transformer (main charger wire/ grid, developer 1st/ 2nd transfer roller bias) Paper

Step Check items Measures 1 Is the toner density of developer material Check and correct the auto-toner sensor proper? and toner supply operation. Check if the amount of toner is sufficient in the toner cartridge. 2 Is the doctor-sleeve gap proper? Adjust the gap. 3 Using the specified developer material, Use the specified developer material, toner and drum? toner and drum. Replace the developer material and 4 Have the developer material and drum reached their PM life? drum. Use the toner cartridge stored in the 5 Is the storage environment of the toner cartridge 35oC or less without dew? environment within specification. Replace the drum. 6 Is there any dent on the surface of the drum? 7 Is there any film forming on the drum? Clean or replace the drum. 8 Is the drum bedewed? Wipe the drum surface with a piece of dry cloth. Remove foreign matter. 9 Is there foreign matter on the transfer belt surface? 10 Is there foreign matter on the transfer Clean the transfer belt unit. belt drive roller? 11 Is there foreign matter on the charger? Remove it. 12 Is the charger wire dirty or deformed? Clean or replace the charger wire. 13 Is the high-voltage transformer output Adjust the output. defective?

14

Is the paper type corresponding to its mode?

Use the proper type of paper or select the proper mode.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 103

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

(17) Poor transfer

Cause/Section Transfer unit

Feeding direction

Paper

Step Check items 1 Is the transfer belt or 1st/2nd transfer rollers dirty? 2 Is the transfer belt in proper contact with the drum ? 3 Is the 2nd transfer roller in proper contact with the transfer belt? 4 Is there any deformation or abnormalities on the transfer belt? 5 Is paper in the drawer or LCF curled? 6 Is paper in the drawer or LCF damp? Is the registration roller malfunctioning? Is the high-voltage transformer output defective?

Measures Clean it. Correct it. Correct it. Replace the belt. Reinsert paper with reverse side up or change paper. Change paper. * Avoid storing paper in damp place. Clean the roller, remount the spring, or replace defective clutch-related parts. Check the circuit and adjust the transformer output.

Registration roller High-voltage transformer (1st/2nd transfer roller bias)

7 8

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 104

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(18) Uneven image density

Cause/Section Main charger Transfer unit

Feeding direction

Laser optical unit Discharge lamp

Developer unit

Scanner section

Step Check items 1 Is the main charger dirty? 2 Is the transfer belt or 1st/2nd transfer rollers dirty? 3 Is the transfer belt in proper contact with the drum? 4 Is 2nd transfer roller in proper contact with the transfer belt? (Is the roller tilted?) 5 Is there any abnormalities or deformation on the transfer belt? 6 Is there foreign matter or dust on the slit glass? 7 Is the discharge lamp dirty? 8 Has any LED of discharge lamp gone out? 9 Is the magnetic brush in proper contact with the drum? 10 Is the developer unit pressure mechanism malfunctioning? 11 Is the transport of developer material poor? 12 a. Is the platen cover or RADF open? b. Is the original glass, mirrors, or lens dirty?

Measures Clean it or replace the charger wire. Clean the belt. Correct it. Correct it.

Replace the transfer belt. Clean the slit glass. Clean it. Replace it. Adjust the doctor-sleeve gap. Check the mechanism. Remove foreign matter if any. a. Close the platen cover or RADF. b. Clean them.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 105

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

(19) Faded image (low density)

Cause/Section Toner empty Auto-toner circuit

Feeding direction

Toner motor Toner cartridge

Step Check items 1 Is the ADD TONER symbol blinking? 2 Is there enough toner in the cartridge? 3 Is the toner density of developer material too low? 4 Is the toner motor malfunctioning? 5 Are there any abnormalities in the toner cartridge? 6 7 Has the developer material reached its PM life? Is the magnetic brush in proper contact with the drum? Is the main charger dirty? Is there film forming on the drum surface? Has the drum reached its PM life? Has the transfer belt, 1st or 2nd transfer roller reached its PM life? Is the high-voltage transformer output settings improper? Are the connector of the high-voltage harness securely connected? Is the harness open-circuited?

Measures Replace the toner cartridge. Check the auto-toner circuit function.

Check the motor drive circuit. Replace the toner cartridge.

Developer material Developer unit

Replace developer material. Check the developer unit installation. Check the doctor-sleeve gap and pole position. Clean it or replace the charger wire. Clean or replace the drum. Replace the drum. Replace the transfer belt, 1st or 2nd transfer roller. Adjust the high-voltage transformer output. Reconnect the harness securely. Replace the high-voltage harness.

Main charger Drum

8 9 10 11 12 13

Transfer unit High-voltage transformer (developer bias)

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 106

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(20) Image dislocation in feeding direction

Cause/Section Adjustment error of scanner or printer section Registration roller

Feeding direction

Step Check items 1 Is same dislocation on every copy?

Measures Adjust the scanner/printer using the adjustment mode.

2 3 4

Paper feed clutch Pre-registration guide

5 6

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 107

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

manuals4you.com

Is the registration roller dirty, or is the Clean the roller with alcohol. spring removed? Reinstall the spring. Is the registration motor malfunctioning? Adjust or replace the gears, etc. if they are not engaged properly. Is the registration roller clutch operating Replace the registration roller clutch. normally? (Is the timing of operation delaying?) Is the paper feed clutch malfunctioning? Check the circuit or the clutch and replace them if necessary. Is the pre-registration guide improperly Reinstall the guide. installed?

(21) Image jittering

Cause/Section Registration roller Transfer unit

Feeding direction

Step Check items 1 Is the toner image on the drum proper? 2 3 Is the registration roller rotating normally? Is the transfer belt or 2nd transfer roller operating normally? Are the fuser roller and pressure roller rotation proper? Is the fuser belt transportation proper? Is there large scratch on the drum? Is the slide sheet defective? Are there any abnormalities on the carriage feet? Is the tension of timing belt inappropriate? Is the carriage drive system malfunctioning? Are any mirrors loosely installed? Is the drum drive system malfunctioning?

Fuser unit

Drum Scanner

5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Measures If proper, perform step 1 to 3; otherwise perform step 4 and after. Check the registration roller section and its springs. Check the drive system and replace the transfer belt or 2nd transfer roller if necessary. Check the drive system. Replace the fuser belt, fuser roller and pressure roller if necessary. Replace the drum. Replace it. Replace the feet. Correct the tension. Check the carriage drive system. Install them properly. Check the drum drive system. Clean or replace the belts, pulleys, bushings if they have dirt or scratches.

Drum drive system

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 108

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(22) Poor cleaning

Note: Poor cleaning may occur in feeding direction.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Feeding direction

5 - 109

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

Cause/Section Developer material Cleaner

Step Check items 1 Is the specified developer material used? 2 Is there paper dust on the drum cleaning blade edge? 3 Is the drum cleaning blade peeled? 4 5

Measures Use the specified developer material and toner. Clean it.

Transfer belt cleaner

6 7 8

Replace the blade. Check and replace the drum. Is the cleaning brush rotating normally? Check the brush driving section. Clean the brush area. Is the cleaning brush damaged? Is there Replace the brush and clean the brush area. Check the drum and replace if foreign matter on the brush? there is any abnormality. Clean or replace it. Is there paper dust on the edge of transfer belt cleaning blade? Is the transfer belt cleaning blade Replace the blade. peeled? Is the transfer belt cleaning blade Check if the spring of the transfer belt contacted and released properly? cleaner clutch is removed or if any connector is disconnected. Otherwise replace the clutch. Check if the blade pressure spring is Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in installed. proper contact with the transfer belt? Is the toner recovery defective? Is the cleaning roller or the oil roller damaged? Have the roller reached their PM life? Is there any bubble-like defect on the fuser belt (188mm pitch on the image)? Have the fuser belt and pressure roller reached their PM life? Is the pressure between the fuser belt and pressure roller proper? Is the temperature of fuser roller proper? Clean the toner recovery auger. Check the cleaning blade pressure. Replace them.

Toner recovery auger Fuser unit

10 11

12 13 14 15

Replace the fuser belt. Check and modify the heater control circuit. Replace them. Check and adjust the pressure mechanism. Check/correct the setting value of fuser roller temperature. Clean or replace the thermistors. Check and correct the circuit.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 110

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(23) Uneven light distribution

Cause/Section Original glass Main charger Discharge lamp Scanner Exposure lamp

Feeding direction

Step Check items 1 Is the original glass dirty? 2 Are the main charger wire, grid and case dirty? 3 Is the discharge lamp dirty? 4 Are the reflector, exposure lamp, mirrors, lens, etc. dirty? 5 Is the exposure lamp tilted? 6 Is the lamp discolored or degraded?

Measures Clean the glass. Clean or replace them. Clean it. Clean them. Adjust the installed position of the lamp. Replace it.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5 - 111

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

(24) Blotched image

Cause/Section Paper

Feeding direction

Transfer unit

High-voltage transformer (1st/2nd transfer roller bias)

Step Check items 1 Is the paper type corresponding to its mode? 2 Is paper too dry? 3 Is the transfer belt in proper contact with the drum? 4 Is the 2nd transfer roller in proper contact with the transfer belt? 5 Are there any abnormalities on the transfer belt? 6 Is the high-voltage transformer output abnormal?

Measures Check the paper type and mode. Change paper. Correct it. Correct it. Clean or replace the transfer belt. Adjust the output. Replace the transformer, if necessary.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING

5 - 112

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

6. FIRMWARE UPDATING
In this model, following firmware is written on the ROM on each board.
Firmware Master data (HDD program data, UI data) System ROM (System firmware, OS data, UI data) Engine ROM (Machine firmware) Scanner ROM (Scanner firmware) NIC ROM (NIC firmware) RADF ROM (RADF firmware) Finisher ROM (Finisher firmware) Finisher ROM (Saddle stitcher firmware) FAX ROM (FAX firmware) Stored Hard disk System control PC board (SYS board) Logic PC board (LGC board) Scanning section control PC board (SLG board) NIC board RADF control PC board (MR-3015) Finisher control PC board (MJ-1023/ MJ-1024) Finisher control PC board (MJ-1024) FAX board (GD-1150)

When you want to update the firmware above or the equipment becomes inoperative status due to some defectives of the firmware, updating the firmware is available by the following actions. Updating with the download jig > 6.1 Firmware Updating with Download Jig Updating with PC connected > 6.2 Firmware Updating with FSMS (Field Service Manager) Notes: Written firmware varies depending on the kinds of the boards provided as service parts. For updating, only the minimum firmware is installed on the system control PC board, logic PC board, and scanning section control PC board. No firmware is installed on the NIC board and FAX board. The latest version of the firmware at the delivery is written on the RADF control PC board and finisher control PC board. When any of above boards is replaced with a new one in the field, confirm the other firmware version used with and then write the suitable version of the firmware. The firmware (master data) is not installed on the hard disk provided as a service part. When the hard disk is replaced with a new one, confirm the other firmware version used with and then write the suitable version of the firmware.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

6-1

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

6.1 Firmware Updating with Download Jig


In this model, it is feasible to update the firmware automatically by connecting the download jig using the dedicated connector and turning ON the equipment. The download jig consists of the ROM, in which the program is written, and the jig board. And three types of the download jigs are available for each type of the firmware. For updating the firmware, in addition to the current ways such as updating each firmware individually, the batch update of the firmware of the equipment is available (except the hard disk and the option).
Firmware Master data System ROM Engine ROM Stored Hard disk System control PC board (SYS board) Logic PC board (LGC board) Download jig Individual update Batch update PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48MB) PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16MB) K-PWA-DLM-320 or PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16MB) PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 K-PWA-DLM-320 (16MB) or PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16MB) PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16MB) K-PWA-DLM-320 K-PWA-DLM-320 K-PWA-DLM-320 K-PWA-DLM-320

Scanner ROM

Scanning section control PC board (SLG board) NIC board RADF control PC board (MR-3015) Finisher control PC board (MJ-1023/MJ-1024) Finisher control PC board (MJ-1024) FAX board (GD-1150)

NIC ROM RADF ROM Finisher ROM (Finisher firmware) Finisher ROM (Saddle stitcher firmware) FAX ROM

Refer to the followings for the details to update with each download jig. > 6.1.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48MB) > 6.1.2 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16MB) > 6.1.4 K-PWA-DLM-320

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

6-2

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

Connector (for SYS board connection)

Connector (for ROM writer adapter connection)

Connector (for SYS board connection)

Connector (for ROM writer adapter connection)

ROM4 ROM5 ROM6

ROM1 ROM2 ROM3

ROM1 ROM2

[Jig board: PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48MB)]

[Jig board: PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16MB)]

Important: The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) has two types having different ROM capacity. ROM capacity for each jig is as follows.
Download jig PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48MB) PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16MB) ROM capacity 8MB x 6 8MB x 2 Application Updating the master data Updating the system ROM, engine ROM, scanner ROM, NIC ROM

The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) is different from the existing jigs. The ROM is installed on the board directly. Therefore, ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write the data to these ROMs. Refer to the following to write the data. > 6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)

Connector

Mark for ROM installation direction

LED

ROM

[Jig board:K-PWA-DLM-320] Important: Pay attention to the direction of the ROM.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

6-3

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

6.1.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48MB) The master data written on the hard disk can be updated by using PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48MB). Update the master data according to the need such as the case of replacing the hard disk. The data to be overwritten are as follows. HDD program data (RIP data, list data, WEB data, filing box control data) UI data (fixed section data, common section data, the language 1 to 5 data) (a) Update procedure Important: Use the download jig PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48MB). Turn OFF the power before installing and removing the download jig. Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not be continued to function properly. (1) Write the data to the download jig. > 6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) Turn OFF the power of the equipment. Remove the connector cover.

(2) (3)

Connector cover

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

6-4

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(4)

Remove the cover plate.

Cover plate

(5)

Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN100) on the SYS board.

Connector

(6)

Turn ON the power. Downloading starts automatically and the processing status is displayed on LCD screen.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

6-5

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

(7)

Update Completed!! is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly.

Update Failed is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed properly. Turn OFF the power, and then check the following items. After confirming and clearing the problems, restart updating from the beginning. Is the download jig connected properly? Is the updating data written to the download jig properly? Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?

(8) (9)

Turn OFF the power, and then remove the download jig. Perform the Updating System ROM continuously. > 6.1.2 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16MB) <Updating System ROM>

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

6-6

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(b) Confirmation of the updated data After the updating is completed, check each data version in setting mode (08) to confirm that the data was overwritten properly. 08-900: System ROM version 08-920: FROM basic section software version 08-921: FROM internal program version 08-922: UI data fixed section version 08-923: UI data common section version 08-924: Version of UI data language 1 in HDD 08-925: Version of UI data language 2 in HDD 08-926: Version of UI data language 3 in HDD 08-927: Version of UI data language 4 in HDD 08-928: Version of UI data language 5 in HDD 08-930: Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power ON

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

6-7

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

(c) Display during the update The processing status is displayed as follows on the LCD screen during the update.
Turn ON the power.

The device check starts.

When the device check completes, copying the data to HDD starts.

Copied

Total files

When copying all the files completes, the backup of the RIP font starts.
e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING 6-8 August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

When the backup of the RIP font completes, the update completes with the following screen.

* If an error occurs, the following error message is displayed and the update is interrupted.

Error message

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

6-9

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

6.1.2 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16MB) The firmware of the equipment except the hard disk and the option can be updated individually or in a batch by using PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16MB). Update the ROM data written on each board according to the need such as the case of replacing the system control PC board, logic PC board, scanning section control PC board, or NIC board. The data to be overwritten by this update are as follows. <Updating System ROM> System firmware (System firmware data, FROM internal program data) OS data (FROM basic section software) UI data (fixed section data, common section data, UI data in FROM displayed at power ON) <Updating Engine ROM> Engine ROM data <Updating Scanner ROM> Scanner ROM data <Updating NIC ROM> NIC ROM data

(a) Update procedure Important: Use the download jig PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16MB). Turn OFF the power before installing and removing the download jig. Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not be continued to function properly. (1) Write the ROM data to be updated to the download jig. > 6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.

(2)

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

6 - 10

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(3)

Remove the connector cover.


Connector cover

(4)

Remove the cover plate.

Cover plate

(5)

Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN100) on the SYS board.

Connector

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

6 - 11

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

(6)

Turn ON the power while [8] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously. The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed. * is displayed next to the items to be updated. (All items are selected in the default settings.)

(7)

Select the item with the ten key. * is displayed next to the selected item. Display or delete the * by pressing the number of the item. All items are selected in the default settings. Select all items to update the firmware of the equipment in a batch. Select items as follows to update it individually. <Updating System ROM> Select 1. OS Update, 2. UI Update, and 3. System Firmware. <Updating Engine ROM> Select 6. Machine Firmware Update only. <Updating Scanner ROM> Select 5. Scanner Firmware Update only. <Updating NIC ROM> Select 4. NIC Firmware Update only.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

6 - 12

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

Example: Updating the system ROM (Updating the system ROM is taken as an example and explained.)

(8)

Press the [START] button. Updating starts and the processing status is displayed on the LCD screen.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

6 - 13

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

(9)

Update Completed!! is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly.

Update Failed is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed properly. Turn OFF the power, and then check the following items. After confirming and clearing the problems, restart updating from the beginning. Is the download jig connected properly? Is the updating data written to the download jig properly? Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?

(10) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector cover.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

6 - 14

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(b) Confirmation of the updated data After the updating is completed, check each data version in setting mode (08) to confirm that the data was overwritten properly. <Updating System ROM> 08-900: System ROM version 08-920: FROM basic section software version 08-921: FROM internal program version 08-922: UI data fixed section version 08-923: UI data common section version 08-930: Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power ON <Updating Engine ROM> 08-903: Engine ROM version <Updating Scanner ROM> 08-905: Scanner ROM version <Updating NIC ROM> 08-916: NIC ROM version

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

6 - 15

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

(c) Display during the update The processing status is displayed as follows on the LCD screen during the update. (As an example, the display for updating the system ROM is explained below.) Turn ON the power while [8] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously.

Press [START] button after selecting the item to be updated. The device check starts.

When the device check completes, erasing the data in the ROM of the equipment starts.

When erasing the data completes, copying the data to the ROM of the equipment starts.
e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING 6 - 16 August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

When copying the data completes, verifying the data starts.

When verifying the data completes, copying and verifying the other data are implemented repeatedly.

When copying and verifying all the data complete, the update completes with the following screen.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

6 - 17

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

* If an error occurs, the following error message is displayed and the update is interrupted.

Error message

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

6 - 18

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) differs from the existing jigs in that the Flash ROM is mounted on the board of the jig directly. The ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write data to these Flash ROMs. Connect the download jig with the ROM writer via ROM writer adapter to write data. For the procedure to write data, refer to the download procedure, instruction manual of each ROM writer, or others.
Download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)

ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350)

PC

ROM writer

Note: There are two types of the ROM writer adapter. Use the proper one according to the ROM writer to be used. Applicable type of the adapter for the ROM writer can be confirmed by the model name indicated on the board. Confirm that the adapter is available for the ROM writer to be used before connecting them. If an unapplied adapter is connected, the application of the ROM writer judges it as an error and writing the data cannot be implemented. Applicable combinations of the ROM writer and adapter are as follows.
ROM writer Minato Electronics MODEL 1881XP (or equivalent) Minato Electronics MODEL 1893/1895/1931/1940 (or equivalent) ROM writer adapter PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881 (model 1881) PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931 (model 1931)

model 1881 model 1931 ( LV 6 5 0 )

model 1881 model 1931 ( LV 6 5 0 )

[PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881]

[PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931]

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

6 - 19

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

6.1.4 K-PWA-DLM-320 The firmware of the equipment (engine ROM, scanner ROM) and the option (RADF ROM, Finisher ROM, FAX ROM) can be updated individually by using K-PWA-DLM-320. Update the ROM data written on each board according to the need such as the case of replacing the board. The data to be overwritten by this update are as follows. <Updating Engine ROM> Engine ROM data <Updating Scanner ROM> Scanner ROM data <Updating RADF ROM> RADF ROM data <Updating Finisher ROM> Finisher firmware Saddle stitcher firmware <Updating FAX ROM> FAX ROM data

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

6 - 20

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(a) Update Procedure Since the procedure differs depending on the data, see the each procedure below. Important: Turn OFF the power before installing or removing the download jig. Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not be continued to function properly. <Updating Engine ROM> (1) Install the ROM to the download jig. Make sure the direction is correct. ( Turn OFF the power of the equipment. Remove the connector cover. Page. 6-3)

(2) (3)

Connector cover

(4)

Remove the cover plate.

Cover plate

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

6 - 21

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

(5)

Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN344) on the logic PC board (LGC board).

Connector

(6)

Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously. Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights. When the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blinking in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning. Is the download jig connected properly? Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly? Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly? Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly? Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector cover.

(7)

(8)

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

6 - 22

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

<Updating Scanner ROM> (1) Install the ROM to the download jig. Make sure the direction is correct.( Turn OFF the power of the equipment. Remove the right upper cover. Page. 6-3)

(2) (3)

Right upper cover

(4)

Remove the cover plate.

Cover plate

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

6 - 23

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

(5)

Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN16) on the scanning section control PC board (SLG board).
Connector

(6)

Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously. Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights. After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blinking in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning. Is the download jig connected properly? Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly? Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly? Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?

(7)

(8)

Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the right upper cover.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

6 - 24

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

<Updating RADF ROM> (1) Install the ROM to the download jig. Make sure the direction is correct.( (2) (3) Turn OFF the power of the equipment. Remove the RADF rear cover.

Page. 6-3)

RADF rear cover

(4)

Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN14) on the RADF control PC board.

Connector

(5)

Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously. Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

6 - 25

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

(6)

After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blinking in approx. 15 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning. Is the download jig connected properly? Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly? Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly? Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly? Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the RADF rear cover.

(7)

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

6 - 26

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

<Updating Finisher ROM> Finisher firmware (MJ-1023/1024) and saddle stitcher firmware (MJ-1024 only) are written on the finisher ROM. These two kinds of firmware can be updated individually by installing the download jig to the finisher control PC board. (1) Install the ROM to the download jig. Make sure the direction is correct.( Turn OFF the power of the equipment. Remove the finisher rear cover.
Finisher rear cover Finisher rear cover

Page. 6-3)

(2) (3)

[MJ-1023]

[MJ-1024]

* Connect the finisher interface cable with the equipment after removing the finisher rear cover. (4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector on the finisher control PC board.

Connector

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

6 - 27

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

(5)

Change the setting of the DIP switch on the finisher contorol PC board. Change the setting of the DIP switch as follows according to the firmware to be updated. Note: Record the current settings of the DIP switch before changing them. After the updating is completed, return the DIP switch to the status as record.

<Updating Finisher Firmware> Change all the setting of the DIP switch (1-8) to OFF. <Updating Saddle Stitcher Firmware> Change the setting of the DIP switch 1-6 to OFF and 7-8 to ON. (6) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously. Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights. Tip: The processing status can be confirmed by the lighting of the LED (LED 101-103) on the finisher control board.

Processing status 0% or above 15% or above 30% or above 45% or above 60% or above 75% or above 90% or above

LED103 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON

LED LED102 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON

LED101 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

6 - 28

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(7)

After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks slowly (at interval of 0.8 sec). The LED starts blinking in approx. 30 sec. (finisher section) or 2 min. 30 sec. (saddle stitcher section) since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed (finisher section) or 3 min. (saddle stitcher section), or LED flashes fast (at interval of 0.1 sec.). In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning. Is the download jig connected properly? Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly? Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly? Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly? Is the DIP switch on the finisher control PC board set properly according to the download section (finisher or saddle stitcher)? Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and return the DIP switch to the status before updating. Install the finisher rear cover.

(8) (9)

man
August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 6 - 29

uals4

you.c

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

om

<Updating FAX ROM> Important: Before updating the FAX ROM, make sure to print out the current Function list for maintenance, Function list (ADMIN), Phone book number information and Group number information. In case the updating is failed and the registered information of the users is lost for some reason, re-register the user information referring to the lists and recover it. Confirm the following items before turning OFF the power of the equipment. Turning OFF the power may clear the data below. Confirm that the MEMORY RX LED is OFF and there are no memory reception data. Print the Mailbox/Relay box report and then confirm that there are no F code data. Press the JOB STATUS button to display the screen and then confirm that there are no memory transmission data. (1) Install the ROM to the download jig. Make sure the direction is correct. ( Turn OFF the power of the equipment. Remove the connector cover.
Connector cover

Page. 6-3)

(2) (3)

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

6 - 30

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(4)

Remove the cover plate.

Cover plate

(5)

Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN602) on the FAX board.

Connector

(6)

Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously. Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights. After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blinking in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the blinking items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning. Is the download jig connected properly? Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly? Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly? Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly? Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector cover.

(7)

(8)

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

6 - 31

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

(9)

In FAX clearing mode, perform the Clearing the image data area. After updating is completed, delete the image data in the memory according to the procedure below. a. Confirm the destination setting is correct in the setting mode (08). 08-201: Destination setting of the equipment 08-701: Destination setting of the FAX b. Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously. c. Key in 102. d. Press the [START] button. Note: If the equipment does not work properly after (9), follow the procedure below and then perform the Clearing all in FAX clearing mode. a. Confirm the destination setting is correct in the setting mode (08). 08-201: Destination setting of the equipment 08-701: Destination setting of the FAX b. Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously. c. Key in 100. d. Press the [START] button.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

6 - 32

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

(b) Confirmation of the updated data After the updating is completed, check each data version in setting mode (08) to confirm that the data was overwritten properly. <Updating Engine ROM> 08-903: Engine ROM version <Updating Scanner ROM> 08-905: Scanner ROM version <Updating RADF ROM> 08-907: RADF ROM version <Updating Finisher ROM> 08-908: Finisher ROM version <Updating FAX ROM> 08-915: FAX ROM version

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

6 - 33

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

6.2 Firmware Updating with FSMS (Field Service Manager)


TBD

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING

6 - 34

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

7. POWER SUPPLY UNIT


7.1 Output Channel
The followings are four output channels which are not linked with the door switch. (1) 3.3V 3.3VA : CN464 Pins 13, 14, 15 and 16 pins Output to the SYS board 3.3VB : CN464 Pins 19 and 20 Output to the SYS board 3.3VB : CN466 Pin 3 Output to the LGC board 3.3VB : CN467 Pins 17 and 18 Output to the SLG board (2) 5.1V 5.1VA : CN464 Pins 24 and 26 Output to the SYS board 5.1VB : CN464 Pin 25 Output to the SYS board 5.1VB : CN466 Pin 1 Output to the LGC board, CCL board (via LGC board) 5.1VB : CN467 Pins 5 and 6 Output to the RADF 5.1VB : CN467 Pins 21 and 22 Output to the SLG board 5.1VB : CN468 Pin 1 Output to the finisher 5.1VB : CN469 Pin 5 Output to the FIL board or FUS board (3) +12V 12VA : CN464 Pin 7 Output to the SYS board 12VB : CN464 Pin 5 Output to the SYS board 12VB : CN466 Pin 16 (*NAD/SAD/TWD models only) Output to the LGC board (4) -12V -12VA : CN464 Pin 9 Output to the SYS board -12VB : CN464 Pin 3 Output to the SYS board

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

7-1

e-STUDIO3511/4511 POWER SUPPLY UNIT

The followings are two output channels which are linked with the door switch. (1) 5.1V 5.1VD : CN466 Pins 11 and 12 Output to the LGC board, CCL board (via LGC board) (2) 24V 24VD1 : CN465 Pins 1 and 2 Output to the LGC board, CCL board (via LGC board) 24VD1 : CN469 Pins 1 and 2 Output to the PFP/LCF 24VD1 : CN470 Pin 1 Output to the power supply cooling fan 24VD2 : CN465 Pins 5 and 6 Output to the DRV board 24VD3 : CN467 Pins 1 and 2 Output to the RADF 24VD4 : CN467 Pin 9 Output to the SDV board 24VD4 : CN467 Pins 11 and 13 Output to the SLG board 24VD5 : CN468 Pin 3 Output to the finisher <<Output connector>> Not linked with the door switch CN464 For the SYS board CN466 For the LGC board, FAX board CN467 For the SLG board, RADF CN468 For the finisher CN469 For the FIL board/FUS board Linked with the door switch CN465 For the LGC board, DRV board CN466 For the LGC board CN467 For the SLG board, SDV board, RADF CN468 For the finisher CN469 For the PFP/LCF CN470 For the power supply cooling fan

e-STUDIO3511/4511 POWER SUPPLY UNIT

7-2

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

7.2 Fuse
When the power supply secondary fuse is blow out, confirm that there is no abnormally with each part using the following table. Voltage 24VD1 Part Fuse type Polygonal motor F3:8A (Semi time-lag) Tray-up motor ADU motor Main motor Developer motor Transport motor Drum cleaner brush motor Transfer belt cleaner auger motor Toner motor Laser unit cooling fan 2nd transfer roller drive clutch 2nd transfer roller contact clutch Bypass feed clutch Registration clutch Upper transport clutch (high speed) Upper transport clutch (low speed) Lower transport clutch (high speed) Lower transport clutch (low speed) Upper drawer feed clutch Lower drawer feed clutch ADU clutch Color developer toner supply clutch Color developer drive clutch Black developer drive clutch Black developer contact clutch Transfer belt cleaner contact clutch Bypass pickup solenoid Image quality sensor shutter solenoid Color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid Discharge lamp Key counter/Copy key card CCL Carge cleaner motor Power supply Power supply cooling fan PFP/LCF DRV Revolver motor F4:5A (Semi time-lag) Exit motor IH control board cooling fan Ozone exhaust fan RADF F5:4A (Semi time-lag) SLG Exposure lamp (lamp inverter) F6:4A (Semi time-lag) CCD drive circuit (CCD board) SLG board cooling fan SLG Scanner unit cooling fan SDV Scan motor Finisher F7:5A (Semi time-lag) Board/Unit LGC

24VD2

24VD3 24VD4

24VD5

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

7-3

e-STUDIO3511/4511 POWER SUPPLY UNIT

IH

F3

24VD1 CN465 LGC board, CCL board (via LGC board) 24VD1 CN469 PFP/LCF 24VD1 CN470 Power supply cooling fan

*NAD/SAD/TWD models: Standard


F4

24VD2 CN465 DRV board 24VD3 CN467 RADF 24VD4 CN467 SLG board, SDV board 24VD5 CN468 Finisher 5.1VD CN466 LGC board, CCL board (via LGC board)

Breaker Main switch


F1 F6 F7

Reg. Door switch


CN460
F5

e-STUDIO3511/4511 POWER SUPPLY UNIT


FIL board AC DOOR Noise filter Switching power supply

Live

AC IN

Noise filter

7.3 Configuration of Power Supply Unit

Neutral

7-4

CN460

manuals4you.com
3.3VA 3.3VB 3.3VB 3.3VB
F2

FUS board

CN464 CN464 CN466 CN467

SYS board SYS board LGC board SLG board

*ASD/AUD/CND models: Standard *MJD model: Option

Noise filter

Reg.

5.1VA 5.1VB 5.1VB 5.1VB 5.1VB 5.1VB

CN464 CN464 CN466 CN467 CN468 CN469

SYS board SYS board LGC board, CCL board (via LGC board) SLG board, RADF Finisher FIL board or FUS board +12VA CN464 SYS board -12VA CN464 SYS board +12VB CN464 SYS board +12VB CN466 LGC board -12VB CN464 SYS board

AC MAIN

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

J662 2 2 3 3 1 1

WIRELESS LAN AC ADAPTER


+5V

FG (OPTION)

AC(N:OUT) AC (GND) AC(L:OUT)

J655 AC(N:MAIN) D NF AC(L:MAIN) E A AC(L) B AC(N)

J656

INLET (AC IN)


F

N A GND B L C

J653

8.1 AC DIAGRAM

MAIN GND

NS-FILTER (NOISE FILTER)

AC(L:MAIN) AC(L:MAIN) 4

F2

MAIN-SW (MAIN-SWITCH)
J622 1 3 4 AC(L:DOOR) 6 2 AC(N:DOOR) 3 F1

NF

NF

8. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

J650

3 2 1

J650 3 3 2 2 1 1

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC


J595 D F AC(N:MAIN) AC(N:MAIN) J460 1

BREAKER

PS-ACC AC-DC DC

AC-DC

DC

J469 1 2 3 4 5 6

5.1VA SG

COV-INTLCK-SW
J647 AC-IN-YHM(N) AC-IN(L) AC-IN-YHM(N) AC-IN-YHM(N) 3 3 2 2 1 1

(COVER OPENING/CLOSING) INTERLOCK SWITCH


CN451 A CN450 B CN453 CN452

J546 1 2 THERMO-FSR IH-COIL J643 J642

FUSER

8-1
PS-IH PWA-F-FIL ASD,AUD,CND MODELS: STANDARD MJD MODEL: OPTION
J433 J431 AC(N) 3 4 AC(L) 3 2 1

SAD,TWD NAD,MODELS: STANDARD

CN454

J644 J644

J493 AC(N) 4 3 2 AC(L) 1 J494 1 2 AC(N) 3

PWA-F-FUS
J433

J657 DRM-N DRM-L 2 1

THERMO-DRM-DH

ASD,AUD,SAD, TWD,CND MODELS: STANDARD DRM-DH NAD,MJD MODELS: OPTION SCANNER

AC(L)

3 2 1

J495 GND 3 2 VDD 1

RY
2 1

GND VDD

RY
J432 1 2 3 AC(N:SCN) AC(L:SCN)

THERMO-SCN-DH J61 J62

J64 1 1 2 2 DH-SCN-N 1 1 DH-SCN-L 2 2 J652 J60

1 2 1 2 J63

SCN-R-DH SCN-L-DH

J432 1 2 3

4 5 6

4 5 6

e-STUDIO3511/4511 WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS


5.1VA SG

(DC LINE)

e-STUDIO3511/4511 WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

8-2

August 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

manuals4you.com

1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 SERVICE HANDBOOK 8. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 8.2 DC Wire Harness

J2 (TD+)FA1 1 (TD-)FA2 2 (RD+)FA3 3 FA45 4 FA45 5 (RD-)FA6 6 FA78 7 FA78 8 NC(MTG) 9 NC(MTG) 10 SH 11 SH 12 SH 13 SH 14

CN355

CN121 VCC 1 VCC 2 VCC 3 NC(/CS2P) 4 D15 5 D14 6 D13 7 GND 8 D12 9 D11 10 D10 11 GND 12 D09 13 D08 14 /INTPR1 15 GND 16 A03 17 A02 18 A01 19 NC(SRXD) 20 A00 21 D07 22 D06 23 A15 24 D05 25 A14 26 D04 27 A13 28 D03 29 A12 30 D02 31 A11 32 D01 33 A10 34 D00 35 A09 36 A04 37 A08 38 /RESET 39 A07 40 /ACK 41 A06 42 /CSP1 43 A05 44 NC(OEP) 45 NC(STXD) 46 RW 47 GND 48 A16 49 GND-5K 50 VCC-5K 51 GND 52 NC(DACK) 53 VCC-5K 54 /INTPR2 55 GND56 BRDIN 57 VCC 58 VCC 59 VCC 60

CN349

e-STUDIO3511/4511 8. 8.2 DC
J151 J152 TRST# A1 +12V A2 TMS A3 TD1 A4 +5V A5 INTA# A6 INTC# A7 +5V A8 RESERVED A9 +3.3VIO A10 RESERVED A11 A12 A13 +3.3VAUX A14 RST# A15 +3.3VIO A16 GNT# A17 GND A18 RME# A19 AD[30] A20 +3.3V A21 AD[28] A22 AD[26] A23 GND A24 AD[24] A25 IDSEL A26 +3.3V A27 AD[22] A28 AD[20] A29 GND A30 AD[18] A31 AD[16] A32 +3.3V A33 FRAME# A34 GND A35 TRDY# A36 GND A37 STOP# A38 +3.3V A39 RESRVED A40 RESRVED A41 GND A42 PAR A43 AD[15] A44 +3.3V A45 AD[13] A46 AD[11] A47 GND A48 AD(09) A49 GND A50 GND A51 C/BE(0)# A52 +3.3V A53 AD[06] A54 AD[04] A55 GND A56 AD[02] A57 AD[00] A58 +3.3VIO A59 REQ64# A60 +5V A61 +5V A62 -12V B1 TCK B2 GND B3 TD0 B4 +5V B5 +5V B6 INTB# B7 INTD# B8 PRSNT1# B9 RESERVED B10 PRSNT2# B11 B12 B13 RESERVED B14 GND B15 CLK B16 GND B17 REQ# B18 +3.3VIO B19 AD[31] B20 AD[29] B21 GND B22 AD[27] B23 AD[25] B24 +3.3V B25 C/BE(3)# B26 AD[23] B27 GND B28 AD[21] B29 AD[19] B30 +3.3V B31 AD[17] B32 C/BE(2)# B33 GND B34 IRDY# B35 +3.3V B36 DEVSEL# B37 GND B38 LOCK# B39 PERR# B40 +3.3V B41 SERR# B42 +3.3V B43 C/BE(1)# B44 AD[14] B45 GND B46 AD[12] B47 AD[10] B48 M66EN B49 GND B50 GND B51 AD[08] B52 AD[07] B53 +3.3V B54 AD[05] B55 AD[03] B56 GND B57 AD[01] B58 +3.3VIO B59 ACK64# B60 +5V B61 +5V B62

PWA-F-NIC
J3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

PWA-F-LGC Board to Board


A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

PWA-F-SYS
CN150 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 CN124 +3.3V 1 +3.3V 2 +3.3V 3 GND 4 -12V 5 -12V 6 +5V 7 +5V 8 +3.3V 9 OPBINT(2) 10 OPBINT(0) 11 GND 12 PCICLK(5) 13 GND 14 PCICLK(3) 15 GND 16 REQ(1)# 17 REQ(0)# 18 +3.3V 19 AD[31] 20 AD[29] 21 GND 22 AD[27] 23 AD[25] 24 +3.3V 25 C/BE(3)# 26 AD[23] 27 GND 28 AD[21] 29 AD[19] 30 +3.3V 31 AD[17] 32 C/BE(2)# 33 GND 34 IRDY# 35 +3.3V 36 DEVSEL# 37 GND 38 LOCK# 39 PERR# 40 +3.3V 41 SERR# 42 +3.3V 43 C/BE(1)# 44 AD[14] 45 GND 46 AD[12] 47 AD[10] 48 M66EN 49 GND 50 AD[8] 51 AD[7] 52 +3.3V 53 AD[5] 54 AD[3] 55 GND 56 AD[1] 57 +3.3V 58 +5V 59 GND 60 +3.3V 61 +3.3V 62 +3.3V 63 GND 64 +12V 65 +12V 66 +5V 67 +5V 68 +3.3V 69 OPBINT(1) 70 +3.3V 71 PCIRST# 72 +3.3V 73 PCICLK(4) 74 +3.3V 75 GNT(1)# 76 GNT(0)# 77 GND 78 PME# 79 AD[30] 80 +3.3V 81 AD[28] 82 AD[26] 83 GND 84 AD[24] 85 +3.3V 86 +3.3V 87 AD[22] 88 AD[20] 89 GND 90 AD[18] 91 AD[16] 92 +3.3V 93 FRAME# 94 GND 95 TRDY# 96 GND 97 STOP# 98 +3.3V 99 +3.3V 100 GND 101 GND 102 PAR 103 AD[15] 104 +3.3V 105 AD[13] 106 AD[11] 107 GND 108 AD[9] 109 GND 110 C/BE(0)# 111 +3.3V 112 AD[6] 113 AD[4] 114 GND 115 AD[2] 116 AD[0] 117 +3.3V 118 +5V 119 +5V 120 CN115 CN116 VSS 1 DQ0 2 DQ1 3 DQ2 4 DQ3 5 VDD 6 DQ4 7 DQ5 8 DQ6 9 DQ7 10 DQ8 11 VSS 12 DQ9 13 DQ10 14 DQ11 15 DQ12 16 DQ13 17 VDD 18 DQ14 19 DQ15 20 NC 21 NC 22 VSS 23 NC 24 NC 25 VDD 26 /WE 27 DQMB0 28 DQMB1 29 /CS0 30 NC 31 VSS 32 A0 33 A2 34 A4 35 A6 36 A8 37 A10 38 BA1 39 VDD 40 VDD 41 CLK0 42 VSS 43 NC 44 /CS2 45 DQMB2 46 DQMB3 47 NC 48 VDD 49 NC 50 NC 51 NC 52 NC 53 VSS 54 DQ16 55 DQ17 56 DQ18 57 DQ19 58 VDD 59 DQ20 60 NC 61 NC 62 CKE1 63 VSS 64 DQ21 65 DQ22 66 DQ23 67 VSS 68 DQ24 69 DQ25 70 DQ26 71 DQ27 72 VDD 73 DQ28 74 DQ29 75 DQ30 76 DQ31 77 VSS 78 CLK2 79 NC 80 NC(WP) 81 SDA 82 SCL 83 VDD 84 VSS 85 DQ32 86 DQ33 87 DQ34 88 DQ35 89 VDD 90 DQ36 91 DQ37 92 DQ38 93 DQ39 94 DQ40 95 VSS 96 DQ41 97 DQ42 98 DQ43 99 DQ44 100 DQ45 101 VDD 102 DQ46 103 DQ47 104 NC 105 NC 106 VSS 107 NC 108 NC 109 VDD 110 /CAS 111 DQMB4 112 DQMB5 113 /CS1 114 /RAS 115 VSS 116 A1 117 A3 118 A5 119 A7 120 A9 121 A11 122 BA0 123 VDD 124 CLK1 125 A12 126 VSS 127 CEK 128 /CS3 129 DQMB6 130 DQMB7 131 A13 132 VDD 133 NC 134 NC 135 NC 136 NC 137 VSS 138 DQ48 139 DQ49 140 DQ50 141 DQ51 142 VDD 143 DQ52 144 NC 145 NC 146 NC 147 VSS 148 DQ53 149 DQ54 150 DQ55 151 VSS 152 DQ56 153 DQ57 154 DQ58 155 DQ59 156 VDD 154 DQ60 158 DQ61 159 DQ62 160 DQ63 161 VSS 162 CLK3 163 NC 164 SA0 165 SA1 166 SA2 167 VDD 168

Board to Board
CN100 DATA0 1 DATA2 2 DATA4 3 DATA6 4 DATA8 5 DATA10 6 DATA12 7 DATA14 8 A21 9 A19 10 A17 11 A15 12 A13 13 A11 14 A09 15 A07 16 A05 17 A03 18 RDX 19 CS7-A 20 CS7-B 21 VCC 22 VCC 23 GND 24 GND 25 DATA1 26 DATA3 27 DATA5 28 DATA7 29 DATA9 30 DATA11 31 DATA13 32 DATA15 33 A20 34 A18 35 A16 36 A14 37 A12 38 A10 39 A08 40 A06 41 A04 42 A02 43 DWNLED 44 /CS0 45 VCC 46 RMSL 47 /WRX 48 GND 49 GND 50
CN105 1 2

LAN(10BASA-T/100BASA-TX)
+12V GND 1 2

FAN

(OPTION)

DOWNLOARD JIG(FAX)

CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

A
PCI SLOT(1) PCI SLOT(0)

F
LCD BACK LIGHT
J423 CCFL+ 1 2 CCFL3 J427 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1

CN359 4 3 2 1

PWA-F-DRV

DOWNLOARD JIG(SLG)

TOUCH PANEL

PWA-F-CCD

J422 YD 1 XL 2 XR 3 YU 4 J424 FRAWE 1 LOAD 2 CP 3 VSS 4 VDD 5 VSS 6 VEE 7 D.OFF 8 D0 9 D1 10 D2 11 D3 12

G
J429 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

PWA-F-DSP

CN11 DFAK-0A 1 1 DFSCST-0A 2 2 DFRXD-0A 3 3 SG 4 4 DFTXD-0A 5 5 SG 6 6 DFRAK-0A 7 7 DFRRQ-0A 8 8 DFRQ-0A 9 9 DFCNT-0A 10 10

J50 SG 3 CN13 PLTN-1A 1 2 +5V 2 1 J49 3 SG 4 3 HOME-1A 5 2 +5V 1 6

USB DEVICE

CN30

J426 SCN15 1 SCN14 2 SCN13 3 SCN12 4 SCN11 5 RET0 6 RET1 7 RET2 8 RET3 9 RET8 10 RET9 11 J425 LDFC-1 1 LDFC-2 2 LDFC-4 3 LDFC-5 4 LDFC-6 5 LDFC-7 6 LDFC-8 7 LDFC-9 8 LDFC-10 9 LDFC-11 10 LDFC-12 11 LDFC-13 12 LDFC-15 13 LDON0 14 LDON1 15 GND 16

RS-232C (D-sub 9pin)

XSCL-1A LP-1A WE-1A YP-1A SG BZON-0A CPPOW-0A LDCLKA LDDAT-0A LDLTH-0A LDON1-0A LDON0-0A SG VDD VDD VDD VDD RSTCP-0A SG RTS1-0A CTS1-0A SOUT0-1A SIN0-1A SG UD3-1A UD2-1A UD1-1A UD0-1A SG LCDEN-1A

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15

A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1

CN118 XSCL-1A 1 LP-1A 2 WF-1A 3 YD-1A 4 INVGND 5 BZON-0A 6 CPPOW-1A 7 LDCLK-1A 8 LDDAT-1A 9 LDLTH-1A 10 LDON1-0A 11 LDON0-0A 12 SG5 13 VDD 14 INV5V 15 LED5V 16 VDD 17 CPRST-0A 18 GND 19 RTS0-0A 20 CTS0-0A 21 TXD0-1A 22 RXD0-1A 23 GND 24 UD3-1A 25 UD2-1A 26 UD1-1A 27 UD0-1A 28 GND 29 LCDEN-1A 30

PC I/F(IEEE1284)

J527 J523 J526

LCD PANEL

CN109 TXD 1 RXD 2 RTS 3 DSR 4 DTR 5 CTS 6 DCD 7 GND 8

CN172 3 2 7 6 4 8 1 5 NC 9

CN21 +24VGND 1 +24VGND 2 LMPON-0A 3 +24V 4 FG 5

CN1 1 2 3 4 5

INV-EXP

MAD[5] MAD[7] MAD[9] MAD[11] MAD[13] MAD[15] MAD[17] ROMDT-0 +5V LED-0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

SG SG +5V +5V SG SG 3.3V 3.3V +24VCCDGND +24VCCD +24VGND +24V

PS-ACC

CN108 STB 1 DATA0 2 DATA1 3 DATA2 4 DATA3 5 DATA4 6 DATA5 7 DATA6 8 DATA7 9 NACK 10 BUSY 11 PERROR 12 SELECT 13 NATFD 14 NC 15 GND 16 FG 17 LOGIC 18 GND 19 GND 20 GND 21 GND 22 GND 23 GND 24 GND 25 GND 26 GND 27 GND 28 GND 29 GND 30 NINIT 31 NFAULT 32 NC 33 NC 34 NC 35 NSELIN 36

PWA-F-KEY

CN2 CN32 J42

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

J428 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

CN119 VBUS 1 D2 D+ 3 GND 4 CN110 VBUS 1 D2 D+ 3 GND 4 GND 5

USB HOST (INTERNAL)

CN31

CN32 +24V 2 +24VGND 1

CN125 VSS 1 DQ0 2 DQ1 3 DQ2 4 DQ3 5 VDD 6 DQ4 7 DQ5 8 DQ6 9 DQ7 10 DQ8 11 VSS 12 DQ9 13 DQ10 14 DQ11 15 DQ12 16 DQ13 17 VDD 18 DQ14 19 DQ15 20 NC 21 NC 22 VSS 23 NC 24 NC 25 VDD 26 /WE 27 DQMB0 28 DQMB1 29 /CS0 30 NC 31 VSS 32 A0 33 A2 34 A4 35 A6 36 A8 37 A10 38 BA1 39 VDD 40 VDD 41 CLK0 42 VSS 43 NC 44 /CS2 45 DQMB2 46 DQMB3 47 NC 48 VDD 49 NC 50 NC 51 NC 52 NC 53 VSS 54 DQ16 55 DQ17 56 DQ18 57 DQ19 58 VDD 59 DQ20 60 NC 61 NC 62 CKE1 63 VSS 64 DQ21 65 DQ22 66 DQ23 67 VSS 68 DQ24 69 DQ25 70 DQ26 71 DQ27 72 VDD 73 DQ28 74 DQ29 75 DQ30 76 DQ31 77 VSS 78 CLK2 79 NC 80 NC(WP) 81 SDA 82 SCL 83 VDD 84 VSS 85 DQ32 86 DQ33 87 DQ34 88 DQ35 89 VDD 90 DQ36 91 DQ37 92 DQ38 93 DQ39 94 DQ40 95 VSS 96 DQ41 97 DQ42 98 DQ43 99 DQ44 100 DQ45 101 VDD 102 DQ46 103 DQ47 104 NC 105 NC 106 VSS 107 NC 108 NC 109 VDD 110 /CAS 111 DQMB4 112 DQMB5 113 /CS1 114 /RAS 115 VSS 116 A1 117 A3 118 A5 119 A7 120 A9 121 A11 122 BA0 123 VDD 124 CLK1 125 A12 126 VSS 127 CEK 128 /CS3 129 DQMB6 130 DQMB7 131 A13 132 VDD 133 NC 134 NC 135 NC 136 NC 137 VSS 138 DQ48 139 DQ49 140 DQ50 141 DQ51 142 VDD 143 DQ52 144 NC 145 NC 146 NC 147 VSS 148 DQ53 149 DQ54 150 DQ55 151 VSS 152 DQ56 153 DQ57 154 DQ58 155 DQ59 156 VDD 154 DQ60 158 DQ61 159 DQ62 160 DQ63 161 VSS 162 CLK3 163 NC 164 SA0 165 SA1 166 SA2 167 VDD 168

J2 RXD 1 SG 2 TXD 3 SG 4 5 6 NC 7 8 F-CNT 9 CNT-GND 10

DOWNLOAD JIG(SYS) FAX(OPTION)


CN401 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 CN600 TXOUT2 1 +5VA 2 +12V 3 3.3V 4 MOD2DMA-1 5 SG 6 MEM2CS-0 7 VDD 8 MEMRD2-0 9 CLKOE-1 10 TXEN2-1 11 VDD 12 A[16] 13 A[14] 14 A[12] 15 A[10] 16 A[8] 17 A[6] 18 A[4] 19 A[2] 20 A[0] 21 VDD 22 CEP1RST-0 23 VDD 24 SG 25 CEPCLK 26 SG 27 D[0] 28 D[2] 29 D[4] 30 D[6] 31 D[8] 32 D[10] 33 D[12] 34 D[14] 35 SG 36 MOD2DET-0 37 SG 38 DREQC2-1 39 DACKC2-0 40 RXIN2 41 AG 42 -12V 43 AG 44 MD2INT-1 45 MOD2CS-0 46 MOD2RST-0 47 SG 48 RXEN2-1 49 MEMWRH2-0 50 MEMWRL2-0 51 A[18] 52 A[17] 53 A[15] 54 A[13] 55 A[11] 56 A[9] 57 A[7] 58 A[5] 59 A[3] 60 A[1] 61 CPURST-0 62 CEP2INT-1 63 VDD 64 VDD 65 IORD2-0 66 IOWR2-0 67 D[1] 68 D[3] 69 D[5] 70 D[7] 71 D[9] 72 D[11] 73 D[13] 74 D[15] 75 VDD 76 VDD 77 CEP2CS-0 78 DREQD2-1 79 DACKD2-0 80 CN702 +24V 1 PG 2 NC 3 CN602 D[0] 1 D[2] 2 D[4] 3 D[6] 4 RD-0 5 A[0] 6 A[2] 7 A[4] 8 A[6] 9 A[8] 10 A[10] 11 A[12] 12 A[14] 13 A[16] 14 A[18] 15 SG 16 SG 17 D[1] 18 D[3] 19 D[5] 20 D[7] 21 BOOTCS-0 22 A[1] 23 A[3] 24 A[5] 25 A[7] 26 A[9] 27 A[11] 28 A[13] 29 A[15] 30 A[17] 31 ROMDET0-0 32 VDD 33 LEDDL-0 34 CN701 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 NC 50

CN113 +12V 1 GND 2 GND 3 +5V 4 CN112 /RESET 1 GND 2 DD7 3 DD8 4 DD6 5 DD9 6 DD5 7 DD10 8 DD4 9 DD11 10 DD3 11 DD12 12 DD2 13 DD13 14 DD1 15 DD14 16 DD0 17 DD15 18 GND 19 NC(KEY) 20 MDARQ 21 GND 22 /DIOW 23 GND 24 /DIOR 25 GND 26 IORDY 27 GND 28 /DMACK 29 GND 30 INTRQ 31 RESERVED 32 DA1 33 /PDIAG 34 DA0 35 DA2 36 /CS0 37 /CS1 38 /DASP 39 GND 40

CN171 1 2 3 4 CN170 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CN344 D[0] 1 D[2] 2 D[4] 3 D[6] 4 RD-0 5 A[0] 6 A[2] 7 A[4] 8 A[6] 9 A[8] 10 A[10] 11 A[12] 12 A[14] 13 A[16] 14 A[18] 15 SG 16 SG 17 D[1] 18 D[3] 19 D[5] 20 D[7] 21 CS2-0 22 A[1] 23 A[3] 24 A[5] 25 A[7] 26 A[9] 27 A[11] 28 A[13] 29 A[15] 30 A[17] 31 ROMDT-0 32 +5V 33 ROMLD-1 34

CN347 +5V 13 SG 12 MAMON 11 MAMCLK 10 MAMCW 9 MAMPL 8 MAMGA 7 PG 6 PG 5 +24V 4 +24V 3 MAMBL 2 NC 1

J581 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

CN354 +24V PG +5V SG ENVT2 ENVT1 ENVCH ENSNR2 ENSNR1 +5VSW

CN491 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

BKCTR MNCTR FLCTR SG SIZE3 SIZE2 SIZE1 SIZE0 +5V CTRCNT2

+24V CTRON CTRCNT MCRUM EXTCTR PG

MAINMOT

COINCONTROLLER

COPY KEY CARD (OPTION)

SG +5V AD0 AD2 AD4 AD6 I/F0 I/F2 I/F4 I/F6 SG WE CSIP2 +5V IPCSW SG +5V AD1 AD3 AD5 AD7 I/F01 I/F03 I/F05 I/F07 SG OE IPRST +5V SG

PWAF-CCL

CN492 CCW 1 CW 2 SG 3 SW1 4 SG 5 SW2 6

J664 6 1 5 2 4 3 3 4 2 5 1 6

IPC
CCL-FPOS-SW J583 1 KEY-COPY 2 COUNTER 3 4 KTCR0 +24V KTCRC SG J648 4 1 3 2 2 3 1 4 CN356 KTCR0 A9 +24V A8 KTCRC A7 SG A6 C-CK A5 C-K(SG) A4 NC A3 NC A2 SG A1 VLED B9 DVCTNR B8 AG B7 DVTNALD B6 +5V B5 SLDVTNA B4 +24V B3 SLDVTNB B2 CKCLS B1 J668 1 2

J667 1 CCL-RPOS-SW 2 J666 3 1 2 2 1 3

SPEAKER

+ -

CN503 1 2

DOWNLOAD JIG(LGC)

NCU (1)

MDM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

CN501 TXOUT 1 RXIN 2 CML 3 LD 4 ER/HK 5 ATT3DB 6 RLADJ1 7 RLADJ2 8 RGCLK 9 SG 10 -12V 11 AG 12 +12V 13 +24V 14 16Hz 15 AG 16 CI 17 ANSDET 18 REVA 19 REVB 20 INTHOOK 21 FXTHOOK 22 +5V 23 SG 24 +5V 25 -12V 26 AG 27 +12V 28 +24V 29 PG 30

CN348 NC B12 +24V B11 +24V B10 PG B9 PG B8 NC B7 DVMPL B6 DVMCW B5 DVMCLK B4 DEVMON B3 SG B2 +5V B1

J578 NC 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J582

SW2 SG SW1 SG CW CCW

J665 6 1 5 2 4 3 3 4 2 5 1 6

(OPTION)
J598 RXD 1 SG 2 TXD 3 SG 4 FG 5 F-CNT 6 CNT-GND 7 +5V 8 SG 9 NC 10 +24V 11 PG 12 FG

(OPTION)
J512 SG/CPSW2 10 1 NC 9 2 J579 DVCTNR 8 3 4 AG 3 7 4 COLRDVTNALD ATTNR-SNR 2 6 5 +5V 5 6 1 4 7 J580 SLDVTNA 3 3 8 ATTNR+24V 2 9 SHUT-SOL 2 SLDVTNB 1 1 10

CCL-MOT

2 1

DEVMOT

M FINISHER

5 4 3 2 1

CN352 +24V PG POMCK POMON POMPL CN334 SG +5VD +5VD SG WRLVL SG SG PIDT1 PIDT0 SG WRAPC SHDWN SG +5VD +5VD SG +5V BEAMDT SG SG CN362 NC NC NC +24V +5V CLKDVP USTFL DRCLB SG BMDRCB

J204 5 4 3 2 1 CN201 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

B
M/DCPOL

(STANADARD)

HDD

Board to Board

A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1

SCRAMBLER BOARD

+5V SG FDMON FDMCK FDMCW FDMPL FDMGA PG PG +24V +24V NC

NC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

TRSPMOT

PS-IH (OPTION)
J510 CN351 PG 1 +24V 2 GASOL 3 NC 4 RLTRS 5 RLCSW 6 NC 7 RLCNT 8 JSPSW 9 SG 10 RLHSW 11 +5V 12 RLC2S 13 NC 1 NC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

CN455 IH2ON 1 +5VSW 2 H1PWR1 3 H1PWR2 4 H1PWR3 5 H2PWR1 6 H2PWR2 7 H2PWR3 8 CN456 IH1ON 1 SG 2 IHDUTY 3 H1ERR1 4 H1ERR2 5

J626 A1 A13 A2 A12 A3 A11 A4 A10 A5 A9 A6 A8 A7 A7 A8 A6

CN358 IH2ON A1 +5VSW A2 H1PWR1 A3 H1PWR2 A4 H1PWR3 A5 H2PWR1 A6 H2PWR2 A7 H2PWR3 A8

NCU (2)

Board to Board Board to Board

DIMM(1)

PM DIMM

DIMM(0)

CN502 TXOUT 1 1 RXIN 2 2 CML 3 3 LD 4 4 ER/HK 5 5 ATT3DB 6 6 RLADJ1 7 7 RLADJ2 8 8 RGCLK 9 9 SG 10 10 -12V 11 11 AG 12 12 +12V 13 13 NC 14 14 16Hz 15 15 AG 16 16 CI 17 17 ANSDET 18 18 REVA 19 19 REVB 20 20 NC 21 21 NC 22 22 +5V 23 23 SG 24 24 +5V 25 25 -12V 26 26 AG 27 27 +12V 28 28 NC 29 29 NC 30 30

CN19 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

(OPTION)

COIN CONTROLLER/ COPY KEY CARD

CN126 L/S 1 FULL-C 2 MONO-C 3 B/W 4 VDD 5 GND 6 NC 7

CN120 VBUS 1 D2 D+ 3 GND 4 VBUS 5 D6 D+ 7 GND 8

USB HOST

6 5 4 3 2 1

CN20 SG 1 SG 2 +3.3VA 3 +3.3VA 4 +3.3VA 5 +3.3VA 6 SG 7 NC 8 BDI[9] 9 BDI[8] 10 BDI[7] 11 BDI[6] 12 BDI[5] 13 BDI[4] 14 BDI[3] 15 BDI[2] 16 BDI[1] 17 BDI[0] 18 SG 19 SG 20 GDI[9] 21 GDI[8] 22 GDI[7] 23 GDI[6] 24 GDI[5] 25 GDI[4] 26 GDI[3] 27 GDI[2] 28 GDI[1] 29 GDI[0] 30 SG 31 SG 32 RDI[9] 33 RDI[8] 34 RDI[7] 35 RDI[6] 36 RDI[5] 37 RDI[4] 38 RDI[3] 39 RDI[2] 40 RDI[1] 41 RDI(0) 42 SCLK-0 43 SDO-0 44 CEBLUE-0 45 SCLK-0 46 SDO-0 47 CEGREEN-0 48 SCLK-0 49 SDO-0 50 CERED-0 51 SHO-0 52 SHP-0 53 BLKCLP-0 54 ACLP-0 55 AOCLK-1 56 SG 57 SG 58 +5V 59 +5V 60 +5V 61 SG 62 SG 63 SG 64 SH-0 65 CCDSW 66 CK2-0 67 CK1-1 68 SHMONO-0 69 SHCOROR-0 70 CP-0 71 PS-0 72 SG 73 SG 74 +10.5V 75 +10.5V 76 SG 77 SG 78 SG 79 SG 80

CN12 NC +24V FANSLG +5VAPS APSR-0A SG +5VAPS APSC-0A SG +5VAPS APS3-0A SG +5VAPS APS2-0A SG A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 CN18 A7 A8 A9 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 CN10 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 CN102 SCN-3V B20 SCNOUT-1 B19 SCNIN-1 B18 MMPI0-1 B17 SCNCTS-0 B16 SCNRTS-0 B15 SRST-0 B14 SYSCNT-0 B13 RESERVED B12 VSYN-1 B11 HSYN-0 B10 GND B9 MCKI-1 B8 RX0-0 B7 GND B6 RX1-1 B5 RX2-0 B4 GND B3 CLK-1 B2 RX3-0 B1 CCODE(0) A20 GND A19 GND A18 GND A17 GND A16 GND A15 CCODE(1) A14 SCNT-1 A13 VSYN-0 A12 GND A11 HSYN-1 A10 MCKI-0 A9 GND A8 RX0-1 A7 RX1-0 A6 GND A5 RX2-1 A4 CLK-0 A3 GND A2 RX3-1 A1

APS-R

J54 1 2 2 1

J48 1 2 2 1

J47 3 2 1 J46 3 2 1 J45 3 2 1 J44 3 2 1 J43 3 2 1 CN16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

THMSDRM

J638 DRTMP+ 1 DRTMP2

APS-C

J55 1 2 2 1

J53 1 1 2 2

J621 TEMPS 4 SG TEMP/HUMI- 3 HUMIS SNR 2 +5V 1 J649 PG 4 PG 3 24VD 2 24VD 1 J636 1 6 2 5 3 4 4 3 5 2 6 1

APS3

SCANFAN-MOT

SLGFAN-MOT

NC

K-ATTNRSNR

APS2

J576 PG 4 ATS 3 +24V 2 PG 1

A4 SERIES ONLY

APS1

+5VAPS APS1-0A SG

B7 B8 B9 CN16

PWA-F-SLG

MDT[0] MDT[2] MDT[4] MDT[6] MRD-0A (PNCNT)DLAD(0) (SSW)DLAD(2) MAD[4] MAD[6] MAD[8] MAD[10] MAD[12] MAD[14] MAD[16] MAD[18] SG SG MDT[1] MDT[3] MDT[5] MDT[7] CSO2-0 (PNGT)DLAD(1) (MWR)DLAD(3)

LP-EXPO

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

CN122 PWRDN 26 PWREN 25 GND 24 -12VB 23 GND 22 +12VB 21 GND 20 +12VA 19 GND 18 -12VA 17 GND 16 GND 15 3.3VA 14 3.3VA 13 3.3VA 12 3.3VA 11 GND 10 GND 9 3.3VB 8 3.3VB 7 GND 6 GND 5 5VA 4 GND 3 5VA 2 5VA 1 J40 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11

CN464 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 CN467 SG 24 SG 23 +5v 22 +5v 21 SG 20 SG 19 3.3VB 18 3.3VB 17 NC 16 NC 15 PG 14 +24VD4 13 PG 12 +24VD4 11

CN466 +5V 1 SG 2 3.3V 3 SG 4 PWRFNL 5 SG 6 PDWN 7 PWRFNH 8 SGD 9 5VD 10 SGC 11 5VC 12 AG 13 SG 14 24VB 15 +12V 16

CN335 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

CN465 +24V 1 +24V 2 PG 3 PG 4 +24V 5 +24V 6 PG 7 PG 8 CN469 24VD1 1 24VD1 2 PG 3 PG 4 5.1VA 5 SG 6 CN468 +5V 1 SG 2 +24V 3 PG 4

CN350 +24V 1 +24V 2 PG 3 PG 4

CN360 SG A1 EEPOIN A2 EEPCLK A3 SG A4 RVMPHC A5 RVMPHA A6 EXTMC A7 EXTMA A8 FAN2L A9 FAN4L A10 FAN6L A11 FAN2H A12 FAN4H A13 FAN6H A14 EXTC1 A15 SG B1 +5VSW B2 FAN5H B3 FAN3H B4 RVMC1 B5 FAN5L B6 FAN3L B7 SG B8 EXTMB B9 EXTMD B10 RVMPHB B11 RVMPHD B12 +5VSW B13 EEPCS B14 EEPDOUT B15

A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1

M
J593 1 2 J592 1 2 J594 1 2

CN440 +24V 1 FAN5 2 +24V 3 FAN6 4 5 CN439 +24V 1 FAN2 2 CN438 +24V 1 FAN3 2 +24V 3 FAN4 4

FAN

M
TRBLTCLN-CLT

J521 +24VF 1 CST-LCURGC-0 FEED-CLT 2 J571 TUP2 2 TRY-MOT TUP1 1 J618 4 1 3 2 2 3 1 4 J573 +24V 1 CST-LCLMFCL TR-H-CLT 2 J572 +24V 1 CST-LCLMFDL TR-L-CLT 2

J529 CLBUCP 2 +24V 1 J513 SG 3 RVLHP 2 +5V 1 J645 1 3 2 2 3 1

2nd DRAWER

J434

J589 FAN1 2 LSU+24V FAN-MOT 1

A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17

A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1

TEMPS SG HUMIS +5V DRTMP+ DRTMPATSDET PG ATS +24V ATSVR SG FAN1 +24V CLBUCP +24V SG RVLHP +5V

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19

J552 SG 1 CST-L-SW CLSW 2 J568 NC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J570 1 2 3 4 5 NC 6 J516-1 NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J517-1 6 5 4 3 2 NC 1 J518 GND 3 CUEMP-1 2 VDD 1

A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13

SG CUEMP +5V SG CUTOP +5V

J519 GND 3 CUTOP-1 CST-U2 TRY-SNR VDD 1 J620 VDD 1 CUFLS-0 2 GND 3

1 2

1 2

FAN

M
REVLVHP-SNR

CN363 SG 3 USTFL2 2 +5V 1

+5V A12 CLFLS A11 SG A10 +24V A9 CLFED2 A8 NC A7 TUP2 A6 TUP1 A5 +24V A4 CLMFCL A3 +24V A2 CLMFDL A1

NEMPL-SNR

1st DRAWER

EMPU-SNR

2nd 1st DRAWER DRAWER

PFP/LCF

J661 +5V 1 USDUSTFL2 2 TNR-SNR SG 3

J660 5 1 4 2 3 3 2 4 1 5

A1 A2 A3

A17 A16 A15

J518 VDD 1 CUEMP-1 2 GND 3

EMPL-SNR

2nd DRAWER

FAX

SN101 VDD 1 DA1 2 VDD 3 DD0 4 VDD 5 DD3 6 VDD 7 DD6 8 VDD 9 DD9 10 AG 11 DD12 12 GND 13 GND 14 GND 15 GND 16 GND 17 GND 18 3.3V 19 INTRQ 20 3.3V 21 5VS 22 -12V 23 AG 24 +12V 25 DA0 26 DA2 27 IDECS 28 DD1 29 DD2 30 DD4 31 DD5 32 DD7 33 DD8 34 DD10 35 DD11 36 DD13 37 DD14 38 DD15 39 /DIOR 40 /DIOW 41 /OMACK 42 /DLDCS0 43 /RESET 44 DMARQ 45 NC 46 FXWP 47 GND 48 GND 49 NC 50

Board to Board

A9 A10 A11 A12 A13

A5 A4 A3 A2 A1

IH1ON A9 SG A10 IHDUTY A11 H1ERR1 A12 H1ERR2 A13

20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

CN202 +5V 3 BEAMDT 2 GND 1

J203 1 2 3

PWAF-SNS

PWAF-LDR

EXIT BRIDGE UNIT THMS-F-FBLT THMS-R-FBLT THMS-C-FBLT


NC NC 3 2 1

CN117 SG A1 MCNT A2 IDTA0 A3 IDTA1 A4 IDTA2 A5 IDTA3 A6 SG A7 IDTA4 A8 IDTA5 A9 IDTA6 A10 IDTA7 A11 SG A12 IDTA8 A13 IDTA9 A14 IDTA10 A15 IDTA11 A16 GND A17 IDTA12 A18 IDTA13 A19 IDTA14 A20 IDTA15 A21 SG A22 IPOS0 A23 IPOS1 A24 IPOS2 A25 IPOS3 A26 +3.3V A27 CCODE01 A28 CCODE11 A29 SG A30 SG B1 MMPI1 B2 +5V B3 CBSY B4 CMD B5 SACK B6 SERR B7 SBSY B8 STS B9 CACK B10 CERR B11 SG B12 PEFCLK-M B13 SG B14 IRCLK1 B15 SG B16 IHSYNC0 B17 SG B18 INSYNC0 B19 SG B20 IDCLK B21 SG B22 IHDEN0 B23 SG B24 IVDEN0 B25 SG B26 NC(RESERVE1) B27 RESERVE2 B28 ARST0 B29 SG B30

CN338 A30 A29 A28 A27 A26 A25 A24 A23 A22 A21 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1

CN331 HVCLK A17 CCON A16 GVR A15 CDVDON A14 CDVAON A13 CDVVR A12 KDVDON A11 KDVAON A10 KDVVR A9 TC1ON A8 TC1VR A7 TC2ON A6 TC2VR A5 ECON A4 HVTSTS A3 +24V A2 PG A1

J480 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 EXIT-SNR CN481 1 CN482 1 CN483 1 J615 1 MAIN CHARGE WIRE J616 1 MAIN CHARGE GRID J611 1 DEV BIAS(COLOR) J612 1 DEV BIAS(BLACK) J613 1 TRANSFER BIAS(1ST) J610 1 TRANSFER BIAS(2ND) J614 1 CLEANING BRAID BIAS

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J635 5VSW SSTHSSTH+ STHUSTHU+ THMUTHMU+ NC(THML-) NC(THML+) FUSSW SG EXTSW +5V

B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B12 B13 B14 B15

B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1

5VSW B1 SSTHB2 SSTH+ B3 STHUB4 STHU+ B5 THMUB6 THMU+ B7 THMLB8 THML+ B9 FUSSW B10 SG B11 EXTSW B12 +5V B13

22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13

J550 +24V 1 K-DEVCLKDVP LIFT-CLT 2 J520 3 1 2 2 1 3 J574 +5V 1 USD-TNRUSTFUL 2 FLL-SNR SG 3 J536 DRCLB 1 DRMBMDRCB CLN-MOT 2 J558 +24V 1 CST-UCLMFCU TR-H-CLT 2 J557 +24V 1 CST-UCLMFPH TR-L-CLT 2 J526 +24V 1 RGST-CLT CLRGST 2

PCI

PWA-F-LGC

PWA-F-SYS

Board to Board

PS-HVT

CN484 1 CN485 1 CN486 1 CN487 1

J530 BMBCOR 1 BELT+24V CLN-MOT 2 J514 +5V 1 COLRCTNR 2 TNR-SNR SG 3 LP-ERS J596 +24V 2 ELSLED 1 J539 +5V 1 BLK 2 SG 3 NC J641 NC 1 4 2 3 3 2 4 1 J554 1 8 2 7 3 6 4 5 5 4 6 3 7 2 8 1 J658 3 1 2 2 1 3 J637 3 1 2 2 1 3 J522 B1 B17 B2 B16 B3 B15 B4 B14 B5 B13 B6 B12 B7 B11 B8 B10 B9 B9 B10 B8 B11 B7 B12 B6 B13 B5 B14 B4 NC NC B15 B3 NC NC B16 B2 NC NC B17 B1 CN361 BMBCOR B1 +24V B2 +5V B3 CTNR B4 SG B5 +24V B6 ERSLP B7 +5V B8 BLK B9 SG B10 +5V B11 KDS B12 SG B13 +5V B14 MARKL B15 SG B16 +5V B17 MARKS B18 SG B19

J584 CN332 LCCNT 28 SCSWB 27 RETS7 26 RETS6 25 RETS5 24 RETS4 23 RETS3 22 RETS2 21 RETS1 20 RETS0 19 SIZE3 18 SIZE2 17 SIZE1 16 SIZE0 15 SG 14 +5V 13 PFRST 12 DRV0 11 DRV1 10 DRV2 9 DRV3 8 DRV4 7 DRV5 6 DRV6 5 DRV7 4 SCSWC 3 CLKB 2 CLKC 1 NC 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1

K-DEVPOS-SNR

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

+24V +24V CLMFCU CLKDVR +24V +24V CLMFDH CLCDVR +24V +24V CLRGST CLCTNS

D
J617 6 1 5 2 4 3 3 4 2 5 1 6 J551 +24V 1 KCLKDVR DEV-CLT 2 J549 +24V 1 COLRCLCDVR DEV-CLT 2 J538 +24V 1 COLR-DEVCLCTNS TNR-CLT 2 J521 CURGC-0 2 CST-U+24V FEED-CLT 1 J620 GND 3 CUFLS-0 2 VDD 1

(OPTION)

J659 +5V 3 TRBLTMARKL 2 HP-SNR2 SG 1 J575 +5V 3 TRBLTMARKS 2 HP-SNR1 SG 1

NEMPU-SNR

+5V B12 CLTOP B11 SG B10 +5V B9 CLEMP B8 SG B7 SG B6 CUSW B5 SG B4 CLSW B3 NC B2 NC B1

J569 1 2 3 4 5 6 NC 7

J516-2 7 6 5 4 3 2 NC 1

J519 VDD 1 CST-LCUTOP-1 2 TRY-SNR GND 3

1st DRAWER

J537 +5V 1 K-DEVKDS 2 TIM-SNR SG 3

B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13

CN337 NC CLFED1 +24V SG CUFLS +5V

J567 NC 6 5 4 3 2 1

J517-1 NC 1 2 3 4 5 6

J553 SG 1 CST-U-SW CUSW 2

FAN

M
J564 ADUCL-0 2 +24VF 1 CN213 1 2 3 CN214 1 2 3 CN215 1 2 3 4 5 CN216 1 2 NC 3 4 5 CN311 1 ADUSET-SW 2 GND COVSW CN217 2 1 J501 17 16 CN211 CN562 ADCOV-1 1 15 ADTR1-1 2 14 ADCNT-1 3 13 GND 4 12 VDD PWA5 11 ADTR2-1 F-ADU 6 10 CRT-DOWNA 7 9 ADM2A-0A 8 8 ADM2C-0A 9 7 ADM2B-0A 10 6 ADM2D-0A 11 5 CN212 CN563 4 +24VF 1 3 +24VF 2 2 DG 3 1 DG 4 CN340 J544 ADCUL B17 1 +24V B16 2 ADCOV B15 3 ADTRT B14 4 ADCNT B13 5 SG B12 6 +5V B11 7 ADTR2 B10 8 CRTDOWN B9 9 ADM2A B8 10 ADM2C B7 11 ADM2B B6 12 ADM2D B5 13 +24V B4 14 +24V B3 15 PG B2 16 PG B1 17

J591 1 IH-FAN-MOT 2 J590 1 2 J587 1 2 3 4 5 6 J588 1 2 3 4 5 6

ADU-CLT

FG

FG
J639 1 7 2 6 3 5 4 4 5 3 6 2 7 1 J525 1 7 2 6 3 5 4 4 5 3 6 2 7 1 J640 1 4 2 3 3 2 4 1 J527 1 6 2 5 3 4 4 3 5 2 6 1 J560 CLTRP 1 2TR+24V DRV-CLT 2 J559 CLTRP 2 2TR+24V 1 CONT-CLT J561 +5V 1 PSTRPD TR22 POS-SNR SG 3 J534 NC 3 KTNR1B 2 TNR-MOT KTNR1A 1 J532 KTNDET 1 K-TNR-SW SG 2 J556 +5V 1 PSTPC 2 FED-U-SNR SG 3 J555 SG 1 CTUFED 2 RGST-SNR +5V 3

OZNFAN-MOT

J312 GND 3 ADUFL ADU2 TRL-SNR VCC 1 CN328 GND 3 ADUFU 2 VCC 1 +24V FDMA FDMB FDMC FDMD

CN435 +24V 1 RVMA 2 RVMC 3 RVMD 4 RVMB 5 +24V 6 CN437 EXTMC 1 +24V 2 EXTMA 3 EXTMB 4 +24V 5 EXTMD 6

ADUTRU-SNR REVLVMOT

M M
ADU-MOT

CN436 +24V 1 +24V 2 PG 3 PG 4

EXITMOT

B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1

CN345 NC NC NC CLTRP +24V CLTRP +24V +5V PSTRPD SG KTNR1B KTNR1A KTNDET SG +5V PSTPC SG +5V CTUFED SG

CN2

1 2 3 4

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

ADU
J631 +5V 1 SFBFED SFB2 FED-SNR SG 3 SFB-SOL J650 NC 1 1 NC 2 2 3 3 CN495 VDD 1 2 GND 3 J629 SOLSFB 2 +24V 1 J628 CLSFB 2 +24V 1 NC 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 J545 NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 J565 5 1 4 2 3 3 2 4 1 5 J511 13 1 12 2 11 3 10 4 9 5 8 6 7 7 6 8 5 9 4 10 3 11 2 12 1 13 J625 1 7 2 6 3 5 4 4 5 3 6 2 7 1 J566 SG 3 CTLFED FED-L-SW 2 +5V 1 J528 SDCSW 2 SIDESG COV-SW 1 +12V AG TNREF TNLV1 TNLV2 TNLED AG J542 1 2 3 4 TNLVL-SNR 5 6 7

+5V SG SCNMD3 SCNMD2 SCNMD1 SCNREF SCNEN MOTRST-0 SCNDIR SCNLK

PWA-F-SDV
6 5 4 3 2 1

J41 CN1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FG NC 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 SG SG +5V +5V DGDF DGDF +24VDF +24VDF FG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

RADF

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

PG +24VD4 SG SG +5V +5V PG PG +24VD3 +24VD3

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

PWA-FFIL

SAD,TWD,JPD,NAD MODELS : STANDARD

SFBFEED-CLT

MOT-A +24V MOT-A1-1 MOT-B +24V MOT-B1-1

CN470 +24VD1 1 FAN-ACC 2

J633 + PS-FAN-MOT

J630 SG 3 SFBSW SFB-SNR 2 +5V 1 J619 SFSZ3-0 5 SFSZ2-0 4 PWA-F-SFB 3 SFSZ1-0 SFSZ0-0 2 GND 1 J507 1 5 2 4 3 3 4 2 5 1

SFSSW +5V SFBFED SG SOLSFB +24V CLSFB +24V SG SFBSW +5V

A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7

J634 NC NC 3 3 PG 2 2 +24V 1 1

SCAN-MOT M

(OPTION)

CN431 VDD 1 GND 2 PWA-F3 FUS 4

ASD,AUD,CND MODELS : STANDARD MJD MODEL : OPTION

6 5 4 3 2 1

13 14 15 16 17 18

SFSZ3 SFSZ2 SFSZ1 SFSZ0 SG SG

A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1

A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1

NC NC SG CTLFED +5V SDCSW SG +12V AG TNREF TNLVL1 TNLVL2 TNLED AG +24V SLTBTNA SG FRDSW +24V RSTSW

HOME SNR

PLTNSNR

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 NC 3

J543 +24V 1 TNLVLSLTBTNA 2 SHUT-SOL J646 4 1 3 2 2 3 1 4 J577 SG 1 FRNTFRDSW COV-SW 2 J597 +24V 1 MAIN-SW RSTSW 2

SFB

JPD MODEL ONLY

8.3 Connector Table


CN331 PWA-F-LGC (CN331) <-> PS-HVT (CN480)
Pin No Symbol A1 FG A2 +24V A3 HVTSTS A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 ECON TC2VR TC2ON TC1VR TC1ON KDVVR KDVAON KDXDON CDVVR CDVAON CDVDON GVR CCON HVCLK Name Field ground +24V High-voltage power supply abnormality detection signal Drum cleaning blade bias ON/OFF signal 2nd transfer belt bias output reference voltage 2nd transfer belt bias output voltage ON/OFF signal 1st transfer belt bias output reference voltage 1st transfer belt bias output voltage ON/OFF signal Black developer bias high-voltage DC output reference voltage Black developer bias high-voltage AC component ON/ OFF signal Black developer bias high-voltage DC component ON/ OFF signal Color developer bias high-voltage DC output reference voltage Color developer bias high-voltage AC component ON/ OFF signal Color developer bias high-voltage DC component ON/ OFF signal Drum main charger grid output reference voltage Drum main charger grid ON/OFF signal Timer output for power supply (AC output reference frequency) Active L:Abnormal H:Normal L Analog L Analog L Analog L L Analog L L Analog L 12 13 +5V RLC2S

CN351 PWA-F-LGC (CN351) <-> BRIDGE UNIT (OPTION)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Symbol PG +24V GASOL NC RLTRS RLCSW NC RLCNT JSPSW SG RLHRW Name Power ground +24V Bridge unit gate solenoid drive signal Not connected Bridge unit intermediary transport sensor detection signal Bridge unit transport cover open/close sensor detection signal Not connected Bridge unit connection detection signal (1) Bridge unit connection detection signal (2) Signal ground Bridge unit load-full sensor detection signal (copier side) +5V Bridge unit exit sensor detection signal Active L -

CN102 PWA-F-SYS (CN102) <-> PWA-F-SLG (CN18)


Pin No Symbol A1 RX3-1 A2 GND A3 CLK-0 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 RX2-1 GND RX1-0 RX0-1 GND MCKI-0 HSYN-1 GND VSYN-0 SCNT-1 CCODE(1) GND GND GND GND GND CCODE(0) RX3-0 CLK-1 GND RX2-0 RX1-1 GND RX0-0 MCKI-1 GND HSYN-0 VSYN-1 RESERVED SYSCNT-0 SRST-0 SCNRTS-0 SCNCTS-0 MMPIO-1 SCNIN-1 SCNOUT-1 SCN-3V Name Image data 3 (differential signal +) Ground Clock signal for image data transmission (differential signal -) Image data 2 (differential signal +) Image data 1 (differential signal -) Image data 0 (differential signal +) Ground Clock signal for image data processing (differential signal -) Horizontal scanning synchronized signal (differential signal +) Ground Vertical scanning synchronized signal (differential signal -) Scanner board connection detection signal Color code signal (1) Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Color code signal (0) Image data 3 (differential signal +) Clock signal for image data transmission (differential signal +) Ground Image data 2 (differential signal -) Image data 1 (differential signal +) Ground Image data 0 (differential signal -) Clock signal for image data processing (differential signal +) Ground Horizontal scanning synchronized signal (differential signal -) Vertical scanning synchronized signal (differential signal +) Ground SYS board connection detection signal Scanner reset SIO transmission request SIO transmission clear TS circuit starting request signal SIO received data SIO transmitted data +3.3V Active L L L L L H -

CN116 PWA-F-SYS (CN116) <-> DIMM (0)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 Symbol VSS DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3 VDD DQ4 DQ5 DQ6 DQ7 DQ8 VSS DQ9 DQ10 DQ11 DQ12 DQ13 VDD DQ14 DQ15 NC NC VSS NC NC VDD /WE DQMB0 DQMB1 /CS0 NC VSS A0 A2 A4 A6 A8 A10 BA1 VDD VDD CLK0 VSS NC /CS2 DQMB2 DQMB3 NC VDD NC NC NC NC VSS DQ16 DQ17 DQ18 DQ19 VDD DQ20 NC NC CKE1 VSS DQ21 DQ22 DQ23 VSS DQ24 DQ25 DQ26 DQ27 VDD DQ28 DQ29 DQ30 DQ31 VSS CLK2 NC NC(WP) SDA SCL VDD VSS DQ32 DQ33 DQ34 DQ35 VDD DQ36 DQ37 DQ38 DQ39 DQ40 VSS DQ41 DQ42 DQ43 DQ44 DQ45 VDD DQ46 DA47 NC NC VSS NC NC VDD /CAS DQMB4 DQMB5 /CS1 /RAS VSS A1 A3 A5 A7 A9 A11 BA0 VDD CLK1 A12 VSS CEK /CS3 DQMB6 DQMB7 A13 VDD NC NC NC NC VSS DQ48 DQ49 DQ50 DQ51 VDD DQ52 NC NC NC VSS DQ53 DQ54 DQ55 VSS DQ56 DQ57 DQ58 DQ59 VDD DQ60 DQ61 DQ62 DQ63 VSS CLK3 NC SA0 SA1 SA2 VDD Name Ground Memory data bus [0] Memory data bus [1] Memory data bus [2] Memory data bus [3] +3.3V Memory data bus [4] Memory data bus [5] Memory data bus [6] Memory data bus [7] Memory data bus [8] Ground Memory data bus [9] Memory data bus [10] Memory data bus [11] Memory data bus [12] Memory data bus [13] +3.3V Memory data bus [14] Memory data bus [15] Not connected Not connected Ground Not connected Not connected +3.3V Data write enable signal Output disable/write mask (0) Output disable/write mask (1) Chip select signal (0) Not connected Ground Memory address bus [0] Memory address bus [1] Memory address bus [2] Memory address bus [3] Memory address bus [4] Memory address bus [10] Bank select (1) +3.3V +3.3V Clock (0) input Ground Not connected Chip select signal (2) Output disable/write mask (2) Output disable/write mask (3) Not connected +3.3V Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Ground Memory data bus [16] Memory data bus [17] Memory data bus [18] Memory data bus [19] +3.3V Memory data bus [20] Not connected Not connected Clock enable signal Not connected Memory data bus [21] Memory data bus [22] Memory data bus [23] Ground Memory data bus [24] Memory data bus [25] Memory data bus [26] Memory data bus [27] +3.3V Memory data bus [28] Memory data bus [29] Memory data bus [30] Memory data bus [31] Ground Clock (2) input Not connected Not connected PD serial data PD serial clock +3.3V Not connected Memory data bus [32] Memory data bus [33] Memory data bus [34] Memory data bus [35] +3.3V Memory data bus [36] Memory data bus [37] Memory data bus [38] Memory data bus [39] Memory data bus [40] Not connected Memory data bus [41] Memory data bus [42] Memory data bus [43] Memory data bus [44] Memory data bus [45] +3.3V Memory data bus [46] Memory data bus [47] Not connected Not connected Ground Not connected Not connected +3.3V Column address strobe signal Output disable/write mask (4) Output disable/write mask (5) Chip select signal (1) Row address strobe signal Ground Memory address bus [1] Memory address bus [3] Memory address bus [5] Memory address bus [7] Memory address bus [9] Memory address bus [11] Bank select (0) +3.3V Clock (1) input Memory address bus [12] Ground Clock enable signal Chip select signal (3) Output disable/write mask (6) Output disable/write mask (7) Memory address bus [13] +3.3V Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Ground Memory data bus [48] Memory data bus [49] Memory data bus [50] Memory data bus [51] +3.3V Memory data bus [52] Not connected Not connected Not connected Ground Memory data bus [53] Memory data bus [54] Memory data bus [55] Ground Memory data bus [56] Memory data bus [57] Memory data bus [58] Memory data bus [59] +3.3V Memory data bus [60] Memory data bus [61] Memory data bus [62] Memory data bus [63] Ground Clock (3) input Not connected PD address [0] PD address [1] PD address [2] +3.3V Active -

CN124 PWA-F-SYS (CN124) <-> PCI (CN150)/SCRAMBLER BOARD (OPTION)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 Symbol +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V GND -12V -12V +5V +5V +3.3V OPBINT(2) OPBINT(0) GND PCICLK(5) GND PCICLK(3) GND REQ(1)# REQ(0)# +3.3V AD[31] AD[29] GND AD[27] AD[25] +3.3V C/BE(3)# AD[23] GND AD[21] AD[19] +3.3V AD[17] C/BE(2)# GND IRDY# +3.3V DEVSEL# GND LOCK# PERR# +3.3V SERR# +3.3V C/BE(1)# AD[14] GND AD[12] AD[10] M66EN GND AD[8] AD[7] +3.3V AD[5] AD[3] GND AD[1] +3.3V +5V GND +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V GND +12V +12V +5V +5V +3.3V OPBINT(1) +3.3V PCIRST# +3.3V PCICLK(4) +3.3V GNT(1)# GNT(0)# GND PMF# AD[30] +3.3V AD[28] AD[26] GND AD[24] +3.3V +3.3V AD[22] AD[20] GND AD[18] AD[16] +3.3V FRAME# GND TRDY# GND STOP# +3.3V +3.3V GND GND PAR AD[15] +3.3V AD[13] AD[11] GND AD[9] GND C/BE(0)# +3.3V AD[6] AD[4] GND AD[2] AD[0] +3.3V +5V +5V Name +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V Ground -12V -12V +5V +5V +3.3V Interrupt request (2) Interrupt request (0) Ground PCI clock (5) [Not used] Ground PCI clock (3) Ground Data request signal (1) Data request signal (0) +3.3V PCI address/data bus [31] PCI address/data bus [29] Ground PCI address/data bus [27] PCI address/data bus [25] +3.3V Command and byte enable (3) PCI address/data bus [23] Ground PCI address/data bus [21] PCI address/data bus [19] +3.3V PCI address/data bus [17] Command and byte enable (2) Ground Initiator ready +3.3V Device select Ground Lock Data parity Error +3.3V System Error +3.3V Command and byte enable (1) PCI address/data bus [14] Ground PCI address/data bus [12] PCI address/data bus [10] PCI bus 66 MHz clock enable signal Ground PCI address/data bus [8] PCI address/data bus [7] +3.3V PCI address/data bus [5] PCI address/data bus [3] Ground PCI address/data bus [1] +3.3V +5V Ground +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V Ground +12V +12V +5V +5V +3.3V Interrupt request (1) +3.3V PCI reset signal +3.3V PCI clock (4) +3.3V Grant (1) Grant (0) Ground Power Management Event PCI address/data bus [30] +3.3V PCI address/data bus [28] PCI address/data bus [26] Ground PCI address/data bus [24] +3.3V +3.3V PCI address/data bus [22] PCI address/data bus [20] Ground PCI address/data bus [18] PCI address/data bus [16] +3.3V Cycle frame Ground Target ready Ground Stop +3.3V +3.3V Ground Ground Parity PCI address/data bus [15] +3.3V PCI address/data bus [13] PCI address/data bus [11] Ground PCI address/data bus [9] Ground Command and byte enable (0) +3.3V PCI address/data bus [6] PCI address/data bus [4] Ground PCI address/data bus [2] PCI address/data bus [0] +3.3V +5V +5V Active L L L L L L L L -

CN464 PS-ACC (CN464) <-> PWA-F-SYS (CN122)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Symbol PWREN PWRDN -12B GND +12VB GND +12VA GND -12VA GND GND GND 3.3VA 3.3VA 3.3VA 3.3VA GND GND 3.3VB 3.3VB GND GND GND 5VA 5VA 5VA Name Power output enable signal Power down signal -12V Ground +12V Ground +12V Ground -12V Ground Ground Ground +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V Ground Ground +3.3V +3.3V Ground Ground Ground +5V +5V +5V Active L L -

J425
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

PWA-F-DSP (J425) <-> PWA-F-KEY (J428)


Symbol LDFC-1 LDFC-2 LDFC-4 LDFC-5 LDFC-6 LDFC-7 LDFC-8 LDFC-9 LDFC-10 LDFC-11 LDFC-12 LDFC-13 LDFC-15 LDON0 LDON1 GND Name LED driver output (1) LED driver output (2) LED driver output (4) LED driver output (5) LED driver output (6) LED driver output (7) LED driver output (8) LED driver output (9) LED driver output (10) LED driver output (11) LED driver output (12) LED driver output (13) LED driver output (15) LED drive selection signal (0) LED drive selection signal (1) Ground Active L L L L L L L L L L L L L H H -

CN352 PWA-F-LGC (CN352) <-> M/DC-POL


Pin No Symbol 1 POMPL 2 POMON 3 4 5 POMCK PG +24V Name Polygonal motor phase locked signal Polygonal motor ON/OFF signal Polygonal motor reference clock signal Power ground +24V Active L: Normal L: ON, H: OFF -

J426
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

PWA-F-DSP (J426) <-> PWA-F-KEY (J429)


Symbol SCN15 SCN14 SCN13 SCN12 SCN11 RET0 RET1 RET2 RET3 RET8 RET9 Name Button scanning signal (5) Button scanning signal (4) Button scanning signal (3) Button scanning signal (2) Button scanning signal (1) Button scanning return signal (0) Button scanning return signal (1) Button scanning return signal (2) Button scanning return signal (3) Button scanning return signal (8) Button scanning return signal (9) Active -

CN332 PWA-F-LGC (CN332) <-> PFP (OPTION)/LCF (OPTION)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Symbol CLKC CLKB SCSWC DRV7 DRV6 DRV5 DRV4 DRV3 DRV2 DRV1 DRV0 PFRST +5V SG SIZE0 SIZE1 SIZE2 SIZE3 RETS0 RETS1 RETS2 RETS3 RETS4 RETS5 RETS6 RETS7 SCSWB LCCNT Name PFP/LCF register control signal PFP/LCF register control signal PFP/LCF switch select control signal PFP/LCF driver control signal PFP/LCF driver control signal PFP/LCF driver control signal PFP/LCF driver control signal PFP/LCF driver control signal PFP/LCF driver control signal PFP/LCF driver control signal PFP/LCF driver control signal Reset signal +5V Signal ground Size data bus 0 Not used Not used Not used PFP/LCF sensor detection signal PFP/LCF sensor detection signal PFP/LCF sensor detection signal PFP/LCF sensor detection signal PFP/LCF sensor detection signal PFP/LCF sensor detection signal PFP/LCF sensor detection signal PFP/LCF sensor detection signal PFP/LCF switch select control signal LCF connection signal Active L -

CN354 PWA-F-LGC (CN354) <-> PWA-F-CCL (CN491)


Pin No Symbol 1 +5VSW 2 ENSNR1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ENSNR2 ENVCL ENVT1 ENVT2 SG +5V PG +24V Name +5V Charger cleaner rear position detection switch signal (Home position) Charger cleaner front position detection switch signal Not used (Open) Charger cleaner motor control signal T1 Charger cleaner motor control signal T2 Signal ground +5V Power ground +24V Active L L -

CN465 PS-ACC (CN465) <-> PWA-F-LGC (CN350), PWA-F-DRV (CN436)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Symbol +24V +24V PG PG +24V +24V PG PG Name +24V +24V Power ground Power ground +24V +24V Power ground Power ground Active -

J2
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

PWA-F-NIC (J2) <-> LAN(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)


Symbol (TD+)FA1 (TD-)FA2 (RD+)FA3 FA45 FA45 (RD-)FA6 FA78 FA78 NC(MTG) NC(MTG) SH SH SH SH Name Transmitted data + Transmitted data Received data + Not used Not used Received data Not used Not used Not connected Not connected Shield Shield Shield Shield Active -

CN466 PS-ACC (CN466) <-> PWA-F-LGC (CN335, 359), FAX (CN702)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Symbol +5V SG +3.3V SG PWRFNL SG PDWN PWRFNH SGD 5VD SGC 5VC AG SG 24VB +12V Name +5V Signal ground +3.3V Signal ground Power supply cooling fan motor control signal (Low) Signal ground Power down signal Power supply cooling fan motor control signal (High) Signal ground +5V Signal ground +5V Analog ground Signal ground (FAX) +24V (FAX) +12V Active L -

CN355 PWA-F-LGC (CN355) <-> COIN CONTROLLER (OPTION)/COPY KEY CARD (OPTION)
Pin No A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 Symbol +24V CTRON CTRCNT MCRUN EXTCTR PG BKCTR MNCTR FLCTR SG SIZE3 SIZE2 SIZE1 SIZE0 +5V CTRCNT2 Name +24V Counter ON signal Copy permitting signal Copying operation signal Exit sensor ON signal Power ground Black and white mode counter ON signal Mono-color mode counter ON signal Full color mode counter ON signal Signal ground Paper size signal (3) Paper size signal (2) Paper size signal (1) Paper size signal (0) +5V Copy key card detection signal Active L L L L L L -

CN105 PWA-F-SYS (CN105) <-> FAN MOTOR


Pin No Symbol 1 +12V 2 GND Name Fan +12V Ground Active -

CN501 FAX (CN501) <-> NCU(1) (OPTION)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Symbol TXOUT RXIN CML LD ER/HK ATT3DB RLADJ1 RLADJ2 RGCLK SG -12V AG +12V +24V 16Hz AG CI ANSDET REVA REVB INTHOOK FXTHO OK +5V SG +5V -12V AG +12V +24V PG Name Transmitted facsimile data Received facsimile data CML relay drive signal Dial pulse drive signal Not used -3db ATT exchange signal MODEM select signal MODEM select signal Not used Signal ground -12V Analog ground +12V +24V Not used Analog ground Ring signal detection Facsimile data answer detection Line 1 External telephone hook detection signal Line 1 External telephone hook detection signal Internal telephone hook signal External telephone hook signal +5V Signal ground +5V -12V Analog ground +12V +24V Ground Active L L -

CN108 PWA-F-SYS (CN108) <-> PC I/F (IEEE1284)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Symbol STB DATA0 DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 DATA4 DATA5 DATA6 DATA7 N ACK BUSY PERROR SELECT NATFD NC GND FG LOGIC GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND NINIT NFAULT NC NC NC NSEL IN Name nStrobe Data bus [0] Data bus [1] Data bus [2] Data bus [3] Data bus [4] Data bus [5] Data bus [6] Data bus [7] nAck Busy PError Select nAutoFd Not connected Ground Chassis ground Peripheral Logic High [Pull-up] Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground nInit nFault Not connected Not connected Not connected nSelectIn Active H -

CN334 PWA-F-LGC (CN334) <-> PWA-F-LDR (CN201)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Symbol SG SG BEAMDT +5V SG +5VD +5VD SG SHDWN WRAPC SG PIDT0 PIDT1 SG SG WRLVL SG +5VD +5VD SG Name Signal ground Signal ground Laser beam monitor signal +5V Signal ground +5V +5V Signal ground Laser ON/OFF signal APC write signal Signal ground Laser image data Laser image data Signal ground Signal ground Laser write level signal Signal ground +5V +5V Signal ground Active -

CN467 PS-ACC (CN467) <-> PWA-F-SLG (CN10)/RADF (CN1) (OPTION)/ PWA-F-SDV (CN32)
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Symbol +24VD3 +24VD3 PG PG +5V +5V SG SG +24VD4 PG +24VD4 PG +24VD4 PG NC NC +3.3V +3.3V SG SG +5V +5V SG SG Name +24V +24V Power ground Power ground +5V +5V Signal ground Signal ground +24V Power ground +24V Power ground +24V Power ground Not connected Not connected +3.3V +3.3V Signal ground Signal ground +5V +5V Signal ground Signal ground Active -

CN356 PWA-F-LGC (CN356) <-> COLR-ATTNR-SNR/ATTNR-SHUT-SOL/ KEY COPY COUNTER (OPTION)


Pin No A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 Symbol SG NC NC C-CK (SG) C-CK SG KTCRC +24V KTCR0 CKCLS SLDVTNB +24V SLDVTNA +5V DVTNALD AG DVCTRN VLED Name Signal ground Not connected Not connected Signal ground Key copy counter identification signal (Connected to A4 pin) Signal ground Key copy counter/copy key card connection detection signal +24V Key copy counter ON signal Color auto-toner and shutter solenoid connection detection signal (Connected to A1 pin) Color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid drive signal B Color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid drive signal A +5V Color auto-toner sensor LED drive signal Analog ground Color auto-toner sensor signal Not used Active L L Analog -

CN337 PWA-F-LGC (CN337) <-> CST-L-TR-L-CLT, CST-L-TR-H-CLT, TRY-MOT, CST-L-FEED-CLT, NEMP-L-SNR, CST-U-TRY-SNR, EMP-U-SNR, CST-L-SW, CST-U-SW, EMP-L-SNR, CST-L-TRY-SNR, NEMP-U-SNR, CST-U-FEED-CLT
Pin No A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 Symbol CLMFDL +24V CL<FCL +24V TUP1 TUP2 NC CLFED2 +24V SG CLFLS +5V +5V CUTOP +5V CUEMP SG NC NC CLSW SG CUSW SG SG CLEMP +5V SG CLTOP +5V +5V CUFLS SG +24V CLFED1 NC Name Lower drawer transport clutch drive signal +24V Upper drawer transport clutch drive signal +24V Tray-up motor drive signal-1 Tray-up motor drive signal-2 Not connected Lower drawer feed clutch drive signal +24V Signal ground Lower drawer paper stock sensor detection signal +5V +5V Upper drawer tray-up sensor detection signal Signal ground +5V Upper drawer empty sensor detection signal Signal ground Not connected Not connected Lower drawer detection switch signal Signal ground Upper drawer detection switch signal Signal ground Signal ground Lower drawer empty sensor detection signal +5V Signal ground Lower drawer tray-up sensor detection signal +5V +5V Upper drawer paper stock sensor detection signal Signal ground +24V Upper drawer feed clutch drive signal Not connected Active L L L L -

CN502 FAX (CN502) <-> NCU(2) (OPTION)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Symbol TXOUT RXIN CML LD ER/HK ATT3DB RLADJ1 RLADJ2 RGCLK SG -12V AG +12V NC 16Hz AG CI ANSDET REVA REVB NC NC +5V SG +5V -12V AG +12V NC NC Name Transmitted facsimile data Received facsimile data CML relay drive signal Dial pulse drive signal Not used -3db ATT exchange signal MODEM select signal MODEM select signal Not used Signal ground -12V Analog ground +12V Not connected Not used Analog ground Ring signal detect Facsimile data answer detection Line 1 External telephone hook detection signal Line 1 External telephone hook detection signal Not connected Not connected +5V Signal ground +5V -12V Analog ground +12V Not connected Not connected Active L L -

CN358 PWA-F-LGC (CN358) <-> PS-IH (CN455, 456), THMS-F-FBLT, THMS-R-FBLT, THMS-C-FBLT, EXIT-SNR
Pin No A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 Symbol IH2ON +5V SW H1-PWR1 H1-PWR2 H1-PWR3 H2-PWR1 H2-PWR2 H2-PWR3 IH1ON SG IH DUTY H1 ERR1 H1 ERR2 5VSW SSTHSSTH+ STHUSTHU+ THMUTHMU+ THMLTHML+ FUSW SG EXTSW +24V Name IH2 ON/OFF signal +5V (photocoupler drive) Heater H1 power data 1 Heater H1 power data 2 Heater H1 power data 3 Heater H2 power data 1 Heater H2 power data 2 Heater H2 power data 3 IH1 ON/OFF signal Signal ground IH1/2 duty control signal Heater H1 error signal 1 Hearer H1 error signal 2 +5V Fuser belt front edge thermistor detection signal Fuser belt front edge thermistor detection signal (+5V) Fuser belt sub thermistor detection signal Fuser belt sub thermistor detection signal (+5V) Fuser belt main thermistor detection signal Fuser belt main thermistor detection signal (+5V) Not used Not used Fuser unit connection detection signal Signal ground Exit sensor detection signal +24V Active H H Analog H Analog H Analog H -

CN468 PS-ACC (CN468) <-> FINISHER (J598) (OPTION)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 Symbol +5V SG +24V PG Name +5V Signal ground +24V Power ground Active -

CN109 PWA-F-SYS (CN109) <-> RS-232C


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Symbol TXD RXD RTS DSR DTR CTS DCD GND Name Transmitted data Received data Transmission request Data set ready signal Data terminal ready signal Transmission enabled Carrier detection signal Ground Active -

CN469 PS-ACC (CN469) <-> PFP(OPTION)/LCF (OPTION)/PWA-F-FUS (CN431)/PWA-F-FIL


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 Symbol +24VD1 +24VD1 PG PG 5.1VA SG Name +24V +24V Power ground Power ground +5V Signal ground Active -

CN110 PWA-F-SYS (CN110) <-> USB HOST


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 Symbol VBUS DD+ GND GND Name +5V Serial data Serial data Ground Ground Active -

CN470 PS-ACC (CN470) <-> PS-FAN-MOT (J633)


Pin No Symbol 1 +24VD1 2 FAN-ACC Name +24V Power supply cooling fan motor drive signal Active -

CN11
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PWA-F-SLG (CN11) <-> RADF (CN2) (OPTION)


Symbol DFAK-0A DFSCST-0A DFRXD-0A SG DFTXD-0A SG DFRAK-0A DFRRQ-0A DFRQ-0A DFCNT-0A Name RADF acknowledge signal RADF VARID signal RADF received data Signal ground RADF transmitted data Signal ground Acknowledge signal Request signal RADF request signal RADF detection signal Active -

CN112 PWA-F-SYS (CN112) <-> HDD (CN170) (STANDARD)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Symbol /RESET GND DD7 DD8 DD6 DD9 DD5 DD10 DD4 DD11 DD3 DD12 DD2 DD13 DD1 DD14 DD0 DD15 GND NC(KEY) MDARQ GND /DIOW GND /DIOR GND IORDY GND /DMACK GND INTRQ RESERVED DA1 /PDIAG DA0 DA2 /CS0 /CS1 /DASP GND Name Reset signal Ground Data bus [7] Data bus [8] Data bus [6] Data bus [9] Data bus [5] Data bus [10] Data bus [4] Data bus [11] Data bus [3] Data bus [12] Data bus [2] Data bus [13] Data bus [1] Data bus [14] Data bus [0] Data bus [15] Ground Not connected DMA request Ground I/O write Ground I/O read Ground I/O ready Ground DMA C197 Ground Interrupt request Reserve signal Device address [1] Passed diagnostics Device address [0] Device address [2] Chip select (0) Chip select (1) Device active or slave present Ground Active H L H L L L L -

CN360 PWA-F-LGC (CN360) <-> PWA-F-DRV (CN434)


Pin No A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 Symbol SG EEPDIN EEPCLK SG RVMPHC RVMPHA EXTMC EXTMA FAN2L FAN4L FAN6L FAN2H FAN4H FAN6H EXTC1 SG +5VSW FAN5H FAN3H RVMC1 FAN5L FAN3L SG EXTMB EXTMD RVMPHB RVMPHD +5VSW EEPCS EEPDOUT Name Signal ground Serial data to EEPROM Serial clock to EEPROM Signal ground Revolver motor drive signal C Revolver motor drive signal A Exit motor drive signal C Exit motor drive signal A Toner fan motor drive signal L Ozone exhaust fan motor drive signal L Paper fan motor drive signal H Toner fan motor drive signal H Ozone exhaust fan motor drive signal H Paper fan motor drive signal H Exit motor drive reference voltage Signal ground +5V Not used IH control board cooling fan motor drive signal H Revolver motor drive reference voltage Not used IH control board cooling fan motor drive signal L Signal ground Exit motor drive signal B Exit motor drive signal D Revolver motor drive signal B Revolver motor drive signal D +5V Chip select signal to EEPROM Serial data to EEPROM Active Analog H -

CN503 FAX (CN503) <-> SPEAKER (OPTION)


Pin No Symbol 1 SP+ 2 SPName Speaker output (+) Speaker output (-) Active -

CN600 FAX (CN600) <-> MDM (CN401) (OPTION)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 Symbol TXOUT2 +5VA +12V +3.3V MOD2DMA-1 SG MEM2CS-0 VDD MEMRD2-0 CLKOE-1 TXEN2-1 VDD A[16] A[14] A[12] A[10] A[8] A[6] A[4] A[2] A[0] VDD CEP1RST-0 VDD SG CEPCLK SG D[0] D[2] D[4] D[6] D[8] D[10] D[12] D[14] SG MOD2DET-0 SG DREQC2-1 DACKC2-0 RXIN2 AG -12V AG MD2INT-1 MOD2CS-0 MOD2RST-0 SG RXEN2-1 MEMWRH2-0 MEMWRL2-0 A[18] A[17] A[15] A[13] A[11] A[9] A[7] A[5] A[3] A[1] CPURST-0 CEP2INT-1 VDD VDD IORD2-0 IOWR2-0 D[1] D[3] D[5] D[7] D[9] D[11] D[13] D[15] VDD VDD CEP2CS-0 DREQD2-1 DACKD2-0 Name Transmitted data +5V +12V +3.3V Mode2 DMA signal SRAM chip select signal +5V SRAM data read signal Clock out enable signal TX enable signal +5V MDM address bus [16] MDM address bus [14] MDM address bus [12] MDM address bus [10] MDM address bus [8] MDM address bus [6] MDM address bus [4] MDM address bus [2] MDM address bus [0] +5V CEP1 reset signal +5V Signal ground System clock signal Signal ground MDM data bus [0] MDM data bus [2] MDM data bus [4] MDM data bus [6] MDM data bus [8] MDM data bus [10] MDM data bus [12] MDM data bus [14] Signal ground Mode2 detection signal Signal ground Data request signal Data acknowledge signal Received data Analog ground -12V Analog ground Mode2 interrupt signal Mode2 chip select signal Mode2 reset signal Signal ground RX enable signal SRAM high byte write signal SRAM low byte write signal MDM address bus [18] MDM address bus [17] MDM address bus [15] MDM address bus [13] MDM address bus [11] MDM address bus [9] MDM address bus [7] MDM address bus [5] MDM address bus [3] MDM address bus [1] CPU reset signal CEP2 interrupt signal +5V +5V MDM data read signal MDM data write signal MDM data bus [1] MDM data bus [3] MDM data bus [5] MDM data bus [7] MDM data bus [9] MDM data bus [11] MDM data bus [13] MDM data bus [15] +5V +5V CEP2 chip select signal Data request signal Data acknowledge signal Active -

CN340 PWA-F-LGC (CN340) <-> PWA-F-ADU (CN211, 212), ADU-CLT, PWA-F-SFB (J619), SFB-SNR, SFB-FEED-CLT, SFB-SOL, SFB-FED-SER
Pin No A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 Symbol SG SG SFSZ0 SFSZ1 SFSZ2 SFSZ3 +5V SFBSW SG +24V CLSFB +24V SOLSFB SG SFDFED +5V SFSSW SG SG +24V +24V ADM2D ADM2B ADM2C ADM2A CRTDOWN ADTR2 +5V SG ADCNT ADTRP ADCOV +24V ADUCL Name Signal ground Signal ground SFB paper size detection signal-0 SFB paper size detection signal-1 SFB paper size detection signal-2 SFB paper size detection signal-3 +5V SFB bypass paper sensor detection signal Signal ground +24V Bypass feed clutch drive signal +24V Bypass pickup solenoid drive signal Signal ground Bypass feed sensor detection signal +5V Connected to A1 pin Signal ground Signal ground +24V +24V ADU motor drive signal D ADU motor drive signal B ADU motor drive signal C ADU motor drive signal A ADU motor control signal ADU exit sensor detection signal +5V Signal ground ADU connection detection signal ADU entrance sensor detection signal ADU open/close switch detection signal +24V ADU clutch drive signal Active L L L L L L

CN125 PWA-F-SYS (CN125) <-> PM DIMM


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 Symbol VSS DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3 VDD DQ4 DQ5 DQ6 DQ7 DQ8 VSS DQ9 DQ10 DQ11 DQ12 DQ13 VDD DQ14 DQ15 NC NC VSS NC NC VDD /WE DQMB0 DQMB1 /CS0 NC VSS A0 A2 A4 A6 A8 A10 BA1 VDD VDD CLK0 VSS NC /CS2 DQMB2 DQMB3 NC VDD NC NC NC NC VSS DQ16 DQ17 DQ18 DQ19 VDD DQ20 NC NC CKE1 VSS DQ21 DQ22 DQ23 VSS DQ24 DQ25 DQ26 DQ27 VDD DQ28 DQ29 DQ30 DQ31 VSS CLK2 NC NC(WP) SDA SCL VDD VSS DQ32 DQ33 DQ34 DQ35 VDD DQ36 DQ37 DQ38 DQ39 DQ40 VSS DQ41 DQ42 DQ43 DQ44 DQ45 VDD DQ46 DA47 NC NC VSS NC NC VDD /CAS DQMB4 DQMB5 /CS1 /RAS VSS A1 A3 A5 A7 A9 A11 BA0 VDD CLK1 A12 VSS CEK /CS3 DQMB6 DQMB7 A13 VDD NC NC NC NC VSS DQ48 DQ49 DQ50 DQ51 VDD DQ52 NC NC NC VSS DQ53 DQ54 DQ55 VSS DQ56 DQ57 DQ58 DQ59 VDD DQ60 DQ61 DQ62 DQ63 VSS CLK3 NC SA0 SA1 SA2 VDD Name Ground Memory data bus [0] Memory data bus [1] Memory data bus [2] Memory data bus [3] +3.3V Memory data bus [4] Memory data bus [5] Memory data bus [6] Memory data bus [7] Memory data bus [8] Ground Memory data bus [9] Memory data bus [10] Memory data bus [11] Memory data bus [12] Memory data bus [13] +3.3V Memory data bus [14] Memory data bus [15] Not connected Not connected Ground Not connected Not connected +3.3V Data write enable signal Output disable/write mask (0) Output disable/write mask (1) Chip select signal (0) Not connected Ground Memory address bus [0] Memory address bus [1] Memory address bus [2] Memory address bus [3] Memory address bus [4] Memory address bus [10] Bank select (1) +3.3V +3.3V Clock (0) input Ground Not connected Chip select signal (2) Output disable/write mask (2) Output disable/write mask (3) Not connected +3.3V Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Ground Memory data bus [16] Memory data bus [17] Memory data bus [18] Memory data bus [19] +3.3V Memory data bus [20] Not connected Not connected Clock enable signal Not connected Memory data bus [21] Memory data bus [22] Memory data bus [23] Ground Memory data bus [24] Memory data bus [25] Memory data bus [26] Memory data bus [27] +3.3V Memory data bus [28] Memory data bus [29] Memory data bus [30] Memory data bus [31] Ground Clock (2) input Not connected Not connected PD serial data PD serial clock +3.3V Not connected Memory data bus [32] Memory data bus [33] Memory data bus [34] Memory data bus [35] +3.3V Memory data bus [36] Memory data bus [37] Memory data bus [38] Memory data bus [39] Memory data bus [40] Not connected Memory data bus [41] Memory data bus [42] Memory data bus [43] Memory data bus [44] Memory data bus [45] +3.3V Memory data bus [46] Memory data bus [47] Not connected Not connected Ground Not connected Not connected +3.3V Column address strobe signal Output disable/write mask (4) Output disable/write mask (5) Chip select signal (1) Row address strobe signal Ground Memory address bus [1] Memory address bus [3] Memory address bus [5] Memory address bus [7] Memory address bus [9] Memory address bus [11] Bank select (0) +3.3V Clock (1) input Memory address bus [12] Ground Clock enable signal Chip select signal (3) Output disable/write mask (6) Output disable/write mask (7) Memory address bus [13] +3.3V Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Ground Memory data bus [48] Memory data bus [49] Memory data bus [50] Memory data bus [51] +3.3V Memory data bus [52] Not connected Not connected Not connected Ground Memory data bus [53] Memory data bus [54] Memory data bus [55] Ground Memory data bus [56] Memory data bus [57] Memory data bus [58] Memory data bus [59] Memory data bus [60] Memory data bus [61] Memory data bus [62] Memory data bus [63] Ground Clock (3) input Not connected PD address [0] PD address [1] PD address [2] +3.3V Active -

CN12
Pin No A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9

PWA-F-SLG (CN12) <-> SCAN-FAN-MOT, SLG-FAN-MOT, APS1(A4 SERISE ONLY)/APS2/APS3/APS4/APS5


Symbol NC +24V FANSLG +5VAPS APSR-0A SG +5VAPS APSC-0A SG +5VAPS APS3-0A SG +5VAPS APS2-0A SG +5VAPS APS1-0A SG Name Not connected +24V Fan motor drive signal +5V Automatic original detection sensor signal Signal ground +5V Automatic original detection sensor signal Signal ground +5V Automatic original detection sensor signal Signal ground +5V Automatic original detection sensor signal Signal ground +5V Automatic original detection sensor signal Signal ground Active -

CN13
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

PWA-F-SLG (CN13) <-> PLTN-SNR, HOME-SNR, PWA-F-SDV (CN30)


Symbol SG PLTN-1A +5V SG HOME-1A +5V +5V SG SCNMD3 SCNMD2 SCNMD1 SCNREF SCNEN MOTRST-0 SCNDIR SCNLK Name Signal ground Platen sensor detect signal +5V Signal ground Carriage home position sensor detect signal +5V +5V Signal ground Scan motor drive signal-3 Scan motor drive signal-2 Scan motor drive signal-1 Scan motor drive reference signal Scan motor ON/OFF signal Reset signal Scan motor rotational direction signal Scan motor drive clock signal Active Analog H:ON L L: CW, H: CCW -

CN361 PWA-F-LGC (CN361) <-> TEMP/HUMI-SNR, THMS-DRM, K-ATTNR-SNR, LSU-FAN-MOT, TRBLT-CLN-CLT, REVLV-HP-SNR, BELT-CLN-MOT, COLR-TNR-SNR, LP-ERS, K-DEV-POS-SNR, K-DEV-TIM-SNR, TRBLT-HP-SNR2, TRBLT-HP-SNR1
Pin No A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 Symbol TEMPS SG HUMIS +5V DRTMP+ DRTMPATSDET PG ATS +24V ATSVR SG FAN1 +24V CLBUCP +24V SG RVLHP +5V BMBCOR +24V +5V CTNR SG +24V ERSLP +5V BLK SG +5V KDS SG +5V MARKL SG +5V MARKS SG Name Temperature signal Signal ground Humidity signal +5V Drum thermistor detection signal Drum thermistor detection signal Black auto-toner sensor detection (Connected to A12 pin) Power ground Black auto-toner sensor detection signal +24V Black auto-toner sensor reference voltage Signal ground Laser unit cooling fan motor drive signal +24V Transfer belt cleaner clutch drive signal +24V Signal ground Revolver home position sensor detection signal +5V Transfer belt cleaner auger motor drive signal +24V +5V Color toner cartridge sensor detection signal Signal ground +24V Exposure lamp drive signal +5V Black developer contact position detection sensor signal Signal ground +5V Black developer contact timing detection sensor signal Signal ground +5V Transfer belt home position sensor-2 detection signal Signal ground +5V Transfer belt home position sensor-1 detection signal Signal ground Active Analog Analog Analog Analog L Analog Analog -

CN113 PWA-F-SYS (CN113) <-> HDD (CN171)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 Symbol +12V GND GND +5V Name +12V Ground Ground +5V Active -

CN344 PWA-F-LGC (CN344) <-> DOUNLOARD JIG (LGC)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Symbol D[0] D[2] D[4] D[6] RD-0 A[0] A[2] A[4] A[6] A[8] A[10] A[12] A[14] A[16] A[18] SG SG D[1] D[3] D[5] D[7] CS2-0 A[1] A[3] A[5] A[7] A[9] A[11] A[13] A[15] A[17] ROMDT-0 +5V ROMLD-1 Name ROM data bus [0] ROM data bus [2] ROM data bus [4] ROM data bus [6] ROM data read signal ROM address bus [0] ROM address bus [2] ROM address bus [4] ROM address bus [6] ROM address bus [8] ROM address bus [10] ROM address bus [12] ROM address bus [14] ROM address bus [16] ROM address bus [18] Signal ground Signal ground ROM data bus [1] ROM data bus [3] ROM data bus [5] ROM data bus [7] Chip select signal ROM address bus [1] ROM address bus [3] ROM address bus [5] ROM address bus [7] ROM address bus [9] ROM address bus [11] ROM address bus [13] ROM address bus [15] ROM address bus [17] Download board connection detection signal +5V External ROM loading status signal Active L L L

CN115 PWA-F-SYS (CN115) <-> DIMM (1)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 Symbol VSS DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3 VDD DQ4 DQ5 DQ6 DQ7 DQ8 VSS DQ9 DQ10 DQ11 DQ12 DQ13 VDD DQ14 DQ15 NC NC VSS NC NC VDD /WE DQMB0 DQMB1 /CS0 NC VSS A0 A2 A4 A6 A8 A10 BA1 VDD VDD CLK0 VSS NC /CS2 DQMB2 DQMB3 NC VDD NC NC NC NC VSS DQ16 DQ17 DQ18 DQ19 VDD DQ20 NC NC CKE1 VSS DQ21 DQ22 DQ23 VSS DQ24 DQ25 DQ26 DQ27 VDD DQ28 DQ29 DQ30 DQ31 VSS CLK2 NC NC(WP) SDA SCL VDD VSS DQ32 DQ33 DQ34 DQ35 VDD DQ36 DQ37 DQ38 DQ39 DQ40 VSS DQ41 DQ42 DQ43 DQ44 DQ45 VDD DQ46 DA47 NC NC VSS NC NC VDD /CAS DQMB4 DQMB5 /CS1 /RAS VSS A1 A3 A5 A7 A9 A11 BA0 VDD CLK1 A12 VSS CEK /CS3 DQMB6 DQMB7 A13 VDD NC NC NC NC VSS DQ48 DQ49 DQ50 DQ51 VDD DQ52 NC NC NC VSS DQ53 DQ54 DQ55 VSS DQ56 DQ57 DQ58 DQ59 VDD DQ60 DQ61 DQ62 DQ63 VSS CLK3 NC SA0 SA1 SA2 VDD Name Ground Memory data bus [0] Memory data bus [1] Memory data bus [2] Memory data bus [3] +3.3V Memory data bus [4] Memory data bus [5] Memory data bus [6] Memory data bus [7] Memory data bus [8] Ground Memory data bus [9] Memory data bus [10] Memory data bus [11] Memory data bus [12] Memory data bus [13] +3.3V Memory data bus [14] Memory data bus [15] Not connected Not connected Ground Not connected Not connected +3.3V Data write enable signal Output disable/write mask (0) Output disable/write mask (1) Chip select signal (0) Not connected Ground Memory address bus [0] Memory address bus [1] Memory address bus [2] Memory address bus [3] Memory address bus [4] Memory address bus [10] Bank select (1) +3.3V +3.3V Clock (0) input Ground Not connected Chip select signal (2) Output disable/write mask (2) Output disable/write mask (3) Not connected +3.3V Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Ground Memory data bus [16] Memory data bus [17] Memory data bus [18] Memory data bus [19] +3.3V Memory data bus [20] Not connected Not connected Clock enable signal Not connected Memory data bus [21] Memory data bus [22] Memory data bus [23] Ground Memory data bus [24] Memory data bus [25] Memory data bus [26] Memory data bus [27] +3.3V Memory data bus [28] Memory data bus [29] Memory data bus [30] Memory data bus [31] Ground Clock [2] input Not connected Not connected PD serial data PD serial clock +3.3V Not connected Memory data bus [32] Memory data bus [33] Memory data bus [34] Memory data bus [35] +3.3V Memory data bus [36] Memory data bus [37] Memory data bus [38] Memory data bus [39] Memory data bus [40] Not connected Memory data bus [41] Memory data bus [42] Memory data bus [43] Memory data bus [44] Memory data bus [45] +3.3V Memory data bus [46] Memory data bus [47] Not connected Not connected Ground Not connected Not connected +3.3V Column address strobe signal Output disable/write mask (4) Output disable/write mask (5) Chip select signal (1) Row address strobe signal Ground Memory address bus [1] Memory address bus [3] Memory address bus [5] Memory address bus [7] Memory address bus [9] Memory address bus [11] Bank select (0) +3.3V Clock (1) input Memory address bus [12] Ground Clock enable signal Chip select signal (3) Output disable/write mask (6) Output disable/write mask (7) Memory address bus [13] +3.3V Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Ground Memory data bus [48] Memory data bus [49] Memory data bus [50] Memory data bus [51] +3.3V Memory data bus [52] Not connected Not connected Not connected Ground Memory data bus [53] Memory data bus [54] Memory data bus [55] Ground Memory data bus [56] Memory data bus [57] Memory data bus [58] Memory data bus [59] +3.3V Memory data bus [60] Memory data bus [61] Memory data bus [62] Memory data bus [63] Ground Clock (3) input Not connected PD address [0] PD address [1] PD address [2] +3.3V Active -

CN16
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

PWA-F-SLG (CN16) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (SLG)


Symbol MDT[0] MDT[2] MDT[4] MDT[6] MRD-0A (PNCNT)DLAD[0] (SSW)DLAD[2] MAD[4] MAD[6] MAD[8] MAD[10] MAD[12] MAD[14] MAD[16] MAD[18] SG SG MDT[1] MDT[3] MDT[5] MDT[7] CS02-0 (PNCNT)DLAD[1] (MER)DLAD[3] MAD[5] MAD[7] MAD[9] MAD[11] MAD[13] MAD[15] MAD[17] ROMDT-0 +5V LED-0 Name ROM data bus [0] ROM data bus [2] ROM data bus [4] ROM data bus [6] ROM data read signal D/L address bus [0] D/L address bus [2] ROM data bus [4] ROM data bus [6] ROM data bus [8] ROM address bus [10] ROM address bus [12] ROM address bus [14] ROM address bus [16] ROM address bus [18] Signal ground Signal ground ROM data bus [1] ROM data bus [3] ROM data bus [5] ROM data bus [7] Chip select signal D/L address bus [1] D/L address bus [3] ROM address bus [5] ROM address bus [7] ROM address bus [9] ROM address bus [11] ROM address bus [13] ROM address bus [15] ROM address bus [17] ROM select signal +5V LED drive signal Active -

CN117 PWA-F-SYS (CN117) <-> PWA-F-LGC (CN338)


Pin No A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 Symbol SG MCNT IDTA0 IDTA1 IDTA2 IDTA3 SG IDTA4 IDTA5 IDTA6 IDTA7 SG IDTA8 IDTA9 IDTA10 IDTA11 SG IDTA12 IDTA13 IDTA14 IDTA15 SG IPOS0 IPOS1 IPOS2 IPOS3 +3.3V CCODE01 CCODE11 SG SG MMPI1 +5V CBSY CMD SACK SERR SBSY STS CACK CERR SG PEFCLK_M SG IRCLK1 SG IHSYNC0 SG INSYNC0 SG IDCLK SG IHDEN0 SG IVDEN0 SG NC(RESERVE1) RESERVE2 ARST0 SG Name Signal ground LGC board connection detection signal Image data [0] Image data [1] Image data [2] Image data [3] Signal ground Image data [4] Image data [5] Image data [6] Image data [7] Signal ground Image data [8] Image data [9] Image data [10] Image data [11] Signal ground Image data [12] Image data [13] Image data [14] Image data [15] Signal ground Standard position signal (0) Standard position signal (1) Standard position signal (2) Standard position signal (3) +3.3V Color code signal (0) Color code signal (1) Signal ground Signal ground TS circuit starting request signal +5V System command busy Command data System status acknowledge System status error System status busy Status data System command acknowledge System command error Ground Clock signal for image data processing Ground Clock signal input for image data transmission Ground Horizontal scanning synchronized signal Ground Vertical scanning synchronized signal Ground Clock signal output for image data transmission Ground Data enable of the horizontal scanning direction Ground Data enable of the vertical scanning direction (output] Ground Not connected Data enable of the vertical scanning direction (input] LGC board reset Ground Active H H L L L L L L L L L L L L -

CN362 PWA-F-LGC (CN362) <-> COLR-DEV-TNR-CLT, COLR-DEV-CLT, K-DEV-CLT, RGST-CLT, CST-U-TR-L-CLT, CST-U-TR-H-CLT, DRM-CLN-MOT, USD-TNR-FLL-SNR, K-DEV-CONT-CLT
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Symbol CLCTNS CLRRST +24V +24V CLCDVR CLMFDH +24V +24V CLKDVR CLMFCU +24V +24V BMDRCB SG DRCLB USTFL CLKDVP +5V +24V NC NC NC Name Color developer toner supply clutch drive signal Registration clutch drive signal +24V +24V Color developer drive clutch signal Upper transport clutch (Low speed) drive signal +24V +24V Black developer drive clutch signal Upper transport clutch (High speed) drive signal +24V +24V Drum cleaner brush motor drive signal Signal ground Drum cleaner brush motor drive signal Toner bag full detection sensor signal Black developer lifting clutch drive signal +5V +24V Not connected Not connected Not connected Active -

CN345 PWA-F-LGC (CN345) <-> MAIN-SW, FRNT-COV-SW, TNLVL-SHUT-SOL, TNLVL-SNR, SIDE-COV-SW, FED-L-SNR, RGST-SNR,FED-U-SNR, K-TRN-SW, TNR-MOT, TR2-POS-SNR, 2TR-CONT-CLT, 2TR-DRV-CLT
Pin No A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 Symbol RSTSW +24V FRDSW SG SLTBTNA +24V AG TNLED TNLVL2 TNLVL1 INREF AG +12V SG SDCSW +5V CTLFED SG NC NC SG CTUFED +5V SG PSTPC +5V SG KTNDET KTNR1A KTNR1B SG PSTRPD +5V +24V CLTRP +24V CLTRR NC NC NC Name Main reset signal +24V Front cover opening/closing signal Signal ground Image quality sensor shutter solenoid drive signal +24V Analog ground Image quality sensor LED drive signal Image quality sensor detection signal Image quality sensor detection signal Image quality sensor reference signal Analog ground +12V Signal ground Side cover opening/closing switch signal +5V Lower drawer feed sensor detection signal Signal ground Not connected Not connected Signal ground Registration sensor detection signal +5V Signal ground Upper drawer feed sensor detection signal +5V Signal ground Black toner cartridge switch signal Toner motor drive signal A Toner motor drive signal B Signal ground 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor detection signal +5V +24V 2nd transfer roller contact clutch drive signal +24V 2nd transfer roller drive clutch drive signal Not connected Not connected Not connected Active Analog Analog Analog L L -

CN20
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

PWA-F-SLG (CN20) <-> PWA-F-CCD (CN19)


Symbol SG SG +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V SG NC BDI[9] BDI[8] BDI[7] BDI[6] BDI[5] BDI[4] BDI[3] BDI[2] BDI[1] BDI[0] SG SG GDI[9] GDI[8] GDI[7] GDI[6] GDI[5] GDI[4] GDI[3] GDI[2] GDI[1] GDI[0] SG SG RDI[9] RDI[8] RDI[7] RDI[6] RDI[5] RDI[4] RDI[3] RDI[2] RDI[1] RDI[0] SCLK-0 SDO-0 CEBLUE-0 SCLK-0 SDO-0 CEGREEN-0 SCLK-0 SDO-0 CERED-0 SHD-0 SHP-0 BLKCLP-0 ACLP-0 AOCLK-1 SG SG +5V +5V +5V SG SG SG SH-0 CCDSW CK2-0 CK1-1 SHMONO-0 SHCOROR-0 CP-0 RS-0 SG SG +10.5V +10.5V SG SG SG SG Name Signal ground Signal ground +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V Signal ground Not connected Color (Blue) digital data bus [9] Color (Blue) digital data bus [8] Color (Blue) digital data bus [7] Color (Blue) digital data bus [6] Color (Blue) digital data bus [5] Color (Blue) digital data bus [4] Color (Blue) digital data bus [3] Color (Blue) digital data bus [2] Color (Blue) digital data bus [1] Color (Blue) digital data bus [0] Signal ground Signal ground Color (Green) digital data bus [9] Color (Green) digital data bus [8] Color (Green) digital data bus [7] Color (Green) digital data bus [6] Color (Green) digital data bus [5] Color (Green) digital data bus [4] Color (Green) digital data bus [3] Color (Green) digital data bus [2] Color (Green) digital data bus [1] Color (Green) digital data bus [0] Signal ground Signal ground Color (Red) digital data bus [9] Color (Red) digital data bus [8] Color (Red) digital data bus [7] Color (Red) digital data bus [6] Color (Red) digital data bus [5] Color (Red) digital data bus [4] Color (Red) digital data bus [3] Color (Red) digital data bus [2] Color (Red) digital data bus [1] Color (Red) digital data bus [0] Serial clock to image pre-processing IC(Blue) Serial data to image pre-processing IC(Brue) Data write signal to image pre-processing IC(Blue) Serial clock to image pre-processing IC(Green) Serial data to image pre-processing IC(Green) Data write signal to image pre-processing IC(Green) Serial clock to image pre-processing IC(Red) Serial data to image pre-processing IC(Red) Data write signal to image pre-processing IC(Red) Layer P/D@sample hold signal Layer P sample hold signal Black level clamp signal Line clamp signal AD clock signal Signal ground Signal ground +5V +5V +5V Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground Shift pulse 4th line mode exchange signal Shift clock to phase-2 Shift clock to phase-1 Sample hold signal (Mono) Sample hold signal (Color) Clump pulse signal Reset signal Signal ground Signal ground +10.5V +10.5V Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground Active .-

CN602 FAX (CN602) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (FAX) (OPTION)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Symbol D[0] D[2] D[4] D[6] RD-0 A[0] A[2] A[4] A[6] A[8] A[10] A[12] A[14] A[16] A[18] SG SG D[1] D[3] D[5] D[7] BOOTCS-0 A[1] A[3] A[5] A[7] A[9] A[11] A[13] A[15] A[17] ROMDET0-0 VDD LEDDL-0 Name ROM data bus [0] ROM data bus [2] ROM data bus [4] ROM data bus [6] ROM data read signal ROM address bus [0] ROM address bus [2] ROM address bus [4] ROM address bus [6] ROM address bus [8] ROM address bus [10] ROM address bus [12] ROM address bus [14] ROM address bus [16] ROM address bus [18] Signal ground Signal ground ROM data bus [1] ROM data bus [3] ROM data bus [5] ROM data bus [7] Chip select signal ROM address bus [1] ROM address bus [3] ROM address bus [5] ROM address bus [7] ROM address bus [9] ROM address bus [11] ROM address bus [13] ROM address bus [15] ROM address bus [17] Download board connection detection signal +5V External ROM loading status signal Active L L

CN363 PWA-F-LGC (CN363) <-> USD-TNR-SNR


Pin No Symbol 1 +5V 2 USTFL2 3 SG Name +5V Toner bag sensor drive signal Signal ground Active -

CN100 PWA-F-SYS (CN100) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (SYS)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Symbol DATA0 DATA2 DATA4 DATA6 DATA8 DATA10 DATA12 DATA14 A21 A19 A17 A15 A13 A11 A09 A07 A05 A03 RDX CS7-A CS7-B VCC VCC GND GND DATA1 DATA3 DATA5 DATA7 DATA9 DATA11 DATA13 DATA15 A20 A18 A16 A14 A12 A10 A08 A06 A04 A02 DWNLED /CS0 VCC RMSL /WRX GND GND Name System data bus [0] System data bus [2] System data bus [4] System data bus [6] System data bus [8] System data bus [10] System data bus [12] System data bus [14] System address bus [19] System address bus [17] System address bus [15] System address bus [13] System address bus [11] System address bus [9] System address bus [7] System address bus [5] System address bus [3] System address bus [1] System read signal Chip select signal (7-A) Chip select signal (7-B) +3.3v +3.3v Ground Ground System data bus [1] System data bus [3] System data bus [5] System data bus [7] System data bus [9] System data bus [11] System data bus [13] System data bus [15] System address bus [18] System address bus [16] System address bus [14] System address bus [12] System address bus [10] System address bus [8] System address bus [6] System address bus [4] System address bus [2] System address bus [0] System address bus [20] System chip select signal +3.3v System control signal System write signal Ground Ground Active -

CN118 PWA-F-SYS (CN118) <-> PWA-F-DSP (J427)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Symbol XSCL-1A LP-1A WF-1A YD-1A INVGND BZON-0A CPPOW-1A LDCLK-1A LDDAT-1A LDLTH-1A LDON1-0A LDON0-0A SG5 VDD INV5V LED5V VDD CPRST-0A GND RST0-0A CTS0-0A TXD0-1A RXD0-1A GND UD3-1A UD2-1A UD1-1A UD0-1A GND LCDEN-1A Name LCD data transmission clock LCD data latch pulse LCD frame signal LCD scanning line start signal Ground Buzzer-ON signal Panel connection detection signal LED serial clock LED serial data LED data latch signal LED drive selection signal (1) LED drive selection signal (0) Signal ground +5V +5V +5V +5V Reset signal Ground Key controller SIO transmission request Key controller SIO transmission clear Key controller SIO transmitted data Key controller SIO received data Ground LCD display data (3) LCD display data (2) LCD display data (1) LCD display data (0) Ground LCD enable signal Active H H H L H L L L L L L H

CN202 PWA-F-LDR (CN202) <-> PWA-F-SNS (CN203)


Pin No Symbol 1 +5V 2 BEAMDT 3 GND Name +5V Laser beam position detection signal Ground Active -

CN347 PWA-F-LGC (CN347) <-> MAIN-MOT


Pin No Symbol 1 NC 2 MAMBL 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 +24V +24V PG FG MAMGA MAMPL MAMCW MAMCLK MAMON SG +5V Name Not connected Main motor brake signal +24V +24V Power ground Field ground Main motor speed switching signal Main motor phase locked signal Main motor rotational direction signal Main motor reference clock signal Main motor ON/OFF signal Signal ground +5V Active L: Braking, H: Normal L: Low, H: High L: Normal L: CW, H: CCW L: ON, H: OFF -

J2
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

IPC (J2) <-> FINISHER (J598) (OPTION)


Symbol RXD SG TXD SG NC NC NC NC F-CNT CNT-GND Name Receiver serial data Signal ground Transmitted serial data Signal ground Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Finisher connection detection signal Ground Active L -

CN481 PS-HVT (CN481) <-> MAIN CHARGE WIRE (J615)


Pin No 1 Symbol Name High-voltage to main charge wire Active -

CN348 PWA-F-LGC (CN348) <-> TRSP-MOT, DEV-MOT


Pin No A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 Symbol NC +24V +24V PG PG FDMGA FDMPL FDMCW FDMCK FDMON SG +5V +5V SG DEVMON DVMCLK DVMCW DVMPL NC PG PG +24V +24V NC Name Not connected +24V +24V Power ground Power ground Transport motor speed switching signal Transport motor phase lokced signal Transport motor rotational direction signal Transport motor reference clock signal Transport motor ON/OFF signal Signal ground +5V +5V Signal ground Developer motor ON/OFF signal Developer motor reference clock signal Developer motor rotational direction signal Developer motor phase locked signal Not connected Power ground Power ground +24V +24V Not connected Active L: Low, H: High L: Normal L: CW, H: CCW L: ON, H: OFF L: ON, H: OFF L: CW, H: CCW L: Normal -

CN482 PS-HVT (CN482) <-> MAIN CHARGE GRID (J616)


Pin No 1 Symbol Name High-voltage to main charge grid Active -

CN119 PWA-F-SYS (CN119) <-> USB DEVICE


Pin No 1 2 3 4 Symbol VBUS DD+ GND Name +5V Serial data Serial data Ground Active -

CN483 PS-HVT (CN483) <-> DEV BIAS (COLOR) (J611)


Pin No 1 Symbol Name High-voltage to developer bias (Color) Active -

CN120 PWA-F-SYS (CN120) <-> USB HOST


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Symbol VBUS DD+ GND VBUS DD+ GND Name +5V Serial data Serial data Ground +5V Serial data Serial data Ground Active -

CN484 PS-HVT (CN484) <-> DEV BIAS (BLACK) (J612)


Pin No 1 Symbol Name High-voltage to developer bias (Block) Active -

CN485 PS-HVT (CN485) <-> TRANSFER BIAS (1st) (J613)


Pin No 1 Symbol Name High-voltage to 1st transfer bias Active -

CN101 PWA-F-SYS (CN101) <-> FAX (CN701) (OPTION)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Symbol VDD DA1 VDD DD0 VDD DD3 VDD DD6 VDD DD9 AG DD12 GND GND GND GND GND GND +3.3V INTRQ +3.3V 5VS -12V AG +12V DA0 DA2 IDECS DD1 DD2 DD4 DD5 DD7 DD8 DD10 DD11 DD13 DD14 DD15 /DIOR /DIOW /DMACK /DLDCS0 /RESET DMARQ NC FXWP GND GND NC Name +5V IDE Address [1] +5V Fax data bus [0] +5V Fax data bus [3] +5V Fax data bus [6] +5V Fax data bus [9] Ground Fax data bus [12] Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground +3.3V IDE interrupt signal +3.3V +5V -12V Analog ground +12V IDE Address [0] IDE Address [2] IDE chip select signal Fax data bus [1] Fax data bus [2] Fax data bus [4] Fax data bus [5] Fax data bus [7] Fax data bus [8] Fax data bus [10] Fax data bus [11] Fax data bus [13] Fax data bus [14] Fax data bus [15] IDE IOR signal IDE IOW signal DM acknowledge signal Chip select signal Reset signal DM data request signal Not connected FAX wake-up signal Ground Ground Not connected Active L -

CN486 PS-HVT (CN486) <-> TRANSFER BIAS (2nd) (J610)


Pin No 1 Symbol Name High-voltage to 2nd transfer bias Active -

CN121 PWA-F-SYS (CN121) <-> PWA-F-NIC (J3)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 Symbol VCC VCC VCC NC (/CS2P) D15 D14 D13 GND D12 D11 D10 GND D09 D08 /INTPRI GND A03 A02 A01 NC (SRXD) A00 D07 D06 A15 D05 A14 D04 A13 D03 A12 D02 A11 D01 A10 D00 A09 A04 A08 /RESET A07 /ACK A06 /CSP1 A05 NC (OEO) NC (STXD) RW GND A16 GND-5K VCC-5K GND NC (DACK) VCC-5K /INTPR2 GND BRDNIN VCC VCC VCC Name +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V Not connected I/F data bus [15] I/F data bus [14] I/F data bus [13] Ground I/F data bus [12] I/F data bus [11] I/F data bus [10] Ground I/F data bus [9] I/F data bus [8] Interrupt 1 signal Ground I/F address bus [3] I/F address bus [2] I/F address bus [1] Not connected I/F address bus [0] I/F data bus [7] I/F data bus [6] I/F address bus [15] I/F data bus [5] I/F address bus [14] I/F data bus [4] I/F address bus [13] I/F data bus [3] I/F address bus [12] I/F data bus [2] I/F address bus [11] I/F data bus [1] I/F address bus [10] I/F data bus [0] I/F address bus [9] I/F address bus [4] I/F address bus [8] System reset signal I/F address bus [7] NIC acknowledge signal I/F address bus [6] Chip select signal I/F address bus [5] Not connected Not connected Read/write to NIC Ground I/F address bus [16] Power ground +3.3V Ground Not connected +3.3V PR2 interrupt signal Ground NIC board in detection signal +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V Active L -

CN21
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5

PWA-F-SLG (CN21) <-> INV-EXP (CN1)


Symbol +24VGND +24VGND LMPON-0A +24V FG Name Ground Ground Exposure lamp ON signal +24V Field ground Active H -

CN487 PS-HVT (CN487) <-> CLEANING BRAID BIAS (J614)


Pin No 1 Symbol Name High-voltage to grid Active -

CN213 PWA-F-ADU (CN213) <-> ADU-TRL-SNR


Pin No Symbol 1 GND 2 ADUFL 3 VCC Name Ground ADU exit sensor detect signal +5V Active -

CN31 CN126 PWA-F-SYS (CN126) <-> COIN CONTROLLER (OPTION)/COPY KEY CARD (OPTION)
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Symbol L/S FULL-C MONO-C B/W VDD GND NC Name Paper size signal Full-color mode signal Mono-color mode signal Black and white mode signal +5V Ground Not connected Active Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6

PWA-F-SDV (CN31) <-> SCAN-MOT


Symbol MOT-B1-1 +24V MOT-B MOT-A1-1 +24V MOT-A Name Scan motor drive signal B +24V Scan motor drive signal B Scan motor drive signal A +24V Scan motor drive signal A Active -

CN349 PWA-F-LGC (CN349) <-> IPC (OPTION)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Symbol SG +5V AD0 AD2 AD4 AD6 I/O0 I/O2 I/O4 I/O6 SG WE CSIP2 +5V IPCSW SG +5V AD1 AD3 AD5 AD7 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 SG OE IPRST +5V SG Name Signal ground +5V System address bus [0] System address bus [2] System address bus [4] System address bus [6] System data bus [0] System data bus [2] System data bus [4] System data bus [6] Signal ground Write signal Chip select signal to IP2 +5V IPC connection detection signal Signal ground +5V System address bus [1] System address bus [3] System address bus [5] System address bus [7] System data bus [1] System data bus [3] System data bus [5] System data bus [7] Signal ground Output enable signal IPC reset signal +5V Signal ground Active L -

CN214 PWA-F-ADU (CN214) <-> ADU-TRU-SNR


Pin No Symbol 1 GND 2 ADUFU 3 VCC Name Ground ADU entrance sensor detection signal +5V Active -

CN2
Pin No 1 2 3 4

INV-EXP (CN2) <-> LP-EXPO


Symbol NC NC Name Exposure lamp high-voltage output (High) Not connected Not connected Exposure lamp high-voltage outout (Low) Active -

CN215 PWA-F-ADU (CN215) <-> ADU-MOT


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 Symbol +24V FDMA FDMB FDMC FDMD Name +24V ADU motor drive signal-A ADU motor drive signal-B ADU motor drive signal-C ADU motor drive signal-D Active -

CN435 PWA-F-DRV (CN435) <-> REVLV-MOT (J587)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 Symbol +24V RVMA RVMC RVMD RVMB +24V Name +24V Revolver motor drive signal-A Revolver motor drive signal-C Revolver motor drive signal-D Revolver motor drive signal-B +24V Active -

J422
Pin No 1 2 3 4

PWA-F-DSP (J422) <-> LCD PANEL


Symbol YD KL XR YU Name Y-axis touch position detection terminal (D) X-axis touch position detection terminal (L) X-axis touch position detection terminal (R) Y-axis touch position detection terminal (U) Active -

CN217 PWA-F-ADU (CN217) <-> ADU-SET-SW


Pin No Symbol 1 GND 2 COVSW Name Ground ADU opening/closing switch detection signal Active -

CN437 PWA-F-DRV (CN437) <-> EXIT-MOT (J588)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 Symbol EXTMC +24V EXTMA EXTMB +24V EXTMD Name Exit motor drive signal-C +24V Exit motor drive signal-A Exit motor drive signal-B +24V Exit motor drive signal-D Active -

J423

PWA-F-DSP (J423) <-> LCD BACK LIGHT


Name high-voltage terminal (High) Not connected high-voltage terminal (Low) Active -

CN492 PWA-F-CCL (CN492) <-> CCL-F-POS-SW, CCL-R-POS-SW, CCLMOT


Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 Symbol CCW CW SG SW1 SG SW2 Name Charger cleaner motor drive signal (CCW) Charger cleaner motor drive signal (CW) Signal ground Charger cleaner rear position detection switch signal (Home position) Signal ground Charger cleaner front position detection switch signal Active L L

Pin No Symbol 1 CCFL+ 2 NC 3 CCFL-

CN438 PWA-F-DRV (CN438) <-> IH-FAN-MOT (J951), OZN-FAN-MOT (J590)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 Symbol +24V FAN3 +24V FAN4 Name +24V IH control board cooling fan motor drive signal +24V Ozone exhaust fan motor drive signal Active -

J424
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

PWA-F-DSP (J424) <-> LCD PANEL


Symbol FRAME LAOD CP VSS VDD VSS VEE D.OFF D0 D1 D2 D3 Name LCD scanning line start signal LCD data latch pulse LCD data transmission clock Ground +5V Ground LCD contrast signal LCD enable signal LCD display data (0) LCD display data (1) LCD display data (2) LCD display data (3) Active -

CN439 PWA-F-DRV (CN439) <-> FAN2-MOT (J954)


Pin No Symbol 1 +24V 2 FAN2 Name +24V Toner fan motor drive signal-H Active -

CN440 PWA-F-DRV (CN440) <-> FAN5-MOT (J593), FAN6-MOT (J592)


Pin No 1 2 3 4 Symbol +24V FAN5 +24V FAN6 Name +24V Not used +24V Paper fan motor drive signal-H Active -

manuals4you.com

1-1, KANDA NISHIKI-CHO, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO, 101-8842 JAPAN